; 03 .j i?. AN AVESTA GRAMMAR IN COMPARISON WITH SANSKRIT BY / A. V. WILLIAMS JACKSON OK COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW YORK CITY Part I Phonology, Inflection, Word-Formation WITH AH INTRODUCTION ON THE AVESTA STUTTGART W. KOHL HAMMER 1S92 Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 https://archive.org/details/avestagrammarincOOjack Inscribed Professor K. F. Geldner with gratitude and regard. M Preface. T he present Grammar is a work of no pretensions ; it is offered as a small contribution toward advancing the Avesta cause. It is written in part fulfilment of a design formed when I first began to stud)- the Avesta and be- came deeply interested in the true value and importance of that monument of antiquity. The end for which the book is intended would per- haps have been better accomplished, however, if the work had been a mere grammatical sketch. This was my first design; and it may at another time be carried out. But as the work grew under my hands, it seemed desirable to enlarge it somewhat further, and to embody additional material which for reference might be serviceable to the general philologist, not to the specialist alone. The linguist may thus find in it useful matter and fresh illustrations, especially in the new readings from Geldner’s edition of the Avesta texts. No attempt, on the other hand, has been made to secure absolute completeness. Numerous minoi points have been purposely omitted. These may perhaps later be taken up in a more extended work including also the Old Persian by the side of the Avesta and the Sanskrit Little of im- VI Preface. portance, however, it is believed, has been overlooked. A fairly symmetrical development has been aimed at, al- though at times certain less familiar points have received fuller illustration than those that arc well-known. This was intentional. They are chiefly matters that had not as yet been sufficiently emphasized elsewhere, or points which are peculiarly individual to the Avesta. They will easily be recognized. The method of treatment is based throughout on the Sanskrit grammar; a knowledge of Sanskrit is presupposed. At every step, therefore, references have been made to Whitney’s Sanskrit Grammar 2 ed. 1889; and it is a pleasure here to express thanks to the author of that work for the abundant suggestions received from it. In the Grammar it might have been easier and more practical in many respects to use the Avesta type itself instead of employing a transcription. On the whole, how- ever, it seemed best under the circumstances to transliterate. For general reference at present this method appears more convenient, and is useful in showing grammatical forma- tions. The original type, it is expected, will be employed, as hinted above, in a little book Avesta for Beginners , planned for a date not far distant. In regard to the transcription here adopted, my views h*ave already been given in The Avestan Alphabet and its Transcription,. Stuttgart, 1890. The phonetic and palaeographic character of each of the Avestan letters is (here discussed. Reasons are likewise presented for trans- literating Av. f, { by the ‘turned’ <9 o, so familiar in pho- netic works. 7 he composite ), the worshipper of Ormazd, favored the rebuild- ing of the temple at Jerusalem a.-, decreed bv Cyrus. Allusions to the ancient faith of the Persians are perhaps contained in Ezek 8.16; Is. 45.7,12 See also Apocryphal New Test., The Infancy. 3.1 — 10. ij 5. The classical references of Greek and Roman writers to the teachings of Zoroaster, which we can now study in the Avesta itself, may he said to begin with the account of the Persians given by Herodotus Early Allusions to the Avesta. xiii (B. C. 450) in his History 1.131 — 141. To this account may be added references anti allusions, though often preserved only in fragments, by various other writers , including Plutarch 'On Isis and Osiris’, anti Pliny, clown to Agathias (A. D. 500). § 6. After the Mohammedan conquest of Persia , we have an allusion by the Arabic writer, Masucli (A. D. 940), who tells of the Avesta ot Zeradusht (Zoroaster), and its commentary called Zend, together with a Pasend explanation. The Abasia (Avesta) is also mentioned several times by Al-Biriinl (about A. D. 1000). The later Mohammedan writer, Shnhrastani (A. D. 11501, sketches in outline the creed of the Magi of his day. An interesting reference is found in the Syriac- Arabic Lexicon of Par-Bahifd (A. 1 >. 965) to an Avastak, a book of Zardusht (Zoroaster), as composed in seven tongues, Syriac, Persian, Aramaean, Segestanian, Marvian, Greek, and Hebrew. In an earlier Syriac MS. Commentary on the New Testament (A. L>. S52) by Tsho’dad , Bishop of Hadatha, near Mosul, mention is made of the Abhasta as having been written by Zar- dusht in twelve different languages. These latter allusions, though late, are all important, as showing the continuity, during ages, of the tradition of such a work as the Avesta, which contains the teachings of Zoroaster, the prophet of Iran. All these allusions, however, it must be remembered, are by foreigners. No direct Iranian sources had been accessible. § 7. From this time, moreover, till about the 17th century we line! there was little inquiry into the sacred books of the Persians One. of the first series of investigations into the Greek and Roman sources seems then to have been undertaken by a European, Bern a he llrisson , De Per- sarum Principatn 1 Paris 1590). The Italian, English, and French travelers in the Orient next added some information as to the religion and customs of the Persians. Among them .may be mentioned the works of Pietro della Valle ( 1.620), Henry Lord (1630!, Mandelso (16581, Tavernier (167S), Chardin (1721), Du Chinon. Most important, however, was the work of the distinguished Oxford .scholar, Thomas Hyde (1700). It was written in Latin, and entitled Hisloria Religionis velentm Persantm. Hyde re- sorted chiefly to the later Farsi sources; the original texts he could not use, although an Avesta MS. of the Vasna seems to have been brought to . Canterbury as early as 1633. Hyde earnestly appealed to scholars, however, to procure MSS. of the sacred books of the Parsis, and aroused much interest in I he subject. In 1723 a copy of the Vendidad Sadali was procured bj an Englishman, George Boucher, from the Parsis iu Surat and was deposited as a curiosity in the Bodleian Library at Oxford. § S. No one, however, could read these texts of the Avesta. To a young Frenchman , Anquetil da Perron , belongs the honor of first dc- XIV Introduction : The Avesta. ciphering them. The history of his labors is interesting and instructive. Happening, in 1754, to see some tracings made from the Oxford MS., and sent to Paris as a specimen, du Perron at once conceived the spirited idea of going to Persia, or India, and obtaining from the priests them- selves the knowledge of their sacred books. Though fired with zeal and enthusiasm, he had no means to carry out his plan. lie seized the idea of enlisting as a soldier in the troops that were to start for India, and in November, 1754, behind the martial drum and fife this youthful scholar marched out of Paris. The French Government, however, recognizing at once his noble purpose, gave him his discharge from the army and pre- sented him his passage to India. After countless difficulties he reached Surat, and there after innumerable discouragements, and in spite of almost insurmountable obstacles, he succeeded in winning the confidence and favor of the priests, with whom he was able to communicate after he had learned the modern Persian. He gradually induced the priests to impart to him the language of their sacred works, to let him take some of the manuscripts, and even to initiate him into some of the rites and ceremo- nies of their religion. He stayed among the people for seven years, and then in 1761, he started for his home in Europe. He stopped at Oxford before going directly to Paris , and compared his MSS. with the one in the Bodleian Library, in order to be assured that he had not been im- posed upon. The next ten years were devoted to work upon his MSS. and upon a translation, and in 1771, seventeen years from the time he had first marched out of Paris, he gave forth to the world the results of his untiring labors. This was the first translation of the Avesta, or, as he called it, Zend-Avesta ( Ouvrage de Zoroastre, 3 vols., Paris 1771 1, a picture of the religion and manners contained in the sacred book of the Zoroastrians. § 9. The ardent enthusiasm which hailed this discovery and open- ing to the world of a literature, religion, and philosophy of ancient times was unfortunately soon dampened. Some scholars, like Kant, were dis- appointed in not finding the philosophical or religious ideas they had hoped to find ; while others missed the high literary value they had looked for. They little considered how inaccurate, of necessity, such a first trans- lation must be. Though Anquetil du Perron had indeed learned the language from the priests, still, people did not know that the priestly tradition itself had lost much during the ages of persecution or oblivion into which the religion had fallen. They did not sufficiently take into account that Anquetil was learning one foreign tongue, the Avesta, through another, the modern Persian: nor did they know how little accurate and scientific training du Perron had had. A* discussion as to the authenticity Discovery of the Avesta— History of Research. XV of the work arose. It was suggested that the so-called Zend-Avesta was not the genuine work of Zoroaster, but was a forgery. Foremost among the detractors, it is to be regretted, was the distinguished Orientalist, Sir William Jones. He claimed, in a letter published in French (1771), that Anquetil had been duped, that the l’arsis had palmed off upon him a conglomeration of worthless fabrications and absurdities. In England, Sir William Jones was supported by Richardson and Sir John Chardin ; in Germany, by Meiners. In France the genuineness of the book was uni- versally accepted, and in one famous German scholar, Kleuker, it found an ardent supporter. He translated Anquetil’s work into German (1776, Riga), for the use of h's countrymen, especially the theologians, and he supported the genuineness of those scriptures by classical allusions to the Magi. For nearly fifty years, however, the battle as to authenticity, still raged. Anquetil’s translation, as acquired from the priests, was supposed to be a true standard to judge the Avesta by, and from which to draw arguments; little or no work, unfortunately, was done on the lexts them- selves. The opinion, however, that the books were a forgery was gradually beginning to grow somewhat less. § 10. It was the advance in the study of Sanskrit that finally won the victory for the advocates of the authenticity of the Sacred Books. About 1825 , more than fifty years alter the appearance of du Perron’s translation , the Avesta texts themselves began to be studied by Sanskrit scholars. The close affinity between the two languages had already been noticed by different scholars; but in 1826, the more exact relation between the Sanskrit and the Avesta was shown by the Danish philologian, Rask, who had travelled in Persia and India, and who had brought hack with him to the Copenhagen library many valuable MSS. of the Avesta and of the Pahlavi books. Rask, in a little work on the age and authenticity of the Zend-Language (1826), proved the antiquity of the language, showed it to be distinct from Sanskrit, though closely allied to it, and made some investigation into the alphabet of the texts. About the same time the Avesta was taken up by the French Sanskrit scholar, Eugene Burnouf. Knowing the relation between Sanskrit and Avestan , and taking up the rending of the texts scientifically, he at once found, through his knowledge of Sanskrit, philological inaccuracies in Anquetil’s translation. Anquetil, he saw, must often have misinterpreted his teachers; the tradition itself must often necessarily have been defective. Instead of this untrustworthy French rendering, Burnouf turned to an older Skt. translation of a part of the Avesta. This was made in the 15th century by the Parsi Naryo- sangli , and was based on the Pahlavi version. By means of this Skt. rendering, and by applying his philologial learning, he was able to restore XV! Introduction : The A vesta. sense to many passages where Anqvetil had often made nonsense, and lie was thus able to throw a flood of light upon many an obscure point. The employment of Skt., instead of depending upon the priestly traditions and interpretations, was a new step; it introduced a new method. The new discovery and gain of vantage ground practically settled the discussion as to authenticity. The testimony, moreover, of the ancient Persian in- scriptions deciphered about this time by Grotefend (1802), Burnouf, Lassen, and by Sir Henry Rawlinson, showed still more, by their contents and language so closely allied to the A vesta, that this work must he genuine. The question was settled. The foundation laid by Uurnouf w as built upon by such scholars as Bopp, Ilaug, \\ indischmann, Westergaard, Roth, Spiegel — the two latter happily still living — and to day by Bartholomae, I)arme- steter, de llarlez, Hiibschniann , Justi, Mills, and especially Geldner, in- cluding some hardly less known names, Parsis among them. These scholars, using partly the Sanskrit key for the interpretation and meaning i>l words, and partly the Parsi tradition contained in the l’ahlavi trans- lation, have now been able to give ns a clear idea of the Avesta and its contents as far as the books have come down to us and w'e are enabled to see the true importance of these ancient scriptures. Upon minor points of interpretation, of course, there are and there always will be individual differences of opinion. We are now prepared to take up the general division and contents of the Avesta, and to speak of its I’ahlavi version. Contents, Arrangement, Extent, and Character. § 11. The Avesta, as we now have it, is but a remnant of a once great literature. It has come down in a more or less fragmentary con- dition; not even a single manuscript contains all the texts that we now have; whatever we possess has been collected together front various codices. All that survives is commonly classed under the following di- visions or books : 1. Yasna, including the Gathas 2. Vispered 3. Yashts 4. Minot texts, as Nydishes, Gahs etc. 5. Vendidiid 6. Fragments, front Hildhvkhi Kask etc. § 12. In the first five divisions two groups are recognized. The first group (i) comprises the Vendidad, Vispered, and Yasna; these as used in the service of worship are traditionally classed together for litur- gical purposes and form the Avesta proper. In the manuscripts, more- Divisions of the A vesta. XVH over, these three books themselves appear in two different forms, accord- ing as they are accompanied, or not, by a Pahlavi version. If the books are kept separate as three divisions , each part is usually accompanied by a rendering in Pahlavi. On the contrary, however, these three books are not usually recited each as a separate whole , but with the chapters of one book mingled with another for liturgical purposes , on this account the MSS. often present them in their intermingled form, portions of one inserted with the other, and arranged exactly in the order in which they are to be used in the service. In this latter case the Pahlavi translation is omitted, and the collection is called the Vendidad Sadah or ‘Vendid&d pure’ i. e. text without commentary, (ii) The second group comprising the minor prayers and the Yashts which the MSS. often include with these, is called the Khordah Avesta or ‘small Avesta’. Of the greater part of the latter there is no Pahlavi rendering. The contents and character of the several divisions, including the fragments, may now be taken up more in detail. § 13. (1) The Yam a, ‘sacrifice, worship’, is the chief liturgical wcrk of the sacred canon. It consists principally of ascriptions of praise and prayer, and in it are inserted the Gathas, or ‘hymns’, verses from the ser- mons of Zoroaster, which are the oldest and most sacred part of the Avesta. The Yasna (Skt. yajr'ia) comprises 72 chapters, called I la, Haiti. These are the texts recited by the priests at the ritual ceremony of the Yasna (has kite). The book falls into three nearly equal divisions, (a) The first part (chap, i — 27) begins with an invocation of the god, Ormazd, and the other divinities of the religion ; it gives texts for the consecration of the holy water, zaothra , and the bartsma, or bundle of sacred twigs, for the preparation and dedication of the ITaoma, haoma , the juice of a certain plant — the Indian Soma — which was drunk by the priests as a sacred rite, and for the offering of blessed cakes, as well as meat-offering, which likewise were partaken of by the priests. Interspersed through this portion , however , are a few chapters that deal only indirectly with the ritual; these are Ys. 12, the later Zoroastrian creed, and Ys, 19—21, cateche- tical portions. — (b)Then follow the Gathas lit. ‘songs', ‘psalms’ (chap. 28 — 53), metrical selections or verses containing the teachings , exhortations , and revelations of Zoroaster. The prophet exhorts men to eschew evil and choose the good, the kingdom of light rather than that of darkness. These Gathas are written in meter, and their language is more archaic and some- what different from that used elsewhere in the Avesta. The Gathas, strictly speaking, are five in number; they a;e arranged according to meters, and are named after the opening words, Alumavaiti, Ushtavaiti etc. The Gathas comprise 17 hymns (Ys. 28—34: 43 — -4^ ; 47—50; 51, 53), and, II Introduction : The A vesta. xviii like the Psalpis, tliey must later have been chanted during the service. They seem originally to have been the texts or metrical headings from which Zoroaster, like the later Buddha, preached. In their midst (chap. 35 — 42) is inserted the so-called Yasna of the Seven Chapters (Yasna Ha pta nghiiiti ) . This is written in prose, and consists of a number of prayers and ascriptions of praise to Ahura Mazda, or Ormazd, to the archangels, the souls of the righteous, the fire, the waters, and the earth. Though next in antiquity to the Gatlins, and in archaic language, the Haptanghaiti represents a somew : hat later and more developed form of the religion, than that which in the Gathas proper was just beginning. Under the Gathas also are in- cluded three or four specially sacred verses or formulas. These are the Aliuna Yailya or Honovar (Ys. 27.13), Ashem Yoliu (Ys. 27.14), Airyama Ishyo (Ys. 54 1 ) and also the Yenghc llatam fYs. 4.26), so called from their first words, like the l’ater Nosier, Gloria I’atri, etc., to which in a measure they answer. — (c) The third part (chap. 52, 55 — 72) or the latter Yasna’ ( iparo yasna) consists childly of praises and offerings of thanks- giving to different divinities. § 14. (2) The Vispered (Av. vis pi ratavo) consists of additions to portions of the Yasna which it resembles in language and in form. It comprises 24 chapters (called Aarde) , and it is about a seventh as long as the Yasna. In the ritual the chapters of the Vispered are inserted among those of the Yasna. It contains invocations and offerings of hom- age to ‘all the lords’ (vis pi ratavo). lienee the name Vispered. $ 1 5 - (3! The Yas/its (Av. yesti ‘worship by praise’) consist of 21 hymns of praise and adorations of the divinities or angels. Yazati i; (hafts), of the religion. The chief Yashts are those in praise of Ardvi- Sura , the goddess of waters (Yt. 5), the star Tishtrya (Yt. 8), the angel Mithra , or divinity of truth (Yt. 10). the Fravashis , or departed souls of the righteous (Yt. 13), the genius of victory, Verethraglina (Yt. 14), and of the Kingly Glory (Yt. 19). The Yashts are written mainly in meter, they have poetic merit, and contain much mythological and historical matter that may lie illustrated by Firdausi’s later Persian epic, the Shah Namah. § 16. 141 The minor texts, Vyais/tes, Gdhs, Sirvzah.s, Afringatis, consist of brief prayers, praises, or blessings to be recited daily 01 on special occasions. § 17 * (51 The l 'endiddd , or 'law against the dae vas, or demons’ (viJaeva ettita), is a priestly code in 22 chapters (called Pargard) , cor- responding to the Pentateuch in our Bible. Its parts vary greatly in time and in style oi composition. Much of if must be late. The first chapter (Farg. 1 1 is a sort of an Avestan Genesis, a dualistic account of creation. Contents and Extent of the A vesta. xix Chap. 2 sketches the legend of Virna , the golden age , and the coming of a destructive winter, an Iranian flood. Chap. 3 teaches, among other things, the blessings of agriculture; Chap. 4 contains legal matter — breaches of contract, assaults, punishments; Chap. 5 12 relate mainly to the im- purity from the dead; Chap. 13 — 15 deal chiefly with the treatment of the dog; Chap. 16 — 17, and partly t8, are devoted to purification from several sorts of uncleanness. In Chap, ig is found the temptation of Zoroaster, and the revelation; Chap. 20 — 22 are chiefly of medical cha- racter. In the ritual , the chapters of the Vendidad are inserted among the Gathas. § 18. (6) Besides the above books there are a number of frag- ments, oue or two among them from the lladhokht Mask. There are also quotations or passages from missing Masks, likewise glosses and glos- saries. Mere belong pieces from the Nirangistan , Aogemculaeca , Zand- Pahlavi Glossary, and some other fragments. These are all written in the Avesta language, and are parts of a once great literature. Under the Zoroastrian religious literature, moreover, though not written in Avesta, must also be included the works in I’ahlavi , many of which are trans- lations from the Avesta, or contain old matter from the original scriptures. § 19. From the above contents, it will be seen that our present Avesta is rather a Prayer-Book than a Bible. The Vendidad, Vispered, and Yasna were gathered together by the priests for liturgical purposes. It was the duty of the priests to recite the whole of these sacred writings every day, in order to preserve their own purity, and be able to perform the rites of purification, or give remission of sins to others. The solemn recital of the Vendidad , Vispered , and Yasna at the sacrifice might be compared with our church worship. The selections from the Vendidad would correspond to the Pentateuch when read; the preparation, consecration, and presentation of the holy water, the Haoma-juice, and the meat-offering, described in the Yasna and Vispered would answer to our communion ser- vice; the metrical parts of the Yasna would be hymns; the intoning of the Gathas would somewhat resemble the lesson and the Gospel, or even the sermon. In the Khordah Avesta, the great Yashts might perhaps be comparable to some of the more epic parts of our Bible; but as they arc devoted each to some divinity and preserve much of the old mythology, they really have hardly a parallel, even in the apocryphal books. § 20. Such, in brief outline, is the contents of the books known to-day as the Avesta; but, as implied above, this is but a remnant of a literature once vastly greater in extent. This we can judge both from internal and from historical evidence. The character of the work itself in its present form , sufficiently shows that if is a compilation from various l XX Introduction : The Avesta. sources. This is further supported by the authority of history, if the Parsi tradition, going back to the time of the Sassanulde, be trustworthy. Pliny {Hist. Nat. 30.1,2) tells of 2,000,000 verses composed by Zoroaster. The Arab historian, Tabari, describes the writings of Zoroaster as committed to 12,000 cowhides (parchments); other Aiabic references by Masudi, and Syriac allusions to an Avesta, which must have been extensive, have been noted above § 6. The Parsi tradition on the subject is contained in the Rivayats , and in a Pallia vi book, the Dinkard. The Dinkard (r»k. 3) describes two complete copies of the Avesta. These each comprised 21 Masks, or Musks (books), l'he one deposited in the archives at Perse- polis, as the Arda Viraf says, perished in the llames when Alexander burned the palace in his invasion of Iran. The other copy, it is implied, was in some way destroyed by the Greeks. From that lime the scriptures, like tlie religion under the Graico-Pavthian sway, lived on, partly in scattered writings and partly in the memories of the priests, for nearly 300 years. § 21. 'l'he first attempt again to collect these writings seems to hare been begun under the reign- of the last Arsacidae, iust preceding the Sassanian dynasty. Pahlavi tradition preserved in a proclamation of King Khusro Anoshirvan (Oth cent A. DA, says it was under King Valkhash, pro- bably Vologoses I., the contemporary of Me 10 , that the collection was begun of the sacred writings as far a* they had escaped the ravages of Alexander, or were preserved by oral tradition. Valkhash was among the last of the Arsacidre. The Sassanian dynasty (A. D. 226) next came to the throne. This house were genuine Zoroastrians and warm upholders of the faith, and they brought back the old religion and raised it to a height it had hardly attained even in its palmiest days. The first Sassanian mon- archs, Avtak.hshir Papakan (Arueshir Habagan, A. D. 220 240) and his son Shahpuhar I. (A. D. 240- 270), eagerly continued the gathering of the religious writings, and the Avesta again became the sacred book of Iran. Under Shahpuhar !!. (A. D. 309 — 380I the final revision of tire Avesta texts was ma-Je by Atur-pat Maraspend, and then the king proclaimed these as canonical, and fixed the number of Mask.-, or books. § 12. Of these Nasks, 21 were counted, and a description of them, as noted, is found in the Rivayats, and in the Dinkard; each received a name corresponding to one of the twenty-one words in tiic Ahuna-Vairya (Ilonovar), the most sacred prayer of the Parsis Each of these Masks contained both Avesta and Zend, i. e. original scripture and commentary. This tradition is too important to be idly rejected. Its contents give an idea of what may have been the original extent anil scope of the Avesta. l'he subjects said to have been treated irr the 21 Nasks may practically he described in brief, as follows; Mask 1 (twenty-two sections), on virtue XXI Extent of the A vesta; the Nashs. and piety; 2 (likewise twenty-two sections), religious observance ; 3 (twenty- one sections), the Mazdayasnian religion and its teachings; 4 (thirty-two sections), this world and the next, the resurrection and the judgment; 5 (thirty-five sections) , astronomy ; 6 (twenty-two sections) , ritual perfor- mances and the merit accruing ; 7 (fifty sections before Alexander, thirteen then remaining), chiefly political and social in its nature ; 8 (sixty sections before Alexander, twelve after remaining), legal; 9 (sixty sections before Alexander, fifteen later preserved) , religion and its practical relations to man; 10 (sixty sections before Alexander, only ten afterwards surviving), king Gushtasp and his reign, Zoroaster's influence , 1 1 (twenty-two sections originally, six preserved after Alexander), religion and its practical relations to man; 12 (twenty-two sections), physical truths and spiritual regenera- tion; 13 (sixty sections), virtuous actions, and a sketch of Zoroaster’s in- fancy; 14 (seventeen sections), on Ormazd aDd the Archangels; 15 (fifty- four sections), justice in business and in weights and measures, the path of righteousness; 16 (sixty-five sections), on next-of-kin marriage, a tenet of the faith; 17 (sixty-four sections), future punishments, astrology, 18 (fifty- two sections), justice in exercising authority, on the resurrection, and on the annihilation of evil; 19, the Videvdad, or Vendidad ^twenty-two sections, still remaining) , on pollution and its purification ; 20 (thirty sections) , on goodness; 21 (thirty-three sections), praise of Ormazd and the Archangels. § 23. During the five centuries alter the ravages of Alexander much, doubtless, bad been lost, much forgotten. The Parsi tradition itself ac- knowledges this when it says above, for example, that the seventh Nask consisted originally of 50 sections, but only 13 remained ‘after the ac- cursed Iskander (Alexander)’. So says the Dinkard and so the Rivayats. Like statements of Joss are made of the eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh Masks. The loss in the five centuries from ihe invasion of Alexander, however, till the time of the Sassanian dynasty, was but small in com- parison with the decay that overtook the scriptures from the Sassanian times till our day. The Mohammedan invasion in the seventh century of our era, and the inroad made by the Koran proved far more destructive, ihe persecuted people lost or neglected many portions of their sacred scriptures. Oi the twenty-one Masks that were recognized in Sassanian times as surviving from the original A vesta, only one single Nask, the nineteenth — the Vendidad — has come down to us in its full form. Even this shows evidence of having been patched up and pieced together. We can furthermore probably identify parts of our present Yasna and Vispered with the Staot \ aslrt (staota yestiya ) or Yaslit (vesnva), as it is ilso called. 1 he two fragments Yt. 21 and 22 (as printed in Westergaard’s edition) and Yt. 11, in its first form, are recognized in the MSS. as taken XXil Introduction : The Avesta. from the 20th, or Hadhokht Nask. The Xirangistan, a Pahlavi work, con- tains extensive Avestan quotations, which are believed to have been taken from the Husparam, or 17th Naslc. Numerous quotations in Pahlavi works contain translations from old Avestan passages. The Pahlavi work, Shavast- la-Shayast, quotes briefly from no less than thirteen of the lost Nasks; the Bundahisli and other Pahlavi works give translations of selections, the oiiginal Avesta text of which is lo^t. Grouping together all the Avesta texts, we may roughly calculate that about two-thirds of the total scrip- tures have disappeared since Sassanian times. § 24. The present form of the Avesta belongs to the Sassanian period. Internal evidence shows that it is made up of parts most varied in age and character. This bears witness to the statement that during that period the texts, as far as they had survived the ravages of Alexander, and defied the corrupting influence of time, were gathered together, com- piled, and edited. According 10 the record of Khusro Anoshirvan (A. I). 531 — 579), referred to above, King Valkhash, the first compiler of the Avesta, ordered that all the writings which might have survived should be searched for, and that all the priests who preserved the traditions orally should contribute their share toward restoring the original Avesta. The texts as collected were re-edited under successive Sassanian rulers, until, under Shahpuhar II. (A. U. 309 — 379) the final redaction was made by his prime minister , Atur-pat Maraspehd. It is manifest that the editors used the old texts as far as possible ; sometimes they patched up defective parts by inserting other texts ; occasionally they may have added or composed passages to join these, or to complete some missing portion. The character of the texts , when critically studied, shows that some such method must have been adopted. § 25. Parts of the Avesta, therefore, may differ considerably from each other in regard to age. In determining this the text criticism by- means of metrical restoration is most instructive. Almost all the oldest portions of the texts are found to be metrical ; the later, or inserted por- tions, are as a rule, but not always, written in prose. The grammatical test also is useful; the youngest portions generally show a decay of clear grammatical knowledge. The metrical Galhas in this respect are wonder- fully pure. They are, of course, in their form the oldest portion of the text, dating from Zoroaster himself. The longer Yaslus and metrical por- tions of the Yasna contain much that is very old and derived doubtless from the ancient faith of Iran; but in their form and in general com- position, they are probably some centuries later than the Gathas. The Vendidad is in this regard most incongruous. Some parts of it are doubt- less of great antiquity, though corrupted in form ; other parts, like younger Formation of the Avesta. — Age of the different Parts. xxiii portions also of the Yashts , may he quite late. The same is true of formulaic passages throughout the whole of the Avesta, and some of the ceremonial or ritual selections in the Vispered and Nyaishes, etc. Roughly speaking, the chronological order of the texts would be somewhat as follows: i. Gathas (Ys. 28 — 53; and the sacred formulas Ys. 27.13,14, Ys. 54, including also ii. Yasna Haptanghaiti (Ys. 35 — 42) and some other compositions, like Y r s. 12, 58, 4.26, in the Gstha dialect. iii. The metrical Yasna and Yashts, as Ys. 9, xo, 11, 57, 62, 65; Yt. 5, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15, 17, 19; portions of Vd. 2, 3, 4, 5, 18, 19, and scattered verses in the Vispered, Nyaishes, Afringans, etc. iv. The remaining prose portions of the Avesta. In the latter case it is generally, but not always, easy to discover by the style and language, where old material Tailed and the hand of the redactoi came in with stupid or prosaic additions. § 26. Considerable portions, therefore, of our present Avesta, espe- cially the Gathas , we may regard as coming directly from Zoroaster him- self; still, additions from time to time must have been made to the sacred canon from his day on till the invasion of Alexander. The so-called copy of the Zoroastrian Bible which it is claimed was destroyed by that invader, doubtless contained much that was not directly from the founder of the faith, but was composed by his disciples and later followers. The Parsis, however, generally regard the whole work as coming directly from Zoroaster ; this is a claim that the Avesta itself hardly makes. The Gathas, however, undoubtedly came directly from the prophet, the Avesta itself always speaks of them as ‘holy’ and especially calls them the ‘five Gathas of Zoroaster’. We may fairly regard many other portions of the Avesta as direct elaborations of the great teacher’s doctrines, just as the Evangelists have elaborated for us portions of the teachings of our Lord. § 27. In regard to the locality in which we are to seek the source of the Avesta and the cradle of the religion, opinions have been divided. Some scholars would place it in the West , in Media ; the majority, how- ever, prefer to look to the East of Iran, to Bac.tria. Both views probably have right on their side , for perhaps we shall not be amiss in regarding the Avesta as coming partly from the East, and partly from the West. The scene of most of it doubtless does belong in the East; it was there that Zoroaster preached , but the sacred literature that grew up about the Gathas made its way, along with the religion to the West, toward Media and Persia. Undoubtedly some texts, therefore, may well have been com- posed also in Media. The question is connected also with that of Zo- XXIV Introduction : The Avesta. roaster’s home which may originally have* been in the West. On the native place of Zoroaster, see Jackson in Arner. Or. Society's Journal. May 1891 pp. 222 seq. The language itself of the texts, as used in the church, be- came a religious language, precisely as did Latin , and therefore was not confined to any place or time. We may regard the Avesta as having been worked upon from Zoroaster’s day down to the time of the bassanian redaction. Religion of the Avesta. § 28. The religion contained in the Avesta is best called Zoroastria- nism, a name that gives due honor to its founder and which is thus pa- rallel with Christianity, Buddhism, Mohammedanism. Other designations are sometimes employed. It has often been termed Mazdaism, from its supreme god; or again Magisin, from the Magi priests; sometimes we hear it styled Fire-Worship, or even Dualism, from certain of its characteristic features The designation Parsiism , from the name of its modern followers, is oc- casionally applied. § 29. Beyond our own Bihle , the sacred books perhaps of hardly any religion contain so clear a grasp of the ideas of right and wrong, or present so pure , so exalted a view of the coming of a Saviour, a resur- rection and judgment, the future rewards and punishments for the immortal soul , and of the life eternal , as docs the Avesta, the book of the scrip- tures of ancient Iran. § 30. In Zoroastrianism, however, as in other religions, we recognize a development. In the older stage of the Gathas, we have the faith in its purity as taught by Zoroaster (Zarathushtra) himself, more than a thousand years perhaps before our Lord. But later, and even before the invasion of Alexander had weakened the power of the religion, we find changes creeping in. There was a tendency, for example, to restore many of the elements of the primitive faith of Iran, which Zoroaster had thrown into the back- ground. Traces of the different stages are plainly to be recognized in the Avesta. § 31. The most striking feature of Zoroaster's faith, as taught in the Gathfts, is the doctrine of Dualism. There are two principles, the good and the evil, which pervade the world. All nature is divided be- tween them. These principles are primeval. Good and evil have existed from the beginning of the world. Ahura Mazda, the Lord of Wisdom (the later Persian Orniazd) is Zoroaster’s god : Angra Mainyu, or the Spiritual Enemy itlie later Persian Ahriman) is the devil. The evil spirit is also called Druj ‘Deceit, Satan*. The good spirit and the evil are in eternal conflict. The good, Zoroaster teaches, however, will ultimately Religion of the Ave.-,ta. — Dualism. XXV triumph. Man, a free .agent, will bring the victory by choosing right and increasing the power of good. Evil shall be banished from the world. This will be the coming of the ‘kingdom’ or ‘the good kingdom’ — vohu fy$aj>ra — as it is called. To the right choice Zoroaster exhorts his people. The question whence Zoroaster derived his idea of dualism, and how far he was a reformer, will not here be entered into. § 32. According to the prophet’s teaching, Alntra Mazda, the god of good, is not without the aid of ministering angels. These are called Amesha Spent a s , ‘Immortal Holy Ones’, the later Persian A m- shaspands. They correspond in a measure to our idea of Archangels. They are six in number and constitute, with Ahura Mazda, the heavenly host. Their names are personifications of abstractions or virtues, Righ- teousness, Goodness, or the like. The seven-fold group, or celestial council, is as follows. Ahura Mazda aided by Vohu Manah Asha Vahishta Khshathra Vairya Spenta Armaiti Maurvatat Ameretat also Sraosha. These abstractions or personifications may be noticed more in detail. § 33 - Vohu Manah (lit. ‘good mind’, Plutarch gtivota) is the personification of Ahura Mazda’s good spirit working in man and uniting him with God. In the later development of t he religion , this divinity was specialized into the good mind or kindliness that is shown toward cattle. He thus became the guardian genius of the (locks. § 34. Asha Vahishta (lit. ‘best righteousness, Plutarch akr ( G$’.a) is the next divinity in the celestial group and is the personification of right (Skt. fid), the divine order that pervades the world. In the heavenly court Asha stands almost in the relation of prime minister to Ormazd. To live ‘according to Asha’ (Right, or the Law of Righteous- ness e. g. Ys. 31.2) is a frequent phrase in the Avesta. The attribute Ashavan is the regular designation of ‘the righteous’, as opposed to Dregvaut ‘the wicked’, or one that belongs to Satan or the Druj. In later times Asha Vahishta came to preside as guardian genius over the fire, a symbol of perfect purity. XXVI Introduction: The A vesta. § 35. Khshathra Vairya or Vohu Khshathra flit, ‘the wished- for kingdom , the good kingdom’, Plutarch s'jvcfua) is the personification of Aliura Mazda’s good rule, might, majesty, dominion, and power, the Kingdom which Zoroaster hopes to sec come on earth. The establishment of this kingdom is to be the annihilation of evil. In later times, Khsha- thra Vairya , as a divinity, came to preside over metals. The symbolic connection may have been suggested by the fact that the coming of the Kingdom (khshathra) was presumed to be accompanied by a flood of molten metal , the lire that should punish and purge the wicked , and which should purify the world. Tile metals thus became emblematic of Khshathra. § 36. Spent a Armaiti (lit. ‘holy harmony, humility’, Plutarch oo^ia) is the harmony, peace, and concord that should rule among men. She is represented as a female divinity; the earth is in her special charge. She plays an important part at the resurrection. The earth is to give up its dead § 37. Haurvatat (Plutarch JtXouxoj) literally means ‘wholeness, completeness, the saving health, the perfection’, toward which all should strive, in short ‘Salvation’, with which word it is etymologically cognate. This divinity is always mentioned in connection with Ameretat. In the later religion, Haurvatat came to preside as guardian angel over the healtti- giving waters. § 38. Ameretat literally means ‘immortality’, and is always joined with Haurvatat. In later Zoroastrianism, Ameretat presides over the trees. The pair of Haurvatat and Ameretat together seem to symbolize the waters of health and the tree of life. § 39. To the number of the celestial council also is to be added the divinity Sraosha (lit. ‘obedience’). This genius completes the mystic number seven when Ahtira Mazda is excepted from the list (cf. also Vs. 57.12). Sraosha is the angel of religious obedience, the priest god, the personification of the divine service that protects man from evil. t; 40. Beside the above divinities in the Gathas , mention is also made of Geush Tashan, the creator of the cow, and Geush Urvan, the personified soul of the kine. We sometimes also find Spent a Mainyu, the Holy Spirit of Ormazd, the will of God, represented prac- tically as a distinct personage. Lastly, the Fire, A tar, is personified in the Gathas as one of God’s ministering servants, and is a sacred emblem of the faith. tj 41. Such is the heavenly hierarchy, and such the faith of Ormazd in which Zarathushlra exhorts the people to believe. The faithful are Religion of the Avesta. — Dualism. XXV11 called Ashavans ‘righteous’, or later more often Mazdayasnians i. e. ‘wor- shippers of Mazda’. This is the true religion in contradistinction to the false. The false religion is the worship of the Daevas ‘demons’ (Av. dai-vu opposed to Skt. diva ‘god’). The Daeva-worsliippers are misguided and live in error. They are the wicked Dregvants (lit. ‘belonging to the Druj, Satan’), 'the children of the wicked one’ (St. Matt. xiii. 38 -43). The two religions themselves are a part of the dualism. § 42. In juxtaposition to Ahura Mazda, Zoroaster sets the fiend Druj ‘Deceit, Satan’ or Angra Mainyu (Ys. 45.2). The spirit of evil in co- existent with Ormazd iYs. 30.3), but is less clearly pictured in the Gathas. In later times, to carry out the symmetry of dualism, Angra Mainyu is accompanied by a number of Arch-Fiends, in opposition to the Archangels of Ormazd. The number of the infernal group is not sharply defined, but the chief members are Angra Mainyu aided by Aka Manah Indra Saurya Taro-maiti Taunt Zairica also Ae^hma. Each is the opponent of a heavenly rival. Aka Manah or ‘Evil Mind’ is the antagonist of Vohu Manah , Taro-maiti, the demon of ‘Presumption’, is the opponent of Armaiti or humility; Aeshma, ‘Fury, Wrath’, the foe of Sraosha or holy obedience. The antagonism in the case of the others is less marked, and the connection somewhat more ■ mechanical. § 43. In the final struggle between the two bands, the powers of light and the powers of darkness, tire good eventually shall triumph. That was an ethical idea which Zoroaster inculcated. But the warfare that rages in the world between the two empires and between the true religion and the false, the belief in Mazda and the Daeva-worship, pervades also the soul of man and leaves the way uncertain. Yet on his choice the ultimate triumph of right or of wrong depends. Each evil deed which man commits, increases the power of evil (e. g. Ys. 31.15); each good deed he does, brings nearer the kingdom of good. As Ahura Mazda’s creature , man should choose the right. Zoroaster’s mission, as shown in the Gathas (e. g. Ys. 31.2 et al.), is to guide man’s choice. A summary of the prophet’s moral Introduction : The Avesta. xxvili and ethical teachings may best be given in the Iliad, so familiar later, ‘good thoughts, good words, good deeds’. This forms the pith of the whole teaching. Purity alike of body and soul, and the choice of the good Mazrla-religion rather than the wicked Daeva-worship, are inculcated. Zoroaster enjoins also the care of useful animals, especially the cow, anil commends the good deeds of husbandry. 11c is the teacher of a higher and nobler civilization, as may be judged from the Avesta creed Vs. 12.1 seq. >5 44. .Man’s actions , according to Zoroaster, are all recorded in Ormazd’s sight as in a life-book (e. g. Vs. 31 ij 14, Vs. 32.6). By his own actions man shall lie judged, and rewarded or punished The doctrine of a future life, the coming of the Kingdom, the end of the world, forms a striking feature in the teachings of the Avesta. This is the tone that Zoroaster himself constantly strikes in the Gathas. This very doctrine, and a belief also in a resurrection of the body characterises the entire Persian faith. The resurrection is to be followed by a general judgment when evil shall be destroyed from the world. This general division and new dispensation is called the Yidaiti (vi -jr- \f tia ‘dis-pose’j. § 45. The views in regard to a future life, though incomplete in the GpthSs , arc carried out in the Younger Avesta, and arc fully given in the Palilavi books. That the belief in a resurrection and a life here- after was common among the Persians, some centuries before our Saviour, we hate evidence in the early Greek writers, such as Theopompus, Hero- dotus, etc. 'l'iie belief in an immediate judgment of the soul after death, the weighing in the balance, the leading of the soul across the Cinvat Bridge and through the mansions of paradise to bliss, or through the grades of hell to torment , or again in special cases to an intermediate state to await the final judgment— are all to be recognized in the Zoroa- strian books and have their prototypes in the Gathas. § 46. In the Vasna of the. Seven Chapters, though not much later than the Gathas, we find in some respects a slight descent from the lofty level on which the religion had been placed by its founder. There is a tendency to revive ancient ideas and forms from the old worship , in which nature had played a prominent part. The elements , earth , air, tire , and water, receive adoration ; the l’ravashis . or guardian angels of the righteous, are worshipped and praised together with Ahura Mazda and the Amesha Spentas. The deity Ilaoma , the divinity of the plant which produced the intoxicating Soma dtink, again finds place in the religious rites. {5 47. In the Younger Avesta, especially in the Yashts, we find still further restorations or innovations. The gods of the ancient mytiio- Later Development of the Religion. XXIX logy, like Mithra, Verethvaghna , once more appear in honor l>y the side of the supreme deity; the divinities of the stars, moon, and sun have their share of pious worship. In the later parts of the Y'asna, the sacri- fice is developed into a somewhat elaborate ritual. The Zoroaster presented in certain portions of the Vendidad, moreover, is evidently no longer a living, moving personage as in the Gathas; he has become a shadowy figure, around whom time has thrown the aureola of the saint. These passages differ widely from the old hymns; they show unmistakeable signs of lateness. They present a religion codified in the hands of the priests; superstitious beliefs and practices have found their w y into the faith; intricate purifications in particular are enjoined to remove or to avoid the impurity arising from contact with the dead. The spirit of the Gathas is gone. It is only here and there that passages in late texts are old and have the genuine Zo- roastrian ring. They must not be overlooked. Tn general, a distinction must be drawn between what is old and what is young. We must recall, as above (§ 27), that the Avesta was probably worked upon from Zo- roaster’s own day down to the time of the Sassanian redaction. The Pahlavi Version of the Avesta. i; 48. 'To the period of the Sassanian editing of the texts belongs the Pahlavi translation and interpretation of the Avesta. At the date when the texts were compiled and edited (§ 21), tire general knowledge of the Avesta and the understanding of the sacred texts was far from perfect. The preparation of a translation or version became necessary. Accordingly, the great body of the texts was rendered into l’ahlavi, the langnngc used in Persia, at the lime of the Arsacidoe and Sassanidm. The Pahlavi version and interpretation of the entire Yasna , Vispered , and Vendidad, with some portions of the other texts, has been preserved. We have not as yet a thorough enough understanding of this version, as the Pahlavi question is still a vexed one; but as our knowledge of this translation increases, we sec more and more its importance. Owing to a somewhat imperfect knowledge of the Avesta texts at. the time when the version was made, and owing to the unskilfiill and peculiar manner in which the Pahlavi translation is made, this version abounds in numerous eriors and inaccuracies. Its renderings, however, are often of the greatest value in interpreting allusions, particularly also in giving hints for the meanings of obscure words, and in such matters it is many times our best and only guide. When more fully understood and properly used in connection with the ‘com- parative method’, referring to the Sanskrit in interpreting the sacred texts, the ‘traditional method’ or native explanation is destined to win great results. The ‘traditional’ and the ‘comparative’ methods must go hand in hand. XXX Introduction : The Avesta. Manuscripts of the Avesta. S5 49. The manuscripts of the Avesta are quite numerous. Some of our specimens were copied down over live hundred years ago. They are written on parchment. The oldest was copied about the middle of the 13th century. From that date onward we have a considerable number of codices still extant. They come to us from India and from Yezd and Kirman in Persia. A number of the manuscripts are deposited in the libraries at Copenhagen, Oxford, London, Paris, Munich. The Parsi priests, especially the Dasturs, Dr. Jamaspji Minocheherji and also Peshotanji Behramji, have shown princely generosity in aiding Western scholars in editing text- by putting valuable MSS. in their possession. It is thus that the new edition of the Avesta texts by Professor Geldncr of Berlin , is able to be pre- sented in so critical a manner. No codex is complete in containing all the texts (§ 1 1 j. The different MSS. themselves, moreover, show certain variations in reading; but these chiefly affect the form and construction of single words , rather than entire passages and the sense. As a rule, the older the MS. is, the better is its grammar; and the later, the more faulty. Notable exceptions, however, must be made, especially in favor of some later MSS. from Persia. Importance of the Avesta. § 50. The importance of the Avesta, as stated above (§ 2), lies not alone in the field of philology, ethnology and early litera- ture, but especially also is it of importance from the standpoint of com- parative religion. Resemblances to Christianity in its teachings be- come significant when we consider the close contact between the Jews and the Persians during the Babylonian captivity. These are beginning more and more to attract the attention of students of the Bible. Language of the Avesta, Grammatical Summary. § 51. The language in which the Avesta is written belongs to the Iranian branch of the Indo-Germanic tongues. With the Ancient Persian of the inscriptions it makes up the Old Iranian division. The later Iranian languages, New Persian, Kurdish, Afghan, Osselish, Baluchi, Ghalcha, and some minor modern dialects, complete 1 lie younger division. The inter- vening Pahlavi and P 3 zand, or Parsi, do not quite complete the link be- tween the divisions. The extent of its relationship with the Armenian K not yet defined with sufficient exactness. On the positive kinship between the language of the Avesta and Sanskrit, see below § 55. Language of the Avesta. — Grammatical Summary. XXXI § 52. The language in which the Avesta is written may best be termed Avesta or Avestan. The designation Avesta for the language, as well as the book, is in keeping with the Pahlavi Avisldk, which is used both of the tongue and of the scriptures. The term Avestan, both for the language and as an adjective, is preferred by some scholars, in order to distinguish the speech from the work itself. This is sometimes found very convenient. The term Zend for the language, as noted above (§ 3), is a misnomer., The designation Old Baetrian, occasionally used for the tongue, has little to recommend it. § 53. The alphabet in which the Avesta is written is far younger than the language it presents. The characters are derived from the Sassanian Pahlavi, which was used to write down the oral tradition when the texts were collected and edited under the dynasty of the Sassanidte. The writing is read from right to left. What the original Avestan script was we do not know. § 54. Two dialects may be recognized in the Avesta: one the ‘Gatha dialect’ or the language of the oldest parts , the Gathas, or metrical sermons of Zoroaster ; the other ‘Younger Avesta’ or the ‘classical dialect’. This latter is the language of the great body of the Avesta. The Gatha dialect is more archaic, standing in the relation of the Vedic to the classical Sanskrit, or the Homeric Greek to the Attic. Possibly the Gatha language may owe some of its peculiarities noticed below, also to an original difference of locality. The Gatha dialect was the speech of Zoroaster and his followers. Its grammatical structure is remarkably pure. The younger Avesta, but only in its late compositions, owing to linguistic decay, show’s many corruptions and confusions in its inflections. All that is old or is written in meter, however, is correct and accurate. Inaccuracies that have there crept in, we must generally at- tribute to the carelessness of the scribes. In its forms , as a rule , the Avesta is extremely antique; it stands in general on the same plane as the Vedic Sanskrit, and occasionally, though not often, it even shows more ancient forms. § 55. The language of the Avesta is most closely allied to the Sanskrit, though individually quite distinct from the latter. Together they may be classed as making up an Indo-Iranian group. Almost any Sanskrit w ord may be changed at once into its Avestan equivalent , or vice versa , merely by applying certain phonetic laws. As example may be taken the metrical stanza Yt. 10.6 in the Avesta : tern amava>it?)u yazatem stir an ddmiihu sdvislem mi Prim yazdi zaoprabyd — XXXII Introduction: The Avesta. ‘Mithra that strong mighty angel, most beneficent to all creatures, I will worship with libations’-- becomes when rendered word for word in Sanskrit: lam dmavantam yajatdm sftrain tlhamasu sdviftham mi ham yajai hotrabhyah. $ 56. In its phonology the Avesta agrees with the Sanskrit in its vowels in genera), but the Avesta shows a greater variety in using . Plural. N’om., Voc. -0 (-as), -a; Acc. -6 (-as, -ns), -a; Instr. -bis; Dat. -byb (-byasj; Gen. -am; Loc, -fis, -hit, -fva. The classes of declension agree exactly with the Language of the Avesta. — Grammatical Summary. xxxiii Sanskrit; the method of forming comparison of adjectives likewise corresponds. The numerals answer to Skt. forms, except Av. aeva- 'one', opposed to Skt. Ska-, Av. baevar- ‘10,000’, but Skt. ayuta. The Av. pronouns closely resemble the Skt., but show also individual pe- culiarities. Noteworthy is the remote demonstrative Av. ava, hau ‘that, yonder’, contrasted with Skt. ami'i, asau. The verbal system in Av. and in Skt. are in general identical. The roots are chiefly monosyllabic and are subject to the same modifications as in Skt. In voice, mode, and tense, and in their conjugation-system the two languages quite agree. The endings show equal antiquity with the Sanskrit. The primary active endings in Av. are: Sing. I, -mi, 2, -hi, 3, -ti ; Dual. 1, -vahi, 3, -to, -pi); Plur. 1, -inahi, 2, -pa, 3, -%ti. The other endings also are parallel with the Sanskrit. § 59. The Av. possesses like facility with the Sanskrit in forming words by means of prefixes, and by adding suffixes of primary and se- condary derivation. The same classes of compounds may. be recognized in both tongues. The rules of external Sandhi , or joining together of words in a sentence, so universal in Skt., are almost wanting in Avesta. The Avesta separates each word by a dot. The vowels are fully ex- pressed as in Greek etc., by individual letters. No diacritical points or accents are written in the texts. The meters in which the Gathas are composed have analogies in the Veda. Almost all the metrical parts of the younger Avesta are in eight-syllable lines. The syntax, however, differs from the Sanskrit in certain points, and shows some marked in- dividualities, especially in the later portions. HI Specimens of the AvestaText. I. From the Gathas. Yasna 45.1—2. Zoroaster preaches upon The Two Spirits. v/ $6n j -*"(y iv<^ -4 i * >m £ ,J " JJ yO>r44 Y^K^lpH" F‘"h( J - ,J |- , -°4 •£>-" 2 V faVr^' "(^fO y>OJ0 lUJ'JJJf-y ^>)i-"k>- u '!ce •ip-’V* 1 - uu apc j ^i5 ^■*V > i p"i"4 - uj i Y (t)K> l ^ ,J - L, K-* J ;]P ^IK'hV -(0^1 (^^1 Ys. 45.1 translated. Now shall I preach, and do \ ou give ear and hear, Ye who hither press from near and from afar. Therefore lay ye all these things to heart as clear Nor let the wicked teacher your second life destroy— The perverted sinner your tongues with his false faith. Transliteration of the same. (See opposite page.) 1 at fravai/yya nil gii}ddim nit sraotd yaeca asnnt yaecti dura} isapd nit im vispd cibra zi mazdamhodum noil d°*bitim dus.sastis ahum m ? rajyd} aka, var°nd dragvm hizvai a.var^to. 2 a} fravaffsya a v ha us mahiyu po u ruye yaym spanych inti mrava} yam angrani noil net inanm noi} saiighd noi} Ip atavo naedd varand noi / td/dd naedd syaopand noit daench noi} n rvgnd iiacahpe . Ys. 45.2 translated. Now shall 1 preach of the world’s Two primal Spirits The Holier One of which did thus address the Evil: ‘Neither do our minds, our teachings, nor our concepts, Nor our belief's, nor words, nor do our deeds in sooth, Nor yet our consciences, nor souls agree in aught.’ XXXV! 1'iiroduciion : The A vesta. II. From the Younger Avesta. a. Yasna 9.5 (metrical). The Golden Age of Yima. -iU(y / - u )A)- u 5 "fa-faWc' ^^>1 -“QnP" -*o> ,j 6&-6 -(O^i -“owp" ^*>1 tou '^ajdojniai' 5 j >ima he lfsapre a !< rvahe noil a atom ivvha naif gar 3 mam no if za u rva cnwha no/f mar'pyus no if arasko daevo.datd : piDica.dasa fracardipe pita puprasca raodoepva [kataraseif] yavata 1 /payoit hvapwd yitnd vlvavuhato pupro. In the reign of princely Yima There was neither cold, nor heat Old age was not. death there was not, Nor disease, the work of Demons, But the son walked with the father Fifteen years old each in figure, Long as Vivanghvat's sun, Yima The good shepherd, ruled a^> sovereign. Specimens of the Avesta Text. XXX Vi 1 b. Vendidad 6.44—45 (prose). Disposal of the Dead. [.mu a $ a .in q ni t i a v t s a .mqnah c a " ,)r a i a dj asauni astva L tinqm gaepanqm datar 3 O holy One material of beings O Creator -°»9 [. aru h a a tn a rah .in Una t ,m q it a t s i ri .tn q r an . a v kj ahum bar dm a tanum iristanqm narq.ni kva O Ahura shall-we-bear body dead fgen.) of men where £>^-"V (7 45 [. ii ru ha . / 0 arm .(. a a ahuro mraot dap V "")>9 . a m a p a din .avk .a dz a m] nidapama kva mazda Ahura spake Then deposit rvh ere Mazda .JfOJ-uqj jjyu [. a c a v g u t i y U i r a d i u i e) e 0 (do) (it) B. Consonants. Guttural ... . 9 k 0 Palatal y C — £ J c j Dental / h ]> _j d ^ d g f t (th) m W P / <’ «• Nasal x v • \f V 1 n ^ii 4 in (ft) (it) it (it) til Semivowel and Liquid ro («) )' (j_)~ ^ f ) (») * ' (ti) " y r v Sibilant « S "j S w S ro S ’ / 2 ill a (0 0) (sh) (ik) z (zh) Aspiration . ... or /t g h ■’< ( 9 ) Ligature t** h (q) 1 Forms in parentheses ( ) show w here Justi has been deviated from. ■ The dgns /, t/ need only he employed for purely scientific pur- poses; the letters y, ir for both initial and internal ro >’, (5 n, answer fully for practical purposes. 3 The differentiation /, y, / need only be made in scientific articles. The single sign .? is ordinarily quite sufficient for the three j tj, £0, ro. Suggestions. The following hints inay be helpful to the student in using the Grammar. The chief points on which stress should be laid, and which it will be sufficient for the be- ginner to acquire, are: 1. In the Preface, the remarks on Transcription, pp. vi— vii. 2. In the Introduction, the sketch of the language of the Avesta, pp. xxx — xxxiii. 3. Throughout the Grammar, the large print alone need he studied. Every thing marked ‘GAv.’ (Gatha Avesta), and all that is in smalt type, may be practically disregarded. 4. Under Phonology, only the sections (§§) referred to in the Re- sume pp. 60 — 61. 5. Under the Declension of Nouns and Adjectives , the following sections should suffice: §§ 236, 24.3, 251, 262, 279, 291, 300, 322, 339, 3 6 2, 363. 6. Under Numerals, note merely the Cardinals § 366. 7. Under Pronouns, compare the Av. and Skt. forms in the case of §§ 386, 390, 399, 409, 417 422, 432. No attempt need be made to commit the paradigms to memory. 8. Under Verbs, the following sections relating to the Present-System are important: $§ 448, 466, 469, 470, 478 — 481, 4S3 — 48,8. The remain- ing conjugations, and the Perfect, Aorist, Future, etc,, may be learned as needed. 9. The rest of the book may be overlooked by the beginner. 10. In consulting the Grammar, the Index will be found of ser- vice for reference. xl Suggestions. A FEW OF THE BOOKS MOST NECESSARY FOR THE BEGINNER. The following list contains a few books that the be- ginner will find most useful. The list is very brief; the student as lie advances will see how rapidly it may be enlarged. a. Texts. Geldner — Avesta } or the Sacred Books of the Par sis — Stuttgart 1 88 5 seq. The new standard edition. Westeroaakd — Zendavesta, or the Religious Books of the Zoroastrians. — Copenhagen. Hard to procure, but useful until Gcldner’s edition is complete W. Geiger — Aogemadaeca, ein Parsentract in Puzend, Alt- baktrisch und Sanskrit. — Erlangen 1878. Useful for the brief Av. fragment it contains Spiegel — Die altpersischen Keilinsehriflen , ini Grundtexte mit Cbersetzung, Grammatik und Glossal - . 2. Aufl. — Leipzig 1881. Good for comparative purpose--:. b. Dictionary. Justi — Handbuch der Zendspracht. Allbaktrisches Worter- buch. — Leipzig 1864. The only dictionary at present, and indispensable for reference. Possible to obtain second-hand. c. Translation Darmestkter and Mills — The Zend-Avesta translated, in the Sacred Books of the Past, cd. by F. Max Muller, vols. iv, xxiii, xxxi. — Oxford 1883-7. This translation is complete. Translations of separate portions are to be found in the works mentioned under (d) and (e). Books recommended for Reference. xli d. Grammar and Exegesis, including also Translations of selected portions. (Books specially mentioned above in Preface, are not repeated liere.) Eartholomaf — Arische Forschungen i-iii. — Halle 1882-7. Grammatical and metrical investigations , with translations of selected Passages. Geldner — U eber die Metrik des jiingeren Avesta. — Tubingen 1877. A useful treatise on Metre. Also contains translations. — Studien zum Avesta. — Strassburg 1882. Grammatical contributions, and numerous translations. — Drei Yasht aus dem Zendavesta iibersetzt und er- klart. — Stuttgart 1 884. Translation of Yt. 14, 17, 19, with Commentary. Spiegel — Commentar iiber das Avesta. Bd. i-ii. — Wien 1864-8. Useful for occasional reference. e. Literature, Religion, Antiquities. Darab Peshotan Sanjana — Civilisation of the Eastern Ira- nians. Vols. i-ii; being a translation from the Ger- man of W. Geiger’s Ostiranische Kultur ini Altcr- thum. — London 1885-6. Useful for reference. Geldner — Zend-Avesta , Zoroaster, articles in the Encyclo- paedia Britannica. Ninth edition. — 1888. By all means to be consulted. Haug and West — Essays on the Sacred Language, Writ- ings, and Religion of the Parsis. 3 ed —London 1884. Contains much useful information. Firoz Jamaspji — Casartelli’s Mazdayasnian Religion under the Sassanids. — Bombay 1889. Treats fully of the later development of Zoroastrianism. xlii Suggestions. Ragozin — Media, Babylon and Persia. (Story of Nations’ Series.) — New York 1888. A good and readable book. w 'ndischmann — Zoroastnscke Studien, herausgegeben von Fr. Spiegel. — Berlin 1S63. Contains much good material. Reside t he above works the student will find abundant and valuable contributions on the A vesta and kindred Ira- nian subjects in the philological journals and periodicals of the last few years. Reference need only be made to the names Bartholomae , Bang, Bezzcnberger, Caland, Casartelli, Darmesteter, de Harlez, Geiger, Geldner, Horn, Hiibschmann, Fr. Muller, Mills, Pischel, Spiegel, Wilhelm, and some others, in the following: Bezzenberger’s Beitriige ; Kuhn's Zcilschrift ; Zeitschrift dcr dcttlsckeu morgenliindischen Gesellsckaf! ; Brugmann und S/reitberg's Fndogermanische Forschungen ; T.e Mnsion ; American Oriental Society's Proceedings , American fourn a l of Philology; Babylonian and Oriental Record. Table of Contents OF PART I. (The Numbers refer to the Sections §§.) Section Page PREFACE v— X. INTRODUCTION: THE AVESTA AND ZOROASTER . . xi — xxsiii SPECIMENS OF THE AVESTA TEXT x.sxiv — xxxviii SUGGESTIONS, AND BOOKS RECOMMENDED . , . \xxix — xlii CONTENTS, AND ABBREVIATIONS xliii— xlviii GRAMMAR. PHONOLOGY. ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION. § i. 1-3. The Av. characters. — 4. Punctuation. — 5-7. Pronun- ciation of Vowels and Diphthongs. — 8-13. Sounds of the * Consonants I — 4 SYSTEM OF VOWELS. § 14. Simple Vowels. 14. The Av. and Skt. Vowel-Systems. — 15. Agreement both in Quality and Quantity between Av. and Skt. Vowels. — -16-22. Agreement in Quality, Difference in Quantity. — 2.3-26. Rules for Quantity of Vowels in Av. — 27-46. Difference in Quality between Av. and Skt. Vowels. — 47-49. Original f in Av. — 50-52. Concurrence of Vowels , Euphonic Rtdes , Con- traction, Resolution, Pliatus 4 — 15 § 53. Diphthongs. 53. Proper, Improper Diphthongs ; Reduction and Protraction Diphthongs. — 54-59. The diphthongs Av. ae, oi ; ao, Ju ; ai, du. — 60. Vowel-Strengthening, Guna and Viddhi. — 61. Changes in y- or v- Syllables. — 62. Vocali- zation of y and v. — 63-68. Reduction and Abbreviation in y- or w-Syllables. — 69-72. Epenthesis, Pro thesis, Anapivxis 15 — 27 xliv Table of Contents of Part I. .Section SYSTEM OF CONSONANTS. § 73. General Rules for Consonants. 74. Voiceless and Voiced (Surd and Sonant) - 75 - Remarks on Sandhi.— 76. Tenues, Av. /■, t, {•.— 77-80. Voiceless (Surd) Spirants, Av. //,/>, f. — Si. The character of Av. /. — 82-88. Mediae, Av. g, d, b, j and the Voiced (Sonant) Spirants, Av. ,7, d, w . — 813-90. Bartholomae’s Law for original aspirate mediae -j- / or -J- s. 91-93. Semivowels, Av. yd), v Cg ). — 94-99. Original i' in combination with Consonants. 100. Liquid, Av. r.- 101-105. Nasals, Av. n, g, v, v, m. — 106-107. Sibilants, Av. f, /. /, 3 , z, i . — 10S-1 10. Origirtal s, how represented in Av. — 111-124. Original as, as, how represented in Av. — 125-129. Original wv. - 130. Original sr . — 1 31- 144. Original sy, sr, s»t,sA’ t , is, ps. — 1 45-1 50. Older palatal s (Skt. />, how represented in Av. - 151-153. De- veloped Av. s . — t 54-106. Av. s, /, /. —167-175. Av. z. --176-1S3. Av. 7 .- 184. Aspiration, Av. h, h l} h> ... . §185. Special Rules for Consonants. — 185. Assimilation. — 1S6. Lioulde Consonants reduced in Av. 187. Consonant dropped. 188-190. Consonants added or substituted. 1 91. Metathesis. — 192 193. Final Consonants in Av. — 193 Note. MS. -Fluctuations in writing certain Consonants and certain Vow'els. — 194. Repetition of same sound avoided in Av RESUME OF PHONOLOGY. § 195. 195-201. Differences between Av. and Skt. Vowels. — 202-203. Av. and Skt. Diphthongs compared. -204-206. Origin of the Consonants in Av. — 207-218. Representa- tion of various Skt. Consonants in Av INFLECTION. DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. §219. Synopsis of the Declension c>f Nouns and Adjectives. — 220. Case, Number, Gender.— 22 1. Table of Case-Findings. - — 222-227. Remarks on the Endings. — 228-231. General Plural Case in Av. — 232. Interchange of Neuter with Feminine F'orms. — 233. Interchange of Case^ in their Functions. — 234. Transition in Declension. — 235. Stem- Gradation (Strong and Weak F'orms). — 236-250 Declen- sion of Stems in a, a. — 251-261. Stems in i, i. — 262-276. Stems in u, ti. — - 277-278. Diphthongal Stems Tago 27 -57 57—60 60—61 Table of Contents of Part I. xlv Section Page in ai,du. — 279-283. Stems without Suffix. — 284-288. Strung and Weak Stems. --289-298. Derivative Stems in ant, mart/, van/. — 299-315. Derivative Stems in an, man, van. — 316. Derivative Stems in in. — 317-318. Radical n- and ///-Stems. — 319-337- Stems in original r. — 338-360. Stems in original y. — 361-362. Feminine Formation. — 363-365. Comparison 62 — 105 DECLENSION OF NUMERALS. § 366. 366-374. Cardinals and Ordinals.-- 375 376. Numeral De- rivatives . . . 106--10S DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. § 377 - 377 - 3 S 4 . Genera! Remarks and Synopsis of the Pronouns. — 385-398. Personal. — 399-405. Relative. — 406-407. Inter- rogative. - — 408. Indefinite. — 409-433. Demonstrative. — 434-443. Other Pronominal Words and Derivatives, Pos- sessive, Reflexive, Adjectives, Adverbs . 109 — 126 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. §444. 444-447. General Synopsis, Voice, Mode, Tense, Person, Number. -448. Table of Personal Endings. — 449-458. Re- marks on the Endings.- 459-464. Mode-Formation, Subjunc- tive, Optative.- - 465-466. Reduplication and Augment.— 467. Vowel- Variation (Strong and Weak Forms). .... 127— -137 § 468. Present-System. —469-470. Classes of Verbs.- —47 1 .Trans- fer of Conjugation.- 472-477. The a -Conjugation (thema- tic). — 478. Cl. 1 (//-class, str. root). --479. Cl. 6 (//-class, unstr. root). --480. Cl. 4 (ya-class). — 481. Cl. 10 (aya- clas.s). — 482-506. Paradigms of //-Conjugation. — 507-5 15. The non-zr-Conjugation (imthematie). — 5 16-539. Cl. 2 (root-class). — 540-5 53. Cl. 3 (reduplicating class). • — 554-565. Cl. 7 (nasal class). — 566-575. Cl. 5 .////-class). — 576-582. Cl. 8 (//-class). — 583-591. Cl. g (////-class) (37—167 §592. Perfect-System. 592-596. Perfect Formation. — 597-601. Table of Perfect Endings and Rental ks. — 602. The Plu- perfect (Preterite).- -603-604. Mode-Formation of the Per- fect. 605-619. Paradigms of the Perfect-System. — 620-622. Absence of Reduplication. - 623. Periphrastic Perfect 167-176 § 624. Aorist-System. 624 625. Form and Classification of Aorists. — 626. Augment and Endings. — 627. Modes of the Aorist. — 628-652. Non-Sigtiiatic Group, ( t i Root- xlvi Section § 669 § <>75- § 708. ■5 722. § 725 - § 743- S 858- Table of Contents of Part I. Aorist, (2) Simple Aorist, (3} Reduplicated Aorist. — 05 3-066. Sigmatic Group, (4) h- for .r-) Aorist, '5) hu- (sa-) Aorist, (6) fif- Aorist, (7} his- Aorist. — 667-668. Aorist .Passive Third Singular Future-System. 6G9. Future Formation. -.070-671. Modes of tlie Future. — 67 2. Paradigms . . Secondary Conjugation. 675-683. Formation of the Passive. — 684-694. Causative. — 695-696. Denominative. — O97-69S. Inchoative. — 699-701. Desiderative. —702-707. Intensive . Verbal Abstract Forms. 709-715. Active, Middle, and Passive Participles. — 716-718. Gerundive and Gerund. 7 19-721. Infinitive Periphrastic Verbal Phrases. 722-723. Periphrases in- sic.id of a tense-stem.— 724. Periphrastic Expressions and Circumlocutions INDECLiNABLES. 725-733- Adverbs. — 734-737. Prepositions.— 73S-740. Con- junctions. — 741-742. Interjections ...... WORD-FORMATION. FORMATION OF DECLINABLE STEMS. Morphology in general. — 744-745. Suffixless Formation. — 746. Derivation by Prefix and Suffix. - 747-754. Nomi- nal and Verbal Prefixes. — 755. Derivation by Suffix. — 756 823. Primary Suffixes. 824-857. Secondary Suffixes FORMATION OF COMPOUND STEMS. Noun and Verb Compounds. — 859-860. Noun-Composition. — S61-877. Euphonic Laws in the Union of the Members of Compounds. — S78. Classes of Compounds.— 879. Copu- lative Compounds. — S80-882. Determinative Compounds. — 883-889. Secondary Adjective Compounds, Possessive Compounds and Adjective Compounds with governed Final Member. — - 890-894. t Hher Compounds, Numeral, Adverbial, Loose. — 895-900. Sandhi in Compounds and Enclitics INDEXES ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS ... .... Page 176 — 1S6 IS6— 187 187—195 105 — 199 I9Q— 200 201 — 206 207—236 236—247 249 271 272—273 Abbreviations. adj. = adjective advl. = adverbial etc. = et cetera et al. = el alia fr. = from indecl. = indeclinable infill. = infinitive nom. propr. = nomen proprium nuin. = numeral orig. = original, originally opp., opp. to = opposed to pret. = preterite ptcpl. — participle str. = strong subst. = substantive v. 1. = Daria lectio var. — variant wk. = weak. The other abbrevi Afr. = Afringan Av.' — A vesta GA v." — Gatba Avesta Ind. Iran. =- Indo-Iranian | Indg. -= Indogermanic | MS. — ~ manuscript MSS. = manuscripts ! Ny, = Nyaish Phi. — Pahlavi ! Sir. = Sirozali I Skt. = Sanskrit i Vd. — Vendidad Vsp. = Vispered Wg. — Westergaard YAv. 3 — Younger Avesta Ys. = Yasna Yt. — Yashi ZPhl. Gloss. ----- Zand-Palilavi Glossary, □ns require no remark. Observe. 1. A v. (Avesta) prefixed to a word indicates that the word or form in question is either found in both GAv. and YAv. or has nothing pe- culiar about it which would prevent its occurence in both. 2. GAv. (Gatlia Avesta) is prefixed (.l) when the word, or form, or construction is peculiar to the Gatlia dialect and is not found in YAv. ; (2) to contrast a Gallia form with a younger form (YAv.) which may stand beside it; (3) to emphasize the fact that the form in question is found even in the Gathas, e. g. siavas § 143. Under GAv. are comprised the usual 17 hymns and the sacred formulas (Introd. p. xxiii, § 25), the Yasna Haptanghaiti, and : hose por- Abbreviations. xlvili tions, such as Ys. 12, that are written in the Gatha dialect even including some possible later imitations, e. g. Ys. 58, 4.26. 3. Y A v. (Younger A vesta) comprises everything that is n o t written in the dialect of the Gathas. For its usage see preceding note. 4. The sign (») is placed before a form to denote that the first part of the word is omitted. 5 In the paradigms under Inflection, the forms in paren- theses () do not actually occur, but are made up after the form in small print which stands beside them. See § 236 foot-note. Thus Loc. (yasnaegu) vlraesu. .w\/\AAAA' Vr '-' GRAMMAR. PHONOLOGY. Alphabet. § i. The Avesta is written in the following characters A. Vowels. Short . . . . ■" a ■> t ) U ? 9 me 'Sa 0 Long . . . . a y z $ u 5 9 > 0 a) B. Consonants. Guttural . . 9 k bk C* g U Palatal . . v c — t \j — Dental . . t _3 d e / Labial . . . . W p */ _J b 01s Nasal . . . . 1 V \S V 1 n & n -6 vi Semivowels and Liquid . ■ • ("! )y \ r (») V Sibilant . . »S V S £0 $ ro § f z i. y t, and > u, * u are pronounced as ordinarily in Sanskrit, but a, a perhaps duller. — i .1 is most probably obscure like the short indefinite vowel familiar in English, ‘gardener’, ‘measuring’, ‘history’, ‘sachem’; it often corresponds to the vulgar ‘chinrney’, ‘rheuma- tis u m’. In the combination h ar 3 , cf. Skt. r, much like English ‘pretty’ (when pronounced ‘p e r e tty’) , e. g. p.ir 3 sa{ ‘he asked’, cf. Mofl. Persian pursuian ‘to ask’; Av. iwr 9 ja- ‘bird’, Skt. inrga-, Mod. Pers. murj. See above, Introduction, on Transcription. — ; d is the corresponding long vowel to t — to e and ^ e, both narrow, about as English ‘let, veil’, French ‘ete’. — ^ o and > o probably somewhat muffled. — y™ •»« au are pronounced as in Sanskrit. — di as a Gk. oh. — ^ ae, ao and 5| Hu. as a union of the two elements ai etc. — se as forming two distinct sounds. § 8. Tenues 9 k, 10 t, 0 p, and Mediae c* g,j$ d,j> b, as ordinarily. — v c, % j, as in Sanskrit , English ‘church, judge’. § 9. Spirants. )y J[, as ch in Scotch ‘loch’, Mod. Gk. j . — tj, a roughened g, guttural buzz, cf. (often) Germ. ‘Tage’, Mod. Gk. y. — 6 as English ‘thin’, surd. — ^ d , as English ‘then’, sonant. —£ f, apparently a spirant, § 81. — 4) f } as in English. — and k ip) respectively perhaps as in Eng. ‘longing’. — 1 n, as Eng. ‘nun’. — & ti (modified from an), a variety of n. — ^ in, as ordinarily. § r 1. Semivowels and Liquid. n>y (initial), probably spirant as Eng. ‘youth’; — » y (internal), probably semi- vowel, i, English ‘many a man’. — 9 v (initial), probably spirant as Eng. ‘vanish’; — » v (internal), probably semi- vowel, u, cf. Eng. ‘lower, flour’. — '1 r is a liquid vigorously pronounced. Observe l is wanting. Note. On » in uvaSbya, see Vocabulary alter > u. 4 Phonology. § 12. Aspiration, w h, as ordinarily. — ^ h, a modi- fication of h before y, possibly stronger. § 13. Ligature, hr, perhaps more vigorous than mr hv , and possibly already shading towards the later Pers. If. Sounds. SYSTEM OF VOWELS. § 14. General Remark. The Avesta presents a greater variety than the Sanskrit in its Vowel- system, especially through the frequent presence of e- and 0-sounds instead of a. Simple Vowels. A. Agreement in Quality between Avesta and Sanskrit Vowels. Av. ", > », — y, y. a, i, u, — a, i, u. i. Agreement in both Quality and Quantity. § 15. The Av. vowels a, a, i, i, u, u, agree in general with the corresponding vowels in Sanskrit. (1) Av. zz = Skt. a; — Av. jit- ‘victorious’, YAv. jij-; GAv. ratal ‘chief, Ratu’ (nom. sg.) beside ratus. Note. Similarly, GAv. -bis (pada-ending) compared with YAv. -bis or -bit, Skt. -ms; but GAv. cis etc. No rule for lengthening is laid down. Principal Rules for Quantity of Vowels. § 23. (1) In Avesta, original i and u are regularly lengthened before final in. Av. pa'tim ‘lord’ (acc.) = Skt. pdtim ; Av. dahlm ‘creation’ = Skt. dhdstm; — Av. tayiini ‘thief’ = Skt. t ay mu ; Av. pitum ‘food’ = Skt. pitrim. Note. Likewise i arising from reduction of ya, § 63 is lengthened; but the u, arising from reduction of va, appears mostly short before m: — Av. mat dim ‘middle’ (acc.) = Skt. madhyam ; but often Av. pri$um beside pritiim (from *pri$-va-m ) ‘third’. § 24. (2) Monosyllables ending in a vowel show- regularly the long vowel. Av. zi ‘for’ = Skt. hi: Av. ni ‘down’ = Skt. ni; Av. nu ‘now’ — Skt. nit, (mi); Av. fra ‘forth’ = Skt. prd. Note. The enclitic -ca , as united with the preceding word, does not regularly fall under this law. § 25. (3) Polysyllables in YAv. shorten as a rule all final vowels except 0. YAv. haena ‘army’ (nom. sg. fem.) — Skt. send; YAv. pita ‘father’ = Skt. pita ; Y Av. para ‘before’ — Skt. pdrd. — YAv. dfriti ‘blessing’ (instr. f.), cf. Skt. dhiti ‘with devotion’ ; YAv. nddri ‘woman’ - Skt. ndri. — YAv. sure ‘O mighty one’ (fem.) = Skt. sure; \ Av. 8 Phonology. baraHe ‘he carries’ = Skt. b karate. — YAv. dal[yu. ‘two nations’, cf. Skt. dasyu, YAv. dva sr’zu ‘two fingers’ = Skt. dva rju. Note. Exceptions occur: YAv. payu ‘two protectors’ = Skt. piiyU ; YAv. rna'nyu beside mahtyu ‘two spirits’, cf. Skt. manyu , YAv. asru ‘tears’; etc. § 26. (4) In GAv. ail final vowels are long with- out exception. (a) GAv. ahurd '() Ahura, Lord’ = YAv. akura , Skt. dsura: GAv. utd ‘also’ = YAv. uta. Skt. utd ; GAv. kuprd ‘whither = YAv. ktipra, Skt. kutra. — GAv. ahi ‘thou art — YAv. ahi , Skt. dsi. — GAv. yae$u ‘among whom' — Skt. yesu. — (b ) Even the anap- tvctic vowel (£ 72), with trifling exceptions, is leng- thened: GAv. CBnhar* ‘they have been — YAv. cBvhar* , cf. Skt. dsur; GAv. vadar 9 ‘weapon’ = YAv. radar*, Skt. vadhar- GAv. atitar 9 (but also atitar 3 } ‘within’ = YAv. atitar 3 , Skt. atitar. Note. Before -ca ‘que‘ in GAv. a vowel is sometimes found leng- thened, sometimes again shortened: — e. g. GAv. yeliyiica ‘and of which’; vacahico ‘and in word ’ ; — a lied ‘and Ashi’ (fern. /); vohuca tnanavhu beside vchii manavha ‘with the Good Mind’. — Similar fluctuations are to be ob- served in \ 7 Av. also. B. Differences irr Quality between Avesta and Sanskrit Vowels. Av. to, (y, ' i », — **•*, x*. 3 , J, e, e, o, 0, — at, q. § 27. The above vowels are found under special con- ditions as representatives of Skt. a and d. § 2S. Summary. The Av. t e answers oftenest to Skt. a before n or m, also occasionally before v. It is commonly the anaptyctic vowel. — The corresponding long is { 3 very frequent in GAv., more rare in YAv. — The Simple Vowels. 9 letter to e is commonly a shading from a after y . — The corresponding long is ^ e . — Avesta ^ o and "> b stand some- times for a under influence of a labial, u, v. — Av. co is either Skt. as, or it answers to Skt. a before n plus stop- sound. — Av. tc- is nasalization of a, a before in, n; it often answers to Skt. a with anusvara. Av. ! d. § 29. Av. 3 often corresponds to Skt. a before n or m — regularly so before the latter when final; occasionally also before v. Av. viridsn ‘they found’ = Skt. dvindan; Av. Jufitsm ‘being’ = Skt. sdntam; Av. upsmsm (beside upammi) ‘highest = Skt. up amain ; — GAv. evistl ‘by ignorance’, cf. Skt. dvitti : Av. ina'nysvim ‘spiritual’ beside Av. mahiyav 0 ; Av. ssvista- ‘most mighty, bene- ficent’ (beside savo) = Skt . savistha- ; Av. kvanhdvim ‘blessed life’ Ys. 53.1 (acc. from hvanhavya-'). Note. The MSS. sometimes vary between ? and a : e. g. Av. bararito beside barnito ‘carrying’ ; jasaytu beside jasdntu ‘let them come’ ; vazariti beside vazniii ‘they drive’; etc. § 30. The 3 (§ 29) arising from a before in or u, is often palatalized to i when either y, c , j or z , im- mediately precedes. Av. yim ‘whom’ = Skt. yam; Av. vacim ‘voice’ beside vac? in = Skt. vacant; Av. drujim beside dru- jsm ‘Deceit, Fiend’ = Skt. drtiharn; Av. bujim be- side biijsm ‘absolution’; Av. bajina ‘dishes’ = Skt. bhajana-; Av. drazimno ‘holding’ beside Av. dra- zdinno. § 31. In GAv., 3 appears sometimes to be written (as a kind of dissimilation) for u or i, when in the follow- ing syllable an u (v) or i stands. The epenthetic vowel is written beside it, according to rule § 70. Thus is to IO Phonology. he explained GAv. dr3gvai(t- 'wicked' (= *drugvant- to Av. druj-) ; GAv. bozvaiit- ‘advantageous’ (= * buzvant - to Skt. y bhuj-) ; GAv. u$? u rn- ‘zeal’ (?) see Ys 34.7. cf. usuruye Ys. 32.16; GAv. Jiup'ti- ‘well-being’; GAv. Sno'ti- Ys. 30.1 1 ; GAv. ask/ l ti- Ys. 44.17. Note. This interchange of ? with u and i may Lie added as a further suggestion in regard to tiie intermediate character of Av. t ?, before suggested. Av. { 3 . § 3 2. Av. 3 is the Corresponding long vowel to 3; it is especially common in GAv. — answering to YAv. 3, a and sometimes to YAv. b. q. GAv. as 3m ‘ 1 ’ — YAv. azom , Skt. ahdm : GAv. V3»i ‘whom’ (beside GAv. yini) = YAv. yim, Skt. yam; GAv. smavatitsni ‘strong = YAv. amavaqtjm . Skt. dmavaniam ; GAv. Jhntd ‘of us’ Ys. 43.10 beside YAv. ahmd, cf. Skt. asmdkam; — GAv. yJ ‘who’ — YAv. yd, Skt. yds ; GAv. 113 ‘us’ — YAv. no, Skt. nas. — Some- times, GAv. starom ‘of stars’ = YAv. strqm; GAv. iuin ‘with, together = YAv. hqtn, Skt. sain . — Also GAv. hvar 3 'sun’ — YAv. hvar 3 , Skt. svar; GAv. vadar 3 ‘weapon’ = YAv. vadar 3 , Skt. vadhar. Note. On GYAv. 3 in at) up spirit), and GAv. 3 i/g (final), )tlgh (in- ternal) from original ans, see § 5 ? 128, 129. § 33. In YAv., 3 (not common) is used apparently often without fixed rule, perhaps being borrowed from GAv.; it occurs most often for an, ah before b, also for a. YGAv. sponista - ‘holiest’; YGAv. aitup sppqts ‘Immortal Holy Ones’; YAv. yasatJ beside yazata ‘divinities’; YAv. dr a 01113 by 0 ‘from assaults ; YAv. avdbis ‘with helps’; YAv. raocobyb ‘to light’; YAv. haenSbyo (!) abl. ‘from enemies’ Yt. 10.93; — as contrac- tion Y Av . fr 3 r 3 naol (i. e. fra- 3 r 3 iiaof) ‘he offered’. Simple Vowels. I I Av. to e. § 34. Av. e generally answers to Skt. a, a , after y, if i, i, e, e or y follows in the next syllable. YAv. raocaye' l ti ‘lights up’ = Skt. rocayati ; GAv. l^ayeht ‘thou rulest’ = Skt. ksdyasi; — YAv. ayeni, GAv. ayeni. ‘I shall go’ = Skt. dyani ; — YAv. yesne, GAv. yesne ‘in worship’ — Skt. yajne; — YAv. yeighm ‘of whom’ (f.) =-Skt. ydsyds; GAv. yehya ‘of whom’ (m.) = Skt. ydsya. Note. Observe, however, that y does not always thus change a to e: e. g. mnzdayasni I ‘Mazda'yasnian’ ; yave ‘for ever’; yahmi, yahmi , yahmya 'in which’. Sometimes the MSS. vary. § 35. YAv. e answers to Skt. e only when final. See §§ 54 *, 25. YAv, avawhe ‘for help’ = Skt. dvase ; YAv. yaza‘te ‘he worships’ = Skt.. ydjaie. Note 1. On Av. t for ya in reductions, see § 67. Note 2. In the MSS. final e often interchanges with i. Av. e. § 36. Av. e, the corresponding long to e, stands: — (1) in the combination Av. ae — Skt. e ; (2) at the end of monosyllables § 24; (3) everywhere when final in GAv. § 26. (1) GYAv. daeva - ‘demon’. — (2) GYAv. me ‘me’, he ‘him’. — (3) GA yasa^e ‘he worships’ (opp. to YAv. yaza' l te)\ GAv. di'ma' l te ‘O Armaiti’ (opp. to YAv. sure ‘O mighty one’ fern.). Note. See Geldner, in K.Z. xxvii. p. 259. Av. 0. § 37. Av. o occurs chiefly in the combination Av. ao = Skt. 5, see § 57. § 38. Av. o rarely corresponds to Skt. a when fol- lowed by u. Labialization. 12 Phonology. Av. vohu ‘good = SkL. vdsu; Av. mosit ‘quickly’ — Skt. maksii ; Av. vohunqm ‘of good things’ = Skt. vdsunam. Av. > o. $ 30. Av. o often corresponds to Skt. a, d when followed by a labial vowel u, u, 0; rarely before r plus consonant. Av. ddmohu (beside ddmahva) ‘among creatures’ -- Skt. illidviasii ; GAv. gusodiun ‘may ye hear’, be- side GA v.giifahvd ‘hear thou' ; GAv. vjr ? zydiu ‘let him do’, beside Av. 7 > 9 r 3 zyaiitd. — Av. asto.viddtus ‘Bone- divider’, beside viddtaof=Skt. -dhdtus. — GAv. oaJ/$o- hvd ‘share thou’ — Skt. bhaksasva; Av. aojoahvatitam, beside aojaahvantzm ‘mighty’ — Skt. djasvantam ; Av. J[$apohva ‘in nights, at night' — Skt. *ksapasu; so locatives Av. yavohva ‘in granaries’ variant yavahva ; gar’mbhva ‘jaws’, kar } $vohu ‘regions , ravdhu ‘free- dom (a //-stems). — GAv. uz 3 mo hi “we may respect’, influence of labial m. — YA\f. pu>dr 3 stdra (dual) ‘de- ciders’, beside YA \ . Jnvar stake ; GAv. cor’t ‘he made’ = Skt. dkar (for akart) ; GAv. fror ? ti-, beside YAv. frJr 3 ti- “forth-coming’. Note. Observe GAv. vatoyotu ‘let him make known’ — Skt. vatdyatu; GAv. afytoyoi ‘for sickness' (for -ayoi), -the first 6 being due to the in- fluence of the following d. § 40. On Av. o = Skt. as. see § 120. § 41. On Av. 5 in compounds, see under Composition. § 42. Av. o (final) sometimes answers to Skt. ait. Av. garo “on a mountain’ — Skt. girau; Av. Jva yaska arista ‘the two worst sicknesses’. Av. t" iV. Av. on = Skt. as. § 43. (1) On Av. (d answering to Skt. as, see § 1 21 scq. Simple Vowels. 1 3 Av. w — Skt. a. § 44. (2) Av. m also corresponds to Skt. a before nt. Av. mazmiitam ‘great’ = Skt. mahdntam; Av. pcoiito ‘guarding’, pres, ptcpl. nom. pi. = Skt. pdntas. Note. Similarly, Av. viro.nyinticim ‘striking men down’ = Skt. ny'ancam. Av. x* q. § 45. (1) Av. q presents a nasalization of a, a before Av. m or n. Av. hqm ‘with, together’ = Skt. saw; Av. mqm ‘me’ = Skt. mam-, — Av. ayqn ‘they may go’ = Skt. ay an ; Av. daevqn ‘demons’ = Skt. dev an ; Av. u rvqno ‘souls’ beside Av. « rvanam (acc. sg.). Note 1. In the MSS., a often stands as variant beside q: e. g. Av. da mi, dd mi ‘creature’, et al. Note 2. Defective writing;. — instances often occur in endings where the final nasal after q is omitted ; — e. g. imq kaomq ‘these haoma- offerings’ = Skt. iman soman; Av. yq ‘quos’ = Skt. van. Note 3. Pleonastic writing; — a pleonastic n is sometimes intro- duced after q before m: e. g. dqnmaki ‘we shall give’ Ys. 68.1 (variant) cf. Skt. dama ; Av. hvqnmahi variant hvqmahl ‘we put foward’ ; Av. fryqnmahl variant fryqmahi ‘we bless’. § 46. (2) Av. q is often a union of a (a) with nasal be- fore Av. sibilants (cf. Skt. anusvara); also before Av. spirants. A \.apqs ‘backward’ — Skt. dp a a ; Av. Jiqs ‘being’ (haqt-) = Skt. sdn : GAv. inqstct ‘he thought’ — Skt. dmqsta ; Av. qsayea ‘of two parties — Skt. qsayos ; Av. qzd ‘distress’ = Skt. ahas ; Av. bqza'ti ‘he sup- ports’ = Skt. bqhate. — Av. rnqpram ‘word, spell’ — Skt. mantram ; Av. °dqp?\w> ‘tooth’; Av. ql/iiai ‘reins’. Original r (r-sonant). Av. , (or?) = Skt. r. § 47. The Skt. r is represented in Av. by ar* or often ar ? . 14 Phonology. Av. ker ? nao'ti ‘he makes’ =Skt. krndii ; Av. msr 3 - pyns ‘death’ = Skt. tnrtyus; Av. hakar 3 ^ ‘at once = Skt. sakrt . — Av. anar 3 tais ‘with the untrue’ — Skt. anrtais ; Av. v ar 3 $ 9 in ‘wood’ = Skt. vrkfdtn; Av. arstis ‘spear’ = Skt. rstis. Note, 'the MSS. vary, often writing ar* for dr } . The new edition of the A vesta has restored many instances of tr* : e. g. frasttrUa - (where Westergaard frasturUa-). § 48. Av. ar, ar (also ar 3 , ar 3 , a‘r, a“r ) often = (orig. r) Skt. ir, ur ; — sometimes = (orig. f) Skt. ir, ur. See Brug- raann, Grundriss der vergl. Gram. 1. § 288 seq., 306 seq. Av. zaranyehe ‘of golden’ = Skt. hiranyasya ; Av. gain's ‘mountain’ = Skt. girts ; Av. csvhar 3 , (GAv. dtahar 3 ) ‘they have been = Skt. dsur ; Av. ta“rva- ye‘ti ‘he overcomes’ = Skt. ]/ turv-, turv- ; Av. dar'- yjut ‘long’ — Skt. dirghdm. — So sometimes Av. ar 3 , ra — Skt. ra, r : — Av. ar 3 zatam ‘silver’ = Skt. rajatam ; Av. ratu- ‘chief, point of time’, cf. Skt. riu-. § 49. Av. »rq may represent original /■-(-«. GAv. n>rq} (acc. pi.) ‘men’, cf. ttfs cyan l no RigVeda 10.50.4; GAv. matorqUcd (acc. pi.) ‘mothers’, cf. Skt. matrn RV. 10.35.2. Concurrence of vowels. Contraction and Resolution. § 50. General Remark. In Avesta, the rule for the union of two vowels within a word or in composition, cor- responds in general to the Sanskrit. (1) Two similar vowels coalesce into their corresponding long (sometimes short). (2) Two dissimilar vowels, when the first is a unite in giving guna § 60. (3) Before dissimilar vowels, the i- or w-vowel (simple or in diphthongs), passes over into the corresponding semi vowel. (4) In Avesta compounds, however, hiatus is often allowed to remain. Concurrence of Vowels.— Diphthongs. '5 § 51. The following are instances of contraction of similar vowels. Av. a, a -j- a, a — a : Av. parazsnti ‘they drive away’ = para -j- az° ; i, i i, 1 — i: Av. Hire ‘I let go down’ = tti -)- ire ; u, ft -j- u, it— it: Av. h/iliiai? ‘by good words’ (hu -j- = Skt. srtktais. a -\- q — q: A v. nqmyqsu I ‘with pliant branches’ = nqmya qsu.i § 46. Note 1. Instead of the long vowel in contractions, the short vowel is often written: e. g. Av. frapayemi *1 shall attain to’ (—fra-\- ap°); Av. pa‘titsm ‘atoned’ (— pa'ti -j- i°) ; Av. anutytee ‘speak after’ (— anu T Note 2. Hiatus sometimes remains in compounds : Av. ava~afitao‘ti ‘he attains’; GAv. cipro-avavkim Ys. 34.4, beside YAv. cipravavhqm Ny. 3.10 ‘manifestly aiding’ ; Av. j/fviwi-iful ‘having darting arrows’. Note 3. Metrically, contractions of like vowels are often to be re- solved in reading. See Geldner, Metrik, p. 13 seq. § 52. Av. i- and u- vowels, simple or in diphthongs, before dissimilar vowels, pass over into y or v. (a) Av. vyauo ‘pursued’ {\ r vi-) — Skt. vyattds ; Av. ! /iayehi ‘thou rulest’ Av. vidoyum ‘anti-demoniac’ ( daeva- ; on oi — ae § 56) ; uityaojano ‘thus speaking’ beside u'ti aojanJ; pa'tyapim ‘up stream’ (pahi -\- ap°) ; nmanaya (loc. °ae -j- a postpos.) ‘in a house’ beside nmane.— (b) tanvd ‘of body’ (tanu-as); havana ‘liaoma-mortars’ C\f hu) ; huaspitn ‘well-horsed’ (htt aspim) ; anajraepva ‘among the infinite’ (loc. -yu -j- a). — (c) With lengthening after the semi- vowel : Av. a'wyamanqm ‘of the over-mighty’ ( a‘wi -j- am°) ; a‘wya- vaxtha ‘with protection' ( avauh -) ; apy/tl^da ‘interrupted in speaking mispronounced’ (u/ida-J. Note 1. In compounds the hiatus often remains: e. g. Av. tiii-arStim ‘sharp-speared’ ; Av. aiu-aspsut ‘swift horsed’ — Skt. asvasvum. Note 2. Metrically, the resulting semi-vowel y, v is often to be re- stored as vowel or read iy, uv. Diphthongs. §53. General Remark. The Avesta vowel-combinations (diphthongs with triphthongs) are of four-fold origin, and may conveniently be divided and designated as follows: i. Proper diphthongs, corresponding to Sanskrit guna (more rarely vrddki) in its two-fold sense: (i) voweh i6 Phonology. strengthening, (2) the result of contraction of two dissimilar vowels. See § 60 seq. ii. Reduction-diphthongs, resulting from r e du c t i o n by contraction of two syllables. See § 64 seq. Metrically often dissyllabic. iii. Improper diphthongs (and triphthongs) arising from epenthesis. See § 70 seq. iv. P r o t rac t i o n- diphthong da, a peculiar extension of a or a into da in ablative singular before -ca ‘que’; likewise in aat ‘then’ (abl. as adv.), GAv. bdat ‘verily’ Ys. 35.5 . Cf. Av. daevaatca ‘and from the Demon’ (daeva-)\ apaapca beside apaf ‘from water’, etc. Proper Diphthongs. Av. (o-", *>> — >5 — ■>•**', )-*" ae, 3 i — no, au — di, du. § 54. The above are real diphthongs when they cor- respond to the Skt. diphthongs. The relation between the Av. and the Skt. diphthongs is concisely this: a. Skt. e is represented in Av. (1) chiefly* by ae, (2) less often by r di, (3) again by e, only when final, but there regularly, p. Skt. d is represented in Av. (1) chiefiy by ao, (2) more rarely by an, (3) again by o, only when final, but there regularly, y. Skt. di and du are represented in Av. by di and du. Note. In some instances Skt. au (final) seems to he represented in Av. by 11, § 42. Av. ae = Skt. e. § 55. The diphthong Av. ae (very common') answers to Skt. e (old at), initial or internal ; likewise as ending in first member of a compound, or again before enclitic -ca ‘que’ Sounds. 17 Av. aetaf ‘this’ = Skt. etdt; GAv. vaedd , YAv. vaeda ‘knows’ = Skt. veda. — Av. fraegyedi ‘he drives forth’ (fra + is-) = Skt. presyati. — Av. duraedars ‘far-seeing’ (loc. du‘re)— Skt. dure.drs-; Av. rapaesta- rsm ‘warrior in chariot’ = Skt. rathestham (loc. rathe). Note 1. Observe that in gen. agaheca 'and of righteousness', the e is reduction-vowel (= ya ), therefore of course no ae appears. Note 2. On reduction-diphthong ae, see § 64. Av. oi — Skt. e. § 56. Av. 5 i , as real diphthong, also answers to Skt. e (old at). It interchanges often with Av. ae, being of like etymological value; but i to « y (ii) and > u to » v (uu) often producing awkward accumulations of signs which are avoided. (a) Vocalization of y and v. § 62. In the combinations original internal vy, vn, vr,yv, the first element is generally vocalized to u, i. When a immediately precedes this u, the two are con- tracted according to § 60 into ao. For ao an au is fre- quently found in GAv. (1) Orig. vy — Av. uy ; — -yv — Av. iv. Av. vanhuya) ‘of the good’ (fern.) = Skt. vasvyas; GAv. po u ruyo ‘first’ = Skt. piirvyas ; Av. mar(uyw ‘of the belly’ (stem maipvt-) ; Av. snduya- ‘made of sinew’, cf. Skt. sndvan-. — Av. mainivai ‘of the two Spirits’ (for mabiyvd) § 68, b). (2) Orig. avy — Av. aoi ; — avn = Av. aon (dun )-, — avr = Av. aor . Av. haoyqm ‘the left’ = Skt. s avy dm ; Av. gaoyao 1 - tis ‘cow-pastures' = Skt. gavyutts. — Av. vaonar ? ‘they have won’, cf. Skt. vavne; Av. rapndm ‘of valleys’ (r avan-) ; Av. a)aono ‘of the righteous’ (a)avan-), cf. Skt. maghonas. — GAv. z > annus ‘having striven’, ptcpl. pf. an-; GAv. asaune ‘to the righteous’ = Skt. rtdvne (cf. Note 1); Av. apa u run- wk. stem of dpravan- ‘priest’ = Skt. dtharvan-. — Av. fraob'isaHi ‘he comes forward’ (for orig. fra-vris-aHi ), cf. frao u rvacsayeni ; Av. fraor>iita ‘they confessed’, cf Skt. avriiita ; Av. fraor’t (i. e. *pravrt ) ‘prone, ready’. Phonology. Note i. Often in YAv., afaun- is found in die formulaic connection i zi'UtnqM fravaiayo. The original difference is to be explained thus: nu — orig. av, and au - orig. av , cf. Av. a$&van — Skt. yidvan-. Note 2. In V A\ pao'ryo is written for GAv. po H ruyd ‘first’ above. Note 3. A like vocalization of Av. v Av. w long. hh) t; 87 may take place — e. g. Av. Vniy natty n (for °navyS, °wyo, ■>byo'' from plagues; Av adaoyd 'for adatvyv\ ‘undeceived’ — Skt. &, iabhyas; Av. nuruyi asavaovb (for e vyb, °vuyb : * bvo) to righteous men’ Yt. 10.55 Av rasmacyo (for °vyd, t-inyo, ’-bvoj ‘to the ranks'. Perhaps Av. aoi, beside av) (for Av. a>wf) —■ Skt. abhi. (b) Reduction and Abbreviation. a. Reductions. § 63. The syllables ya and va before m or it, espe- cially when final, are generally reduced to 1 ( 1 ), or u. (u ) respectively —a kind of samprasarana. Old ya — Av. i (i) ; va = Av. u (u ) — before m, n. Av. saranitn ‘golden’ (acc.)--Skt. hiran-ya-m ; Av. u/fsin ‘they increased (for *ufy> for (1) In composition: — A x. pa' tyautu ‘let them come to’ = Skt. prdtiyantu ; Av. pryaf/stis ‘three twigs’ (for pri-yalistis) cf. pa tica-yafistis. — (2) Internal: — Av. fryo ‘friend (graphically friio for friiio) — Skt. priyas; Av. yasityo ‘worshipful’ = Skt. yajhiyas. — (3) Initial: — Av. yeyqn (written iieiiqu for orig. *iydydii) ; GAv. yadaca ‘and here’ Ys. 35.2 (written iiada for Av. Uiadd ) (b) Av. » for »>. (1) In composition: — Av. hvacauham ‘having good words’ = Skt. suv ac a sain ; Av. hviddtce ‘well-built (houses) Yt. 17.8 (i. e. hu-viddta- cf. Ys. 57.21); Av. vohvar*z - ‘doing good' (i. e. vohu T~ v c ). — (2) Internal: — Av. yvdn?m ‘juvenem’ = Skt . yiivanam; Av. drvahe ‘firm’ (gen.) — Skt. dhruvdsya : — Av. hva- ‘suus’ (metri- cally huva-) cf. Skt. sva-. See Geldner, Metrik, p. 20 seq. Note 1 . Similarly when v (>t) stands for w (-- bh) § 87 . Av. -"^3 uuaetbya for uuuaeibya for tewaiibya cf. GAv. ubaibya ‘with both’ = Skt. ubhdbhyiim. Note 2. Instances of Av. v (») equal Skt. Tv, iv may be found: \v. jvariti ‘they li\e’ — Skt .jiventi; Av. evat ‘quantum’ — Skt. ktvat , Av. vTdidva Epenthesis, Prothesis, and Anaptyxis. 25 ‘looking around’ (j/V?) = Skt. didivan; perhaps Av. jajnva) ‘having smitten’ cf. Skt. jaghnivdti. Note 3. Internal ay, av are sometimes found written as an exten- sion of y, v (i. e. iy, uv)\ Av. navaya- ‘navigable, flowing’ = Skt. navy a; Av. aspaya- (cf. acc. aspaem § 64) ‘belonging to a horse’ = Skt. asvya- ; Av. hava- (cf. gen. f. hroyw) ‘suus’ — Skt. svd- ; Av. kava variant for kva ‘where’ = Skt. kva. iii. Epenthesis, Prothesis, and Anaptyxis. Cf. Brugmann, Grundriss der vergl. Grammatik § 637 seq., § 623 seq. § 69. Two of these viz. Epenthesis, Prothesis (and certain cases of Anaptyxis like s u runvata .) — may be considered fundamentally the same, as each consists in the introduction of an anticipatory parasitic sound. For convenience , however, in the following, Epenthesis and Prothesis will be distinguished thus: (t) Epenthesis — an anticipatory vowel attached inter- nally to a vowel; (2) Prothesis — an anticipatory vowel attached initially before a consonant. § 70. Epenthesis is one of the characteristic sound- phenomena of the Avesta. It consists in the insertion of a light anticipatory i or u, when in the following syl- lable respectively an i, i, e,e,y, or an u, v stands. — Epen- thesis of i takes place before r, n, rtf, t, p, pr, d, p, b, w, also before i$h (— orig. sy). — Epenthesis of u takes place only before r. Note. The epenthetic vowel attaches itself parasiticallv to diphthongs as well as to the simple vowels including (/-privative. In the MSS., the law of epenthesis is not always consistently carried out; many times it is omitted: e. g. manySus beside mahiyius ‘of the Spirit’. Epenthetic i. Av. bavaiti ‘he becomes’ = Skt. bhdvati ; Av. ae*ti (GAv. debt) ‘he goes’ = Skt. eti ; Av. biaoiti ‘he forces, drives’ = Skt. inoti; Av. at- pi ‘unto, in’ = Skt. dpi; Av. barahiti ‘they carry’ = Skt. bharanti ; Av. ainikam ‘face’ = Skt. dnikam ; Av. bifiri ‘fullness’ = Skt. bhuri ; Av. ah'istzm ‘unhurt’ = Skt. dristam. — GAv. rd'ti ‘with offering — Skt. rati . GAv. a‘bi (YAv a ‘zui) ‘unto, to' -Skt. abhi : YAv. nut ' 1 dim 'middle' (acc. sg.) -Skt. mddhyam ; — Aw ba'ryehite ‘they are brought' -- Skt. bhriyante: Av. nivo’-ryede ‘is confined’ ( \ vary ; Av. ni u ru‘dyat “should flow ( (/ rud -). — Av. a‘ryu “Aryan - - Skt. aryds; Av. na’ryqvi ‘manly’ (acc. fern.) Skt. nary din; Av. mahiyus ‘Spirit’ — Skt. many its . — With vanishing of the y which caused the epenthesis. ahjltat gen. sg. fern, of acm “this’ — Skt asyas. Epenthetic u. Av. a u rvaqtd ‘swift steeds’ = Skt. drvantas; Av. a u runa- ‘wild, fiery', cf. Skt. arund ■ Av. a u rn$d ‘bright, white — Skt. arusds: A w pa"rvata ‘two mountains’ — Skt. parvatau ; Av. ta“rnnam “young’ — Skt. tdrunam ; Av. ha u rvqm ‘whole’ = Skt. sdrvdm ; Av. po lt ru- (also /y w u ru-) ‘many , for paru-. \ote i. Epenthetic i is even attached to the an.iptyclic vowel (§ 72): Av. courage Vsp. 7.3; GAv. m?r*tii?’dyai ‘to destroy Vs. 46.1 t ; fraor’Uim ‘confession’ Ys. 13.8. Note 2. Epenthetic it is found also before v for w (§ 87) : gi a rva- ye‘ le ‘he seizes’ {\ garw- Skt. \fgr06h-') §71. Prothesis. As intermediate between Epenthesis and Anaptyxis, we may distinguish Prothesis, which con- sists in the similar introduction of an anticipatory 1 or u initially before a consonant. It takes place regularly before r followed by i or u (v). An instance is found also before p. Av. ‘rinafyti ‘he lets go, drives’ = Skt. rindkti ; Av. h'ifydfi ‘is hurt = Skt. risyati GAv. U rupaye‘t(ti ‘they cause pain’ — Skt. ropdyanti : Av. U rune ‘for the soul’, 11 r van- ‘soul (i. e. for ruvan § 68=Mod. Pers. ruvan). — Before / Av dpyejd ‘destruction = Ski. tyajas. § 72. Anaptyxis. An irrational vowel (Anaptyxis), which does not count in the metre, is often developed System of Consonants. 2 7 in Avesta between two consonants, especially if one be r, and regularly after final r. The anaptyctic vowel is generally o ( 3 ), more rarely a, i or o'. In GAv., anaptyxis is still more common than in YAv. Av. valfdra- ‘word’ — Skt, vaktrd Av. nap drat. ‘offspring’ (abl. from nap tar -) ; Av. z 9 mo ‘of earth’; GAv. i lad 9 main ‘we give’ = Skt. dadmdsi; Av. ga- r 9 mo ‘hot’ = Skt. gharmds ; GAv. pra ‘forth’, YAv. fra § 24 — Skt. pra ; GAv. aefnid ‘Fury’ -YAv. aefnd; GAv. racpnaioho ‘of share’ = Skt. reknasas . — GAv. d 9 bdvayat ‘he deceived’. — YAv. aipar 9 ‘within’, GAv. aiitar 9 — Skt. ant dr ; YAv. hvar 9 ‘sun, GAv. hvar 9 = Skt. svdr . — GAv. gyaopana- ‘deed', YAv. gyaopna- — Skt. cyautna-; GAv. markka- ‘death’, YAv. mahrka- =■ Skt. niarkd-. — -GAv. yez’vt ‘young’ = Skt. yahvi; YAv. 7 lidrinao'ti ‘he delivers over’. — YAv. mdv«ya 'to rue’ — GAv. mad yd ; YAv. havoya- ‘left’ — Skt. savyd-; GAv. duzaz°bco ‘maledictus’. — YAv. s u run- vata (instr.) ‘worthy of being heard’. Note. Anaptyxis occurs sometimes between the members of a com- pound: e. g. GAv. dus 3 .tfsaprn- ‘evil-ruling’ ; GAv. }am 3 .frasta ‘he questioned with’; YAv. us>.hi?ta( : ‘he stood up’.— More rarely in the few instances of sandhi; YAv. halpapycos * lanvS ‘of bis own body’; YA x.yas* te ‘who to thee’. SYSTEM OF CONSONANTS. § 73. General Remark. Viewing the Av. and the Skt. system of consonants side by side, it may be noted: (1) The Av. palatal series is incomplete- — the Av. possesses only c and j . (2) The Skt. cerebral series is entirely wanting in the Avesta. (3) The Av. has no aspirates, their place being in part taken by the corresponding spirants. (4) The nasals are only in part identical. (5) The 28 Phonology. Av. is richer than the Skt. in sibilants, especially through the presence of the sonant sibilants z and z. § 74. Surd and Sonant (Voiceless and Voiced). For tiie distinction between surd and sonant (voiceless and voiced), we may refer to the Sanskrit. The law, moreover, that in internal combination, surd (voiceless) consonants stand before surd consonants, and sonant (voiced) before sonants, has in general the same extent as in Sanskrit. 1 Observe that n and in part m are at times treated as surd. 2 § 75. Sandhi between words (§ 4) is wanting in Avesta, except in case of some enclitics and compounds. Tenues — Surd Spirants. Av. 9, r°, a) and p — q) g. k, t, p and c — 1 /, p, f — /. Av. k, t, p and c. § 76. The Av tenues k, i, p and c agree mostly with the corresponding tenues in the Sanskrit. Av. katdro ‘which of two’ = Skt. katards; Av. tdpaye‘ti ‘makes hot’ = Skt. tapdyati ; Av. patniti 'they fly' — Skt. pdtanti. — Av. cara' ! ti ‘he moves’ = Skt. carat i; Av. cakana 'lias been pleased’ = Skt. cdkana. Note. In the distinction between guttural and palatal k/c, the Av. and the Skt. do not always agree: Av. pitsk&L ‘from behind, behind’ = Skt. paicut, cf. Av. pasca; Av. cicipwd ‘through the wise one’ — Skt. cikitva; Av. fraj!o.car*t(ir- converter’ — Skt. “kartar-, cf. Av. fraIo.k>r*li- ; Av. vaokuie dat. sg. pf. ptcpl. \ r vak/e — Skt. ucuse. Av. J[, p, f. § 77. The surd spirants Ip p, f in Av. are of two- fold origin: — (1) they are the representatives 1 Cf. Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar, § 156 seq. ; Stenzler, Elementar- !>uch der Sanskritsprache, § 44 seq. 2 See Sievcrs, Grundziige der Phonclik, pp. 114, 133. Tenues— Surd Spirants. 29 of the old surd aspirates kh, th, ph ; or (2) they have arisen from the tenues k, t, p regularly changed before most consonants in Av. to corresponding lp p ; f. Observe that /has in general the treatment of a spirant § 8 l. (1) Av. Ip p, f — Skt. kh, th, ph. Av. J[a> ‘fountains’ = Skt. khds; Av. fyarain ‘ass = Skt. kharam ; Av. hapa ‘friend’ = Skt. sdkha. — Av. hnptapjm ‘seventh’ — Skt. saptdthani ; Av. gaped ‘hymns’ — Skt. gathds; Av. ar?pa- ‘part, portion' — Skt. drtha-. — Av. safciwhd ‘hoofs’ = Skt. saphasas ; Av. kafavi ‘foam, slime’ — Skt. kapham. (2) Av. Ip p, f — Skt. k, t, p. Av. Ipratus ‘wisdom’ = Skt. krdtus ; Av. *rina%ti ‘he lets go, drives’ = Skt. rindkti; Av. taoJpna ‘seed’ = Skt. tokma; Av. J^aprain ‘rule, kingdom’ — Skt, ksatrdm. — Y Av. pyaopnais, GAv. §yciop a ndis ‘by deeds’ = Skt. cydutndis; Av. haipyd ‘true’ = Skt. satyds. — Av. draft'd 1 spear, banner’ — Skt. drapsds; Av. lrafntrn ‘sleep’ = Skt. svdpnam ; Y Ax. fra, GAv. f } ra ‘forth, before' = Skt. pra: Av. fraolfo ‘pronounced’ — Skt. prdktds. Note l. In Av., we sometimes find t[ prefixed to /, initial or inter- nal, apparently without etymological value: e. g. a-lgnus ‘up to knee’, cf. Skt. abhi-jfni. See Barlholomae, A.F. in. 19 seq., and § 188 below. Note 2. In Av., / sometimes takes the place of s (Skt. s): e. g. Av. pamnouhvant- ‘healing’ from \fpam- - Skt. "J \f s am- ‘to heal’, cf. also Av. sama- ; Av. a’vjipyd ‘over-sleeping’ (non), pi.) with ] fsT- = Skt. V it- ‘lie, sleep’ ; Av. a^wipuro ‘very mighty’, beside Av. surd ‘mighty’ — Skt. suras ; Av. anapafytqm (fem.) ‘whose time of delivery is not come’, beside frasafytakc (masc.) ‘whose time is come, dead’ 1 [sac-. Note 3. Original th (Iranian/) becomes d after and f : e. g. GYAv. utyda- ‘spoken, word’ = Skt. uktha- ; Av. prqf»da~ ‘satisfied’ — Tndo-Irati. *tramplha- ; Av. ana‘wi.drup 1 o ‘not to be deceived’ Yt. 10.5. See Bartho- lomae, K.Z. xxix. 483, 502 = Flcxionslekre pp. 63, 82. Nole 4. On Av. f apparently for earlier pv, see § 95. 30 Phonolog) . § 78. (a) Kxcepti on. The change of k.t,p, to 1/. P, f> before consonants § 77, docs n o t take place when a sibilant or a written nasal (not q) immedia- tely precedes; nor under these circumstances, are !/, p, f, as answering to older aspirate § 77, allowed. In all such cases, simple k, t, p are employed. Av. ustrain ‘camel’ (-str-) as opposed to kupra ‘where Opr-) — Ski. us train , kutra ; Av. 1 /rafstrdis ‘with noxious creatures’; Av. pistram ‘bruising, wound ; Av. zatitvd ‘in this ( ahmi ) tribe’ (- ntv - § 94) as opposed to haozqpiva (-qpiv-). — Av. staoram ‘bullock — Skt. sthuram (-th-) ; Av. spar a/ ‘he darted Skt. dsphurat, § 48; Av. skarayaqt- ‘springing, turning’ (in nom.propr.) cf. Skt. skhalayati ; perhaps Av. skar‘na - ‘turning, active’ == Skt. skhaiaua -. — Av. pant an am ‘path (be- side Av. papo acc. pi.) — Skt. pdnthanam, pathds. § 79 - (b) Exception. (1) Similarly pt remains un- changed; but (2) not original ptr w r hich becomes (with assimilation) p dr as original ktr becomes 1 /dr, in both GAv. and YAv. (i)A v.hapta ‘e-tz.’ — Skt. sapid; Av. sitpti- ‘shoulder’ = Skt. sitpti -. — But (2) Av. nap dr 0 apqm ‘of offspring of waters’, cf. Skt. ndptre ; Av. rap dram ‘aid cf. Av. rap-aqtam . rap-ako; Av. apdJ/dre in north’, beside apdl/iara- : Av. 'yaot/dra- ‘girdle = Skt. yoktra-. Note. Some further exceptions occur: Av. da'iya- ‘lawful’, / ritya - ‘third’, bitya- ‘second’, see § 92 Note 1. Observe especially Otr?m lire’, and trofyu [ 'may >teal’ for tar’fyj/, tir'fyS/ see variants - al ’ abbreviated writing. § 80. On piv for original tv, see § 94. Av. £ t. § 81. There can be little doubt that Av. / has in general a spirant value. It seems to occupy a position Mediae— Sonant Spirants. 31 intermediate between t. d and /. d. It is both surd and sonant (voiceless and voiced) ; to find a distinction palaeo- graphically when it appears as surd or as sonant is not warranted by the MSS. It occurs chiefly as final for t, except when ^ or s precede; in that case t appears § 192. As initial, surd and sonant, it is found in a few words, [kaepivi ‘faith, faithful’, tbae$d ' hatred, harm’ = Skt. dvesas. cf. § 96. As internal it occurs in a few words, com- pound o'r in the MSS. treated as compound, and therefore handled as if it were final. Av. asdt ‘from Right’ = Skt. rtat ; Av. bavaf ‘he became’ = Skt. dbhavat ;■ Av. yavaf ‘how much’ — Skt. ydvat; Av. baker ■'/ ‘once’ = Skt. sakft. — GAv. haecat.aspa- nom. propr. ; YAv. a u rvat.aspa- ‘swift- horsed’; Av. brvapbyam ‘both brows’; Av. °tafku§is ‘running’ (MSS. °tal ka$is) ; Av. afca ‘atque’. — GYAv. tkae$diu ‘faith, faithful’; YAv. tbaipb ‘hatred, harm’, cf. GAv. d.vae$avha — Skt. dvesas. Note 1. Sometimes, l appears as variant of J before h: e. g. adk)m ‘robe’ (variant ajkam) Skt. dtkam. Note 2. In taj:.apdm ‘with running water’ (adj.), Yt. 13.43, t stands for final c, cf. Av. tad a‘pya ‘in running water’ (ioc.), Vd. 6.26. Mediae — Sonant Spirants. Av. c*, _j, _j and % — t,, t,, g, d, b and j — j, d , iv. § 82. The mediae g. d, b } in Av. have a two -fold value: — (1) they represent old mediae, agreeing with the Skt. g, d, b; or (2) they are the representatives of the old s o n a n t a s p i r a t e.s , gh , dh , bh ; that is to say, originally in Av. the sonant aspirates lost their aspiration and fell together with the mediae. In GAv., the mediae 32 Phonology. thus arising are regularly preserved unchanged throughout. But see § 82 (a). The following scheme shows the standpoint of the Gat has in comparison with the Sanskrit. Skt g gh d dh b bh V V v Original- and GAv. g d b (1) GAv. (old) g, d, b = Skt. g, d, b. GAv. ugrSrig ‘mighty’ (acc. pi.) = Skt. ugrdn ; — GAy. yada ‘when’ = Skt. yadd; GAv. vidvco ‘know- ing’ = Skt. vidvdn. (2) GAv. g, d. b = Skt. gh, dh, bh. GAv. dar } gJm ‘long’ = Skt. dirgham; — GAv. odd ‘then’ — Skt. ddha : GAv. advdnam ‘way’ = Skt. adliva- rtam ; — GAv. uboibya ‘both’, cf. Skt. ubhabhydm ; GAv. n'bi ‘unto’ = Skt. abht. § 82 a. Observe in connection with this rule § 82 that the sonant spirants appear before z: cf. § 180. GAv. aojza ‘thou spakest’ ; dizvza'dydi . — ■ See § 89 Bartholomae’s Law. Note. On the sonant spirants — in GAv. raf*dru - aid'; uh in - ‘spoken, word’ — arising from old tenues or aspirate tenues, cf § 77 Note 3. § 83. (1) In YAv. these mediae g, d, b —of double origin § 82 — are preserved unchanged when initial; or again when internal, if immediately preceded by a nasal consonant or by a sibilant. (2) Under all other cir- cumstances in YAv. these mediae — whether represent- ing old mediae or old sonant aspirates — are regularly changed to the corresponding sonant spirant (j, d, zo). Exceptions to the rule are not many. The secondary re- lation of GAv. to YAv. may thus be tabulated (cf. § 82): GAv. g d b AAA YAv. g J d d ' b w Mediae and Sonant Spirants. 35 (1) YAv. g, d, b (GAv. g, d, b) = Skt. g, d, b. YAv. gqm ‘cow’ (GAv. gqyri) = Skt. gam-, YAv. griva- ‘neck’ = Skt. griva-; YAv. atigustae l bya 'toes of both feet’, cf. Skt. avgustJv&bhydm. — YAv. diirdf ‘from afar (GAv. diirdf) = Skt. diirdt ; YAv. vitidaHi ‘may find, receive —Skt. vindati; YAv. hazdya / ‘might sit’ opt. pf. = Skt. sasadydt, sedyat. — YAv. bar p ziste ‘on the highest' (cf. GAv. har>zistJiu) = Skt. bdrhisthe. (2) YAv. g, d, b (GAv. g, d, b) — Skt. gh, dh, bh. YAv. gaos.zm ‘ear (cf. GA\\ gjit$dis) = S\i\.. ghosain ; YAv. zarigdni ‘foot’ = Skt. jdughdm. — YAv. darayaf. ‘he held fast’ (GAv. ddrayat) = Skt. dhdrdyat ; YAv. drvahe ‘firm’ (gen.) — Skt. dhruvdsya YAv. bandaru ‘bond, sickness’ = Skt. baud ham; YAv. dasdi ‘give thou’ = Skt. daddhi. — YAv. bniniru ‘earth’ (GAv. burnim) — Skt. bhumim; YAv brata ‘brother’ (GAv. b a rdtd ) — Skt. bhrdtd ; YAv. Zdmbayadwa m ‘crush ye’ - Skt .jam- bhayadhvam. (3) YAv. j, d, zv (GAv. g, d, b) = Skt. g, d, b. YAv. ujratn ‘mighty’ (GAv. ugra) = Skt. ugrdni ; YAv. bajdin ‘portion, lot’ (GAv. baga-) = Skt. bhdgam; YAv. vi.zr^jd ‘bird’ — Skt. inrgds. — YAv. vidvea ‘know- ing’ (GAv. vidvdi) — Skt. v id van ; YAv. pa l dyamiha ‘set foot’ = Skt. pddyasva. (4) YAv. j, d, zv (GAv. g, d, b) — Skt. gh, dh, bh. YAv. dar 3 j 3 in ‘long’ (GAv. dar 3 gani) — Skt. dirghdm; YAv. maejani ‘cloud — Skt. nicghdm; YAv. jajnvca ‘having smitten’ = Skt. jaghnivan. — YAv. ada ‘then’ (GAv. add) = Skt. ddha; YAv. adzvan 3 m ‘way (GAv. advdnarn) — Skt. ddhvdnam; YAv. ar^dsm ‘side half’ = Skt. ardham. — YAv. ahvi ‘unto’ (GAv. cdbt) - Skt. abhi; YAv. gar 9 worn ‘foetus’ — Skt. gdrbharn; YAv. azvram ‘cloud’ = Skt. abhrdrn. 3 34 Phonology. § 84. Exception I. Initial j, not,?-, i.s found before a: VAv. j’nib, r /rid> women’ (GAv. g-';ia>\ — Skt. gnat; YAv. g*nqm ‘to smite’ inf. to ~\b jnn- Ski.. J' Ati rt-. § 85. Exception 2. Exceptions to the law for internal change are also found. % (a) Commonly in the endings “//it, “byo, “by a . YAv. tauuovo ‘to bodies’ - Skt. tanubhyat ; YAv afrivainiebil ‘with blessings’, cf. Skt. tamani-bkit, etc. but YAv. ahcyat-ca ‘and with these’ (fern, abl.l beside abyd Yt. 10.82 = Skt. abhydt, YAv. bazuwe ‘with both arms’ § 67 cf. Skt. bahubhyam; YAv. hinu'wyo ‘from fetters’ Yt. 13.100 beside YAv. gStubyo. (b) The combination internal dr remains generally unchanged : YAv. |;Wra/ ‘from seed’ — Skt. ksudrat ; YAv. udrtm ‘otter’ = Skt. udram; GYAv. ar*dra - ‘pious’/ GYAv. tadra- ‘misfortune’; YAv. dadrdna- being held’ ], dar- =. Skt. \ r dhar-. (c) In some other instances internal d remains in YAv. unchanged ; YAv. radar * ‘weapon’, GAv. vadar* — Skt. vddhar; YAv. yaza- nta’dc ‘we worship’ = Skt. ydjamahe, etc.; YAv. var*da/>?in ‘growth’, beside var’daya ‘make thou grow’ = Skt. yard hay a. § 86. Instead of internal d in YAv., p i.s sometimes written; especially before u, re. YAv. vipupi, % vtpupui ‘having knowledge’ = Skt. vidusl, vidftsbn, GAv. vidufe ; YAv. carapue ‘ye go’ Yt. 13.34 = Skt. cdradhve; YAv. dapu$6 ‘of creator’ = GAv. daduso : YAv. Pr 9 pwa- ‘uplifted as variant to dr* dik'd-. So YAv. ?apa‘ti ‘he gives’ = Skt. dddati RV. 2.35.10; YAv. ggapaHi ‘vanishes’ beside YAv. zgada'ti; GAv. vaepa Ys. 5.6 ‘he knows’, beside GAv. vaedd = Skt. veda. § 87. Instead of internal YAv. w, we sometimes find YAv. v written. YAv. nvaroit ‘should bring out = Skt. a-bJuiret; YAv. l[pnid‘bra YAv. yupnaoyo = Skt. yustndbkyam; YAv. rndv J yn ‘to me’, GAv. ma'byd ; YAv. g? u rvaye' l te ’he seizes’ (for *gsr- ivaye'ti § 70 Note 2) — Skt. grbhnyati; 'S Av. vaebya Mediae and Sonant Spirants. 35 ‘with both’ (for uvae*bya § 68 for mvae' l bya), cf. Skt. ubhdbhya.nl, GAv .uboibya ; YAv.frabavara ‘he brought forth’ = Skt. babhara. Perhaps YAv. a L wi > avi > aoi ‘unto’ = Skt. abhi. Note. On Ay. fiw for tv, dm for dkv, etc., see §§ 94, 96. Av. S j. § 88. From the fact that the original sonant aspirates fell together with the mediae in A vesta , § 82, and also from the two-foid nature of Skt. j and It — see Krugmann, Grundriss der vergl. Gram. §§ 452, 480, 451, — is to be explained the following relation between the Avesta and the Sanskrit. Skt. Av. j <[ J y> Av. z Skt. (1) Av. j = Skt. j. YAv. jvantam , GAv. jvaiito ‘living = Skt. jivan- tam, etc. (§68 Note 2); YAv. jajnva) ‘having smitten’ — Skt . jaghnivan ; — Y Av. jym ‘bowstrings' — - Skt. jyas; GAv. jydtSus ‘of life’, cf. Skt. jivatos ; also GYAv. aojisto ‘strongest’ — Skt. ojisthas ; GYAv. ‘jyejo ‘de- struction’ — Skt. tyajas. (2) Av. j — Skt. h. YAv. jari tar dm ‘smiter’ — Skt. hantaram; YAv. ja'nti ‘he smites’ = Skt. hdnti ; YAv. ar’jaHi ‘is worth’ = Skt ..arhati; GYAv. drujmt ‘Deceit, Fiend' = Skt. dr it ham. Note I. According to § 83, the media ] when initial should in YAv. pass over into its corresponding sonant spirant, this spirant has in our alphabet fallen together with the sonant sibilant 2 . Hence the relation §§ 177 , 178 below YAv. 2 = Skt. j; — YAv. i = Skt. h. Note 2. Owing to the etymological relation gjj, we sometimes find Av. j — Skt. g: — e. g. GYAv. kaqjamana- ‘assembly’ — Skt. sqgamana- ; I’honology. 36 GYAv. jasoi( 'lie might come’ — Skt. gachet; Av. ~\fjad- ‘to beseech’, cf. •Ski. | /'gad-. Note 3. Av. j also sometimes answers to Ski. gh: — e. g. Av. draj- ilti m ‘longest’ — Skt. draghisfkam ; Av. drajo 'length, duration’, cf. Skt. draahman-. Bartholomae’s Law. See Bartholomae, A. F. i. p. 3 seq. ; A. F. iii. p. 22 Note. § Sg. The combination, original aspirate mediae--)-/ or - s, hail already in the Indo-lranian period become m e d i a -|~ dh or zh ; the con- sonant group thus arising is then treated according to the special laws of the language, Indie 01 lranic. In GAv. the law is carried through without exception (but see § 82 a, and Note). In YAv., however, the law diows a number of exceptions § go. — Lxamples of the law from GAv. are: GAv. aoggda ‘he spake’ to ]/ angji ending la, cf. Gk. euxopat, Skt. Shate; GAv. cag»du ‘they two grant’ to ~\f kgig.Ji -j- -las. — GYAv. vjr^zda- 'grown great, mighty’, to j f vardh -| — la-, cf. Skt. vfddha-; GAv. dozde ‘lie makes’, to \~dhd-, pres, stem dadh -| — te; GYAv. mazdah -, norm mazda) ‘wisdom, Mazda’, to orig. \/ mandh -| — tas- — Skt. -medtids-. — GAv. go r* id a ‘he complained’, to ]/" garg x h -J — la, cf. Skt. gar hate. — With orig. s, GAv. aojid ‘thou spakest’, to [/' aug.Ji -j- -sa, 2nd. sg. pret. mid. ; — GAv. diivza’dyui ‘to deceive’, to orig. dabh -1 — sa-, rutin, desiderative , cf. YAv. dhvia / ‘from deceit’, a substantive from desid. stem, cf. Skt. aipsati. § go. In YAv., as compared with GAv., this law holds good only in part; as for the rest, the old tenues t , or surd sibilant s, i-. restored and assimilation then takes place. Thus: — YAv. ao$la ‘he spake’, to y'augji -j- ending la, beside GAv. aog*da; YAv. drufato ‘deceived’, to ~\f draugji -j- -la-, — Skt. dwgdhas. — YAv. daste ‘he makes’, to | f did-, pres, stem dadh -j- te , beside GAv. dazdi: YAv. mastim ‘wisdom’ to orig. [ mandh -j — ti-, beside GAv. humqzdra-, \ T Av. mezdra-. — YAv dapta ‘deceived’ noni. f. past ptcpl. to orig. \f dabh, cf. Skt. dabdha-. — With orig. s, YAv. vagatu ‘he carried’ (r restored § 165), 3rd. sg. mid. sa- a or. to \f vagyi, be- side YAv. vaiul ‘he carried’. Semivowels. .37 Semivowels. Av. ro y (initial), » y (internal); ip v (initial), » v (internal). § 91. General Remark. The semivowels ro/ and. ip v were probably spirants ; internal »y and » v were apparently sometimes spirant, sometimes vocalic (see § 92 Note 1). Note. In a few instances ,J y and )) v stand as initial, wlien re- presenting iy, uv : GAv. iyaducd ‘and here’ Ys. 35.2 (prou. stem 2) ; YAv. uva&t>ya ‘with both', Skt. ttbhabhydm — see §§ 87, 68. Av. y == Skt. y. § 92. Av. y (initial and internal) corresponds to Skt. y: Av. yasmm ‘worship’ — Skt. yajndm ; Av. tayus ‘thief’ = Skt. tayus ; GAv. ahurahya ‘of Ahura’ 2=2 Skt. asurasya. Note 1. (a) A possible test as to when y is spirant or semivowel, may perhaps be found in the treatment of a preceding t, e. g. haipya ‘true’ (9/ spirant) but daHyi- ‘lawful’ (y semivowel ddh-i-a -). (b) Moreover the metre shows that y is often to be read with vowel value iy § 68: GAv. fry 6 ‘friend’ (read fr-iy-o) — Skt. priyas; YAv. bitya- ‘second’ (read bil-iy-a-) = Skt. dvitiyli .-. — In Yt. 13.99 initial ro must be read iy in yae$a ‘he has sought’ = Skt. iyesa. Note 2. On Av. y — Skt. v, in tanuye etc., see § 190. Av. V = Skt. V. § 93. Av. v (initial and internal) corresponds to Skt. v: Av. vastrsm ‘vesture’ — Skt. vis tram ; Av. vdtd ‘wind’ = Skt. vatas ; — Av. tutava ‘lie has power 1 = Skt. tutava; Av. hvaspo ‘with good horses’ = Skt. svdsvas. Note 1. Metrically » v is often to be read as a vowel. Thus: Av. gaepahva ‘among beings' Ys. 9.17 (loc. r -a!m -)- a postpos.) ; ° cipraesya ‘among seeds’, GAv. tvSm ‘thou’ (read tuS/u) — Skt. tvim (tuam) ; YAv. kva ‘where’ (read kua ) = Skt. kva (kita). Note 2. On Av. v for w, see § 87. Note 3. On Av. v for Skt. itv see § 6S. Original v in Combination with Consonants. Av. representative of Skt. tv. § 94. The combination original tv (1) generally becomes Av. J>?v; (2) it remains unchanged when a sibilant Phonology. precedes or when v preserves its vocalic character u . — When samprasarana with following a takes place, t remains unaltered. (i; GYAv. lp'apivd, Ip'apwo ‘by, of wisdom’ = Skt. krdtvd, krdtvas; YAv pwqm ‘th.ee = Skt. tv am; Av. inqpiva- ‘to he thought, thought’, for *mantva - ; — (2) Av. varstva- 'to be done, act’; Av. ratvd ‘O Master , gdtvo ‘from the seat (prob. rat-u-d. gat-u-d)\ G Av. tv 3 m ‘thou’ (inJm). — YAv. turn ‘thou’— Skt. tvam: Original pv. § 95. The combination original pv apparently seems to become f in Av.:— e. g V 57.29 af»tite ‘they are overtaken’, for earlier *apvariH (el. 8), Av. ‘aquosum’ for older *dpvaqtam ; Av. hulhafa ‘slumber- ing’ nom. sg. from orig. *susvapvott(t)-. Original dv, dhv. § 96. The combination original dv, dhv becomes (1) when initial, GAv. dv, d a b ; in YAv. (b, b (dv) , — (2) when internal, GAv. dv; in YAv. dv, div (dv). (1) Initial. GAv. dvae$avhd ‘through hatred’ (YAv. fbaesavha) — Skt. dvesasd; GAv. d ai bis?nti ‘they hate' (cf. YAv. fbaefaydt) = Skt. dvisdjiti; GAv. d ai bitim ‘second’ (YAv Skt. dvitiyam. — Y Av . (baesavha ‘through hatred’ — Skt. dvesasd: YAv. tbae$ayd( ‘may harm through hatred’ — Skt. dvcsaydt; YAv. bitim ‘second = Skt. dvitiyam. — YAv. dva ‘two = Skt. dvd; Av. dvarsm ‘door — Skt. dvdram; Av. dvqsaHi ‘rushes, springs’ = Skt. dhvqsati. (2) Internal. GAv. advaeso ‘without harin’ — Skt. advesds; GAv. vidved ‘knowing’, YAv. vidvee = Skt. vidvan; — GAv. advansm ‘path’, YAv. adwan.’/n — Skt. ddhvdnam. Liquid. 39 — Av. didvae$a ‘I have hated' = Skt. didvesa ; YAv. vidvaestvd ‘foe to harm’. Nolo. In YAv. vifiaejsaijhjm ‘foe to malice’ and vidvaditvo ‘foe to harm’, the /A dv is treated apparently as initial, — prefix vi. Av. representative of Skt. sv. § 97. The combination sv (Skt.) appears in Av. as sp. Av. vtspam ‘all’ — Skt. visvam; Av. aspo ‘horse = Skt. dsvas ; Av. spaetam ‘white’ = Skt. svetdm. § 98. On Av. representative of sv (Skt.), see § 130. Av. representative of Skt. hv. § 99. The combination Skt. hv appears in Av. as zb. Av. zbayemi ‘I invoke’ — Skt. kvdyami; GAv. duz- az°ba> ‘male-dictus’ cf. Skt. ]/ hva -. Liquid. Av. 1 r. § 100. The Av. liquid is r; it corresponds to Skt. r and l, the letter / being wanting in Av. Av. r = Skt. r (/). Av. rap am ‘wagon’ = Skt. rdtham ; Av. narani ‘man’ — Skt. naram ; Av. srtro ‘beautiful’ = Skt. sri- rds, srllds. — Av. hukar 3 pta- ‘well-formed’ = Skt. -klpta-; GAv. Ip'apa'ti ‘arranges’, cf. Skt. kalpate. Note 1. In Av., hr appears instead of simple r when immediately followed by k or p: — YAv. vthrku ‘wolf’ = Skt. vfkas; GYAv. kihrpdm ‘corpus’ -= Skt. kfpam; YAv. mahrko ‘death’ = Skt. mar has , cf. GAv. niat^kae-cd ‘morti-que’ ; YAv. kakrkana- nomen propr., cf. Skt. kjkat.ta-. See Bartholomae, A.F. ii.39; Brugmann, Grundriss der vergl. Gram. §260. Note 2. On urv- (i. e. u rv- for vr-), see § 19 1. Note 3. On r in vow'd combinations ar, a’r, a u r, dr 3 , see § 48. 40 Phonology. Nasals. Av. i, ), ti, 4. n, 9i. i). }}, in. § ioi. General Remark. Of the nasals in Av., in corresponds in general to Skt. in. — To the Skt. n there correspond in Av., i n and ^ n , — the latter, a modification of i n, stands before stopped consonants. — The letter ) v is evidently guttural in A \. paatauham 'fifth' from pan k ia^va. Otherwise i v stands in the combination uh, null derived from orig. .y-sy liable § io8. — The character -u ij is palaeo- graphically. from the manuscripts, a modification of i v; it occurs for n> in connection with h when it is preceded by an i- or ^-sound § 1 1 8 Note. § 102. Av. n occurs initial, internal (except before stopped-souuds), and final. Av. noma ‘name’ = Skt. nama : — Av. tanu} ‘body’ — Skt. tun As ; — Av. anyu ‘another’ — . Skt. anytis ; Av. navanva ‘victorious’ — Skt. vavanvan ; Av. varfndiU ‘of.a male’ •— Skt. vrpjh ; — Av. barm ‘they carried’ — Sk;. abba ran. § 103. Av. n occurs before k, y r r, j, t, cl and -byo (for -t/byu), bya. Av. ztni^a- ‘upper pail of fool’ — Skt . jdugha- ; — Av. ftanca ‘five’ — Skt. yd/ha; — Av. r.’yja'tc ‘bestirsjTlinTies’ — Skt. rajialc , — Av. ar% '» r* ‘inter’ — Skt. ant dr ; Av. bar?>iti ‘they carry' — Skt. bhdranti ; Av. b>r>zanJ>ya ‘for the two great ones’. Note. For -//”• see under Sibilants § 12S. § 104. On Av. 1 r, tl f see above General Remark. § 105. Av. m occurs initial, internal, final. Av. mathmtm ‘midmost’ — Skt. madhyamdur. . Av. am?nt ‘strength’ — Skt. cimatn; Av. mraoui ‘I spake’ — Skt. dbravam. Note 1. The m in Av. \ r mru- (opp. Skt. \ r bru-) is probably the more original. Note 2. On initial m — Skt. sm, see § 140. Sibilants: Original s. 41 Sibilants. Av. -o, . gj, ro — f, on. s , § z, z. § 106. General Remark. Of the sibilants, s, s, / are surd; and z, z are sonant. In Avesta, s corresponds to both Skt. i' and to s. — Av. / answers in general to Skt. s. The letter Av. s is chiefly final after i, u and consonants, also in some ligatures. Av. / is not so common , chiefly before y. Note. Av. I, /, / are palaeographically closely related. In most MSS., s and / interchange with each other. In the younger Indian MSS., s is the predominant character: the Persian MSS. often (though by no means throughout) show a preference for / when the sound answers to orig. rt. In the four oldest MSS., with Pahlavi translation, /. is the principal cha- racler , — s standing as final or in ligatures. This rule is there preserved almost without exception. — In the old Mss. ro /has a double value — (1) as a ligature for / -)- k, hilku ‘dry’, et al. ; or (2) it is a modification of I, / before v» § 162. Younger MSS. write in the (1) first case Ik; in the (2) second case they have a special ligature. — See Geldner, Drei Yasht p. viii seqq. Av. §107. General Remark. Av. s is of three-fold origin : — 1. = original „v, 2. = older palatal ^ (Skt. s), 3. = developed 1. Original s. § 108. General Remark. Original s (i) under certain conditions remains s in Avesta (2) but generally other- wise becomes h (nil). i. Original j remains s. § 109. Original s remains s in Avesta before initial k, c, tj p, n, or internal before the same letters when it is preceded by a, q, a. 42 Phonology. Av. sksmbem ‘scaffold’ — Skt. skambharn; Av. yds -ktr’t- 'making efforts’, cf. Skt. a-yas-: Av. sk?iidam ‘broken’, scincLiye'ti 'breaks asunder’, cf. Lat. scindere. — Av. staotdrem ‘praiser’ — Skt. stotdram; Av. vaste ‘lie clothes’ = Skt. vaste ; Av. dste ‘he sits’ = Skt. dste; GAv. mqsta ‘he thought’ = Skt. amqsta; Av. dqstvqm ‘cunning, skill’, cf. Skt. dqsas-; GAv. spsr 3 - ddni ‘I will strive' — Skt. spardhdni; Av. manaspaohya- ‘having the mind pre-eminent’. — Av. snayaeta ‘should wash’ — Skt. snayeta ; Av. asnatdravi ‘priest who washes the utensils’, cf. Skt. a-snataram ‘dreading water’. ii. Original s becomes //. § no. Original s becomes h in Av., regularly when initial before vowels. Av. hapta ‘err-ra’ = Skt. saptd, Lat. septem ; Av. haca ‘with, from’ — Skt. sded; Av. haomsm ‘Haoma’ — Skt. somam ; Av. bo ‘he’ = Skt. sds; Av. huJ/tein ‘good word’ = Skt. sukiam ; Av. haksr 3 { ‘at one time’ — Skt. saki't. as. § ill. The combination old a* becomes in Avesta (i) ah-, (2) anil-, av-, (3) -5 (final). Old as- = (1) Av. ah-. § 1 12. a. Old as- = Av. ah — regularly before i, i. YAv. a hi ‘thou art’, GAv. alii — Skt. a si; GAv. ns main ‘in homage = Skt. natnasi., § 1 1 3. { 3 . Old as- — Av. ah — before i, i, when the a becomes e, § 34. Av. darayehi ‘thou holdest fast’ = Skt. dhardyasi ; Av. ja'dychi ‘thou asktst’ ; Av. sadaye/ri ‘thou appearest’ — Skt. chadayasi ; Av. aojyehil ‘more strong’ (acc. pi. fem.) = Skt. ojiyasts. § 1 14. y. Old as- — Av. ah-, generally before u, u and their strengthenings. Sibilants: Original s. 43 Av. qzahu ‘in distress’ = Skt. qhasu; Av. ahurjm ‘Ahura, Lord’ = Skt. dsuram ; Av. ahum ‘life’ = Skt. asum. § 115. H. Old as- = Av. all-, the a before u, v then passing over into 0, d. Av. vohu ‘good’ = Skt. vasu; GAv. bafypdhva distribute’ — Skt. bhaksasva. § 1 16. e. Old as- = Av. ah- rarely before e, cf. per- haps § 35 Note 2. Av. raodahe ‘thou growest’ = Skt. rodhasi ; Av. pawhnhe ‘thou mayest protect’ (aor. subj.) Yt. 8.1 = Skt. pasasi. Old as- = (2) Av. avh-. § 117. 7. Old as- = Av. avh-, regularly before a, a, 3 , 9 , 0, o i, q. Av, vavlianam ‘vesture’ — Skt. vdsanam ; GAv. namavhd ‘with homage’ — Skt. ncimasa. — Av. vavhSus ‘of good’ = Skt. vasos. — Av. aravhd ‘of help’ = Skt. avaso. — GAv. ramhavhoi ‘thou mayest offer' (aor. subj.) — Skt. rdsase; Av. u§avhqm ‘of dawns’ = Skt. usdsdm. Note. An exception is Av. daliakd ‘Dragon’, dahakaca. § 1 18. fk Old as- — Av. avh-, generally before e, e, ae-ca, but cf. § 116. YAv. avavhe, avavhae-ca, GAv. avavhe ‘for help’ = Skt. dvase ; GAv. nsmauhe ‘for homage’ = Skt. nainase. Note. Here Av. vh - may appear instead of nh- when epenthetic i precedes it, or when a is shaded to e after y § 34: — YAv. ava l yhe ‘for help’ beside avavhe — Skt. dvase ; GAv. did/dyhc ‘I was made wise’ (redupl. aor .).— yeyhe ‘of which’ = Skt . ydsya ; GAv. srdvayeyhc ‘to make heard’; GAv. ragayeyhe ‘to harm’ — cf. the Skt. infinitives in -ase. § 1 19. y- Old as- = Av. avh-, seldom before u: Av. ?. lavhus ‘good’ = Skt. vdsus ; Av. unhid (beside ahum ) ‘life’ = Skt. dsus. 44 Phonology. Old -as — (3) Av. -0. § 120. Old -as final — Av. -0, — (G Av. olien has -S § 32). Av. pupro ‘son’ — Skt. putrds; Av. isavo ‘arrows’ — Skt. isavas ; Av. darayo ‘didst hold fast’ = Skt. dhdrayas. — Cf. GAv. y? ‘who’ (YAv. yd) — Skt'. yds; GAv. 7 >j ‘of ye’ (YAv. vd ) = Skt. vas; GAv. mazS ‘great’ (gen.) = Skt. mahas. Note. Observe that as is retained before enclitic ca ‘que’, etc. Av. tfavasca ‘and arrows’ = Skt. isavas-ca; Av. i^avasci( ‘even the arrows’ = Skt. isavas-cit ; Av. yasca : and who’ = Skt. yds-ca. — Av. nimas 3 te 'homage to thee’ = Skt. tux mas te ; Av. yastn£ ‘qui id’ = Skt yds tdt. as. § 1 21 . The combination old as becomes in A vesta (1) dh-, (2) cavil-, (3) -,v (final). Old ds- = (1) Av. dh-. § 122. Old ds- — Av. dh- regularly before i, i, u, it. Av. bavdki ‘mayest thou be’ = Skt. bhdvasi: Av. pdhi ‘thou protec.test’ = Skt. pdhi. — Av. ddhim ‘crea- tion’ = Skt. dhashn; GAv. rahi *1 offer’ (aor.)=Skt. rasi. — Av. dhurdis ‘of the Ahurian , cf. Skt. dsttres: GAv. a hit loc. pi. fem. of aent ‘this’ = Skt. dsn. Old as- = (2) Av. mail-. § 123. Old ds- — Av. tit ah-, — before a, a, ?. e, e, 3 , oi, q. Av. anoha ‘lias been’ — Skt. asa ; Av. prcaahaye'de ‘he terrifies’ — Skt. trasayatc ; Av. natvliabya ‘with both nostrils’=Skt. nasdbhyam ; — Av. w dmh.vu ‘tnoon’ = Skt. masam; — GAv. rdwhe ' 1 offer’ = Skt. rase ; — Av. ceaho ‘of mouth’ — Skt. asas; — Av. dtvuhoif ‘creation’ (abl.), cf. Skt. dkasi-i — Av. d>ahqm ‘of these’ (fern.) = Skt. dsdm. Sibilants : Original j. 45 Old -as = (3) Av. -at. § 124. Old -as final = Av. -d> — regularly. Av. buy at ‘mightest be’ = Skt. bhityds ; Av. kacnaym ‘of an army’ = Skt. senayds; Av. dco ‘thou madest’ = Skt. ad has. Note. Before enclitics Ua etc.), orig. -as appears as -ws : — Av. gd- paisca ‘and the Gathas’ =-• Skt. gathascu; Av. urvarmsca ‘and trees’ = Skt. urvdrasca ; Av. haenaycosca ‘anti of the army’ — Skt. senayasca ; — GAv. dcosca ‘and madest’, dws-tu ‘thou madest’ = Skt. adasca, etc. Original ns. § 125. The combination old internal -ans- before vowels becomes:- — (1) in YAv. -anti-, -onh-, -ah-; — (2) in GAv. -Hugh-, -dh-. Old -ans- — (1) YAv. -anh-. -anh-, -qh-. § 126. «. Old -ans- internal = YAv. -anh-, -a yah- be- fore a, a, 3 , oi. YAv. savhani ‘I shall proclaim’ = Skt. sqsdni ; YAv. dawhavha ‘with cunning, skill’ (Ny. i.i6) = Skt. dqsasa. — YAv. v a whan ‘they will struggle’ (Yt. 13.154)= Skt. vqsan. — YAv. s anh bis ‘shouldst proclaim’ = Skt. sqses. — Similarly YA v. janhantu ‘shall injure' (Vd. 2.22), cf. Skt. hisantu. § 127. fl Old -ans- — YAv. -qh before i, y. YAv. dqhistam ‘most cunning, skilled’ = Skt. dq- si stain; YAv. zqhyamnanqtn ‘of those who will be born’ (y zan- — Skt. J/ /an-'). Old -ans- = (2) GAv. -Sngh-, -Sh~. § 128. Old -ans- internal = (a) GAv. -high- (are,^) before vowels; — and = ({■») GAv. -ah- before m. (a) GAv. saiighdni ‘I shall proclaim’ = Skt. sqsdni; GAv. vdqghap, vaqghan ‘shall strive’ (aor.) = Skt. vqsat; 46 Phonology. GAv. sJnghd ‘proclamation, proclaimed = Skt. sqsas. — GAv. m? right (also tnJnhi) ‘I thought’ = Skt. mast. — G A v . fsjnghyo, fpng/rim ‘thrifty’ — orig. psansyas. — (b) in}hma l dl ‘we thought’ (s- aor. from ]/ man-). § 129. The combination old final -ans — ([) Y Av. •qn, or -q (-qs-ca), -J (Ps-ra) , — (2) GAv. -3 rig, -q. YAv. daevqn, GAv. daevSqg ‘Demons’ — Skt. dev an. — GAv. spjritj/ig amasdtigYi. 39.3= Y Av. anus? spnqtj — YAv. anu$3s-ca spzntj — GA\ . anu$q sprig q = YAv. amjfqs-ca spJi/tq (acc. pi.) = Skt. amftan. — YAv. aesinqn, aesmqs-ca ‘wood’, cf. Skt. asvan , dsvdjca : YAv. var 3 sds-ca ‘hair’. Note. In some of the above examples , it might be suggested that YAv. / is perhaps due to Gatha influence. Original sv. § 130. The combination orig. sii becomes in Avesta »or hv or k . — Sometimes, sv when internal, becomes vuh (also written v/i). (1) Orig. sv- initial = Av. hv-, k-. GYAv. hva-, also ha- ‘suus’ = Ski. svd- ; GYAv. hvar* ‘sun’ = Skt. svar ; YAv. hvaspu ‘having good horses’ — Skt. svasvas . — YAv. havharrm ‘sister’ — Skt. svdsaram; GYAv. har-'nCB 'splendors’, cf. Skt. svar\iara- , YAv. hisaf ‘he sweated', fr. Av. l/" hid- — Skt. | ' und-. (2) Orig. -sv- intern al = Av. -hv-, -k-, -vhv-, -mih- (Pers. MSS. -oh-). (a) It becomes hv ,— after c— YAv. a hva ‘among these’ (ahu -!- a postpos.) = Skt. asu, YAv. unahva ‘in empty holes’ — Skt. unasu; YAv. vyar’Pahva ‘in separate places’ (loc). — After a — GAv. gspthva ‘hear thou’ = Skt. ghosasva; so YAv. damaltva ‘among creatures’ (loc. rf»-stem 4 - a) — Skt. dhamasu . — After o (— a § 39)-- YAv. ha- tgdhva ‘distribute thou’ = Skt. hhdksasvct . — !bj Hccon.es h, —after a — GAv namahahts ‘full of homage’ — Skt mimasvatis ; YAv. harahailim nom. proj.r — Skt. sarasvaiim . — So (see lie-low under Composition) Y Av . fiu‘rdhal/l>;ii ‘surrounded’ — $V\..pari?vaUam . — (ci Becomes -nuh- Sibilants : Original s. 47 - wliv -) — GYAv. vnvuhun ‘good’ (fern.'), Pers. MSS. vunkim — Skt. vasvtm ; YAv. pa'dyatmha ‘set foot, abide’ = Skt. padyasva ; YAv. hunamtha ‘press haoma-juice’, cf. Skt. sunusva; — YAv. aojavukatit-, GAv. aojoijghvaqt-, aojovhvatit- ‘strong’ = Skt. ojasvant-. — YAv. vavhvqm ‘of good things’, beside vohunqm ; YAv. hfar 3 navhvanta ‘glorious’, cf. Yt. 15.56, beside har 3 navuhatitdm ; YAv. var’aivhurit.vn ‘brilliant’ Yt. 12.1 = Skt. * varcasvantam . Note. In rama hrastrdm orig. ‘having good pastures’, h — orig. sti + *'" (§ 68 )- Original sy. § 1 31. This combination, orig. sy preceded by a vowel , becomes somewhat complicated in Av., owing to the varied treatment of y, as y sometimes remains after s has become an /Tsound, or y sometimes vanishes, with or without leaving a trace of epenthesis. In GAv., y is generally retained, in YAv. y generally vanishes. (A) y remains. § 132. Orig. sy — (1) Av. hy (the y remaining);— mostly GAv., more rare YAv. (a) YAv. hyal ‘might be’ ■-= Skt. syat ; YAv. uzdahyamnanqm ‘of offerings to be elevated’, cf. Skt. dhu-sy-ate ; YAv. mahyae‘hyd ‘to lords of the month’ — Skt. masyebhyas ; YAv. manahyu ‘spiritual’ (non), sg.) for *manasyas. — (b) GAv. uhurahyd ‘of Ahura, Lord’ — Skt. asurasya; GAv. ahyd ‘of this’ — Skt. asyd; GAv. vahyo ‘better’ = Skt. vdsyas. § 133. Orig. sy = (2) Av. }{y, mostly GAv., rarely YAv. (a) YAv. dakyuuqm ‘of countries’, cf. Skt. dasyu- ; and YAv. fiyaova-, tiyaonya- nom. propr. — (b) GA v. valiytia ‘melior’ — Skt. vdsyun; GAv. afiyaca ‘ejus-que’ (beside ahyd) -- Skt. asyd. Cf. Geldner, Studien zum Avesta p. 141. (B'j y vanishes. § 134. Orig. -sy- internal = (1) Av. -vh-, they vanishing without leaving epenthesis. YAv. vavhd ‘melius’ = Skt. vdsyas, YAv. aevawho gen. sg. fern, (orig. -syos) from aeva- ‘one’. 4 8 Phonology. § 135 - Orig. -sy- internal = (2) Av. d qh- } thej- vanishes but leaves epenthesis. YAv. n'nhat (also ay ha) ‘of this’ (fern.) Skt. asyas ; YAv. da'yhSus 'of country’, cf. Skt. dd.iyu-. § 136. Orig. -sy- internal = (3) Av. -qh-, the y with a following a becoming e. (a) With epenthesis— YAv. a‘qhe ‘of this’ — Skt. osyd . — (b) Without epenthesis — YAv. ycqhe ‘of whom’ — Skt. yasya. § 137. Orig. -sy- internal = (4) Av. h. the y with a following a having become e. § 67. Very common in YAv. genitive singular. YAv. ahc ‘of this - — Skt. osyd ; YAv. ohurahr (.beside GAv. ahurahya) ‘of Ahura' — Skt. dsurosya. — Isolated GYAv. vahehis ‘the better ones (fern.) =■ Skt. vasyas Is. Original sr. § 138. Orig. sr- initial = (?) Av. r- (the instances are uncertain). GAv. hvv/taysn ‘they made fall’, cf. Skt. srqsayan ; YAv. raunat ‘the lame’, cf. Skt. 1 f sras-, srqs •; Av. rdmsm ‘sickness’ — Skt. sr amain. § 1 39. Orig. -sr- internal — Av. -nr-. Av. hazawrsm ‘thousand’ ~ Skt. solid sram ; Av. dovrd ‘cunning, wise’=Skt. dasras ; ZPhl.Gloss. vanri-, vavra- ‘spring’, cf. Skt. vasantd -; Av. aw'd ina‘tiyus ‘the Evil Spirit’. Note. In GAv. -*igr- is also written : GAv. daqgra-, aipgra-. Original sin. § 140. Orig. sin- initial = Av. m, through loss of h. Av. ma{ ‘with’ = Skt. stud/ ; YAv. mala, GAv. mahi ‘sunns’ — Skt. srndsi. § 141. Orig. stn- internal = Av. km. Av. lahmai ‘to whom’ — Skt. kdsrnai; YAv. a/trni, GAv. a Ami ‘suin’ — Skt. as mi. Sibilants : Older palatal s. 49 Original ski. § 142. Orig. sky = Av. s (cf. Skt. c/i). Av. jasahi ‘he comes’ Skt. gashali, cf. pds'/.ei: Av. isa'ti “he desires’ = Skt. ichciti ; Av. yasadi ‘holds’ — Skt. yachati. Original ts. § 143. Orig. t -\- s — Skt. s (through intermediate ss §§ 185, /si. GAv. J^indvasTt (loc. pi.) ‘belonging to you’ — Skt. yusmdvatsu ; GAv. drsgvasu ‘among the wicked’ ( dragvat -j- su) ; YAv. masy 0 ‘fish’ — Skt. matsyas; YAv. ajava./j/ynus ‘rejoicing the righteous’ (Yt. 13.63 nom. sing. °t A s), cf. Av. 1 /snutsm ‘joy’; YAv. k Isa / ‘he sweated’ (°r/ [= /] + .v §74), cf. Skt. y'svid-; YAv. r aose ‘thou growest’, cf. Av. raodahe, raosta ; GAv. stavas ‘praising’ (nom. sg. stavaift-), cf. Lat. mnan(t)s; GAv. dasvd ‘give thou’ = Skt. datsva ; GAv. pi§yasu loc. plur. stem pi§yaiit- ‘beholding’. Original ps. § 144. Orig. ps — Av. f$, except before r, tr. YAv. drafso ‘spear, banner’ = Skt. drapsas ; GAv. haf$i ‘thou extendest’, cf. GAv. haptl from \~hap- = Skt. \ r sap- ; GAv. nafyu ‘among children’, cf. napatom, naptyaepd § 187 (5); YAv. harig 3 r 2 3 f$dne ‘I will seize’ (i'-aor.), beside gar 3 p tom, JP garw- = Skt. ]/ ' garbh-. Note 1. Observe s remains unchanged before r, tr: — Av. fs’ratu- ‘fruit, reward’, Av. fyrafstra- ‘noxious creature’. Note 2. Observe that j (= sky cf. § 142) remains unchanged in the examples tafsol (YAv.) ‘grew warm’, nir’fsakti (GAv.) ‘it wanes’. 2. Older palatal s (Skt. s'). § 145. General Remark. Older palatal s (Skt. s) commonly appears as Av. s. In certain combinations it is changed to s. 4 50 Phonology. i. Older palatal s (= Skt. s) = Av. s. § 146. Older palatal s (= Skt. s) = Av. s before vowels, semivowels, and most consonants. Av. safoavko ‘hoofs’ — Skt. saphdsas ; Av. qsa ycu ‘of two parties’ — Skt. qsayos ; GAv. sdsti 1 he teaches' — Skt. sdsti; Av. pasiim ‘pecus’ = Skt. paste/;/; Av. spas'd ‘spies’ — Skt. spasas; — Av. nasye'ti ‘he vanishes’ = Skt. ndsyati; Av. usydt ‘he might wish' = Skt. usyat; Av. isvati - ‘having power’, cf. Skt. isvara; — Av. v/spa'tis ‘village-lord’ = Skt. vi spat is; Av. usmahi ‘we wish’ — Skt. ustndsi; Av. sraesta- ‘fairest’ = Skt. srestha-. Note 1. On Av. / instead of Av. j (= Skt. s), see § 77 Note 2. Note 2. On older palatal s retained in Av. before n, see § 160 Note. Note 3. On older palatal s in iv — Av. sp, see § 97. Note 4. On Av. saena- ‘eagle’ — Skt. Spend-, sec § 1 S 7 (3). ii. Older palatal s = Av. s. § 147. Older palatal s (— Skt. s) before t becomes Av. s (= Skt. st). For examples see § 1 59. § 148. Older palatal s (= Skt. s) before n generally becomes Av. >v (— Skt. sn). For examples see § 160. § r 49. Older palatal s (— Skt. s) a ft e r Av. f (— orig. /) becomes $. For examples see § 16 1. iii. Older palatal s — Av. § 150. Older palatal s (= Skt. s) becomes An. ; before sonants. For examples see § 1S2. 3. Developed Av. s. §151. Av. s sometimes results from the dentals t (p), d (d) becoming a before t. Av. cistis ‘wisdom’ = Skt. cittis ; Av. ainavastara- ‘stronger’ (a/uavant)- Skt. dmavqttara- ; Av. l n stake ‘of the dead’ (| / l rip-)\ Av. a l wi-sastar- ‘one who sits’ Sibilants: Av. /. 51 (y/iadj = Skt. sat tar-; Av. raosta ‘has grown up', cf. Av, raodaiiti,. Skt. \ r rudh-. Note. Sometimes t (t) becomes r before c: — Av. raevascifira- ‘of splendid family’ (raevatyt- -j- cipra-) ; Av. yasca ‘and when’ (ya£ -(- caj. § 152. Av. s sometimes results from Av. z becoming s before in. Av. upasmqm ‘upon earth’ (acc. fern.), beside Av. zqm, z 3 mo; Av. rasmanqm ‘of battle ranks’, cf. Av. rdzayehite ‘they arrange in ranks’ (JY raz- = Skt. raj -); Av. maesmana ‘with urine’, cf. Av. maezamti ‘they make urine’ (]/ miz- = Skt. y mill-') ; Av. bar 3 smana ‘with barsom’, cf. Av. ‘grow up. be high, great’ (= Skt. ybarh-). § 153. Av. ^ more rarely results from Av. z becoming before n. See also § 164 Note. 1. Av. asnya- ‘belonging to tlie day’ (from azan-) — Skt. tiro-ahnya- (fr. dhan-)\ Av. yasnifii ‘worship’ (]/~yaz- = Skt. j fyaj-). Av. s, S, j § 154. General Remark. Av. s Q, §) stands either for an original r after i, it and certain consonants; or for an earlier palatal s under special conditions. Av. S S) = Skt. S. § 155. Av. s (S, S) answers to Skt. 4 after i. u, and their strengthenings, and after If and r. Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 180. Av. ijavd ‘arrows’ —Skt. isavas ; Av. vahisto ‘best’ = Skt. vdsisthas ; Av. raesayd / ‘may wound’ = Skt. re say at: Av. sraeSyeHi ‘it clings’, cf. Skt. slisyati.- — Av. dus.kar^tem ‘ill-done’ = Skt. dus-krtdm ; Av. viusti- ‘fist’ - Skt. must!-: Av. gao'sam ‘ear’ = Skt. ghosavi; Av. taoSaye ; ti ‘makes still’ (Yt. 10.48)= Skt. tosayati. — Av. uliSansm ‘bull’ = Skt. uksdnam: GAv. va}[sya >2 Phonology. '1 will speak’ = Skt. vaksyami. — Av. varjnois 'of a ram' = Skt. vrsnes ; Av. tar {no ‘thirst’ = Skt. trsnd-. Note I. Before r we find s not / though i or u precede: — GAv. pwisra- ‘glancing’, cf. Skt. ~\f tvis- : YAv. kusrc,-, pisra-. Similarly in Skt. usra-, t tvuisra cf. Whitney, Sanskrit Grat.imar § i S I a. Note 2. Sometimes, J is written for / before y : — GAv. /rat-syamahi ‘we send forth’ — Skt. prifyantasi; YAv. bupyatitqm ‘of those to be’- Skt. bhauifya/ffi/i, etc. § 156. Av. -s from orig. s, appears similarly (§ 155) when final after i-, «-vo\vels and their strengthenings, also after Ip and r, cf. § 192(3). Av. a 2 is ‘Dragon’ (nom. sg.); ga'ris ‘mountains’ (acc. pi.) ; tan us ‘body’; vault us ‘good’ (acc. pi.); rasnaos ‘of Rashnu, Justice’; vanhJus ‘of the good’; bardis ‘thou shouldst bear’ ; gaits ‘cow’; til /dais ‘with words’.: — dml/s ‘fiend’ ; dnusdial/s ‘following’; pard- d art’s ‘Fore-seer’ § 192 (3). § 157. On Av. fs from orig. ps, see § 144. § 158. Av. § (= older palatal sps - Indog. /as) — Skt. ks. Av. va$i ‘thou wilt’ — Skt. vaksi ( ]/ vas -') ; Av. disydt ‘should show’ (opt. aor.), cf. Skt. adiksat ( [/ dis -); Av. nd{d‘ti ‘may vanish’ (aor. subj.), \ nas-; Av. parddar } s ‘F'orc-seer, the cock’ (- dars + ■> nom. sg.); GAv. ndsu loc. pi. from nas- ‘loss, mishap’. — So Av. saeti ‘lie dwells -- Skt. kseti; Av. viosu ‘quickly — Skt. maksu, cf. Lat. max. — Similarly Av. da$ina- ‘right, dexter’ -= Skt. daks inn-; Av. |/ tas- to fabricate’ = Skt. taks-. Note j. Indog. k^s appears in Av. as fs . — In Skt. orig. k^s and k t s fell together in ks,- but Av. still holds them apart as respectively fs and /. See lliibschmann, Z.D.X 1 .G. 38 p. 428. The same distinction between the two original sounds is to be remarked in Prakrit and Pali as observed by Pischel, Gbit. get. Am. 1881, p. 1322. Note 2. On f/makim ‘of you’ and a/gnus ‘up to the knees’, ct. §§ 77 Note 1, 188. Sibilants : Av. s. 53 § 1 59. Av. s appears for older palatal s (= Skt. s) before t (= Skt. si), cf. § 147. Av. nasto ‘made to vanish' = Skt. nastds (| Anas -) ; GAv. vast! ‘be wishes’ = Skt. vdsti (J/ vas -) ; Av. darsti- ‘seeing, sight’ = Skt. dfsti - ; Av. parsta- ‘question’ = Skt. prsta- ( ypras -); GAv. daedoisl redupl. aor. 3 sg. mid. Av. ]/ (/is- ‘show’ — Skt. y d/s-. § 160. Av. f appears for older palatal s (= Skt. s) before n — Skt. sn, cf. § 148. Av. apnao’ti ‘he attains’ = Skt. a snot i] Av. frayno ‘question’ = Skt. prasnds; Av. spapnaot ‘he espied’ J P spas- — Skt. y spas-. Note. Sometimes Av. s appears instead of the above / before 11, cf. § 146, and Note 2: — Av. snapa- 'smiting, wounding’, to \Fsnap- — Skt. snath-; Av. vasna ‘by will’, \f vas- — Skt. \Fvas-. § 161. Av. i appears for old palatal s (= Skt. s) after Av. f (=z orig. p), cf. similarly, orig. ps (dental) § 144. A \. fpbiH ‘with fetters’, cf. Skt. 2 pas- 'to bind' ; Av. ha u rva-fp-avo ‘having whole flocks’ (pas/;- = Skt. pasu-J. Note. On Av. tafsat, tur^fsaHi see § 144 Note 2. § 162. Av. §y (or sometimes simply f) appears for older cy. In GAv. the y is mostly retained; in YAv. the y is mostly dropped. YAv. syaop/um, GAv. pyaop a n sm ‘deed’ = Skt. cyautnam; GAv. ajjyo, YAv. aso ‘worse’, coinparat. to aku- (superl. ac/Fla-) , cf. Ski. aka-; YAv. favayuit ‘might cause to go’ (]/ /"-) ~ Skt. t yavdyet (y cyu -) ; GAv. Jyetttt ‘they abide, repose’, YAv. ‘repose, joy’, cf. Lat. qi/ies; GYAv. fra pa- ‘forward, prone, ready’ = Ski . pracya-; GAv. vasye'le ‘is spoken’ = Skt. uc) ate. See Hiibschmann, Z.D.M.G. xxxviii. p. 431. §163. Av. / (§) = Skt. rt. See Bartholomae, A. F. ii. p. 39, Av. amte) — Ski. yajv.dm ; Av. iisua- ‘in-born’ [a 4- |/ zan- ‘to bear’). Note 2. Observe z in Av. iniltar- ({/ zan- ‘know’) = Skt. jnatdr ; Av. s ntim ‘knee’, ahtubyascip ‘even to the knees’. § 165. A\ . f sometimes results from Av. z (— Skt.^/ or ii) being changed to / before s . — See §§ 185, 186. GAv. u rvapt ‘shall proeeed’ (r-aor.), | aras- — Ski. 7 •raj-; ( j Av. var*jra‘li ‘may do’ (r-aor.), J fvarz-, cf. Skt. \f varj- , GAv. var*s-cd 2 sg. aor. («2-|-r); Av. hvur*s ‘well-doing’ norm sg. (°3 -f- s) ; Av. haropyamna- ‘about to be imbrued’ (ye -j- s\'harz- = Skt. sarj-). Note. Perhaps here Av. apt l a ‘might be led’ beside Av. aza‘/i, Skt. ajati. § 166. Av. s sometimes results from Av. z (=• Skt. 7") being changed to i before t (cf. Skt. st). Av. ornorstd ‘rubbed’ ( ware-) - Skt. °«;r/Jr ( \, r marj -) ; Av. '’bar', 'a- ‘imbrued’ ( | r barz-') = Skt. °srs/d- (tfsarj -) ; Av. yastar- ‘worshipper’ (\/yaz-) — Skt. yaffdr- (4. yaj-\ Sibilants: Av. z. 55 Av. z. § 167. General Remark. Av. z appears either as the representative of Skt. j or h, see § 88; or it is the cor- responding sonant to s, §§ 106, 74. § 168. Av. z = Skt. j. Av. zao§ 3 in ‘wish’ = Skt. josain; Av. zdtd ‘born’ = Skt. jdtds; Av. zd mb ay a dwd m ‘ye knock together’ — Skt . jambhayadlivam ; Av. zindf ‘may take violently r = Skt. jinat ; Av. zrayo ‘sea’ = Skt. jrayas. — Av. aza'di ‘he drives’ = Skt. ajati; Av. yazaite ‘he wor- ships’ = Skt. yajate ; Av. har 3 zmiti ‘they send forth’ = Skt. srjanti; Av. vazrsin ‘club’ = Skt. vdjravi. § 169. Av. z — Skt. h. Av. zasta- ‘hand’ = Skt. hdsta-; Av. zarois ‘of the golden’ — Skt. hares-, Av. zi ‘for’ = Skt. hi. — Av. azsm ‘syw’ = Skt. aha m ; Av. mazisto ‘jviy-icTo;’ = Skt. md- histhas ; Av. bdzus ‘1 viiyy;’ = Skt. bahiis ; Av. bsr 3 zanUm ‘great, high’ = Skt. brhdntam ; Av. viaezariti ‘mingunt’ = Skt. mehanti ; Av. izye‘ii ‘he seeks’, cf. Skt. ihate. § 170. Av. z results often from s being sonantized before sonant consonants. Av. azgatd ‘unmatched, unconquered' Yt. 13.107, Y hag-, orig. sag- = Skt. Y sagh- ; Av. vanhazdca ‘giving the best’ (comparat. to vawhu- + |Y^), cf. Anc. Pers. vahyasddta- nom. propr.; Av. mdzdrdjahya- ‘a month long’, cf. Skt. mas--, Av. azd 2 bis ‘with bones’ = (stem ast-)\ GA v. zdi ‘be thou’, cf. Av. as-ti ‘he is’. Cf. Brug- mann, Grundriss der vergl. Gram. §§ 589 seq. § 17 1.. Av. s (similarly § 170) in combination zd = Skt. (?)dh> (d)dh. See above (Bartholomae’s Law) § 89; and Brugmann, Grundriss der vergl. Gram. §§ 476, 591. Av. inazddh - ‘wisdom, Mazda’ — Skt. °medhas ; GAv. prazdUm ‘ye protected’ (r-aor. from \ r pra~) = Skt. tradhvam ; et al. Phonology. 56 Original Av. z changed to s, ,f. § 172. Av. s before « becomes f (X)» see §§ 153, 164 for examples. § 173. Av. z before m becomes s, See § 152 examples. § 174. Av. z before t becomes s, see § 166 examples. § 175. Av. z before s becomes /, see § 165 examples. Av. i. §176. General Remark. Av. z is the corresponding sonant to i as Av. z is to s. Sometimes (though more rarely) it answers like z to Skt. j, h. § 177. Av. s (more rarely) = Skt. j. See § 88 Note 1. Av. °/ael}M ‘sharpness , edge’, cf. Skt. lejas ('J/ trj -) ; Av. baia[ ‘he distributed, offered’ — Skt. b/idjat. § 178. Av. i (more rarely) — Skt. h. See § 88 Note r. Av. aits ‘Dragon’ = Skt. d/ns ; Av. daia’ti ‘it bums’ — Skt. dakali. § 179. Av. z most commonly results from Av. A being sonantized before sonant consonants. GAv. asruzdum ‘ye were heard of’ (Ys. 32.3, s'-aor. mid. -pass. \ sru-) = Skt. asrodhvam. beside A v.s P rao- $ane, sraosa-; Av. sna'pizbya ‘with two weapons' from stem Av. sna l pis- ; Av. azvzdata- ‘laid in the waters’, beside Av. afscipra- ‘having the seed of waters’ ; Av. yaozdapd/itJm ‘making pure’, beside Av. yaos = Skt. yds. — Av. duzuliUm ‘ill-spoken = Skt. duruktdm ; Av. duzvacavho ‘ill-speaking’, beside Av. duskar ? t?m ‘ill done’ = Skt. durvacas, duskrtdm; Av. dusmanavlte ‘to the evil-minded’ (here ;«-surd) — Skt. durmatiase . Note. Exceptions occur; GAv. ?r*svaca> ‘true-speaking’ et al. ; cf. Bartholomae, B.B. xiii. p. 77. § 180. Av. wi orig. bh r) = Skt. ps. See § 89. YAv. diwia( ‘from deceit’, GAv. dr.isia*dyai ‘to deceive’, cf. Skt. dipsati. § 181. YAv. £ (= Av. s [= Ski. k}-\- j) = Skt. ks. Cf. § 165. YAv. rts-vaiaf ‘lie carried forth’ (>-aor. from vaz-j — Skt. vaksat (' \[vah -). Some Additional Rules as to Consonants. 57 Note i. On 2 in GAv. agionvammm 'unharmed’ cf. Skt. j, fksan -, see § 89. Note 2. GAv. dzul Ys. 53.7 is uncertain. Uncertain also GYAv. iia- ‘zeal, striving’ to \f is- = Skt. ~\[ih- (?). § 182. Av. 2 appears for old palatal s (— Skt. s) before sonants. GAv. aidyai ‘to attain’, y as- = Skt. ]/ as- / GYAv. vtzd>yO ‘to, from villages’ (vis-) = Skt. vidbhyds (vis-). § 183. Av. id = Skt. dh, or d. See Brugmann , Grundriss § 591. Av. miiddni ‘ptaOdv’ = Skt. midham ; Av. m?vidik?m 'mercy' (if from y mars-, cf. § 179) = Skt. mrdikdm. Here again GAv. asniidwn Ys. 32.3 (§ 179)= Skt. asrotfhvam. Aspiration. Av. of' i". h, J{, Jv. § 184. These are all derived from an original 5-sound, and have been treated, in particulars, under the sibilants § uoseqq. Some Additional Rules as to Consonants. § 185. In Av., assimilation of consonants is some- times found. YAv. nmcimni ‘house’ — GAv. dtmanani ; Av. kanindni ‘few’ (for *kabii 3 tn or kambnam § 186), cf. kambistam. — Total assimilation, Av. bumm ‘foundation’ (for bunnani § 186) = Skt. bud imam ; Av. sana / ‘it appeared’ Yt. 14.7 (i. e. sannap, sad-naf). §186. In Av., double consonants (i.e. the same consonant repeated) are not allowed. If owing to total assimilation § 185 they should occur, the combination is- then reduced in writing to a single consonant. Av. inasyo ‘fish’ (for massyo § 185) = Skt. matsyas ; Av. usnaHi- ‘ablution’ (for ussnditi-. i. e. ud-sndHi- § 185, cf. Av. us tanum snayaeta) ; Av. dupiti- ‘distress’ (i. e. dus-piti-, cf. Skt. suksiti -); Av. hdmipydp from 58 Phonology, ham -f \f mip- ‘to change’, Ys. 53.9; GAv. dragvasu ‘among tlie wicked’ (for dragvassii)\ Av. uyahva ‘at dawn’ (for u$ah-hva ) ; Av. ajavar*s ‘evil-doing’ (nom. sg. var's-s, from \/varz- § 165); Av. bunatn § 185 end. §187. A consonant sometimes falls out. See§i86. (1) g before v falls out in YAv. YAv. drtvycos-ca ‘poor’ (gen. fern.), beside YAv. drijaos (gen. masc. dripu -') ; YAv. drvaiitam ‘wicked’, beside GAv. drjgvanUm , cf. Skt. druhvan- ; YAv. hvovo nomen propr. beside GAv. hvdgvo. (2) d between consonants falls out. Av. bar 3 zaiibya ‘great’ (dat. dual for older °andbhy°). (3) y after initial older ^-palatal (= Skt..f) sometimes falls out. Av. samahe ‘of black’ = Skt. sydmdsya; Av. sacno ‘eagle’ — Skt. sycnas. (4) h (= original i) is dropped before in (initial) and r §§ 140, 138 seq. (5) k (%) seems sometimes to fall out. Av. tidrya- ‘quartus’ for *kturya- cf. a-fyftihya- ‘four times’; Av. avajfala : he spake’, if these forms are from \ r vac-. (6) t seems sometimes to fall out. GAv. naff a loc. pi. for K napt-su from Av. ttapal-, napt- ‘off- spring’, cf. § 1 85 seq. § 188. Av. is sometimes introduced before s. Av. d//$nus ‘knee-high’, cf. Skt. abhi-jiiu; Av. //s/jid- kjm, fy$mat ‘of, from you’. § 189. On s (—Skt. s. s ) retained before -ca etc., see §£ t 20 Note; 1 24 Note; 129. § 190. In Av., y takes the place of v between u and e. Av. duye ‘two’ — Skt. dvi. Av. upa.inruye ‘I invoke’ == Skt. upa-bruve ; Av. tanuye ’for the bod)’’ = Skt. tanvi ; Av. °buye ‘to be = Skt. bhuve. Note. Similarly Av. uve ‘both' (for *uvt, uw e § 68 Note 1) — Skt. ubhi. Some Additional Rules as to Consonants. 59 § 1 9 1 . In Av., metathesis of r often takes place; — Skt. vr (vl) becomes with prothesis § 71, Av. u rv. Av. aprava ‘priest’ = Skt . dtharvd; Av.caprudaso ‘fourteenth’ .= Skt. cafurdasds ; Av. bratidryo ‘uncle’ (for brdtvryo § 62) - Skt. bhratrvyas ; Av. u rvatais 4 ‘with doctrines’, cf. Skt. vrdtdis ; Av. * rvapo ‘faithful, friend' (]/ var-). § 192. As final consonants in Av., the following may stand: (1) nasal, 11 and in, (2) dental / (or t when preceded by developed 4 or by i), (3) sibilant i and s . — Two consonants may stand in the case of //s, fs, st, st- and GAv. ng. (1) barm ‘they carried’; azsm T; (2) par 3 sat ‘he asked’ ; amavaf. ‘strong’ ; (3) hizubis ‘with tongues’ ; taints ‘body’; ha u rvatds ‘perfection’ (nom. sg. -tdt-s)\ t/fayqs ‘ruling’ (nom. sg. -ant-s). — drips ‘fiend, Druj’; dfs ‘water’; kar 3 fs ‘corpse’; cdist ‘he promised, an- nounced’; aibi.inoist ‘he turned toward’. — GAv. ma- Sydng ‘mortals’ acc. pi. Note. When orig. s precedes final t the latter is dropped: — e. g. Av. as (i. e. *ds-t) 'was’ = Skt. dsit ; Av. dims (i. e. *cinasl § 109) ‘thou didst promise’, opp. to cdist or to moist (mip-). § 193. Av. 111 appears instead of final 11 in voca- tives of tf/z-stems. Av. asdunt ‘O righteous one’ = Skt. rtdvan ; Av. apraoin ‘O priest’ = Skt. dtharvan; Av. yum (for *yuv 3 ii) ‘O youth’ = Skt. yuvan ; Av. prizafom ‘O triple-jawed’ (cf. acc. prizafanani). Note 1 . The MSS. often fluctuate between final m and n in endings, a, qn, qm, c. g. haoviq, haomqn, haomqm ‘haoma-offerings’ (acc. pi.) Yt. 10.92 -= Skt. soman, cf. § 45 Note 2. — So apparently, Av. ca$mqm ‘in eye’, cf. Skt. janman. Note 2. Observe other MS. fluctuations (cons, and vowel): — c /. j z; p d; d a> ; as au ; m a£; ai a?; 3 it — dapqm, dadqm ; mazda, mazda: fyrata 6 tau ; vastrm °/rdf Co Phonology. § 194. Av. avoids generally a repetition of the same syllable. Av. ma'dyahyehe ‘of Mid-Year’ (for »ia‘dya-yd‘ryehe ) ; Jniydhyw ‘of good harvest’ (for huyd'ryaycd ) ; Av. fra- zinte, frazitita ‘they are, were plundered' (for *frci- zi/unie, *fraziimita). cf. Skt. prajindte ; Av. har 3 na hacimno for */rar-’uavha hacimno attended with glory Yt. 10.121. Resume. Principal differences between Sanskrit and A vesta in Phonology. Vowels. § 195. GAv. lengthens all final vowels, YAv. lengthens them in monosyllables, shortens them in polysyllables (§§ 24—26). § 196. Original T and it are lengthened before final m in Av. (§ 23). § 197. Av. f ) generally answers to Skt. a before m or it. — Av. (ar») = Skt. r (§§ 29, 47). § 198. Av. 10 i 1 , commonly a modification of internal a after y . — Sometimes equals final ya (§§ 34, 67). § 199. Av. Y 6 chiefly equals final Skt. as (o) § 120. § 200. Av. p" a> chiefly equals Skt. as; — more rarely Skt. a -(- stop-sound (§§ 1 2 1 — 124, 44). § 201. Av. x- 4 is a nasalization of a (a) before m or n. It often equals Skt. a with anusvara (§§ 45, 46). Diphthongs. § 202. The Skt. e is represented by Av. ac, vi, or (when final) e; the Skt. d by Av. no, 7 >u, or (when final) J (§§ 55—58, 35, 41). § 203. A striking peculiarity in Av. is Epenthesis (§ 70) and Anaptyxis (§ 72) and the frequent Reductions (samprasaraua etc.) § 63 seq. Consonants. § 204. The voiceless spirants Av. fy, />, f are chiefly sprung from old tenues k, t, p before consonants ; — sometimes they represent old voiceless aspirates (§ 77 seq.). Resume of principal Phonetic Laws. 6l § 205. The original voiced aspirates gh, Jh, bh fell primarily to- gether with the mediae in Av. (§ 82). § 206. The voiced spirants Av. j, d, - (§§ 121 — (24). § 212. Skt. s is represented in Av. by s (§ 146). § 213. Skt. sv is represented in Av. by sp (§ 97). § 214. Skt. eh is represented in Av. by ,r (§ 142). § 215. Dentals before dentals are changed to s in Av. (§ 1 5 1 ). § 216. Av. 2 and s (— Skt. s') before voiceless consonants generally become / (§§ 164 — 166, 160). § 217. Skt. rt is often represented in Av. by / (§ 163). § 218. Skt. ks is represented by Av. or / (§ 158 Note 1). INFLECTION. DECLENSION, NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. § 219. Nominal declension includes nouns and adjec- tives; these may be conveniently taken together in A vesta and divided into two great classes of declension — (a) the vowel class, and (b) the consonant class — according as the stem ends in a vowel or in a consonant. For a summary of Avesta declension in a tabular form, see opposite page. § 220. Case, Number, Gender. The Avesta agrees with the Sanskrit in its eight cases, nominative, accusa- tive, instrumental, dative, ablative, genitive, locative, voca- tive; three numbers, singular, dual, plural; and in the three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. The uses of the cases are in general the same as in Skt. , but see § 233. The Av. dual is interesting as show- ing a distinct form for the locative case, see §$ 223, 236, 262. In Avesta, a substantive has commonly the same gender that it has in Sanskrit. Note 1. As to gender, however, some individual peculiarities occur, as a few words in Av. show a different gender from that which they have in Skt.: — e. g. Av. vac- (masc.) ‘vox’ = Skt. vac (fem.) — but observe the compound paUivac- is fem. ; Av. targna- (masc.) ‘thirst’ — Skt. tfsaa- (fem.); Av. zaiiga- (masc.) ‘leg’ = Skt. japgha- (fem.); Av. sti- (fem.) ‘existence, creation’ — Skt. sti- (masc.) — This occasional phenomenon is sometimes important to observe in the matter of exegesis. Note 2. On fem. and neut. plur. forms interchanging with each other, see § 232. b. Radical stems in -h (original Synopsis of declension of Nouns and Adjectives. 63 B. Consonant Stems. A. Vowel Stems. OO CO O' a w o 3 m 5’ o w ft 3 cn 5' o 3 50 ID o. Cj K Odd 3 o' s' 'z, 71 C < < < 3 P {13 p W <’ 5' < 1 g * if b »> 2 2' in w rt 2 £ 5. co S’ 3 g- 3 . 5* C? P O p- 2 . d c n> 2 n re in c/a O ft Pit 3 3 • O C/Q* 3* C/Q 3 c/§; g o g c/t «! 0 c Hj. 2 . '"5! a 2! 3' 5’ 1 I H cr o crq 3- 64 Inflection : Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. § 22 r. Endings. Here may be enumerated the nor- mal endings which are added to the stem in formation of the various cases. The stem itself, moreover, some- times varies in assuming these endings, as it often appears in a stronger form in certain cases, and in a weaker form in others. Connecting elements as in Skt. seem at times to be introduced between stem and ending. The normal endings (but observe §§ 25 . 26 ) are: i. MASCULINE — FEMIN I N E. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. (-s),— -av — A. -(a)m ... -(a)m I. -d -d D. -e -e Abl. -(a)t -at G. (-as°j - 0 ; -a ■ (-s ) ; -he, -hyd .... -as; -s; -sya L. -i -i V. — — Dual : N.A.V. -d -d (Ved.) I.D.Abl. -bya -bhydm G . -w -os L. -d see gen. Plural : N.V. (as-) -5, d -as A. (ns°)> (-as 1 ) -5; d . . . . . . . (-ns) -as I. -bis -bids D. (-byas°) -by 5 -bhyas G. -qm -am L. -su, fUj hu ... -su ii. NEUTER (Separate Forms.). Sg. N.A.V. — , -m — , -m Du. N.A.V. -i ... -i pi. N.A.V. — , -i -* Remarks on the Endings. 65 General Remarks on the Endings. i. MASCULINE — FEMININE. § 222. Singular: — Nominative: The typical ending is disguised by entering into euphonic combinations with vowels and consonants ; it assumes especially often the form -s, § 156. — Often it is wanting — e. g. cf. derivative stems in orig. a and /. Accusative: The typical ending -/// appears after vowels; the ending -)m (= -am = -»jm) after consonants. Cf. also § 23. Instrumental; Regularly < 1 , a, § 25. — This is sometimes disguised by combining with a preceding y to e, § 67.— The fern, //-declension, as in Skt., shows a fuller form, making the case end in -ay a (ray a) beside the simpler normal form in a. Dative: YAv. -c (orig. -ai), GAv. -e, -in, § 36. — Notice of course Av. -i7 c-ca . — In the //-declension, the e (orig. ai) unites with the stem vowel into ai, cf. Gr. , -msca answering to Skt. -os — a preceding vowel being treated as in Skt. Locative: The ending 6 occurs in zaslayo (YAv.) from zasta- ‘hand’, in uboyd (GAv.) from uba- ‘both’, and auhvo (GAv.) Ys. 41.2 from auhu- ‘world, life’. § 224 Plural: — Nom. Voc.: The typical form orig. as occurs both in the vowel and the consonant classes of declension. — But beside this, in the masculine of both classes the ending (= orig. -as, § 124) which is, however, less common than the ending a (a). — Often the tf-stems have -aw kb, cf. Vedic Skt. -asas. — In the /-stems, the usual nom. pi., as in Vedic Skt., is -is instead of -yd, -yasca. Accusative: The original ending -ns (seen in -qsca from //-stems) appears in the consonant stems as -b, - as ‘ (i. e. orig. -ns).— Beside this, in the mxsculine of both classes the ending a (a) \ s found, cf. nom. above. — In the //-declension the normal orig. -ns combines with the a of the stein into YAv. -q(n), -iisca, GAv. -qsca— sometimes also YAv. ~S, -Jsca. — The fern, //-stems show -a, -asca. — The masc. fern. i- and //-stems show generally -7/, -iis. Instrumental: Everywhere the ending -bis, -bis (§ 21 Note), except in the a-stems which show -aiit. Dat. Abl.: The regular form is -byo, -byasca, or written -uyb, -vyb, -nyo, §§ 83 (4), 87, 62 Note 3. Genitive: Universally -qm, which is often dissyllabic as in Vedic Skt. — In the vowel stems an n is usually inserted before this -q»i. Remarks or. the Endings, Cases and Forms. 67 Locative: The normal form is -hit, -fu. — To this ending, an enclitic postpositive a in YAv. is often attached, thus giving -hva, -$va, cf. Skt. vdnesv a RV. 9.62.8. ii. NEUTER (Separate Fonns). The neuter shows in general the same endings as the masculine. Its special forms, however, are worthy of note in the following cases ; § 225. Singular: — Nom. Acc. Voc. : In general no ending — the case is simply the bare stem in its weak form, if the stem have a weak form. The a-stems have m as in the accusative masculine. § 226. Dual: — Nom. Acc. Voc.: The ending orig. -i is to be recognized in the a-stems, where it is combined with the stem vowel preceding it, into e, e. g. duy.-e saU-c ‘two hundred’. — Sometimes the simple stem (or like nom. sing.) seems to be used, e. g. va , dqma At. 15.43, a f l ‘two eyes’ Yt. 11.2. § 227. Plural:— Nom. Acc. Voc.: Commonly the ending is wanting i. e. the case-form is the simple stem, or if consonantal it is the strongest form of the stem (cf. afsmanivan i. e.. orig. °dnt ; or again mania from n/^-stem). — Seldom the ending is -i : namSm, cf. Skt. namani. — Sometimes in the consonant declension, the endings - a , -as of the vowel (a- or a-) declension are found, cf. § 234, e. g. daemana, mas ana, maesma to stems daeman- ‘eye, glance’, rnasan- ‘greatness’, maesman- ‘urine’, but see § 308. § 228. General Plural Case. The plural in Av. occasionally shows a certain instability which is exhibited in the transfer or rather generalization of some of its case-forms. This is especially true of the neuter plural; and in general it may be added that the tendency to fluctuation increases in proportion to the late- ness of the text. — See also, Johannes Schmidt , Pluralbildungen der indo- germanischcu Keutra pp. 259 seq., 98 seq. § 229. (1) The instrumental plural in -bid, -ais is occasionally used in YAv. as general plural case, e. g. azdbid (as acc. neut. Yd. 6.49) — vis paid (nom. Yt. 8.48), sraes/dsd (Yt. 22.9), tyra fstrdis (as acc. Ys. 19.2), etc. § 230. (2) The mv-stems have also the neuter plural in q()i) some- times used as general plural case, see § 308. § 231. (3) An ending -is, -its (like orig. fern, pi.) is sometimes employed in nouns and adjectives as general plural case, acc. as well as iustr., e. g. GYAv. ndmSnis (as acc.) Yt. 1.11 and (as instr.) Ys. 51.22 68 Inflection: Declension of Nouns mid Adjectives. — Vs x 5 2, YAv. afaouij Vsp 21.3, suvavlmUis Vd. 19.37, ? ouhiis Vsp. 6. 1 , GAv. aviujiius (as iustr.) Vs. 12.4, 1 dius Vs. 12.4. § 232. Interchange of Neuter with Feminine forms. Closely connected with this instability in the plural (espe- cially neuter) is the interchange between neuter and femi- nine forms, as the neuter plural (occasionally also the sin- gular) often shows the closest analogy to the feminine. Instances of this interchange are abundant, e. g. <7- a eel. vmaiiMH (non;, acc. sg. neur.) ‘house’, beside which nindnd) (acc. pi., cf. fem.), mnandha (loc. pi., cf. fem.); aicrtm (nom. acc. sg. neul.) ‘cloud , mvraj (nom. pi., cf. fem V — ah-stzm avaahu (gen. sg.) ‘of aid’, GYAv. avahydi (dat. sg. fem.). — Similarly stem bar*?, ah- (neut.) beside bar* zd- ‘height’, et a!. — Adjective combinations tisaro sata ‘three hundred. , vispdhu karfrohu^n ail climes’, shrascodritts Ivor* pa* ‘steaming viands'. See also. Johannes Schmidt, PluralbiUitngeu p. 29 seq. § 233. Interchange of cases in their functions. The cases in their usage are not always so sharply distinguished in YAv. as in Sanskrit. Sometimes a case may take upon itself the functions that belong properly to another, e. g. dative in genitive sense, etc. A discussion of the question, however, belongs to Syntax. § 234. Transition in Declension. Transfers of in- flection in parts of some words from one declension to another, especially in general from the consonant declen- sion to the 77-declension, arc not infrequent in Avesta A word may thus follow one declension in the majority of its cases, but occasionally make up certain of its forms quite after another declension. Examples arc numerous and are of two kinds. (a) The simple unchanged stem is used, but given the endings of another declension much the commonest ca.-e, e g. stem ia'dyaiit- imploring with dat sg. ja' dyavt-ai ui-decl.) instead ot ^ja^lyatil-c / tachit-qm acc. sg. f, et al. Vowel Class: — (i) Stems in a. 69 (b) The stem itself is remodelled and made to con- form to another declension, thus really giving a new stem, e. g. sravah- ‘word with instr. pi. sravtiis (stem srava-) instead of *srav§bis cf. gen. pi. sravawkqm. The case is much less common. § 235. Stem-gradation. In A vesta, as in Sanskrit — cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §311 — the stem of a noun or ad- jective, especially in the consonant declension, often shows vowel- variation, strongest, middle or strong, and weak forms, a, a,—, -ay-, -ay-, -i-; -au-. -ao-, -u-; -tir 3 -, -ar 3 -, -r-, -ar 3 -; -writ-, -ant-. -at- [=--nt]; -tin-, -an-, -n-; etc. (cf. § 60). The strong and strongest forms appear commonly in Singular Nom. Acc. Loc. , in Dual Notn. Acc., and in Plural Nom., of the Masc. and Fern., and in the Plural Nom. Acc. of the Neuter. The remaining cases are weak, but there is much overlapping in this matter of stem- gradation. The distinctions are not always so sharply- drawn as in Sanskrit. A. STEMS IN VOWELS. i. Stems in a. Masculine and Neuter (cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 330). 1 . MASCULINE. § 236. Av. yasna- m. ‘worship, sacrifice’ = Skt. yajna-. Av. mazda-ycsna-, 1 * daeva-yasna - 1 'worshipper of Mazda, of Demons'; ahum- ‘Lord, Ahura’; vira- ‘man’ ; haoma- ‘haoma-plant’. 1 The forms with 0 e. g. 0 yasna are from mazda-yasna-, daeva-yasna-. The forms in parentheses do not actually occur, but are made up after the forms beside them — so throughout below. 70 Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. yasn-0 ... yajtt-ds A. yasn-sm yajn-dm I. yasn-a yajii-a (Ved.) D. yasn-ai yajn-dya Abl. yasn-df yajn-dt G. yasn-ahe yajn-dsya L. yesn-e 1 * ya jn-i V . (yasil-a) ahura . . . yajii-a Dual: N.A.V. (yasn-a ) vira yajA-a (Ved.) I.D.Abl. (yasn-ac‘bya ) virae'bya yajn-abhyam G. (yasn-ayd >) vtraycB yajA-dyos L. (yasn-ayd ) zastayo — Plural : N.V. yasn-a yajn-ds °-C0r)ho -na- ‘jaw’. Av. cf. Skt. Sg. N.A.V. vastr-am vdstr-am Du. N.A.V. (vastr-e) havuhar*ne vdstr-r PI. N.A.V. vastr-a vdstr-d (Ved.) Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 238. In general, GAv. lias the same forms as above, with long final vowel, cf. § 26. 1 cf - § 34 - Vowel Class: — (i) Stems in a. 7 * i. MASCULINE. § 239. Singular: — Nom. : YGAv. yasnas-ca . — Quite late, the forms of nom. sg. in -a, -e Yt. 1.8,12 seqq. and occasionally in the Vd.- Acc. : YAv. also mafim ‘mortal’ (i. e. -ya-m, § 63); dacum ‘demon’ (i. e. -va-m § 63). — GAv. also ma$Tm ‘mortal’ (i. e. -ya-m); also any 3 m, §§ 3 2 i 2 9i beside a^nrm ‘alium’ ; fra$ 3 m ‘proue, ready’. Instr. : YAv. also baepape ‘with own’ (- e — -ya, § 67). Abl. : YA yasnaa{-ca (§ 53 iv).— Also miprada ‘from Mithra’ (-«/-)- a, § 222) Yt. 10.42; sraojtSda ' from obedience’; Itfaprada ‘by the sovereignty’ Ys. 9.4. — Also hupafytd£ haca panvand / 'from well-drawn bow’ § 19. Gen.: YAv. viistryehe ‘of a husbandman’ (§ 34). — GAv. has only -hya e. g. yasnahya, vastryehya, or -hya (before -ca ‘que’ § 133) e. g. ahtfiya-ca. Loc. : YAv. zqpae-ca ‘and in birth’ (§ 55). — With postpos. a § 222, umanaya ‘in the house’ (-ae-\-a ). — Also (sporadic) ra'pya ‘in a chariot’ Yt. 17.17. — Again (rare) ma’dyoi ‘in medio’ Vd. 15.47; — but (often in com- pounds § 56) maidyoi °. — GAv. yesnc, as above. — Also (common) zqpdi ‘in birth’ § 50. § 240. Dual:— N.A.V. : YAv. also (but not common) gavo ‘both hands’, yaskv ‘two sick- nesses’, § 42. I.D.Abl : YAv. also gao$a ; we beside gacjiaciue ‘with both ears’ (§§ 85, 67), padave ‘with both feet’ (§§ 87, 67). — GAv. ranoibya ‘with both allies’. Gen. : YAv. havanayws-ca ‘of both haoma-mortars’. § 241. Plural: — Nom.: YAv. also (not common) atH 3 $CB ‘immortals’ (-a- ‘hymn". A. Derivative Stems in a. FEMININE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. daen-a .... scn-a A. daen-cpn . . . . sen-am I. daen-aya , en-aya D. daen-ayai sen-ayai Abl. (' daen-ayai ) urvarayut see gen. G. daen-aycii . . sen-Ryas G- (daen-aya) grivaya sen -ay am V. daen-e sen-e Dual: N.A.V. (daen-e) urva‘re sen-e I.D.Abl. (daen-abya) vqbioabya sin-abhyam G. (daen-aya)) nadkayre 1 scn-ayos Plural : N.V. daen-m sen-as A. daen-a) sJn-as I. daen-a bis . sen-abhis D.Abl. daen-dbyo . .... . . . sin-abhyas G. (daen-ampn) urvaranqm sen-dndm L. (daen-dhu) urvarShu sen-dsu -ahva gSpdhva — Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 244. In general, GAv. has the same forms as above, with the long final vowel, cf. § 26. § 245. Singular: — Norn. : YAv. also me re ‘manly’ (fern, adj., -e = -ya, § 67) = Skt. ndrya . — 1 See llaug, Zand-Faidavi Glossary p. 100 1 . 23. Vowel Class: — (2) Stems in a. 73 Again some atljs. and nouns, like the pronominal declension, have -e for -a: Av. nd‘)ike (nom.) beside naWika ‘woman’, apdr’nayiikc ‘maiden’, p}r*ne ‘plena’ beside acc. p>r (i) * 3 nqm. — GAv. also b)r 3 Ijfe ‘dear, welcome’. Instr. : YAv. also daena . — Also (isolated) s u-wty a ‘with a ring’ beside acc. suwyqut, cf. Skt. subhrdya, subhram. — GAv. duenS ; — also sasnaya ‘by command’. Dat. : YAv. also (rare) gaepyai ‘for the world' Ys. 9.3 seq. ALL: In GAv. wanting— its place supplied by gen. Gen.: YAv. dacnayms-ca § 124 Note. — GAv. (exceptional) vahyfo Ys. 43.13 from zudryo- ‘desirable’ (lor vabyaym § 104 trissyllable). Voc. : GAv. pbuructstd O Pourucista’, spetita f ‘O holy one’. § 246. Dual: — Acc. : YAv. (rare) vqpwo, ‘flocks’ (rt-decl.). § 247. Plural : — N.A.V. : YGAv. duencBs-ca. Dat. (Abl.): YAv. urvarabyas-ca ‘and from trees’. — Also gaepuvyd ‘from beings’, vuijnduyo ‘from plagues’ Ys. 68.13, § 62 Note 3. — Again (but uncommon) haendbyd ‘from hosts’ Yt. 10.93 (analogy to the following word draomSbyd). Gen.: YAv. (not common) ‘of woman’ (-4- § 45) — Without in- serted u (-q>n for - anqm ) naWikqm ‘of woman’. Loc. : GAv. (only -hu\ ad anil ‘in rewards’. B. Radical Stems in a. § 248. Stems with radical a, so far as they have not gone over to the ordinary a, a declension, are represented by a few forms (a) masculine and neuter, (b) feminine. (i) Masculine and Neuter (cf. Lanman, Noun Infection in the Veda p. 443 seq.). § 249. Declension of Av. rapaedtS- m. ‘warrior standing in chariot’ — Skt. rathes(ha- (part of its forms, however, are from the stem rapaestnr-, cf. Skt. sir,’yes(har -\ — The forms from radical rapae-sta- are: — Singular. Nom. rapaestes ; Acc. rabaestqm ; Dat. rapoidte (cf. Skt. dhiyq-dhi, and on oi cf. § 56), rapaistai (a-decl., cf. Skt. raihesf/idya'j ; Gen. rapaedttS. — Plural. Acc. rapacstws-cd. Note 1. The forms from stem rapaestar- are enumerated at § 330. Note 2. Similar, dat. sg. neut. poi 'for protecting’; cf. also vdi. 74 Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. (ii) Feminine (cf. Whitney, .S kt. Gram. § 351). § 250. Here belong a few forms: — Singular. Nom. /ai ‘joyous’, aktp ‘judgment’; Acc. mqm ‘measure’ Vd. 5.61; Yt. 5. 127; Instr. jya ‘with bowstring’. — Plural. Nom. jytii ‘bowstrings’. 3. Stems in i and i. Masculine , Feminine and Neuter (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 339, 364). A. Derivative Stems in original i. i. MASCULINE — FEMININE. § 251. Av. . ^ j-ffj ga l ri- m. ‘mountain’ = Skt. girl-. Av. afyti- f. ‘sickness’, pa‘tisld‘/i- f. ‘opposition’, nmand.paUi - m. ‘lord of house’, ar/ira.pa‘ti- in. ‘teacher’, aii- f. ‘Rectitude, Blessing’, afi- n. ‘eye’. Av. Singular : cf. .Skt. N. g ah' -is gir-is A. gair-im gir-im I. (ga‘r-i) r.hti gir-i (Ved.) D. (gai'-Jc) pahiitatie gir-dye Abl. gar-oil see gen. G. gar-dis gir-cs L. gar-a gtr-ii (Ved.) V. (gah'-e) nmdno.paHe gir-e •l asi — Dual : N.A.V . (ga‘r-i) alpra.pa’li gir-i I.D.Abl. (ga l r-lbya) asibya .... . . . gir-ibhySm Plural: N. gar -ay 5 A. ga'r-is D.Abl. ga‘r-ibyd G. gah'-inqm ii. NEUTER (Separate Forms). § 252. Av. bafri- n. ‘richness’, zarapi/stri- (adj.) gir-dyas gir-in m., -is f. gir-ibhyd 'gir-inam ‘Zoroastrinn’. Sg. N.A.V. bu‘r-i cf. Skt. bh&r-i PI. N.A.V. ( bulr-i ) zarapuMri bh&r-i Vowel Class: — (3) Stems in i and t. 75 Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 253. In general, GAv. has the same forms as above, with the long final vowel, cf. § 26. § 254. Singular: — Acc. : In metrical passages , -im (cf. § 23) is sometimes dissyllabic , cf. Geldner, ■ Metrik p. 15. Dat. : YAv. pa l tistatayae-ca ‘and for withstanding’.— GAv. has -aydi YAv. -aye- § 56) e. g. afloyoi ‘for sickness’ (on 0 sec § 39 Note). — Also from weak stem GAv. paipyae-cd (YAv. pape Yl. 17.58) ‘and to the husband’ = Skt. patye, cf. Lanman , Noun Inflection p. 400. — Also inf. GAv. mruite ‘to speak’, stoi ‘for being’, YAv. stc ‘for being’, taruidite and tardiditi ‘for despising’. Abl. : In GAv. wanting i. e. its place supplied by gen. Gen. : YAv. seldom dhitycd ‘of sickness’ (like z-decl., but variant dhitaydb). — Also darqyoil ‘of daring’ Yt. 14.2. Loc. : YAv. likewise gard ‘on the mountain’ Vd. 21.5 = Skt. girau (on 0 see § 42). — GAv. regularly vidata ‘at the judgment’. §255. Plural:— Nom. : YAv. also (from strongest stem) staomayo ‘praises’. Acc.: YAv. also (-i's for -is, § 21 Note 1) istil-ca 'and wishes’- et al. — Also (from middle stem) gar ay 0. — GAv. also (from middle stem) drmatayO — likewise (with -is) ustis ‘desires’. Gen. : YAv. also (from weak stem without inserted n) kaoyqm (i. e. *kav- y-qm, § 224) ‘of Kavis’. § 256. Observe also the declension of hafyi- m. ‘friend’ = Skt. s&khi-, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 343 a. — Strong stem -ay-, mid. st. -ay-, wk. st. -y-. Singular. Nom. hafyi ; Acc. °ha\dim (i. e. -ay tin, § 65) Ys. 46.13; Inslr. hayi (§ 162); Dat. — Dual. N.A.V. hajfa. — Plural. Nom. ha\ayn, haliaya; Acc. ha^ayo, hafpiya; Gen. halqm (§ 162). Note. Transfers from the 1 -declension to the a-declension occur: e. g. from Av. vi- m. ‘bird’ — Skt. vi-, Du. lustrum, vayas'i’ya.— PI. Abl. vayac‘/yus-ca; Gen. vayanam (beside the regular /-deck forms vis, vis nom. sg. Yt. 13.3; Vd. 2.42; vavd nom. pi. and vayqm gen. pl.). Inflection : Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. 76 B. Derivative Stems in original i. ^Cf. W hitney. Sxt. Gram. § 364.) FEMINISE. § 257. Av. ayaoni- fem. to asavan- 'righteous’. Av. 3 >*jar>j>ri- f. bearer, mother', fiaoiii f. ‘fatness’, chizanahi f. 'giving birth’, fyfapri- f. ‘female’. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. a$aon-i dev-i A. ajaon-itn dtv-im 1. (tl § il 0)1 ~V tl) 3 r 9 ja*/ya dcv-yd D. asaonydi dev-yai Abl. (a$aon-yaf) bar*J>ryat see gen. G. a'$aon-ycu dcv-yds L. a$avan-aya CO' dsz-yim V. a$aon-i dh-i Dual : N.A.V. (a$aon-i) fjaoni dev-i (Ved ) I.D.Abl. (asaou-ibya) fiuoni’.ya div-ibhyani Plural : N. asaon-is dev-U (Ved.) A. ay ao u~is dev-U I. ( asaon-lbis ) Szizanahibis dev-ibhis D.Abl. ayaon-ibyo dev-ibbyas G. ayaon-i/iqm ieu-in&m L. (a§a 01 l-isu) fyfaf>ri$u dev-fsu -t{Va fyCaprifua — Forms to he observed in GAv. and YAv. § 258. In general, GAv. lias the same forms as above, with the long final vowel, cf. § 26. § 259. Singular: — On varying 1, i see § 2t Note I. Nora. : GAv. has asduni Vs. 53.4. Instr. : So GAv. vavhuya ‘with good', vahehxa ‘with better’, and mahiyd ‘with thought’, cf. Dat. mahiyai Vs. 43.9. 1 Yl. 5.54. uncertain, cf. § 6b Note 3. Vowel Class: — (4) Stems in u and it. 77 Gen.: YAv. drvatycos-ca God of the wicked' (tenu); — also astvtdpyd 'of the corporeal’ (according to cons. dec!.). Voc. : YAv. sometimes ( e according to f-decl.): agaone ; ahurane 'O Ahuran’. § 260. Plural: — Nom. Acc. : YAv. also -is (cf. § 21 Note) bamttis ‘bearing’ Yt. 8.40, gysUig ‘havocking, bloody’ Yt. 10.47. — Also (like Ski. Jetty ns) listryenyo, tigtryenyas-ca ’wives of Tishtrya’. Gen. : YAv. vauuhtnqm 'of the good’ (observe :) is sometimes written. C. Radical Stems in original 1. Feminine Nouns and Adjective Compounds m. f. n. !cf. Whitney, Ski. Gr. 35 r 35 2 ' § 261. Here belong a few words chiefly monosyllables — mostly mere roots: Singular. Nom. I»r 3 zai-dis ‘high-spirited’, ?r>i J -jTs ‘right-living’ ; Acc. yavae-jim ‘ever-living’; Instr. sraya ‘by beauty’; Dat. 3i > i 3 -jyui. ‘for the right- living’; Gen. sruvcS ‘of beauty’, fygyd, r/gayas-ta *of destruction’; Loc. ayaoi- dya ('1 ‘in impurity’. — Plural. Nom. frvo ‘blessings’; Acc. varga-jlg (m.) ‘buds’, yavac-jyo ‘ever-living’ - Dat. yavae-jibyS. 4. Stems in u and it.. Masculine, Feminine and Neuter (cf. Whitney, Ski. Gr. § 341, 304). A. Derivative Stems in original it. i. MASCULINE — FEMININE. § 262. Av. mahiyu- m. ‘Spirit’ — Skt. many it-. Av. zartlu- rn. ‘tribe’, ragine- m. ‘justice’, vauhu- ‘good’, past!- m. ‘small cattle’, aohn - m. ‘life’, bargnu- 1. ‘head, top’, ydtii- in. ‘place, bed’ Av. Singular : cf. Skt. N. mahiy-us . many- us A. mahiy-um many -nm I. (mohiy-.Q s a>itu many -iinn, -id 1). mahiy-ave many -due Abl. mahiy-aot see gen. 1 wahiv-ms \ G. manv-us ( -aos rav* aoi ! L. (ma'ny-dit) vauhdu (GAv.) . many -da V. mahiy -5 rnany-d 78 Inflection ; Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. Av. Dual ; cf. Skt. N.A.V. mahiy-u, -u I.D.Abl. ( mahiy-ubya ) pa.su/ya . . . . many-ubhyam G. mahii-vd ) 1 L. ( nia‘ni-vd ) aulivO (GAv.) .... — Plural : N. (ma l ny-avo) /ar/navo . . . . many-dvas A. ( mahiy-us) bar snu/ many-un m., -its f. D.Abl. (mahiy-ubyo) gat wye . . . . many-ttbhyas G. (ina‘ny-unq.ni) va n tu»q,n . . . • many-undm L. ( mahiy-ufu ) va*>!n,$u . . matty-usu -U$va barjpnufua .... — ii. NEUTER (Separate Forms). § 263. Av. vohu- ‘good’ = Skt. vdsu-. cf. Skt. Sg. N.A.V. Voh-U vds-u PI. N.A.V . Voh-U vds-u, -u Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 264. In general, GAv. has the same forms as above, with the long final vowel, cf. § 26. i. MASCULINE — FEMININE. § 265. Singular. — A'om. : YAv. also (from strongest stem) ujra.banTud strong-armed’ Yt. 10.75 < iiar*jd.bazaui ‘long-armed’ Yt. 17.22. Acc. : YAv. also (from strongest stem) vasuutn (i. e. -avjm, § 65) ‘corpse’, gar'mdum ‘heat’ ; — again (from strong stem) da’yhaom (i. e. -av?in, § 64) ‘nation, country’. Instr. : Less common ir.str. (weak stem -{-) ending d: YA. fyrajnva, GAv. \rapioa ‘by wisdom’; YAv. p?r ! pwa Yd. 9.2 ; GAv. cicipwa ‘through the wise one’ -= Skt. cikitva (fr. cikilti-'). — Also (orig. gen. or cf. § 39) YAv. ftni.drvo ‘with spear of havoc’; rufnvo ‘with Rashnu' Yt. 14.47. Pat. : YAv. also (from weak stem) rap we, rapwae-ca ‘to the Master’, — observe (also from weak stem) YAv. auuhe (i. e. orig. *asv-c) ‘for 1 See §§ 68 b, 62. Vowel Class : — (4) Stems in u and v. 79 life’ Ys. 55.2, GAv. ahuyc (i. e. orig. s astt-v-S , § 190) ‘for life’ Vs. 41.6. — Observe also GAv. haetaove variant baelaoe Ys. 53.4 beside bae- tave Ys. 46.5, cf. YAv. variant hraetaoe beside hactavt ‘for kindred’ Ys. 20.1, cf. § 61. Abl. : In GAv. wanting— i. e. its place is supplied by the gen. as in Skt, Gen. : (a) Also (from strongest stem) YAv. fiazdus ‘of the arm’, GAv. nur’pyduS 'of death’. — .Again (from strongest stem -)-) ending 0: YAv. nasdvo ‘of a corpse’; — and (from weak stem -j- o) YAv. rap wo ‘of the Master’. — -(b) The interchange in the gen. ending - 3 us, -no} is connected perhaps with an original difference of accent : e. g. observe Av. vavhdus, a a ho us — Skt. vasos, asos (unaccented ultima), and Av. /ayaof , gar’naoS — Skt. tayos , gpdhnos (accented ultima) et al. Exceptions depend perhaps upon a shift of the accent. Loc. ; (a) The above loc. in -du is Gatha locative, cf. also Ys. 62.6 vavhau (Gatha reminiscence). —Similarly, GAv. pdr^ttB ‘at the bridge’ Ys. 51.13; fyratcB ‘in judgment’ Ys. 48.4. The regular YAv. loc. is formed in 0 (weak stem -|- 6 , orig. gen.?), e. g. ahmi zaiilvo ‘in this tribe’ Ys. 9.28, galvo ‘on a couch’, da'yhvd ‘in the country’, aohvd ‘in the world’. — (b) Observe Vsp. 12.5 da‘p/10 = Skt. dasyau, cf. § 42 (but see variants), Av. haetd ‘at the bridge’ - Skt. selau ; Av. varHaflo Vd. 8.4 — and GAv. porno Ys. 51.12.— With postpositive a and strong stem: YAv. anhava ‘in the world’ Yt. 6.3; gatava ‘in place’ Ys. 65.9. Voc. : YAv. occasionally ratvo ‘O Master’, or’zvb ‘0 righteous one’, rnfnvo ‘O Rashnu, Justice’. § 266. Dual: — I.D.Abl. : YAv. also bazuwe ‘with both arms’, cf. §§ 67, 85 a. § 267. Plural: — Nom. : YAv. also with ending a, § 224 (from strong stem) gatava ‘couches’. — With regular ending 0 (from strongest stem) nasdvo ‘corpses’, (from weak stem) pasvas-ca ‘small cattle’. — Observe Yt. 14.38 dus.ma‘nyid ‘enemies’ (nom. ph). Ace. ; YAv. also {-its, § 21 Note 1) harbius ‘heights’ ; pauyus ‘many’ Yt. 8.49; daiyhits ‘countries’ Yt. 8.9.— Again with ending a, § 224 (from strong stem) harpnava. — Ending d like nom. (from strongest stem) nasdvo ‘corpses’, (from strong stem) gdtavd ‘places’, (from weak stem) pasvd ‘small cattle’. Dat. Abl.: YAv. hinuhayo ‘from fetters’ Yt. 13.100 = Yt. 19.86. Gen.: YAv. also (without inserted ti) vanhvqm ‘of the good’, rapwqm ‘of Masters’; ydpwqm ‘of sorcerers’. — Observe the variant -ilnqm iox-ieuqm (§ 21 Note 1) occurs, e. g. variant vohunqm Ys. 65.12 etc. I.oc. : GAv. (only. -1?) po H rttsu ‘among people’. 8o Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Aiijectives. ii. NEUTBK. § 26S. Plural: — X.A.V. YAv, t with ft: asrft “tears’. — Also za/rao ‘knees’ occurs. — Observe u in asrti ‘tears’ Yt. 10.3S, cf § 2 5 Note. § 269. Occasional transfers to the a -declension are found: — e. g. Sg. Gen gntvake ‘of the place’; Dat. hiikrai ‘for the dry’. §270. Declension of Av. day hit-, duhyu- f. 'nation, country', cf. Skt. dasyu- §:j 135. I33 - — Singular. Nom. dct'y/utJ; Acc. 1 tafyhaom (i. c. -1 ivtm §64), dakyitrn (GYAv.); instr. didy/iu ; Dat. da'yiiave ; Abl. da'yhaol: Gen. dayhS/tH (Y Av.), datyJnf (GAv.) ; Loc. day Jive . — Dual. Nom. da'yhu (Yt. 10.8,47), dahyu 1 Yt. 10.107). — Plural. Nom. Voc . dayha.e, did y have ; Acc. dtdrdtus, dti’yhdpo ; Gen. dulfyiwqm (GYAv.). B. Derivative Stems in original u. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 356.) These are not sharply to be distinguished from A in Avesta, nor are they numerous. As example may be taken FEMININE. § 27 1. Av. tanii f. ‘body = Skt. tana-. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. tan- id tan-fa A. tan-vim (GAv.), tan-urn (GYAv.) . tun -vain, t'jn-um I. tan-va ] . lan-va D. tan-uye (GYAv.) tun- vi Abl. tun-vat see gen. G. ta/l-VO . tan-vas Plural : N.A. tan-VO tan-vas I. (tan-ub/S) hhubis (GAv.) lan-uhhts D.Abl. tan-ubyo tun-nblmc G. tan-unqm ian-unam L. tan-HfU tan-usu Forms to he observed in OAv. and YAv. § 272. Metrically, the v in tanvSm etc. ii to be re- solved into u as in Sanskrit. 1 See Aogamadaccd 48 p. 25 ed W. Geiger. Vowel Class : — (5) Diphthongal Stems. 8l § 273. Singular:— Dal. : Observe tanvcie-ca Iiaug, Zand-Pahlavi Glossary p. 52. 9. Abl. : YAv. a'so tanaol like «-decl. Gen.: G(Y)Av. tanvas-cig — also GAv. hizv tS ‘of the tongue’ Ys. 45.1, cf. Skt. vadhvas. § 274. Plural:— N.A.V. : YAv. tanvas-ca. C. Radical Stems in original u. Masculine Nouns and Adjective compounds (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 355 c end, § 352.) §275. Here belong a very few root words: — Singular. Norn, (with- out s) anil (GAv.) , ahu (VAv.) 'Lord' ; dyii (neut. GAv ) ‘duration’ ; Acc. ahum. — Plural. Acc. anhvas-cd (GAv.). — Similarly (nom. sg. without s') apsiradyu ‘youth’, framru or °mril ‘pronouncing’. — Add dative -bays ‘to become’. §276. Declension of yii n. ‘duration, ever’: — Singular. Instr. (adv.) yave (YAv.), yard (GAv.) ; Dat. yave, yavae-ca (YAv.), yave or yaove, yavoi (GAv.); Gen. yard. 5. Diphthongal Stems. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 360 seq. i. Stems in di. § 277. Av. red, rae- f. ‘splendor’ = Skt. rat-. Singular. Acc. raem (i. e. ray-?m § 64); Instr. ray a. — Plural. Acc. rayo (GAv.), also raes-ca (YAv. § 64 Note); Gen. rayqm. ii. Stems in au. § 278. Av. gdu-, gao- m. f. ‘cow’ = Skt. gdu-. Singular. Nom. (Voc.) ydus, gao3; Acc. gqm, or rare gaum, gaom (i. e. gdv-sm §§ 64, 65); Instr. gava; Dat. gave (YAv.), gavfd (GAv.); Abl. gao£; Gen. grus. — Dual. N.A.V. gava (GAv.); Gen. °gavdt . — Plural. Nom. gavo 1 ; Acc. geo ; Instr. gaobis; Gen. gavam. Note. Similarly Sg. Nom. hipdus, Acc. hijxim ‘ally’ Ys. 48.7, 34.10. 6 1 See Aogemadalca 84 p. 28 ed. W. Geiger. 82 Inflection • Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. B. STEMS IN CONSONANTS. 6. (A) Stems without Suffix. Root-words and those inflected like them. Masculine, Feminine and Neuter (cf. 'Whitney, Skt. Gr. §§ 383, 39 r). § 279. Av. vis- f. ‘village’ = Skt. vis-. Av. spas- ni. ‘spy’, amsr’tap- f. ‘Immortality’, ast- n. ‘bone’, na:- ‘misfortune’. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N.V. (VIS) spas vit A. vis- 3 1H vis-ant I. vis- a vis-a D. vis-e vis-i Abl. vis-Clf see gen. G. vis-d vis-as L. vis-i vis-i Dual: N.A.V. (vis-a) anur’tata ... vis-au I.D.Abl. (viz 1 -by a) amirKadbya vid-bhyam G. (vis-d)) anur^tatm vis-os Plural: N.V. (VIS-0) spaso vis-as A.. Vis-d vis-as I. (VIZ 1 -bis) a:d‘bis vid-bhis 13. viz 1 - by d vitj-bbyds G. vis-qm vis -dm L. (visit) ndpu (GAv.) vik-su Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 2S0. In general, GAv. has the same forms as above, with the long final vowel, cf. § 26. § 28 1. Singular: — Nom. : GYAv. dru\s ‘Fiend’ § 192, ba»rvalas ‘Perfection, Salvation’ (-tas i. e. -tSt-s § 192)1 db.>r 3 s title of priest (-/ — j— j), Niraugistan. Acc. : YAv. also drujirn ‘Fiend’ {-im — -sm ij 30). — GAv. also drujim § 30 and kihrpim ‘body’ § 32). Consonant Class: — (6) Stems without Suffix. 83 Dat. : YAv. yavaetatae-ca ‘and for eternity’.-— GAv. also (-« more common than -c § 56) mazOi ‘for the great’. Abl. : In GAv. wanting — i. e. its place supplied by the gen. as in Skt. Gen.: GAv. also maz ? ‘of the great’ (-/ = orig. -as § 32). Loc. : YAv. also apya 'in water’ (a‘pi-\-a § 222), ustataHya ‘in the word usta' (ptaki -4- a § 222). — GAv. has simply i: amdr 3 la‘lt ‘in Im- mortality’. § 282. Dual: — I.D.Abl, : Solitary YAv. brvalbyqtn ‘both brows’. § 283. Plural:— Norn. Acc. : YAv. also (with ending -a § 224) vaca, vaca. Neut. pi. acc. asti ‘bones’ Yt. 13. 11 (variant as/a, but see § 283 Note). Loc. : GAv. as above najjii and (§ 26 Note) nafiu-ca 'among descendants’. Note. Transfers to the tf-decl. are numerous e. g. Sg. Nom. hvar 3 .dar 3 s-d ‘sun-like’, Skt. svar-drs ; Acc. (neut.) ast-tm ‘bone’ ; Abl. visap or v/sdda ‘from a village’ Yt. 13.49. — Ph Acc. (neut.) asla ‘bones’; Loc. like 5 -dec 1. bar’iahu ‘on the heights’. With stem-gradation (Strong and Weak). Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 385 seq. § 284. The strong and weak forms are distinguished by a variation in the quantity of the stem- vow el (as long or short) or by its elision, again by the presence (strong) or absence (weak) of a nasal. For examples see the following declensions. § 285. (i) Declension of Av. vakic- m. ‘voice, word’ (strongest stem -d-, strong -a-) = Skt. vakic- f. (no vowel variation), cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram.. § 391 : — Singular. Nom. vafys; Acc. vacsm, vdcim ; Instr. vaca; Gen. vaca (Ys. 31.20). — Dual, vajzdya-ca. — Plural. Nom. vaca, vaca (ending a cf. vowel decl. §224); Acc. vaco, vacas-ca, vaca; Dat. Abl. vaji‘- byo; Gen. vacqm. Note, (a) The dat. du. and pi. (pada-endings) seem to derive their s (i) from the nom. sg. vdJ/J. — (b) Observe the form vajys as gen. Ys. 8.1. § 286. (ii) Declension of Av. ap- f. ‘water’ (strongest stem ap-, strong stem ap-) = Skt. dp- f. (stems dp-, ap-) Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 393 : — 8 4 Inflection: Declension of Nor ns and Adjectives. Singular. Mom. afi ; Acc. apem, ap)»i-ca g 19; Instr. apa-ca ; A hi. npa(, apaat-ca («-decl.); Gen. apd, apas-ca, apd; Loc. at py a (-/ -f- a § 222). — Dual, apa, ape (Gah 4.5 li-decl.). — Plural. Norn. apd, apas-ca § 19 ; Acc. apd, apas-ea, apd; Dat. a‘wyd; Gen. apqm. Note. The dat. pi. afuyd is for orig. *abbiiyas § 186. § 287. (iii) Declension of aiic - stems (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 408, 409): — Singular. Nom. frqi ‘forward’ ; Acc. °iiya>q:?m Mown’ ; Instr. fraca (? Yt. io. 1 1 8 fraca aiti [p"'- -j- a] cf. Skt. fraca ), larasca ‘across’, cf Skt. ti rased instr. advbl. (Whitney § 309 d ) , pa«rvqtica ‘ad- vancing’ ; etc. § 288. Av. pap- m. ‘path’ = Skt. path- belongs partly here and partly under //-stems § 310 — which see. 7. (B) Derivative Stems in ant, mant, var L t. Participial Adjectives and Possessive s ( see Hartholomae, in K.Z. xxix. p. 4S7 seq. — Ftexionslehre p. 68 seq. — Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 441 seq., § 452 seq.) § 289. This subdivision of consonant stems includes: — (i) participial (and adjective) stems in a/it ; and (ii) pos- sessive adjective stems in matit, -vaiit. They are mascu- line and neuter; the corresponding feminine is made in a'OOti-. The stem shows vowel-gradation, strong stem a?if, weak stem at (from tit; also GAv. at, see § 1 8 Note). § 290. As to stem-gradation, (1) the adjective ant- stems generally show at in the weak (= Skt. weak) cases, (2) the participial (thematic) ant - stems show ant in almost ah forms. (3) The mant-, rant - stems agree with the ad- jective stems in showing at in the weak cases. A number of interchanges, however, between ali three occur — these interchanges are found chiefly in YAv. e. g. dat. du. ber*zanbya (from str. st.) Ys. 1.11; 3.13. i. MASCULINE. §291. ( i ) Adjective, Av. bar’zatit- ‘great’ = Skt. brhdnt-; (2) Participial, Av. fpuyatyt- Consonant Class : — (7) Derivative Stems in arit, mailt, varyi. ‘thrifty, raising cattle'; (3) Possessive, Av. astvant- ‘possessing bones, corporeal’ ; dragvaqt- (GAv.) ‘belonging to the Drui, follower of Satan’. (1—2) ant -stems: Av. katit- ‘being’; stavaiit- ‘praising’; £bij>yatit- ‘ hating’ ; agaolgayaiit- ‘increasing Righteousness’ ; (3) marit-, vaqt- s terns: drfgvaiit- (GAv.) , drvaiil (YAv.) ‘belonging to the Druj’, pwavaul- ‘like thee’, amavcnit- ‘mighty’, satavaqt- ‘hundred-fold’, po u rumar}.l- ‘multitudinous’, daevavant- ‘belonging to the Daevas’, cazdoipihvatil- ‘wise-in-heart’. (a) rr/^-Stems. (1) Adjective. (2) Participial. N. A. I. D. Abl. G. V. N.A.V. N.V. A. I. D.Abl. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. j I. bar^z-o • ■ 1 2.f$uy-qs 1 -as stav -as . . 1 bar 3 z-aqt-am bar*z-ata j 1 . bar^z-ade • • 1 1 2.f$uy-arite j bfh-ati I /. (bar 3 z-ataf) . ’ ) 1 2 . (f^uy-aritaf) pbijiyaiita£ ■ j see gen. 1 1 . bar ? z-atd ■ • 1 \ 2 . f$uy-aiito 1 b)h-alds ber?z-a Dual: ba^z-arita 1. 1 . bar’z-atibya 2 . (fs 11}' -Cl t Cl)) a$aoJgaya>itw ■ byh-atos Plural : . bar^z-aqto brh-antas I /. (bar } z-ato) hatd ■ ’ 1 1 2 .f$uy-aqtd t byh-alas (bar^z-adbis) hadbrf . . bj/i-ddbhis ( 1 . ( bar 3 z-adbyb ) ■ ■ i 1 2 . (fsuy-aqbyo) tbiffanbyo . . } b}'h-adbhyas 86 Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. j /. b.tr? z-atam I 2 . (Jsuy-antqm) tbityaqtqm .... L. (bsr^z-asu) f$uyasu (GAv.) . . bjh-dtsu (b) inaiit-, vaqt- Stems. (3) P o s s e s s i v e s. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. ( ast-vcv | -vqs pwdvqs | bhdga-van -va arncva J A. ast-vailUm ... bhdga-vantam I. (ast-vata) satavata ...... bhdga-vala 1). ast-va‘te bhaga-vate Abl. ast-vata} sec gen. G. ast-vatd bhdga-valas ( ast-vahiji 1 I -• | . . . j bhdga-vati l -man l po“ruma’ti ) V, (ast-VO) fir vd bhdga-van Plural : N.V. drog-vanto bhdga-vantas A. drzg-vato bhdga-vatas I. drsg-vdd^bis and dacvavafbis . . bhdga-vadbhis D.Abl. drsg-vdd^byd and cazdoii vhva d ? byo bhdga-vadbkyas G. dv sg-vatqm bhdga-vaUtm Iv. dmg-vasu b/idga-tatsu ii. NEUTER (Separate Forms). § 292. Av. haiit- ‘being 1 , as /vaqt- ‘corporeal’, afsmanivarit- ‘metrical’. Sg. N.A.V. (a) ha} (b) ast-vat . . of. Skt. bhdga-vat Pi. N.A.V. — afsmani-vqn . bhdga-vanti Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 293. In general, GAv. has the same forms as YAv., with the long final vowel, cf. § 26. § 294. (a) According to § 29, -21 it- or (after palatals § 30) -iiit- may be found instead of -aiii- : — Av. p at- silt- 2 m Consonant Class : — (7) Derivative Stems in aqt, marit, vaiit. ‘falling’, druz-ivit-sm ‘deceiving’, raoc-i){t-at (abl.) ‘shining’ et al. — (b) According to § 63, -hit-, -mit- may be found instead of -yarit-, -vatyt -: — Av. var’z-hit-sm beside vsr 3 z- ynrit-5 ‘working’, har^ncwh-wit-am ‘glorious’, tamcwh-mit-sm ‘dark’ Yt. 5.82, cf, Skt. tdmasvantam. !. MASCULINE. § 295. Singular:— Nom. : In YAv., the awAstems generally have nom. -a, and the z/awAstems have nom. -vis or -va or sometimes -vo, In GAv. the nom. is -qs or -as (for -at-s ). — Observe YAv. ptr’navo, astavo ‘possessing a feather, possessing a bone’ Yt. 14.36; also hq ‘being 1 Yt. 13.129, vyqsca ‘driv- ing’. — GAv. fpuyqs ‘thriving, prospering’, stavas ‘praising’, pwavqs ‘like thee’. — On UmawuheB ‘dark’, foar 3 navuhCb ‘glorious’ (for orig. -sv-) see § 130(2)0. Instr. : GAv. also drsgvala (observe a § 18 Note 3) ‘with the wicked’. Dat. : GYAv. also dr?gva ' l ti, drva‘te (observe a § 18 Note 3) ‘for the wicked’ Ys. 31.15 etc., Ys. 71.13.— On GAv. dr)gvhtae-ca, see § 19. Gen.; On har 3 navuhato ‘of the glorious’, see § 130(2)0. Loc. : Sometimes variant astvaHi. See furthermore below § 297. Voc. : Y’Av. drvo above is like nom. (see Nom.). § 296. Plural: — Nom.: YAv. with ending a § 224: bdr 3 za*ita ‘great’ Yt. 5.13, yatumarita ‘belonging to sorcery’ ; — also (isolated) weak stem nom. pi. mrvato ‘speaking’ Ys. 70.4. Acc. : YAv. also (observe strong stem) bn>zaitto ‘great'. Gen.: YAv. also (2 from weak stem) fliijSyatqM ‘of those hating’ Yt. 10.76. —Also GYAv. hatqm ‘of beings’ (observe a) § 18 Note 3. § 297. Transfers to the a- declension are not infrequent. Here belong : i. MASCULINE. Singular. Nom. bdr 3 zo above in paradigm, also Voc ,bir 3 za; Dat. zbayaqtai ‘for him invoking’; Abl. saopyaqtal ‘from Saoshyant’ ; Gen. I’aevaqtahe ‘of the radiant’ ; Loc. b 9 r s zaritaya or /»r 3 za>it a ya (uncertain see § 257) Yt. 5.54,57. — Plural. Dat. Abl. saopyaqiadbyo ‘for the Saoshyants’, drvatadbyu ‘from the wicked’.— ii. NEUTER. Singular. Acc. nar 3 cavhaqlnn et al. Yt. 19.9. § 298. Declension of Av. mazaql- ‘great’ — Skt . inahant-. This word shows a strongest stem mazaeql-, like Skt. mahant-. i.MASC. Singu- lar. Nom. tnaza, Acc. mazahqtsm ; ii. NEUT. mazap, cf. Skt. inahan, mahan- tam, mahat, Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 450 b. 88 Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. 8. (C) Derivative Stems in an, man, van. Masculine, (Feminine) and Neuter (cf. Whitney, Ski. Gr. § 420 seq.). § 299. The stem has a triple form: — strongest stem an, strong stem an, weak stem n (before vowels) or a (— n) before consonants. Cf. Brugmann, Grundriss der vergl. Gram. ii. § T13 — The strong and weak forms do not al- ways agree with the Sanskrit in its sharp division; cf. also Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 425 f. (a) an-, ;«tf«-Stems. i. MASCULINE. § 300. Av. a'ryaman- m. ‘friend - Skt. ar- yamdn- m. Av. mars man- n. ‘urine’, Igapan- f. ‘night’, mar*! an- m. ‘mortal’, cajfman- n. 'eye', prizafaii- ‘triple-jawed’, ajiavan- ‘righteous’, as an- m. ‘stone’, rasman- m. ‘rank, column’, daman- n. ‘creature’, arfan- ni. ‘male’, vyatyuan- n. ‘council’. Av. Singular . cf. Skt. N. ahyam-a aryiun-d A. a'ryam-amm aryam-dyam j | ahyam-na -ana macsmana ■ aryam-na ^ | ( ahyam-ahie ) 1 i -Tie lgafne ary am- rid Abl f C^ryam-nafj marina t { ...... 1 -anaf caj!mana[ ' sec gen. ( (a'ryam-nd ) 1 Gl i aryam-nds L. (ahyam-ahii) cafmabn (GAv.) . . . at yam-dni j ahyam-a -am prizafjm § 194 \ j dryam-an Dual: N.A.V. ahyam-ana .... . . a/yam-and (Yed.) l.D.Abl. (a l ryam-and 3 ) cayman^ dryani-anos 1 See Yd. 22.13. — s Thus, metrically aGyamnas- — 3 Vsp. i.S etc. ■id Ys. 33.4; 46.1. Consonant Class:— -(S') Derivative Stems in an, man, van. 89 Plural : N.V. ( (Vryani-and ) a(avano ar yam-anas M (ah- yam-no) fysafno -and rasmand aryam-nas I. (ahyam-Sbis) damsM aryam-abhis D.Abl. (ahyam-a by 5 ) damabyo arya/n-dmyas G - 1 (ahyam-nqm) argnqm -anqm rasmanqm .... aryam-ndm L . { (ahyam-dhu) vydJimohn 1 .... -ohva damohva .... aryam-dhn ii. NEUTER (Separate Forms). § 301. Av. nainan- n. ‘name’, cintnan- n. ‘attempt’. Sg. N.A.V. nqm-a nam-a | nam-q(n) pi. N.A.V. ndm-mi nam-ani I cinm-am (GAv.) 2 I Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 302. In general, GAv. has the same forms as above with the long final vowel, see § 26. § 303. Occasionally (1) instead of Av. d we find q before the n || 45) or (2) instead of a we find GAv. J (§ 32): — e. g. (1) Av. « rvqno ‘souls’; — (2) Gi\v. rnazSnd ‘with greatness’; GAv. asSno ‘stones, heavens’. § 304. On tlie interchange of strong (an) and weak (n) forms see § 299. i. MASCULINE. § 305. Singular:— Nom. : YAv. fravrase ‘Franrasyan’ {= °sya cf. § 67, acc. franrasyansni). Acc. : YAv. also (from strongest stem) havamimm title of priest; and (from weak stem) ar^nsm ‘male’. Instr. : GAv. also tnazSna § 303. Dat. : Similar (-ahic) infin. dat. n. YAv. f^nUmaUie ‘to rejoice’, staomahie ‘for praise’; GAv. liiqnmSnc ‘to be content’ § 303. — Observe d l 'wi.goiJ>ite Vd. 3.24. — From strongest stem YAv. puprane ‘having a child’. Gen. : GYAv. also (from strongest stem) mainland ‘of mortal’, havana.no. 1 Yt. 13.16, cf. § 39. — 2 Ys. 12.3. 90 Inflection : Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. Abl. : YAv. isolated iundeclined abl.) bar’s »un (neutA ‘with barsomb Loc.: YAv. aiso (from weak stem) asni ‘by day’ § 164 Note 1 .—and (from strongest stem) husravani ‘in good \vord’(?) Ny. 4.S. — GAv. also aif- ming, tofmqm (neut.) ‘in eye’ Ys. 31.13; Ys. 50.10, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 425 c. Yoc. : YAv. adryama (cf. Vd. 22.9) above in paradigm is like nonr. or after a-decl. § 306. Dual : — N.A.V. : YAv. also (from strongest stem § 314 Note 1 b) spana ‘two dogs’. § Plural: — Nom. : YAv. also (from strongest stem) asaao ‘stones’. With ending a § 224 (from strongest stem) arcana ‘males’, and (from weak stem) asna ‘stones’. Acc. : YAv. also (from strongest stem) asdno ‘stones’; GAv. nsind Ys. 30.5 cf. § 303. — With ending a § 224 (from strongest stem) arcana ‘males’. Dat. Abl. : YAv. also draomsbya ‘from assaults' § 33. ii. « Eli TEE. § 30S. Plural: — Nom. Acc. : The common ending is q(n) § 43 Note 2 : Av. namq(n), damqu, da 'H a m cf. Ys. 48.7, 46.6, etc. — Less frequent is the ending -am (- sni ), cf. Skt. -am . — Observe as dual and plural (like sing.) dqma Yt. 15.43; Ys. 71.6. — Perhaps here belong likewise maesma Vd. 8.11,12, et al., cf. Johannes Schmidt, Neulra pp. £9, 316, but see § 227 above. As general plural case, qn is also used: e. g. (as imtr.) Av. srirail ndiiiqti ‘by fair names’ Ys. 15.1, Vsp. 6.1 ; so damqn (as nom. pi.) Yt. 8.48, (as gen. pi.) Ys. 57.2, (as instr. pi.) Yt. 22.9. — As acc. pi. and gen. loc. singular ayqn. As general plural case, is (§§ 228, 331) is also used: e. g. (as instr.) k'Sis na/tiJnif ‘by their own names’ Ys. 15.2. § 309. Transfers to the a- declension are found. Here belong; Singular. Dat. syavarfanai ‘to Syavarslian’ ; Gen. arcana he ‘of a male’; Abl. ^afnaa^ca ‘night’. — Plural. Loc. asanaepua m. ‘on stones’. § 310. Declension of Av. paiitan-, pap- m. ‘path’ = Skt. panthan-, path- m. cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 433. This word follows partly the rz/i-declension (strongest stem pantan-, strong stem pantan- § 299), partly the suffixless consonant declension (weak stem pap- § 288). Consonant Class : — (8) Derivative Stems in an, man, van. Singular. Nom. paiqta, parqttB Ys. 72.11 ; Acc. paiitanrm, poqtqm , Instr. papa; Abl. patitap; Gen. papa; Loc. pa'pl (GAv.). — Plural. Nom. paqtano; Acc. papa, papa; Gen. papqm. Note. Transfers to the J-declension (fem.) are Sg. Acc. papqm ; Gen. papaya. — PI. Acc. pap®. § 31 1. Often, a neuter stem in an stands parallel with one in ar, see § 237, and Brugmann, Grundriss dcr vergl. Gram. ii. § 118. (b) z'tf/z-Stems. § 312. The f'tfw-stems are declined like those in an, man, but in the weak case-forms the va becomes (by sam- prasarana § 63) u, which coalesces with a preceding a into ao ( au § 62) or with a preceding u into u (it § 51 Note 1). § 313. (i) Declension of Av. a$avan- m. ‘righteous’ = Skt. rtavan- shows in weak cases a$aon-, a$aun (i. e. GAv. and cf. § 62 Note i). Singular. Nom. afava; Acc. ajavangni ; Dat. apaone, apaonae-ca, apaune (GAv. § 62 Note 1); Abl. agaonap; Gen. ajlaond, agaonas-ca (GAv.), agaimo (GAv.); Voc. apaum § 193. — Dual. Nom. Acc. Voc. asavana; Gen. ajSaona. — Plural. Nom. aSavand; Acc. ajtavand (str. stem YAv.), a gains o (wk. stem GAv.), asavana (ending a § 224); Dat. agavabyo (GYAv.), agavaoyo (YAv. § 62 Note 3) ; Gen. aj/aonqm, ajfaunqm (§ 62 Note 1). Note 1. Similar to agavan- is (a) the declension of GAv. magavan- (str. st.), mag 3 .ua- (wk. st.) m. ‘member of the community’, cf. Skt. rnaghd- van-, maghon- Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 428; — and (b) the declension of Av. apravan- (str. st.), apa u run- (wk. st. §§ 62, 19 1) m. ‘priest’ = Skt. dthar- van *. Observe Av. voc. sg. apraont § 193. Note 2. Transfers to the tf-uecl. are not infrequent : e. g. Dat. Du. a^avanae^bya. § 314. (ii) Declension of Av. "rvan- (i. e. u ruvan - §§ 68 b and 71 end) m. ‘soul’. This- has in weak case-forms "run- {u § 51 Note i). Singular. Nom. u rva ; Acc. u rvatum ; Instr. « runa ; Dat. « rune , n-runae-ca; Gen. “rund. — Plural. Nom. “rvqnv (§ 45); Acc. “runa, u runas-ca Ys. 63 . 3 , “rvqno (str. st.) ; Dat. » rvdibyd (rt-decl.). Note i. (a) Similar to « rvan - is the declension of Av. yvan- (i. e. yuvan- § 68 b, str. st.), yuu- (wk. st.) m. ‘youth’ = Skt. yuvan-, yun- m., 92 Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 427. — Observe Av. voc. sg. yum opp. 10 Skt. yuvan (§ 193). — (b) Similar also in Av. span- (triple stem span-, span-, stin- § 20) ra. ‘dog’ — Skt. svdu- (si’iin-, si'Gn-, sun-') m. f cf. W'hitney, Skt. Gram. § 427. — (c) Likewise Av. zrvan- 11. ‘lime’, dat. sg. 2 rune Yt. 5. 129. Note 2. 1 ransfers to the a - d e c 1 . are found : — e. g. gen. sg. suna/n beside stino; again gen. sg. trvanahe (stem zrvana-), loc. zrune Vd. 19.9 (stem zruna-, but cf. § 35 Note 2 or § 233). So above dat. pi. "rvditya (variant u rvae‘byo, after «-decl. instead of *»rvabyo). § 3 1 5 - ( a ) Forms to be observed are: YAv. nom. sg. ta»rvw ( van - stem) ‘overpowering 1 , cf. Bartholomae, in K.Z. xxix. p. 561 = Flexionslehre pp. 1 4 1 , 142. So sg. nom. prizaftb, acc. °ansm, voc. °jtu (stem orig. *zapv ; Acc. zqm; Instr. z 3 ma (§ 24); Dat. z 3 me (cf. also § 233); Abl. s 3 ma(, z*mada Yt. 7.4 (§ 222, a-decl.) ; Gen. z 3 m 5 ; Loc. z 3 mi. — Plural : Nora, znno ; Acc. z 3 mf>, z 3 mas-ca ; Gen. z 3 mqm. Note I. The nom. sg. zed is zd (= ? zam- = zm) -j- s § 222; similarly acc. zqm (= ? zm -(- m). Note 2. Similar to zsm- is Av. zyam- m. ‘hiems’, Sg. Nom. zya>, zyws-ci /; Acc. zyqm ; Gen. zimo ; cf. Brugmann, Grundriss ii. § 1 60. Like- wise Av. dam- ‘domus’, cf. GAv. gen. sg. a nig, loc. sg. dqm — see Brug- mann, Grundriss ii. § 160. 11. (F) Stems in original r. Masculine (Feminine and Neuter), cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 369 seq. § 319. Here belong a limited number of nouns: (a) Derivative stems in orig. -tar, -ar — nouns of agency and nouns of relationship; (b) Radical stems in orig. -ar; (c) Derivative stems (indeclinable) in orig. -ar. § 320. Strong and weak case-forms. — Nouns of this declension show three stem-forms : strongest stem dr, strong stem ar, weak stem r (before vowels), ar 3 (before conso- nants). The (1) nouns of agency show the strongest form dr in acc. sg., nom. du., and nom. pi.; the (2) nouns of relationship show simply the strong form ar in those cases. — The strong and weak case-forms, however, do not always agree with the Skt. in its sharp division, cf. also Lanman, Noun-Injlection in the Veda p. 420 fin. (a) Derivative Stems in -tar, -ar. § 321. These are divided with reference to the acc. sg., nom. du., and nom. pi. dr or ar into two classes: 1) Nouns of Agency. — 2) Nouns of Relationship. Chiefly Masculine (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 373). § 322. i) Av. datar- m. ‘giver, creator’ = Skt. ddtdr-, dhatdr-. 2) Av. patar- m. ‘father’ = Skt. pitdr-. 94 Inflection : Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. Av. frab>r a tiir- m. title of priest, afar- m. ‘fire’, iutr- m. 'man', uipdtar- nt. ‘protector’, zdmatar- m. ‘son in law', sdtar- m. ‘persecutor’. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. dd-ta dS -td ^ j I . dd-tar dm da-tar avi t .?. p‘-tdr Jin pi-tdram I. (dd-pra) ap>a (GAv.) dd-tra D. (ad-pre) frabrrpre . . . . . dd-tri Abl. (da-praf) apra[ see gen. G. d d-pro da-tur L. (da-tari) nairi dd-tdri V. da-tar 3 dd-tar Dual : N ^ v | J- (da-tar a) nipdldra da-turd (Ved.) I 2 . (p'-tdra) zamdtara pi-tara (Ved.) I.D.Abl. ( dd-t.Tr : ' by a) vdr>bya dd-tfbhydni G. (dd-prai) norm dd-tros Plural : ^ | I . da- tdrd dd-tar as l 2 . pi-tard . pi-taras ^ j I. dd-tar o da-tfn \ 2 . f 3 -dr d pi-tfn n.Abl. (da-tor 0 by 5 ) dl?r 3 bya da-trbhyas G. (dd-prq.Hl) sdprqtn dd-tfftam Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 323. In general, GAv. has the same forms as above, with the long final vowel, see § 26. § 324. On the occasional interchange of strong (ar) and weak (r, or 0 ) case-forms see § 320, and § 4 7 Note. § 325. Singular:— Norn. : YGAv. observe pita, p a ta, ptd ‘father’. Acc. : YAv. also (from weak stem) brdpnm ‘brother’. — Observe Av. trav/id- rp/u ‘sister' opp. to Skt. svdsaram (-dr-).— GAv. alio (pm §§ 22, 32) p'iarSni ‘father’. Gen. : YAv. sdpras-cif ‘of the persecutor’. — Also (isolated) from strong stem s, yds tars ‘of the tyrant’ Ys. 9.31, like gen. nurs § 332 Dat. : GAv. also J*drOi ‘father’ (i. e. -01 — -e, § 56) Ys. 53.4. Consonant Class: — (n) Stems in original r. 95 § 326. Dual: — N.A.V. : VAv. also (from weak stem) bra-pro ‘two brothers’. § 327. Plural: — Nom. : YAv. also dStSras-ca see § 19. — Also ending a: vatlara ‘coursers’. Acc. : YAv. also acc. pi. in -out, -bt (like s/rJut, strJ t, tPrSut, §§ 329, 332) pairi.aetrsut Vd. 9.38, cf. Skt. paryetar-, see American Journal of Philology x. p. 346.— GAv. also (from strong stem) m Star 6 ‘mothers’. — Also matsrqf-ca § 49. Dat. : YAv. observe ptdr 3 byo ‘for fathers’ Vd. 15.12. § 328. Transfers to the a- decl. occur: e. g.: Singular. Gen. sSsirahe ‘of the persecutor’ (i. e. stem sdstra- beside sastar-). — Plural. Gen. sSstranqm ‘of persecutors’. (a) Like nouns of agency. § 329. (i) Declension of Av. star- m. (strongest stem star-, strong stem star-, weak stem str-, star*-) = Skt. star- ici. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 371): — Singular. Acc. starom ; Gen. sided. — Plural. Nom. Acc sided, staras-ca (§ 19 on a), slraut (acc. YAv. cf. § 327); Dat. Abl. stor’byd ; Gen. strqm, stSrqm, starbm-cS (GAv.). § 330. (ii) Declension of Av. rapacstar- ‘warrior stand- ing in charriot’. — This word shows also a parallel stem rapacsta according to the radical a-decl., see § 249. The forms from stem rapacstar- are: — Singular. Acc. rcipaettSrom ; Gen. rapaesiSrahe (a-decl.) ; Voc. rapaetlara ((Z-decl.).— -Plural. Nom. rapaettaro ; Acc. rapaSt/Srbs-ca (§ 327, or perhaps here «-decl. § 129). Note. The forms from stem rapaet/S- are enumerated at § 249. ( 0 ) Like nouns of relationship. § 331. (iii) Declension of Av. dtar- m. ‘fire’ (strong stem atar-, wk. st. dpr-, atr- [§ 79 Note], dtsr *-') : — Singular. Nom. Start (= str. st. -j- s) ; Acc. Strom (YAv.), Strom (GAv.); Instr. Spra (GAv.); Dat. apre, aprae-ca; Abl. Spra[; Gen. apro, Spras-ca ; Voc. Star 3 (YAv.), Star 3 (GAv.), Start (YAv. same as nom.). — Plural. Acc. ataro; Dat. Abl. at3r*byo ; Gen. aprqm. § 332. (iv) Declension of Av. nar- m. ‘man’ = Skt. nar- (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 371): — 9 6 Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. Singular : Non), na; Acc. nartm; Dat. tta’re (VAv.), naroi (GAv.); A.bl. m I' lil. Version at Vd. 342; Gen. nari (YAv.), nsr*s (GAv.) ; Loc. na'ri; Voc. — Dual: Norn, nara; I.D.Abl. it)r*byo; Gen. ■Ultra. — Plural . Nom. Voe. Hard, naras-ca, vara (§ 224); Acc. n 3 raj (GAv. Ys. 40.3 see § 49), n 3 rdus (ace. YAv. cf. § 327); Dat. Aid. var>byd, n 3 r 3 byas-ca, n?ruyo, nuruyo, mrsyd (§ 62 Note 3, and § 31 Note); Gen. narqm (YAv.), narom (GAv.) Ys. 30.2, see §32. Note I. GAv. n’ral at Ys. 45.7 is apparently used as gen. sg. rather than acc. pi., see Gah 3.6 nars citation, cf. Skt. nfn , Pischel-Geldner, Vedisrhe Studien p. 43. Note 2. Transfers to the a-declension, stem nara- occur: — Singular: Nom. naro, Gen. nurahe ; etc. (b) Radical Stems in original r. § 333 - Here belong a very few nouns and their (ad- jective) compounds, e. g. : — 8 314- (0 Av. livar- n. ‘sun’ = Skt. svur- (cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 3S8 d) : — Singular: Nom. Acc. livar* (YAv.) , hvar * (GAv.); Gen luird or hi (YAv.), hrt>>ig (GAv. i. e. *kan-s, cf. §§ 337, 31S Note 2). § 335- (*') GAv. sar- f. ‘association, unity’ : — Singular: sarzm, sarSm ; Dat. saroi ; Gen. sari (Ys. 49.3); Loc. sa'r: (Ys. 35. S). — Plural: Acc. sard (Vs. 31-2 1). (c) Neuters (derivative) in original ar. § 336. These neuters (indeclinable) in ar* , ar * (GAv.) are used chiefly as acc. sg., but they may supply other cases. Singular : Nom. Acc. vadar * (YAv.) , vadar* (GAv.) ‘weapon’ (= Ski. vddhar ) ; as Dat. (and acc.) dasvar * ‘strength’ Ys. 68.2; as Gen. (and acc.) karfvar * ‘clime’ Vsp. 10.1— Dual:. N.A.V. (and acc. sg.) danar* ‘two D. measures’. — Plural : Acc. (beside acc. sg.) aydr* (GAv.). Note. These neuters rarely show declined cases: — e. g. Sg. Instr. das vara ‘with strength’ (Ys. 55.3); PI. Instr . baevar*bli ‘with thousands’. — Like (i-decl., Dat. sg. baevarai. § 33 7 - These ar-neuters commonly show parallel an- stems with which they unite in forming a declension: e. g. Av. kar$var-, kar^van- n. f. ‘clime, zone'; ajar-, ajar/- n. Consonant Class: — (12) Stems in original r. 97 ‘day’; zafar-, zafan-n. ‘jaw’; panvar-, panvana- {a- decl.) n. ‘bow’. See § 31 1 and Brugmann , Grundriss der vergl. Gram. ii. § 118. 12. (G) Stems in original .<•. (a) Derivative Stems in -h (— orig. s). (a) Stems in -ah (= orig. Ind.-Iran. -a. i'). § 338. These very common stems in -ah (- orig. -as) are chiefly neater nouns; but as adjectives (compound or with original accent on the ending, cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 417) they may likewise be masculine or feminine. A feminine substantive id ah- (see § 357 for declension) also occurs. — Cf. Horn, Nominaljlexion im Avesta p. 26 seq. ; and Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 414, 418. i. MASCULiNE — FEMININE (ADJECTIVE), NEUTER (SUBSTANTIVE). § 339 - Av. -q livacah- (adj. m. f.) ‘well-speaking’ — Skt. suvdcas-. Av. vac ah- n. ‘word’ = Skt. vdcas-; Av. duz-vacali- (adj .) ‘evil-speaking’ = Skt. durvacas-. Av. anaocah- (adj.) ‘hostile’, raocah - n. ‘light’, sarah- n. ‘head’ (= Skt. siras- n.) , zvayuh- n. ‘sea’, and m. 110m. propr. ‘Zrayah’, ar^zah- n. ‘daylight’. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. hvac-aj ... suvac-as A. hvac-avhsm suvac-as am I. vac-anha vac-asa D. vac-aiohc vat-ase Abl. vac-anltaf see gen. Ci . vac-avhd vdc-asas L. vac-ahi vuc-asi V . IlVaC-O suvac-as Dual : N.A.V. (hvac-avha) anaocavha (GAv.) . . . st/vdc-asa (Veil.) G. (vac-anha)) zrayanhto vdc-asos 98 inflection : Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. Av. Plural: cf. Slu. N.V . duzvac-aaho ........ suv&c-usos A. . dutvac-aahd suvuc-usas I. VCli -citUS ^ vuc-obhis D.Abl. (VttC'd by 6) raocsbyu ' vdc-obhyns G. vac-avhqm vdc-asom I -. (vac-ahu) sarahu vac-asu •(1 III) Cl ar’iahva — ii. NEUTER (Separate Forms). Sg. N.A.V\ VCIC-O idc-as PI. V.A.N. vac-cu vdc-qsi Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 340. In general, GAv. lias the same forms as above with the long final vowel, see § 2 6. i. MASCULINE — FEMININE — - NEUTER. § 341. Singular: — Nora. YAv. also uncoiupouiided adj. (sec § 338) aoja, Strong’ Ys. 57.10 beside substantive aoju n. ‘stiength’, GAv. doatitit Minting’ beside (ini, n. ‘hatred’, cf. Ski yasas ‘beauteous’ (observe accent) beside ydrar n. ‘beauty’.- -Add h/ar 3 nas-ia n. and glory’. Acc. : On uscuolurr., u(q»i f. ‘dawn’, see § 357. Dat. : YAv. > a f novhae-ca ‘and for support'. — OAv. infin. dut. sravaycyhe ‘to announce’ (see § it8 Note on -ye- = -vc 7-). Abl. : YAv. also postpositive ti § 222' zrayauhuda ‘from the sea’ Y't. S.47. — After <7-decl. f postpos. a § 2.221 Ijmaohdda ‘from darkness’. Gen.: YAv. foar*navkas-ca ’and of glory'. l.oc. : YAv. peculiar zraya (Yt. 5.38 , S.S), zrayd (Ys. 65.4), zruyai (Yt. 5.4: 8.31) ‘in the sea’. — Sec also § 357 Note 2. §342. Plural: - Nom. : YAv. framanavhus-ca ‘kindly-minded’, rnslr. : YGAv. also (with variant -bis § 21) vuepbis. Loc. ; YAv. also {- 6 hu. -ohm § 39) rovohu ‘in freedom’, Umdhva ‘in darkness’, ii. NEUTER (Special Forms). § 343- Plural: — N.A.Y.: YAv. add aojC&s-ca ‘powers’, GAv. t.'mJ,s-cd ‘and darkness’ § 344 Transfers to the ld‘d-yebis) frayebit ire- yobhis G. (nddd-yapham) vMiavhqm 2 .... s re -yas dm ii. NEC T E R (Separate Forms). Sg. N.A.V. mas-yo sri-yas 1 See Hang, Zand-Pah/avi Glossary p. 48, 16. — 2 See § 134. IOO Inflection : Declension of Nouns and Adjectives. Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 347. i. MASCULINE. Singular: Nom. GAv. observe vafiyde ‘melior* (see § 133 on/;); Ace. (from strong stem) vat/havhjm ‘meliorem’ (see § 134 on vh — oiig. .rv), cf. Skt. katuytisatn ‘younger’, Whitney, Ski. Grant. §4650. — Observe in paradigm Dual, Plural Nom. “yan/ta, • yanhu (i. e. strong stem) opposed to Skt. °yqsdu, 0 yqsas (i. e. strongest stem). — ii. NEUTER. Singular: Nom. YAv. observe vauho ‘melius’ § 134, GAv. vahyd ‘melius’ § 132. On YAv. ap, GAv. a§yO ‘worse’, see § 162. (y) Stems in -a'cih . — Perfect Active Participles. § 348. The stems in -vah are perfect active participles used adjectively. They show a double form of stem for masculine and neuter: strongest stem -vah, weak stem -ns. The Skt. has -vqs, -us, cf. Brugmann, Grundriss ii. ij 1 36 Anm. 6. — The corresponding feminine form has -usi- (i. e. weak stem -f- /-declension § 257) e. g. Av. vipu$i (nom.), vlpushn ‘knowing’, see § 86 on p. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 458 seq. MASCULINE— NEUTER. § 349. Av. -«r-“)vyp YAv. vidvah-, GAv. vidvah- ‘know- ing’ — Skt. vidvds-. Av. dadva/i- ‘creator’, ’rirtpivah- ‘having died’. N. Av. Singular: vld-viv cf. Skt. A. 0 vid v con ham 1 L vip-usa 2 . D. vid- use (GAv.) Abl. (vip-USat) dapupat ~ G. vid-upo (GAv.) N. Plural : vid-vcovho . . vid-vasas 1 . (vip-uzbis) dadullns (GAv.) . . . . . vid-vddbhis G. ( vip-usqm ) triripufqm .... . . vid-usam Forms to be observed in GAv. and Y Av. § 330. Singular • Nom. YGAv. also (from weak stem) inn minis ‘having thought’ Vt. 8.39, vipus ‘knowing’ Vd. 4.54, yacius ‘having striven’, Ilaug, 1 See \ sp. ig.f : Yt. 10.35. — 2 See § t?6. Consonant Class: — (12) Stems in original s. IOI ZPhl. Gloss. p. 16.6; 56.5, vTdus (GAv.) ‘knowing’ Ys. 45.8, vaunus ‘having won’ Ys. 28.5, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 462 c, and Bartholomae, in K.Z. xxix. p. 531 = Flexionslehre p. in; — Voc. YAv. (nom. as voc.) vTspd.vtdva> ‘O all-knowing one’ Vd. 19.26. — Plural: Uncertain whether acc. pi. or gen. sg. dadufo Ys. 58.6. Note. On the interchange of d, d, p see §§ 82, 83, 86. §351. Transfers to the a-decl. may be found: e. g. dat. pi. Av. vipujlde‘byas-ca. (b) Radical Stems in -h (= orig. -s). (a) Stems in -ah (=r orig. -as). §352. To this division (masculine, feminine and neuter) belong simple nouns like Av. mail- m. ‘moon’ (Skt. mas-), ah- n. ‘mouth’ (Skt. as-) and the compounds of Av. -dah- ‘giving, doing’. The forms have all the long vowel a) (a). — Cf. Horn, Nominalflexion tin Avesta p. 4 seq., and Lanman, Noun-Inflection in the Veda p. 493 seq. MASCULINE — FEMININE — NEUTER. § 353. Av. -a YGAv. huddh-, huddh- ‘beneficent’ = Skt. sudds-. Av. yds- n. (metrically dissyllabic) ‘decision’, ako.ddh- ‘maleficent’. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N.V. hud-a) sud-ds A. hud-amhom . sud-dsam I. hud-cavka sud-dsd D. hiid-cewhe sud-dse Abl. kud-cuvha£ see gen. G. hud-dwhd sud-dsas L. (hud-ahi) yahi sud-asi Plural: N.V. hud-anoho sud-dsas A. hud-cBvhd sud-dsas I. (hud-asbis) akd.dmbis — D. hud-wbyo — G. hud-wvhq,m sud-dsam 102 Inflection: Declension of Nouns and Adicctives. Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 354. Plural: Instr. and Dat. often show MS. authority for °abii, "ubyo ; the form in -»hu i ; Gen. nnuuhahe beside ntcauho ; Voc. duzda ‘O malevolent one’ § 234b. Note. The aec. sg. ufLdqui 'giving understanding’ notn propr. is per- haps to be explained as formed after the radical /t-decl. § 250, cf. Skt. 'jayo-dhiim —■ cf. ltrugmann, Grundriss ii. § 134, 1*, Lanman, Ncun-Jnfltction 1 >P- 555 . 443 . 446 . (jii) Like radical a/z-Stems. § 356. Declension of Av. rnazdah - f. ‘wisdom, Mazda’, Anc. Pers. -mazddk- — Skt. - midhas -. This word like ufdh-, u.fa/i-, § 357, is abet all 1 best considered a contract noun, cf. dat. sg. GAv: (dissyllabic) mazdu : (i. e. mazdd(h)-e) \ acc. sg. GAv. (dissyllabic) maidqm (i. e. mazdu(h)-ani) ; gen. sg. GAv. (trissyllabic) mazdeb (i. e masdu(h)-ns) ; noin.pl. GAv. (dis- syllabic) mazdcBs-ca (i. c. °a(hj-as). The forms are as follows: — Singular. Norn, maidts (dissyllabic GAv.); Acc. mazdqui ; Dat. wazdai; Gen. mazt/ib, mazdco\-ca (YAv.), mazdas-ca (trissyi. GAv.); Voc. (-declension , sg. nom. hvapb ‘beneficent’. (c) Derivative Stems in -is, -us. i J 3 58. The examples are not numerous. The words are chiefly neuter. There is no vowel-gradation. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 414. Adjectives — Feminine Formation — Comparison. 103 § 359. Av. sna‘pis- n. ‘weapon’. — Singular: Nom. Acc. (neut.) snaipis; Acc. (masc. adj.) nida.snaipipm ‘having weapons laid down’ ; Inslr. sna'pip-a ; Gen. hadi$as-ca ‘of the abode’; Loc. vipiUi ‘at the judgment’ (Geldner). — Dual: Instr. sna'pizbya.— Plural : Gen. snaipi$qm. Note. Transfers to the a-decl. occur: e. g. sg. gen. hadifahe 'of the abode’. § 360. Similar are the «r-nouns : Av. ar 3 dus- n. ‘assault, battery’. — Singular: Nom. ar 3 dus; Instr. ar 3 du$a; Loc. tanufi ‘in person’. — Plural: Gen. ar 3 du$qm. ADJECTIVES. Feminine Formation — Comparison. § 361. The declension of adjectives, as agreeing exactly with that of nouns, is treated above. § 362.. Feminine Formation. The adjective ^-sterns masc. neut. form their corresponding feminine in -a or -1. The consonant stems and zz-stems show regularly the fern, in -l , before which the adjective stem usually appears in its weak form. (1) With-#: Av. ha u rva- (m. n.), ha u rvd- (f.) ‘whole’; sura- (m. n.), surd- (f ; ) ‘mighty’; ujra- (m. n.), ujra- (f.) ‘strong’; aspa- (m.) ‘horse’, aspd- (f.) and aspi- (f.) ‘mare’. (2) With -z: Av. rava- (m. n .) , rsvl- (f.) ‘broad, smooth'; spitdma- (m. n.), spitdml- (f.) ‘belonging to Spitama’; daeva- (m. n.), daevi- (f.) ‘devilish’. — asavan- (m. n.), apaonl- (f.) ‘righteous’; bdr 3 sa>it- (m. n.), bzr 3 - zaHi- (f.) ‘high, great’; vtdvah- (m. n.), vipusi- (f.) ‘knowing’; ddtar- (rn.), ddpri- (f.) ‘giving, giver’; pra- tar- (m.), prapri- (f.) ‘protector, nurturer’; vavhu (m. n.), vanuhi- (f.) ‘good’; driju- (m. n.), drivt - (f.) ‘poor’ § 187 ‘ For different views on the subject see Horn, NomincdJiejcion im Ansta p. 5; Brugmann, Grundriss der vergl. Or. ii. § 133 -, but ii. § 134, 1 -. 104 Inflection: Comparison of Adjectives. § 363. Comparison of Adjectives. In A vesta as also in Sanskrit, there arc two ways of forming the comparative and superlative degrees of adjectives: — (1) -tara-, -tenia- and (2) -yah-, -ista- added to the stem. The corresponding feminine to these is -tara-, -tsma- and -yehl- (§ 34), -ista- according to rule, § 362. (1) -tara- (comparative), -tama- (superlative). § 364. Before -tara-, -tema-, adjectives whose stem ends in a appear commonly in the form 5 as in noun com- pounds. The rt-stems may, however, retain a unchanged, as in Sanskrit. Other stems commonly remain unchanged, appearing in the weak form if they have one. baifazya- ‘healing’, baiyazydtara- , bac$azyotama- srira- ‘fair’, srirdtara-, — aka- ‘bad’, akatara-, — huyasta- ‘well-sacrificed’, huyastara-, — hubao'di- ‘sweet-scented’, hubao'ditara-, hubao'ditema- asaojah- ‘very strong’, asaojastara -, 1 asaojastema- ydskar-t- ‘energetic’, ydskar*stara-,~ yask.ir*stema- amavaut- ‘strong’, amavastara-,- amavast.ima- yaetvah- ‘having striven’, — yaetustema- (2) -yah- (comparative), -ista- (superlative). § 365. Before -yah-, -ista-, the adjective reverts to its original simple crude stem without formative suffix: viaz- ‘great’, inazyah-, inazisia- mas- ‘great’, masyah-, — vanhn- \ ,, , ‘good , vohu- | 1 vahyah- (GAv.), ] { vavhah- (YAv.), 3 J vahista- as-u- ‘swift , dsyah-, asista- ak-a- ‘bad’, \ a§yah- (GAv.), ] i ayah- (YAv.), 4 j | acista- Cf. § 109. — 2 § 15 1. — 3 §§ 132, 134- — 1 § 162- Comparison of Adjectives. 105 Note 1. Some few adjectives, in appearance at least, show both forms of comparison , as above aka- ‘bad’, akalara-, and to this also (cf. Note 2) ajSyah-, arista-; so superlative asaojista- beside ajaajastara-, asaa- yastsma- to asaojah- ‘very strong’. Note 2. As seen also above, comparatives and superlatives may be more or less mechanically attached to a positive of similar meaning and containing the same crude stem, see § 365 : e. g. to tafy-ma- 'strong’, the comparative fqsyah-, superb taqrista- beside tafymotama-, et ah Note 3. The rw-stems sometimes follow the analogy of zz^Z-stems in their comparison : e. g .vtr^pravan- ‘victorious’, comparat. v) r’pravasiara-, superl. V 3 r a pravast>ma- ; afavan- ‘righteous’, ajiavastfma- ; vjr*prajan- ‘vic- torious’, v)r a p.rajqstara-. vsr^prajqsiima-. NUMERALS. § 366. The numerals in A vesta correspond geneially in form and in usage to the Sanskrit equivalents. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 475 seq. Cardinals. Av. cf. Skt. Av. cf. Skt. I. aeva- — 10. dasa dasa 2. dva- dvd- 20. visa‘ti visati- 3. pri - tri - 30 . prisat- trisat- 4. capwar- catvdr ■ 40 . capwar 3 sat- catvarisdl- 3. pane a panca 50 . pattedsat- paficaidi- 6 . fy$vas sds 60. ipsvasli- sasfi- 7 hapta sapid 70 . haptiVti- sapta/i- 8 asla as fa 80. asta'ti- asiti- 9 nava nava 90 . navakti- naiali- 1 0 dasa dasa 100. sata- satd- Av. Av. 100 sat a 600. Jpivas saia 200. duye sa‘te 7 00. hapta sata 300. ti$ u rb sata 800. asta sata ^400. capwaro sata 900. nava sata 500. panca sata rooo. hazaara- 10000. baevar- § 367. The numbers from it — 19, as far as they occur, are made up as in Skt. : e. g. Av. dvadusa ‘12’ = Skt. dvjddasa ; Av. paqcndasa ‘15’ — Skt. pdrtcada ia See below under Ordinals, § 374 b. Note. Observe, the common form,' Av. pnsala- ‘30' and capissar 3 - suta- ‘40’ arise from transfer of prisat- etc. to the rr-decl. The strong form piirui is to be sought in prisas (orig none but crystallized form), etc. Inflection: Numerals — The Cardinals. I.O.7 § 368. In composite numbers the lesser numeral pre- cedes, and ca — ca connects the terms: e. g. Av. pai/caca visatica ‘25’; pi' ay a sea prisq.se a ‘33’; panedea capwar^sa- tzmea ‘45’, etc. Note. The' first member is sometimes put in the sociative instru- mental ease; e. g. Av. nava.satais hazavr?mca ‘one thousand and nine hundred’. Declension of Cardinals. § 369. (1) Declension of Av. aeva- (m. n.), aeva- (f.) ‘one, alone’ (singular): i— ii. M/iSC. NEUT. Sg. Nom. aevo ; Acc. iiyum (§ 63 Note 2), or (abbreviated spelling) dim, aoim; Jnstr. aeva; Gen. aevahe ; Loc. aevakrni (§ 443). — iii. FEM. Sg. Nom. aeva; Acc. aevqm; Gen. aevavhcb (§§ 443, 134). § 370. (2) Declension of Av. dva- ‘two’ — Skt. dvd- (dual) — cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 482 b. Du. N.A.V. dva (m.), duyc (f. n.); I.D.Abl. dvadbya ; G.L. dvayce. Note. Observe dvae-ca Yt. 19.7 beside duye § 190. § 37 * • (3) Declension of Av. pri- (m. n.), tisar- (f.) ‘three’ = Skt. tri - tisar- (plural) — cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 482 c. i — -ii. M A S C. NEUT. PI. Nom. prays ; Acc. prdyo ; Dal. Abl .pribyo; Gen. prayqm. — iii. FEM. Nom. /cjyu; Acc. /ip'ra, tij/ro, li$ra; Gen. tigrqm, ti$ranqm () 1 5° poiicasatim, paiicasapbis-ca (§ 19b); 60—70 )/svaslnn (acc. sg. io8 Inflection: Ordinal Numerals and Derivatives. fern.) etc., also naim'lil-ca face. pi. fern, beside navaHim).— too — 1000 sain-, hazavra- as neut. nouns, a-decl. § 237. — 10000 bacvar* (acc. sg.), baevarai (dat. sg. a-decl. § 237); baevqn (acc. pi.), bacvar’bis (instr. pi.) cf. 336. Ordinals. Av. cf. Skt. Av. cf. Skt. JSt fr at 3 via - prathama- I Dh aevatidasa- — 1 pao'rya- purvyd- 2nd bitya- < Ivilfya - I 2th dvadasa - dvadasa- 3rd pritya- triiya- 13 th pridasa- irayddasd- 4th tii'rya- tiirya- 14 th caprildasa- caturdasd- 5 th ptdpda- paiuatha 1 I 5 th paticadasa- pa/nadasd- 6th J/Jtva- — 1 6th tyfvas.d asa - sodasd- 7 th haptapa- saptatha- I 7 th haptadtisa- saptadasd- 8 th astJ/ua- asjama- 1 8th astadasa- asiddasd- Qth nauma- (§ 64) vavarnd- 19th liavadasa- navadasd- lOth da si via- dasanid- 2Cth visqstJina- — I OOth Av. satotJHia- — Skt. salatamd-. IOOQth Av. hazavrotjma — Skt. sahasraiamd-. Note 1. The ordinals as adjectives are declined according to the tf-decl. § 236 seq. Note 2. Av. fyjilva- ‘sixth’ has fem. cf. § 362. Note 3. Av. prisala- as ‘thirtieth’ is found. Numeral Derivatives. § 375 Numeral Adverbs: Av. hakir’p ‘ones’ = Skt. sakft; Av. bis ‘twice’ = Skt. dvis ; Av. pris ‘thrice’ = Skt. Iris ; Av. copras ‘four times’, cf. Skt. catus, Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 489. — Also with a: Av. atbitim ‘for the second time’, iipritim ‘for the third time, thrice’; afytii‘rtm ‘for the fourth time’. — Likewise some others. § 376. Multiplicative Adverbs: Suffix -vatil—A\. biizmf ‘two-fold’; priivap ‘three-fold’ ; visaUivab ‘twenty-fold’ (nom. masc.) ; prisapwcS) ‘thirty- fold’ ; etc.— Suffix -pwa : e. g. prisata-pwsm ‘thirty-fold’; etc. Note. Here also might be added a number of other words pripva- ‘a third’ et al. ; but they belong rather to the dictionary. 1 Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 4S7. PRONOUNS. § 377. Pronominal declension in Avesta agrees in its main outlines with the Sanskrit. A synopsis of the Pro- nouns in Avesta may be given as follows : — A. Gender not distinguished. I a. First person azsm. b. Second person turn. c. Third person, he and other forms. SYNOPSIS OF * PRONOMINAL- DECLENSION. B. Gender distinguished. 2. Relative — Pronoun ya-. 3. Interrogative — Pronoun ka-. (Indefinite.) a. Demonstrative hi- (hvo). b. Demonstrative acta-. c. Demonstrative aern ( a-, i-, ima-, ana-). d. Demonstrative ava- (hdu). 5. Other pronominal Words and Derivatives. (Possessive). (Reflexive). (Adjectives declined pronominally). 4. Demonstrative § 378. General Remark. Most of the pronouns in Avesta are closely parallel with those in Sanskrit, and like the latter they show also many marked peculiarities. They are generally made up by combining a number of different stems. The principal points to be observed in regard to their inflection are the following: i — ii. MASCULINE — NEUTER. § 379. Singular:— Xom. Acc. Neut. : Commonly the suffix -/ = S'kt. -I (J) — Sometimes in later texts of the YAv. instead of the ending -in, like the neuter ending of the noun-declension, is found: e. g. yint, aorn. I iO Inflection: Declension of Pronouns Oat. Abl. Loc. : Show an inserted element -Am- — Skt. -j#/-, — The dat. »g. of the two personal pronouns ends in -t>ya f-t/ynj, -byv — Skt. -hhya(mj, Whitney, Ski. Cram. § 492a. — The loc. sg. in V Av. may lake post- positive a as in the noun-declension, see § 222. g 380. Plural: — Nom. (Acc.): The pronominal n-slems make this case end in t. This form in c often serves also as accusative. Gen.: Shows -$qm Skt. -sSm . — The 'genitives’ a'lmakun . yftlmaktm, ya- 7’dkii/i , as in Skt.. are really crystallized cases nom. acc. neut. of possessives. Lot:.: In YAv. the loc. pi. may lake postpositive a as in the noun- declension. see i; 224. Similarly also in fern. loc. pi. iii. FEMININE. § 381. Singular: — Dat. Abl. Gen. l.oc.: Show an inserted element -Ay- ( -Ay-), -pk- ~ Skt. -sy-. § 382. Plural: — Gen. : Shows -vAqm ~ Skt. -sam. § 383. Interchange of Neuter with Feminine Forms. As in the nouns $ 23 2, so also in the pronouns the neuter plural often assumes the form of the feminine or rather interchanges with it. — See also Johannes Schmidt, Plural- bildungen der indogertn. Ntutra pp. 21, 260, etc. Note. In formulaic passages, especially in the Yashts (e. g. Yt. 5. 1 3,1 5), masc. forms yepht, a'pAr, ah mat are sometimes u»ed instead of the proper iein. forms. This arises from the mosaic character of such passages. $ 384. General Relative Case is found in YAv. in the instances of yetis as plural , cf. § 229. — For the treat- ment of yd. yaf, yim as stereotyped case (plural and sin- gular) see under Syntax. A. GENDER NOT DISTINGUISHED. i. Personal Pronouns. § 385. The first and second personal pronouns, as in Skt., show many peculiarities and individulities of inflection. Sonic cases also use two forms, a fuller and a briefer form, according to the position of the pronoun in Personal Pronouns. 1 I I the sentence, whether accented, unaccented, or enclitic. Furthermore, on the third personal pronoun, see § 394 seq. § 386. (a) First Person, Av. -fai" azsm ‘ 1 ’ = Skt. ahdin. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. (IZP7H a haul A. mqm ; vid (end.) mam; via 1}. mdv s ya 1 ; me (end.) m ah yam ; me Abl. via{ mat G. maria ; Vie (end.) . mama; ml Plural: N. vaem 3 vayam A. ahma 3 ; no (end.) as man; nas ID. ahma* by d (GAv.)j no (end.) . . . asmdbhyam ; nas Abl. ahmat as mat G. ahmdkom ; no (end.) ...... asmakam ; nas § 387 - Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. GAv. has in general the same forms as YAv., but shows also a number of peculiarities to be marked ; these are likewise occasionally found in YAv., perhaps borrowed. § 388. Singular: — Nom. : GAv. azs/u. § 32. — Also once (unaccented or proclitic) as-ci) Ys. 46. iS. Dat.: Y Av. the form mav a ya before -(a, -ci(, § 386 Note I. — GAv. ma‘byii, uia'byO, and (end.) moi. Gen.: Observe, gen. Av. mana (note -it-) contrasted with Skt. mama (-in-). § 389. Plural: — Nom. : GAv. (sporadic) nom. pi. unaccented (second place in sentence) vj Ys. 40.4, cf. Skt. va-yam, cf. § 393. A cc. : GAv. regularly vm, cf. also at Vsp. 15.2 = Ys. 15.3 n(b , Gatba re- miniscence., see § .387. Dat. : GAv. ahum' by a (above), ilhrnai, and (end.) ns, cf. also at Vsp. 12.4 ns, see § 387. Gen. : GAv. also (unaccented) ahma, shina, and (end.) ns. 1 Also before -ca, -a[ written muv a ya. See also § 3S8. - i. e. vay?m, S) 64. 3 Vt. 1.24 variant; i. e, Av. ahma - Skt. a smart; Av. aspa — Skt. aivdn I 12 Inflection: Declension of Pronouns. § 390. (b) Second Person, Av. turn ‘thou’ = Skt. tvdm. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. N. turn 1 ; til tvdm A. plVtyiH ; plod (end.) tvdm; tva I- pWCt,' 1 tva (Ved.) h). ta'bya (GAv . ) , te (end.) .... tnbhyam; te Abl. piv a l tvdt G. tava ; tc ^end.) tdva ; it Dual: G. yavakam 8 — Plural: N. yuz.wi yuydm A. VO (end.) va: D. yufmaoyb, J/SU/dV'ya ; VO (end.) . yusmdbhyom ; vas Abl. ytt^maf yusmdt G. yuftnakom / VO fend.) yusmunam ; vas Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 391. GAv. has in general the same forms as YAv., but shows also a number of peculiarities to be marked; these are likewise sometimes found in YAv., perhaps borrowed. § 392. Singular:- N'om. : GAv. tvi/n (cf. §§ 32, 93 Note i), t/i. Dat.: GAv. tadyd (above), also ta‘byo, and (end.) toi. Gen.: GAv. tava; toi (end.) see § 56. § 393. Plural: — Nom.: GAv. also yul i. e. Av. yus: Skt. yu-ydm:: Av. vi '§ 389): Skt. va-yarn. Acc. : GAv. regularly va>. Dat.: GAv. y;?fma‘byd, fyfma*byd; vi (end.), cf. also YAv. (Gatha remini- scence) vo Ys. 14. 1, etc. Abl.: GAv. also bjmaj. Gen.: GAv. qlmukom and (end.) vi. — Also i(imd Ys. 43.11. ‘ i. e. fvfm, see § 63. * Ys. 43.10. ® I'r. 6.1 and llaug, ZPht. Glossary pp. 3, 46, see § 68 Vote 3, cf. Skt. yuvdtiu, see § 3S0. Relative Pronoun. I 13 § 394. (c) Third Person, Av. ((o^o) he Qc) and other forms. The proper third personal pronoun him , he etc. (enclitic) is defective; its deficiencies are partly supplied by the demonstrative pronoun, and partly by enclitic forms of di-, i- used with personal force. These latter show distinction of gender, but they may best be included here. § 395 - The following forms of the proper third per- sonal (often used anaphorically, sometimes used re- flex ivelv, see also § 416) occur in GYAv. ; they are all enclitic: Singular. Acc. kirn (GYAv.); Dat. Gen. he or § 155 (YAv.), hoi (GAv.). — Dual. N. A. V. (GAv.). — Plural. Acc. hi! (GYAv.). Note 1. The form he dat. gen. sg. seems in some passages in YAv. to serve as plural. See under Syntax. Note 2. With the above A vesta forms compare Skt. ace. sg. sim ; Prakrit dat. gen. se — all enclitic. See Wackernagel in K.Z. xxiv. p. 605 =eq. § 396. Similar to he in usage are the forms from stem YAv. di likewise enclitic: — Sg- Acc. dim m. f. ; dig n.« — PI. Acc. dis m. f. , din. Ys. 65.8. § 39 7. Of like usage (cf. also § 422), is stem G(Y)Av. i- enclitic — sometimes employed almost pleonastically : — Sg. Acc. im m. ; , r / n. (GAv.), (YAv., particle). — Du. N.A.V. i. — PI. Nom. i n. ; Acc. is m. ; i n. § 398. On hvo, hviiv-'ya used as personal (and reflexive) see §§ 416, 436 Note 3. B. GENDER DISTINGUISHED. 2. Relative Pronoun. § 399. Relative Av. ya- ‘who, which’ — Skt. yd-. The relative stem ya-, yd- = Skt. yd-, ya-, shows the following forms. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 508. 8 1 14 Indeclion : Declension of Pronouns. i. MASCULINE -NEUTER. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. M • V -0 y.ds A. y-iJti v-am 1- ' y-ena D. y-ahviai y-asmai Abl. y -ah mat y-asmat G. y ehe, y-erjhe 2 y .d sya b. y-ahmi y-asmin Dual: N. y-d y-d (Veil.) G. y-Ciyd) y-dyos Plural : N. y-oi y-i A. y-tz y-du I. yd is y-dis D.AbI .y-ar‘byo y-iohyas G. y-atsqm y-isam L. y -ads u (GAv.) y-hu ii. NEUTER. Sg. N.A.V. y-at y -dt PI. N.A.V. y-d. y-d (Ved.) jii. FEMININE. Singular: N. y-d y-d A. y-qm . . . . ; Abl. y-ey/ldf, °dda see gen. G. y-etjhd) y-dsya? I., y-eqhe 3 y-dsySm Plural : N.A. y-d) y-ds D.Abl . y-dbyo y-dbhyas G. y-dwhqm y-d, dm L. y-ahu, y-dhva y-dsu 1 cf. § 30. — cf. §§ 137, 136, 34. — 3 i. e. *: ’asya(m), uncertain Ys. 9.32, cf. ayht § 422. Interrogative Pronoun. 1 1 5 Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 400. GAv. has generally the same forms as YAv., but shows also some peculiarities to be marked ; these are occasionally found likewise in YAv., perhaps borrowed. i. MASCULINE — NEUTER. § 401. Singular: — Nom. : YAv. yas-ca, yas * tg . — In YAv. (commonly in late passages, but. cf. Yt. 10. 1 19) the form yd is sometimes found as general relative case, cf. § 384, and under Syntax. — GAv. yS, yas-ca (also YAv. borrowed yS, fcf. § 400). Acc. : GAv. ySm, yirn, see §§ 32, 30. Abl. : YAv. also yahmS{, on d see § 19(b) — GAv. once adverbial yd( Ys. 36.6 = Ys. 58.8, like Skt. yat, cf. Whitney § 509 a. Gen.: GAv. yehyd, see § 132. Loc. ; YAv. also (with postpos. a § 380) yakrnya. — - G Av. only yahrni. § 402. Plural : — Nom.: YGAv. yac-ca, yae-cd . — In YAv (late) a form ya as nom. acc. pi. (cf. td, § 413) occurs, cf. noun-inflection o-stems § 236. Acc. : GAv. yitig, yirigs-tii, yr^s-ca. Instr. ■ YAv., ydtJ commonly occurs as general plural case, cf. § 384. Dat. Abl. : GAv. yac^byas-cd. ii. NEUTER. § 403. Singular:— Nom. Acc.: YAv. also yini like neut. noun-declension, but generally in late passages. — On yas-ca — ya^-ca see §151 Note. — GAv. hya[ (variants y a l , yiaj,, e. g. Ys. 28.9, 30.6 etc.). § 404. Plural: — Nom. Acc. : YAv. also neut. (like fem. § 383) vcv. iii. FEMININE. § 405. Plural: — Nom. Acc.: YAv. ySts-ca . — Also rare (like neut.) yd, cf. Ys. 10.78. —GAv. ytbs-cd. 3. Interrogative Pronoun. § 406. Interrogative Av. ka- ‘who, which, what?’ = Skt. kd-. Inflection: Declension of Pronouns. I 16 The interrogative ka-, ka- — Ski . kd- . lea-, is identical in inflection with the relative and requires no full paradigm to be given. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 504. i. MASCULINE — NELTKK. Av. Singular : cf. .Ski. N. k-d k-ds A. k-ttru etc k-dm ii. NEUTER. Sg.N.A.V. k-af etc k-dt iii. FEMININE. Sg. N. k-d etc k-d. Note. YAv. also an instr. sg. ktnta — Skt. kina beside Av. ka . — YAv. also ng, tqs-ca, and later dialect hi Ys. 63.1 — Ys. 15.2. ii. NEUTER. § 414. Plural: — Acc.: YAv. also (like fern., see § 383) ta», i&r-ca. iii. FEMININE. § 415. Plural: — Acc.: YAv. rarely (like neut.. cf. § 383) ta Yt. 10.79, cf. similarly yd §405. —GAv. /a) r-ca. § 416. Here is to be added also G(Y)Av. nomina- tive singular hvo ‘ille, ipse’, dative hvav°ya (like md- v°ya ) properly originally reflexive, see 398, 436 N. 1, 3. Note. In oldest GAv., hvo takes the place of demonstr. ho, which form does not occur in the metrical Gathas. § 417. (b) Demonstrative Av. aeta- ‘this’ = Skt. eta-. The demonstrative aesa-, ae?a-, aeta- ‘this, here’ = Skt. cs-a*, esa-, eta-, is identical in declension with ha-, ha-, ta- from which it is derived by prefixing ae- which makes it the nearer demonstrative. The only GAv. form noted is Demonstrative Pronouns. I j 9 nom. sg. fetn. aesd 12.9 (later GAv.). — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 499 b. i. MASCULINE — NEUTER. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. N. ae §-5 es-as A. aet-am gt-dm I. art- a et-ina D. aet-ahmdi u-dsmai Abl. aet-ahrndt et-dsmat G. aet-ake et-dsya L. aet-ahmi et-dsmin Dual: G. aet-aya) ct-ayos Plural : N.(A.) aet-e et-i G. aet-aesq.ni et-ifS/u L. aet-ae$va ct-isu ii. NEUTER. Sg. N.A.V. aet-af ei-at pi. N.A.V. act-a et-d iii. FEMININE. N. acs-a es-a A. aet-qm ct-am I. aet-aya u-dys G. aet-anhaa l , aet-aya) et-dtyas Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. 1. MASCULINE — NEUTER. § 418. Singular: — Nom.: YAv. also alga =. Skt. esa , Whitney, Silt. Gram. § 176a, cf. ha above § 41 1. § 410. Plural: — Nom. Acc.: YAv. notice that aete like te above §§ 413, 3S0 serves as both nom. and acc. masc. and also neut. 1 See § 134. 120 Inflection: Declension of Pronouns. ii. NEUTER. § 420 Plural: — Nom. Acc. YAv. also (like fem., § 383) aeta>. — On aile see § 380. Gen.: YAv. also (contaminated with fem.) aetavhqm. iii. FEMININE. § 421. Singular: — Non). : GAv. (only occurrence) act'd Vs. 12.9. Gen. : YAv. the form ae!ayj>, actaycBt-ci( follows the noun-inflection, a-dccl. § 422. (c) Demonstrative Av. acm ‘this’ — Skt. ay dm The demonstrative acm, as in Skt., is made up from defects e stems a-, i-, ima-, ana- = Skt. a-, i-, ima-, ana- combined to fill out a complete declension. It is to be observed (in GAv. it is evident) that beside the accented forms , there occur likewise unaccented forms (not found at beginning of a padat. These forms gene: ally come from the brief stej 1 . i. MASCULINE-— NEUTER. Av. Singular: cf. Ski. N. aem ' ay dm A. 11 turn . imam I. ana anena D. ahmdi . as mat Abl. ahmdf . asmiil G. ahr, ahjhc 2 . asyd L. akmi . Dual : asm-in N.A.V. ima imti (Ved.) g. ! : • ■ ayos (Ved.) 1 a nay a) 0 . . Plural : andyos N. ime .... ime A. imei . . . imatt I. ac’bis (YAv.), anais (GAv.) . . . ibhis D.Abl. ae'byo . *. ebhyas G. aefytn . esdm L. ae$u, aesva . esu 1 i. e. ay)M, § 64. — 4 See §§ 136, 137. — 3 Uncertain, see Vd. 4.48. Demonstrative Pronouns. I 2 1 Av. ii. NEUTER. cf. Skt. Sg. N.A.V. imaf . iddm PI. N.A.V. ima ima (Ved.) iii. FEMININE. Singular: N. im 1 . iydrn A. iinqm imam I. dya, ay a ayd (Vcd.) D. ahjliai asyai Abl. ahglidt . . . . see gen. G a' q It CO a. yds L. ahilie ^ as'ydni Dual : l.D.Abl .abya (GAv.) abhyim Plural : N.A. imeo . . imas\ I. dbls ii bht.s I). Abl. abyo abhy&s G. cbvhqm . . . . as am L. ahu (GAv.), dhva dsn Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 423. GAv. has in genera! the same forms as YAv., with lengthened final wherever possible. There are also some peculiarities worthy of note. i. MASCULINE — NEUTER, § 424. Singular: — Nora.: GAv. also ayiui beside aim, see § 32. Abl.: YAv. also ahmdf, on a see § 19(b). Geu. : GAv. a/tya, afyya-ca, cf. §§ 132, 133. Loc. : YAv. also (with postpos. a, § 379) ahmya. 1 i. e. iysm, see §§ 63, 51. — 2 i. e. orig. *asya( m j. 122 Inflection: Declension of Pronouns. § 425. Dual: — Gen.: GAv. also (from stem a-, § 431) (hs-ca. § 426. Plural:— Nom. (Acc.) : YAv. ime serves also as acc. pi., see § 380. lnstr : GAv. observe the form atwil above from stem ana-, and ats below § 431 from stem a-. Dat. Abl. : YAv. at’byas-cig. ii. NEUTER. § 427. Singular: — Nom. Acc. : YAv. observe iirtat above as opposed to Skt. idttrn. § 428. Plural: — N.A.V. : YAv. also (like fern., § 383) imcb. — GAv. regularly itna which is the only GAv. instance noted of this stem ima Doc. : YAv. also (see fein. § 383 : Cttvhqm. iii. FEMININE. $ 429. Singular: — lnstr.: GAv. by it cf. YAv. aya above in paradigm. Dat.: GAv. afyyGi, cf. § 133. Abl.: YAv. also on it see § 1 9 (b). Gen.: YAv. a’ah<&s-ra, see § 124 Note. Loc. : YAv. also, identical with instrumental, ay a. § 430. Plural : — Nom. Acc. : YAv., also a form unfits* before t, see § 124 Note. Dat. Abl. : YAv., also a'byas-cif., dhvyas-ca, on tl see § 19 Note. § 431. Directly from stem a- come: — Singular. Acc. Neut. (as particle) r?/(GYAv.); Dat. (uncertain?) di Vd. 3.23 (neut. fern.); Abl. (as particle) at (GAv.), dat (YAv.). — Dual. Gen. dfs-cd (GAv.). — Plural. lnstr. also used advbl.) a is (GAv.). § 432. (d) Demonstrative hdu, ava- ‘that’ = Skt. a sail, — . The remote demonstrative in Av. ava- ‘that, yonder’ (cf. Old Pers. ava-), combined with hdu, is to be con- trasted with Skt. anrih , asdu-. The Av. shows ava- throughout where the Skt. has ainu-. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 501. Pronominal Words and Derivatives. i. MASCULINE — NEUTER. Av. Singular: N. han A. ao-m 1 I. av-a G. ay-ahghe Plural : N.(A.) av-e I. av-dis G. av-ae$qm ii. NEUTER. Sg. N.A.V. av-a{, ao-m pi. N.A.V. av-a 123 cf. Ski. asait iii. FEMININE. Singular: N. hau ... — A. av-qm Abl. av-ahghdf — G. av-ahjhdt, av-avhm Plural : N.A. av-& — D.Abl. av-abyo — Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 433. Plural. Acc. Neut. : YAv. also (neut. like fem. § 38 £) avfa. Note. For the derivatives avail!-, avavaiit- (ava%t-) from ava- see § 441. 5. Other Pronominal Words and Derivatives. Possessive — Reflexive, Pronominal Derivatives and Adverbs. § 434. Under the above head belong the possessives and a number of words which have chiefly the nature of i. e. *avim, § 63. 124 inflection : Declension of Pronouns. adjectives and are inflected partly according to the pro- nominal declension, partly according to the nominal. They answer in general to corresponding forms in Sanskrit. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 515 seq. Possessive — Reflexive. § 435. Here may be enumerated as connected with the personal pronoun, the following possessive (and re- flexive) forms: — Av. ma- ‘meus’, pzva- ‘tuns’, hva -, ha-, hava- (reflexive) ‘ situs ’, ahrndka- ‘our’, yiismdka-, I/smaka- ‘your . — mavant- ‘like me', pwdvatit- like thee , yii§mdvaiit-, J^mavarit- ‘like you’. — haepa'pya- ‘own’. Other Pronominal Derivatives and Adverbs. § 436. The following derivatives may further be noted: — Relative, yavatit- ‘how much’, yatdra - ‘which of two’. — Interrogative, evatit- ‘how much?’, katdra- ‘which of two?’. — Demonstrative, aetavarit- ‘so much’, avaitf- ‘that, such’, avavatit- ( avatyt - § 194) ‘so much . — Likewise here, numerous pronominal adverbs ya-pa ‘how, as’, ka-da ‘how, when?’, cu. ‘how?’, i-da ‘here’, etc. Note I. Here observe Av. halo ‘reciprocally, each other’ — Skt. svd/as. Note 2. On hvo ‘ipse, ille’ as personal pronoun, see §§ 398. 416. Note 3. From same stem as hvo (in Note 2) comes the interesting reflex, dat. hvav°\a ‘self’ (like mav°ya § 388). cf. Lat. s(v)ibi. Note 4. From an assumed demonstrative stem Iva- comes the neut. adverb pwa[ ‘then again’ Ys. 44.3 — Skt. tvat. Note 5. Instances of GAv. ahya gen. of dcmonslr. (— pers,), from aim § 422, instead of the reflex, possessive, occur. D e c 1 e n s i o n of Pronominal Derivatives. § 437. In regard to inflection, the pronominal deriva- tives follow partly the pronominal declension and partly the nominal. The following forms of the possess ives (reflexive), and of the demonstrati ve derivatives de- clined according to the pronominal declension are worthy of note. Pronominal Words and Derivatives. 125 § 438. i. Declension of the possessive pronoun GAv. ina- ‘mens'. i — ii. MASC.— NEUT. Sg. Nom. mi; Dai. mahmai; Gen. mahya . — PI. Acc. (Neat.) via . — iii. FEM. Sg. Gen. ma}>yai (§ 133). § 439. ii. Declension of the possessive pronoun GAv. piva- ‘tuus’. i — ii. M ASC. — NEUT. Sg. Nom. pw? ; Instr. pwa ; Dat. pwahmdi ; Abi. pwahmaf ; Gen. pwahyd; Loc. pvjakmi . — Pi. Kom.pwoi (masc.); Acc. pwa- (neut.). — iii. FEM. Sg. Num. pwdi ; Gen. pwaliy&. — P). Loc. pwdhu. § 440. iii. Declension of GYAv. hva-, ha- (hava-) ‘suus’ -- Skt. svd . — GAv. has only YAv. (from GAv.) , and i — ii. MASC. — NEUT. Sg. Nom. hi (GAv.), hvo (YAv.); Instr. ha ; Gen. hake; Loc. hah mi. — 'Du. Acc. hva. — PI. Instr. hais ; Loo. hacsu (? emended F11. 4.2). — iii, FEM. Nom. hae-ca (GAv.), hva (YAv.); Dat. hahyai. Note 1. From the by-form hava- come: Masc. Neut. Sg. Nom, hava ; Acc. haoin (§ 64); Instr. hava; etc. regularly according to nominal declension (§ 236 a- § 430. This is to be distinguished from av avaiit- ( avaiit - § 194) in § 442. MASC. Sg. Nom. ava>. — PI. Dat. Abl. avaljiyu . — NEUT. Sg. Nom. Acc. aval above in paradigm. § 442. v. Declension of the demonstrative derivative avavaiit- ( avaiit - § 194, cf. variants) 'so great’ — to be distinguished from avaiit- § 441 . Sg. Nom. (neut.) avava{; Acc. (masc.) iivafytom (§§ 194, 44) and avavaritdm (neut. adv. ff-decl.); Instr. avavata; Gen. avavato.— PI. Gen. avavatqm. Inflection: Adjectives declined pronominally.. ! 26 Adjectives declined pronominally. § 443. A few adjectives in Aw, like their correspond- ing Skt. equivalents, also follow the pronominal declension wholly or in part. Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 522 seq. — Instances are: Av. aeva- ‘one, alone'; Av. any a- ‘other — Skt. anyd- ; Av. vispa- ‘all’ — Skt. visva-. For example: PI. Norn. Acc m. visee , vispi (pronominal) beside Noin. m. vlspCBvho ; Acc. visfis-ca (YAw), vispas-ca, visphig (ClAv.) i. c. nominal declension; -Gen. vtspacpqm (pronominal) be- side vis pa iiq m (nominal) ; et al. CONJUGATION, VERBS. § 444. The Avesta verb corresponds ciosely to the Sanskrit in form, character, and in usage. The Av. texts, however, are not so extensive as to give the verb com- plete in all its parts ; some few gaps in the conjugation- system therefore occur. Modelled after the Sanskrit, the Avesta verbal system may be presented as on the next page. § 445. Voice, Mode, Tense. The Av. agrees with the Skt. — especially with the language of the Vedas — in voices active, middle (passive), in tenses present (and preterite), perfect (and pluperfect), aorist, future, and in modes indicative, imperative, subjunctive, optative. In usage likewise these generally correspond with the Sanskrit. Note 1. The middle voice, as in Skt., is often used with a pas- sive force. A formative passive, as in Skt., however also occurs (cf. V. a). Note 2. Under tenses, observe that ‘injunctive’ or ‘improper sub- junctive’ is a convenient designation for certain forms of augmentless pre- terites used with imperative force. These are enumerated under the simple preterite. Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 563. § 446. Infinitive, Participle. Like the Skt., the Av. conjugation-system possesses also infinitive forms (abstract verbal nouns) and participial forms (active and middle in each tense-system) and gerundives. See VI below. § 447. Person, Number. The Av. like the Skt. distinguishes three persons, and three numbers. Note. It is to be observed that the first persons imperat. are sup- plied by subjunctive forms. Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. 1 38 u I. Present-System—' (to Classes) J. ' | a. Present. 1. Indicative b. Preterite t (Injunctive). 2. Imperative. / 3. Subjunctive (Pres, and Pret. Forms). 4 - 5 - Optative. Participle. SYNOPSIS OF < VERU- SYSTEM II. Perfect-System i. 3 - a. Indicative b. Imperative. Perfect (Present!. Pluperfect (Preterite). Subjunctive (Pres, and Pret. Forms). 4 - 5 - Optative. Participle. III. Aorist-System (non -s-j and j-Class) Indicative (Preterite Aor). Imperative. Subjunctive (Pres, and Pret. Forms). Optative. Participle. „ I i. Indicative (Act. and Mid.). IV. Future-System l 2. Participle. V. Secondary Conjugations. a. Passive. d. Inchoative. b. Causative. e. Desidcrative. c. i lenominative. f. Intensive. VI. Verbal Abstract Forms. a. Participles, b. Gerunds, c. Infinitives. VII. Periphrastic Verbal Phrases. Personal Endings of Verbs. 129 § 448. Personal Endings. These are either (a) pri- mary (pres, and fut. indie., and partly subjunct.) or they are (b) secondary (pret. indie., opt., aor., and partly subjunct.). Some individual peculiarities of form occur in (c) the imperative and in (d) the perfect; the endings, therefore, of the latter two also are separately enumerated. The scheme of normal endings in comparison with the Skt., — cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 553 — is as follows: (Observe the Av. 3 du. forms often identical with Skt. 2 du.) a. Primary Endings. i. A 0 T I V f ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. I . -mi . . -mi -e -c 2. -hi (-si) -si ( -si) -(w)he (-(e) . -se (-fe) 3 --ti ■ ■ -ti -te -te Dual : Dual : 1 . -vahi (GAv.) -vas — ...... -vahe 2. — . . -thas — -athe 3. -to, -pd -tas -ape -iite 1 . -main . Plural : -masi (Ved.) Plural : -maide .... -make 2. -pa . . -tha -pzve -dhve 3 . -nti . . -nti -H te -nti b. Secondary Endings. i. ACTIVE. ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular cf. Skt. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1 . -in . -m -i, -a -i, -a 2. -s (-s) . • - s GO -vha (-(a) [-thas] 3 - -/ • • . -t -ta -ta Dual : Dual : 1. -va . . -va — -vahi 2. — . . -tam — -atham 3. -font -tarn -ate in -alani 9 130 i nfiection: Conjugation of Verbs. Plural : Plural : I . -tua -rna \ -mauli (GAv.) . | -rna'dt! (YAv.) 1 - m tiki 2. -ta . • - ta -dwani -dhvam 3. -n -n -flta .... -nta C. Imperative Endings. i. ACTIVE. ii. MIDDLE- A v. Singular cf. Skt. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. 2. -di, . -dki, — -vuha (-svd) -sva ( -sva j 3. -tit . •til -tarn -turn Plural : Plural: 2. -ta, na (GAv.) - ta ■dwD 7 U .... -dhvam 3. -r k tu ■ -ntn -ntqm . ... - n!am d. Perfect Pin d i n gs. i. ACTIVE •ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. 1 .-a . - a -e -e 2. -jiii . -tha — 3. -a . -a -€ -e Dual : Dual : 1. — . -va — -vahc 2, -athur -dike 3. -atar -alur -aUe (GAv.) -at? Plural: Plural: i . -rna ~ma — -make 2. -a . • • ( • •a — -dhve 3. -ar>, -ar*s -ur — - re General Remarks on the Endings. § 449. In general, GAv. ha.', the same forms as YAv. above, with the long final vowel wherever possible, cf. § 26; but there are also a number of peculiarities to be remarked upon in connection with GAv. as well as with reference to YAv. Sporadic, cf. § 457 . Remarks on the Endings. 1 3 1 Note. Observe that Av. 3 du. is in form often like Skt. 2 du. : e. g. Av. -id (beside -to) 3 du. pres. act. — Skt. -tas 3 du. (but -lhas 2 du.); — again Av. -tun 3 du. pret. act. — Skt. -tam 3 du. (but -lam 2 du.), et al. — Compare the Homeric interchange of -xov, -"CYjV in secondary tenses. a. Primary Endings (Observations). § 45c. Singular: — First Person: i. ACTIVE. Indicative. GYAv. also -a, -a — i. e. GAv. has -a regularly in the thematic or a -conjugation pres, indie., and -mi in the unthematic or non-a-conj. pres, indie. ; but in YAv. this distinction is not sharply drawn. — Subjunctive. YAv. -ni, -a, GAv. -ni, ii. MIDDLE. Indicative. GAv. also -di (§ 56, be- side -^.—Subjunctive. GYAv. -ni, -ne, -at (i. e. a -[- e). Second Person: i, ACTIVE. Subjunctive. In later texts of YAv. -a(h)i sometimes drops its k and becomes -di, e. g. YAv. yazdi ‘mayest thou worship’ Yt. 10.140. — ii. MIDDLE. Indicative. YAv., observe -se (aiter -d [-1] §§ 151, 186) raose ‘thou growest’ Ys. 10.4. — GAv. also indie, subjunct. -vhdi § 56. Third Person, ii. MIDDLE. GYAv. also (but not common; cf. also perf. below) like 1 sg. -e Skt. -e beside te, § 451. Dual:— Third Person: i. ACTIVE. YAv., observe -po in yiltdyapd 'they both fight’ Yt. 8.22, a 3 du.-form (like Skt. -thus 2 du.-form) beside -to above, see § 449 Note. — ii. MIDDLE. YGAv. occasionally -te or -a’te e. g. baraHe ‘they two bring’ ZPhl. Gloss, pp. 54.8=107. r 3, vor^nvaHe ‘both believe’ (indie.) Ys. 31.17. — Again -ite , GAv. jamaete ‘they both may come’ (aor. subjunct.) Ys. 44.15. § 452. Plural: — First Person: ii. MIDDLE. YAv. only occasionally is the MS. variant -malde (observe d) is noted. Second Person: ii. MIDDLE. GAv. regularly -duye = Skt. -dhve § 190. Third Person: i. ACTIVE — ii. MIDDLE. Indicative. YGAv. occasionally have in the 3 pi. of the non-rt-conjugation (unthematic) the form -aHi (i. e. -nti) or even -aHi — Skt. -ati in the active , and -aHe (i. e. -ate) = Skt. -ate in the mid. ; but more commonly in the non- a-conj. (unthematic) the ending ( -aipi) -.ititi, (-aiite) -i>ite of the a-conj. (thematic) is assumed instead. — Uncommon in the pres, is -re, cf. indicative soire ‘they lie down’ Yt. 10.80 = Skt. sire Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 629, and subjunctive mrava.tr e ‘they may say’ Yt. 13.64, nig rat re ‘they may throw’ Yt. 10.40, cf. §§ 486, 521. Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. r 3-5 b. Secondary Endings (Observations). § 453 - Singular : — First Person: ii. MIDDLE. Observe that the normal ending ; coalesces ■with the final of an c = Skt. -dike and some other forms — see Bartholomae, A’./, x.-.ix. p. 286 seq. — Flexions- lehre p. 17 seq. § 455 - Plural : — First Person: ii. MIDDLE. Observe that GAv. has a proper secondary end- ing -mahii (cf. opt. vafrtmafdi) — Skt. -nia/ii, but YAv. substitutes for this -tna'de drawn from the present. Second Person: ii. MIDDLE. GAv. shows -dum — Skt. -dhvam, § 63. Third Person: i. ACTIVE. In redupl. formations GAv. has occasionally an unthematic 3 pi. pret. in -a( (i. e. -iji) corresponding to the oc- casional -ati =r -n.ii of the pres., e. g. za.al ‘they drove away’, et al. — GYAv., remark also opt. -dr 3 s, -dr 3 , thus bityar 3 s ‘they would be’, hyar 3 beside hvqtt. Also -nr 3 aor. pret. GAv. adar 3 they made Ys. 43.15 = Skt. adur ; YAv. askar 3 ‘they elapsed’ Ad. 1.4, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 829, 55 ° — cf- also under peifeet endings (Pf. ii, below). — ii. MiDDLE. YAv. also sporadic traces of secondary 3 pi. mid. -run Skt. -ram in Av. vaazirpm Yt. 19 69, cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § S34 b (perhaps best as pluperf.). c. Imperative Endings (Observations). § 456. Singular: — Second Person: i. ACTIVE. YGAv., the (7-verbs (thematic) have no end- ing, the simple stem form in -a. -a is used. —The non-a-verbs (un- thematic' show -di \-iii § 83, 1), GAv. -di. — ii. MIDDLE. A A \ . re- Mode-Formation. 133 gularly -m/ha — Skt. -sva. — GAv. -sva (in dasvd 'give’ — * dad-sva § 186), -$vS, -hva § 130,2 a. Third Person: ii. MIDDLE. A suffix -qm — Skt. -dm, 3 sg. mid. is found in GAv. sr’iucqm ‘let him speak aright’ Ys. 48.9, vidqm ‘shall de- cide’ vi -j- da Ys. 32.6, Geldner, in B.B. xv. p. 261, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 618. § 457. Plural:— Second Person: i. ACTIVE — ii. MIDDLE. The forms are undistinguishable from an augmentless imperfect § 445 Note 2.— A genuine instance of -na cf. Skt. - tana 2 pi. active imperat. is GAv. bar and Ys. 30.9, cf. Skt. bhajatana, Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 740. Third Person: i. ACTIVE — ii. MIDDLE. The endings -aqtu, -ori-Lu, -sqtqm occur in both a-verbs and in non-a-verbs — (in the latter case by transfer § 471 to a-conj.). d. Perfect Endings. § 458. For observations on the perfect endings see Pf. ii below. Mode-F ormation. 1. Indicative Mode. § 459. The indicative has no special mode-sign other than the use of the present stem itself. The endings are the primary in the present, the secondary in the preterite. Note. For special remarks on the strong and weak stem-forms in the indicative, see below §§ 467, 476 and observe under the different con- jugation classes. 2. Imperative Mode. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 569.) § 460. The imperative has no characteristic mode- sign, the stem is identical with that of the indicative, the special endings are simply added. Note 1. For special remarks on the strong and weak stem-forms see below under the imperatives of the various conjugation-classes. Note 2. For remarks on the endings see § 456. 3. Subjunctive Mode. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gra?n. § 557 seq.) § 461. In Av., as in Skt., the subjunctive has as its characteristic mark an a added to the stem to form the 1 34 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. special mode-stem. In the ^-conjugation (thematic) this a unites of course with the stem-final and forms a: — e. g. (i) thematic #-st.em, Av. bar-a-hi 'mayest thou bear’ (i. e. bara-a-hi) - Skt. bhdr-a-si;- -{ 2) unthematic, Av. jan-a-Hi ‘may he smite' (cf. pres, indicat. ja'n-ti) — Skt. hdn-a-ti. § 462. The endings of the subjunctive are partly primary (i. e. pres. subjuncC), partly secondary (i.e. pret. subjunct.). — the former predominating. Observe in 1 sg. active YGAv. -ni, -ni (i. e. -ant) or also VGAv. -a, -a ; — and in J sg. middle it is -ne (i.e. -due) beside -Si. Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 562. Subjunctive Endings combined with Mode-Sign. Av. i. ACTIVE. Singular : cf. Skt. Av. li. MIDDLE. Singular : cf. Skt. I. -av.i, - a . -a fit, -a -dne, - ai -ai ,j -ahi, -asi | -avhe -ase ( j -V, -(V . -aUi . -as j -ate . -ate 3 i -at . . -at a . — 1. - dva Dual : Dual ' -avahe 2. — . . -at he* — . . . -aithe 3 -! ■ato . -alitn • - 1 — . . . . -Site 1. -dm a Plural: -dm a’ de Plural : 2. -at ha -atha — . . . -adhve 3, l -?n . • - \ -an j - 3 ute, -aSre . -ante Note 1. Observe (late) YAv. z sg. -ai — -Shi (5 450. Note 2. On improper subjunctive or imperative see § 445 Note 2. 4. Optative Mode. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 564 seq.) § 463. The characteristic mode-sign of die optative in Av., as in Skt., is -ya-, -l- added to the weak-stern for the non-rz-conjugation (unthematic), or it is -l- added to the regular tense-stem of the class for the ^-conjugation (thematic). Mode- Formation. 1 35 In the zz-stems (thematic) the mode-sign -z- unites with the stem-final a into -ae- (-oi-) §§ 55, 56. In the non- rt-conj. the distinction between -yd-, -l- is that -yd- was employed in the active and -i- in the middle. Note. Instead of instances of -t- (§ 21 Note) occur, e. g. datpifa beside < ia‘diia ‘mayest thou give’.- Similarly occur instances of -ya- for -yd- (§ iS Note 1), cf. bit y at a , buyama ‘may ye we be’. — Probably also GAv. daddy at Ys. 44.1c. § 464. The endings of the optative are the secondary ones through- out. Jn YAv., however, the t pi. mid. -ma’de (primary e. g Ys. 9 21) in- stead of GAv. -maddi (secondary) is found. Observe in the tf-conj. (thematic) the 3 pi. act. mid. Av. -?n, -mta (cf. Gk. Xsy-oi-ev. Xay-o i-vto) is to be contrasted with Av. non-17-verbs which show -ar 2 , -a/*d — Skt. -ur, -ran (act. mid. in both a- and non-a-stems). Optative Endings combined with Mode-Sign, a. iz-conjugation (thematic), i. ACTIVE. ' ' ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. Av. Singular . cf. Skt. f. — . . -eyatn -ava 1 -eya 2. -did . -es -aejfa -efiias 3. -oil . Plural: -el 1 - aeta Plural: 1 -bimaddi (GAv.) ) ( -dimadie (YAv.) [ -eta I. - ac?na . -etna j . - emahi 2. -aeta. -eta -bidwstn . -edhvatn 3. -aym b. Non- i. ACTIVE. - eyur -ay ant a ■c-conjugation (unthematic). ii. KIDDLE. . -Iran Av. Singular : cf. Skt. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. I . -yq m -yam -ya -iya 2. . -yas -f/tf . -ithas 3 - -yat ■ ■ Plural : -yat -ltd Plural: . -it a T . -yd/na 2 -yam a -1 maddi . -itncthi 2. -yata t -nn . -yata ~~ \ . -idhvam 3. -yar> . 1 -yar’s . -yur [ . -Tran 1 Cf. Ys. 8.7. — - See Yt. 24.58. 136 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. Reduplication and Augment. a. Reduplication. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 5S8 seq.) § 465. (a) Reduplication in Av., as in Skt., is found in certain parts of the ve r b -c onj u ga t i o n (pres, of 3rd. class, and in the desiderative, and intensive), in the per- fect, and sometimes in the aorist. The reduplication consists in the repetition of a part of the root. — The rules of reduplication should be noted;— (b) A long internal or final vowel of the root is commonly shortened in the reduplicated syllable; sometimes — see desiderative, intensive — it is lengthened or strengthened. Radical at' (r-vowel) is reduplicated by i. An initial vowel, by repetition of itself, of course merely becomes long in reduplicating. (c) Roots beginning with a consonant repeat that consonant, but a guttural is reduplicated by the cor- responding palatal; an o riginal s (including st, sp, sm ) is reduplicated by h, an orig. palatal s by s, an initial spirant by the corresponding smooth: — e. g. Av. ja-jm-af {y gam- ‘go’), hi-sta-Gi ( [/ sta- ‘stand’), hi-spos-amna (]/ spas- ‘see’), hi-sniar-znto (j/ mar-, *smar- ‘remember’), tu-pru-ye (j/ pru - ‘nourish’). Note 1. The original guttural instead of palatal is retained in re- duplication before u, cf. Av. ku-fy$nv-qna ( 1 / fyfnu- ‘rejoice, please’). Note 2. Observe the redupl. form (desiderative participle) s i-lfpi&uh- )>nna> Yt. 13-49, c f- Skt. ji-jnas-amanas . b. Augment. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 585.) § 466. In Av. the augment is comparatively rare, tire instances of its omission far exceed in proportion those of the Vedic Sanskrit. The augment, as in Skt., consists of short a prefixed to the preterite tense — imperfect, aorist, pluperfect. This Present System. — Classes of Verbs. 137 a, as likewise in Skt., combines with an initial vowel into the corresponding vrddhi. It is often difficult to decide whether an a is the aug- ment a or the yerbalprefix a — a. Note 1. For metrical purposes it seems sometimes that augment must be restored in reading where the texts omit it. — See Geldner, Metrik p. 38. Note 2. Instead of a, CAv, shows once a form ? in augment be- fore v, cf. GAv. Svaocaj. (but written S. voacaf) § 32. Note 3. On augmentless preterites ('injunctive') with imperat.- subjunct. force, see § 445 Note. § 467. Vowel-Variation (Strong and Weak). In Av., quite as in Skt., verb-stems commonly show vowel-variation — strongest, middle or strong, and weak forms, cf. § 235. This phenomenon must of course go hand in hand with an original shift of accent. I. PRESENT-SYSTEM. §468. The present-system is the most important of the systems, its forms are by far the most frequent in occurrence, and upon the basis of present-formation may be founded in Av., as in Skt., the conjugation-groups and classification of verbs. See the following § 469. Classes of Verbs. § 469. Taking the Sanskrit Grammar as model, we may in the Av. present-system likewise distinguish ten classes of verbs according to the method of forming the present-stem. In Av., however, the phenomenon of accent (§ 2 end) is not always so clearly discernible. The ten classes fall into two great groups of con- jugation according as the endings are attached to the root with or without the (thematic) stem-vowel a. The (I) first group, the thematic or ^-conjugation (Cl. 1,6,4, 10), assumes a in the formation of its present-stem ; the <38 Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. (II) second group, the unthematic or non-rr-conjugation (Cl. 2, 3, 7. 5, 8, 9), attaches the endings directly to the root (the latter as stem, however, subject to modification) without this a as formative element of the stem. — Cf. Whitney, Ski. Cram. § C02 seq. § 470. The classification of Av. verbs on the basis ol the Sanskrit Grammar is the following: — I. ^-Conjugation (thematic). First Formation — Class 1 — see § 478 seq. (1) rt-class with strengthened root-form - Skt. first ( bhii -) class. Av. C bi/-, bav-u-Ui lie becomes’. Second Formation — Class 6 —see § 479 see. (6) rz-class with un strengthened root-form = Skt. sixth (tud) class. Av. druj-, drui-a-Ui ‘he deceives’. Third Formation — Class 4— see § 480 seq. (4) j/tf-class (unst'rengthened root-form) — Skt. fourth (div-) class. Av. !/%/ti— Skt. bhar-a-ti ; Av. J/~ fyji- ‘to rule', ay -e-Hi = Skt. ksdy-a-ti ; Av. J / bu- ‘to be’, bav-a-Hi = Skt. bhav-a-ti. Note 1. Here for convenience, as in Skt., may be included the roots Av. s/a-, had- (orig. redupl.) = Skt. stha-, sad-, e. g. Av. hiltaUi ‘he stands’ =r Skt. tisthati ; Av. hida’ti ‘he sits’ — Skt. sidati, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 748, 749 a. Note 2. Some roots in a -j~ cons, show a fluctuation between d and d, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 745 d, e : Av. \f nam- ‘to bow’ has nun-a- be- side nam-a- = Skt. ndm-a- ; Av. (/ dvar- ‘to run’ has dvar-a- beside dvdr-a-, cf. also § 18 Note 1, and Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 545 c. §470. Class 6 — tf-class with unstrengthened root- form = Skt. sixth ( tud -) class. — The thematic a is simply attached to the root in its weak form to make up the present-stem. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 751. Av. J Sis- ‘to seek, desire’, is-a-He = Skt. is-d-te ; Av. J/TA- ‘to become’, vis-a-'ti (cf. § 20 on z) — Skt. vis-d-ti: et al. Note. With nasal strengthening Av. hit£c-a-iti ‘he sprinkles’ (j/ 7 «c-) — Skt. sihe-d-ti. § 480. Class 4 — ycz-class (unstrengthened root-form) = Skt. fourth (div-) class. — Also here the Pas si ve, cf. V. a below. — The present-stem is formed by adding ya- (ye- § 34) to the simple unstrengthened root. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Grain. §759. Av. ]/ nas- ‘to vanish’, nas-ye-Hi = Skt. nds-ya-ti ; Av. ypra- ‘to protect’, Jra-ye-hite = Skt. trd-ya-nte. Note 1. For the Passive formation see V. a below Note 2. The strong form of the stem (-at:- instead of -A) is to be noted in the verb Av. sraes-yc-’-ti ‘it clings’ - Skt. slts-ya-Zi. § 481. Class 10 — rzycr-class (strengthened root-form) ~ Skt. tenth (cur-) class. — This class includes in part the secondary formation causative, denominative, see V. b, c, be- low. Ihe formative element ay a is added to the strengthened 142 Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. root. — The roots in internal a generally, but not always, receive the vrddhi strengthening; the roots in i, u com- monly receive the giina increase. Av. y tap- ‘to warm’, tap-aye-' ti = Skt. tdp-aya-ti ; Av. \ r pat- ‘to fly’, apat-ayo-n = Skt. dpdt-aya-n ; Av. \ r r is- ‘to wound’, raes-aya-i — Skt. res-aya-t; Av. y rue- ‘to light up’, raoc-aye-iti — Skt. rdc-aya-ti. Note i. Observe that the roots with a do not always show the Vfddhi stage. Note 2. Some exceptions to the rule for guna of i- and «-roots occur. Note 3. In Av., as in Skt., a heavy syllable ending in consonant does not take vyJdhi or gnu a. Paradigms of the ^-Conjugation (thematic). Cl. 1, 6, 4, 10. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 734 seq.) § 482. Av. A3 bar- ‘bear, carry’ = Skt. bhdr-. Cl. 1. Av. hji- ‘rule, possess’, zti- ‘call, bless, curse’, vacn- ‘see’, yaz- ‘worship’, jas- ‘come’, jiv- ‘live’, ci}- ‘teach, point out’, car- ‘niove, go’, har- ‘eat’, az- ‘drive win', yds- ‘desire, seek’, pac- ‘cook’, van- ‘win’, pwars- ‘cut, make’, ram- ‘delight’, miz- ‘make urine’. — Cl. 6. vat- ‘speak’, vis- ‘become’. — Cl. 4. yuJ- ‘fight’, tan-, zfi- ‘give birth, be born’, varz- ‘work’, bud- ‘mark, know’ — Cl. 10. vid- ‘knew’, ta u rv- ‘overcome’, var- ‘to cover’, par- ‘go, make go’, dar- ‘hold fast', hall's- ‘incite’. § 483. i. Indicative. — a. Present. i. ACT! V E. Av. Singular : 1 . bar-d-mi 2 . bar-a-hi 3. bar-a-'ti Dual : 1. — 2 . — j bar- a- to . 1 -U-pd yii’dyapo 1 cf. Skt. bhar-a-tni bhdr-a-si bhar-a-ti bhd.r- 5 .-vas bhdr-a-thas bhar-a-tas 1 Cf. § 449 Note. ^-Conjugation (thematic): — Cl. i, 6, 4. 10. 143 Av. Plural : cf. Skt. ( bar-a-mahi \ 1. { „ . \ bhdr-a-masi (Ved.) 1 -a-mahl vaeiayamahi I 2 . (bar-a-ba) ayapd (GAv.) bk&r-a-tha | bar-3-titi . 1 3- j ... . \bhar-a-nti I zavairiti I jj. MIDDLE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. f . ba' l * r-e bhdr-e f bar-a-he 1 I 2 . , } bhdr-a-se ! -a-vhe va$avhe. ] 3. oar-a-He uhdr-a-te Dual: 1 . — . . bhar-a-vahe 2. - — • bhar-e- the 3- (bar-Ol-pe ) vaenoipe 2 bkdr-e-te Plural : ( (bar-a-ma i de) yazumaule | 1 . ( ... bhdr-a-mahe i -a-mcdde I 2. (bar-a-pzoe) carupwe 3 bhar-a-dhvc 3. bar- 3 -flte ... bhdr-a-ntl § 484. b. Preterite (and Injunctive). 4 1. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1 . bar- 9 -m a-bhar-a-m 2 . ( bay- 0 ) jasu a-bhar-a-s 3. bar-a-f a-bhar-a-t Dual : 1. (bar-d-vaj j-java 4 d-bhar-a-va 2. — d-bhar-a-tam 3- (bar-a-tam) ia u rvayatnn 5 d-bhar-a-tam 1 Cf. § 1 16. — - - Cf. § 449 Note. — s See Yt. 13.34. — 4 On augment- less Fret. — Subjunct. Imperat. (Injunctive) see § 445. — 0 Cf. § 449 Note. 144 Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. Av. Plural : I bar-a-ma 1 • l -a-ma barayama . 2 . (bar-n-ta) ta u rvoyata . 3. bar-a-n ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 1 . ba'r-e 1 2. ( bar-a-wha ) zayavha . 3. bar-a-ta Dual : 1. — 2 . — I (bar-ae-tzm) cac$aet>m . . . "'If bar-di-pe) cardipe - . Plural : 2. (bar-a-dwam) varayadwsm* . . 3. (bar-a-tita) carpyta § 485. 2. Imperative. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular : 2. bar -a \ 3 . bar-a-tu cf. Ski. j d-bhar-a-ma a-bhar-a-ta a-bhar-a-it d-bhar-e d-bhar-a-thas a-bhar-a-ta d-bhar-a-vahi a-bhar-e-tham a-bhar-i-tam a-bkar-a-Mahi a-bhar-a-dhvam d-bhar-a-nta cf. Skt. bhar-a bhdr-a-tu 2. ( bar-a-ta ) barata Plural : 3- bar-3-titu -a- l^t U parayaritu ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 2. bar-a-mtha 3. (, bar -a- tain ) vn-^.yatqm 1 . . bhdr-a-ta bhar-a-mu bhar-a-sva bhar-a-lam 1 Yt. 5.6, cf. apprise, aspuze. — - Ys. 9.5, cf. § 449 Note. cf. Delbriick, Allind. Vb. ij 106, Rarlholomae, Altiran. Vb. p. 52, 53. — 3 Cf. § 484 Foot- Note 4. — 1 -See Vsp. 15.1, best reading. a-Conjugation (thematic): — Cl. 1, 6, 4, 10. U5 Av. Plural : cf. Skt. 2 . ( bar-a-dwom ) darayadwsni bhar-a-dhvarn 3- (bar-a-rittpn) jasmtqm bhdr-a-nldin § 486. 3. Subjunctive. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. 1. bar-d-ni bhdr-d-ni 2. bar-a-hi bhar-a-si 3- 1 (bar-a-‘ti) carani bhar-d-ti \ bar-a-p bhar-a-t Dual: 1. — bhbr-a-va 2. — bhdr-d-thas 3- (bar-d-to) jasdto Plural : 1. bar-a-ma 1 bhdr-a-ma 2. (bar-d-pa) azapa (GAv.) bhar-d-tha 3- bar-q-n bhar-a-n ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. ^ j (bar-a-ne) insane I (bar-ai) vtsai bhdr-ai 2. (bar-co-tohe) yds (BK he bkdr-a-sg 3. ( bar-d-ite ) pa cake bhar-d-tc Plural : | (. bar-co-nte ) yaz&nte — ^ ( -?vn>*saeta . . bhar-e-ta 3 . bar-ay- 3 n ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 1. ( bar-ay-a ) ha)/$aya 1 2. (bar-ae-$a) haftaeSa bhdr-e-thas 3. bar-ae-ta Plural : r. ( bar-di-maide ) mvdyoima i de . . bhbr-c-mahi 2. (bar-oi-dwem) ramoidwjm . . . bhar-e-dhvam 3. (bar-ay -anta) maezayanla - . . . . . bhar-e-ran § 488. 5. Participle. Av. ). ACTIVE. cf. Skt. bar-a-nt- (fem. - 3 flti-) bhar-a-nt- (fern, -anti-) ii. MIDDLE. bar- 3 -nma- (feill. - 3 -mnci-} , . . bhar-a-mana- (fem. -a-tnand-') Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. § 489. GAv. shows in general the same forms as above, but with the long final vowel, cf. § 26. It has, however, a certain number of individual differences; these as well as other variations in YAv. also may here be noted. § 490. (1) The original unmodified forms of 3 pi. act. mid. -aiyti, -ante, cf. zavahyte above, occasionally stand instead of being changed to -elite, e. g. : — GAv. vano 3 ?iti, YAv. vanatiti ‘they win’ Yt. 13.154, GAv. hacabite beside YAv. hachite ‘they follow’ (§§ 30, 491). § 491. (2) According to § 30, the forms -hiti, -i>ite, -in are often found after palatals, instead of -atiti, etc., e. g. : — Av. frataciriti ‘they run forth’ (variants •taca*%ii, “lacptiti Ys. 65.3, if lac -) , fratacin ‘they ran forth’; haritite (YAv.) beside haca’ntt 1 Ys. 8.7. — 2 i. e. * maez-ae-atiia for *maiz-a-l-ariid. a-Conjugation (thematic): — Cl. r, 6, 4, 10. \^~j (GAv.) ‘they follow’; yazhiti ‘they worship’ Yt. 8.11 beside yazospt Yt. 8.24, cf. Yt. 10.54 yazsiite, yaziqti ; snaezijitae-ca ‘and they drop as snow’ (cf. § 55). § 492. (3) GYAv., when y precedes the thematic -a- (-a-), especially in Cl. 4, 10, the combination -ya- (- yd ■) generally becomes -ye- according to § 34, e. g. : — Av. sadayemi , sadayehi , sadayeHi ‘I, thou, he appear’ (Y^sad- C.l. 10); jcddyemi , jaidyehi, ja l dye*>iti ‘I, thou, they beseech’ ( j/yW- Cl. 4) ; fysaye/’n (GAv.), J/jfayeili, fygaye'te, 1 /JayeHiti, fyjfayetii (subjunct. -am) ‘thou, he etc. rule, possess’ ( 1 ffyii- Cl. 1); zbayemi, zbayehi, ► zbayeUi ‘I invoke'’, etc. ; baiidayeni ‘I may bind’ (subjunct.). § 493. (4) Some reductions of -ya-, -va- before rn, n (§ 63) occur, e. g. Av. vir^ziriti ‘they work’ (i. e. var^zyatiti, Y varz - Cl. 4) ; Ov/zVy/z ‘they wound’ (i. e. *ri$yanti , jArz'/- Cl. 4); u rvaesi?iti ‘they turn’; ufyfin ‘they grew’ (i. e. ufyiyan, j / vafys Cl. 4); fyavhurite ‘they shower sleet’ (i. e. fyauhvinpe ). — -So imperat. 2 sg. nase ‘perish’ (i. e. nasya). § 494. (5) Some reductions of -aya-, -ava- (-dya-, -ava-) before final m, n (§ 64) occur, e. g. ; — Av. daesaem ‘1 showed’ (i. e. daesayam, l/Vz'f- Cl. 10); abaom ‘I became’ (i. e. abavam, y^zz- Cl. 1) Yt. 19.57,61,63, baon 'they became’ Yt. 5.98 etc. § 495. Certain other peculiarities likewise require de- tailed notice. 1. Indicative. a. Present. § 496. Singular : — First Person: i. ACT GAv. shows only the ending -d (Gk. -to), instead of -ami in the thematic verbs and only -mi in the non-zz-verbs (un t h e m a li c), e. g. GAv. t if yd ‘I praise’, kaya ‘1 discern’. — YAv. similar but rare (perhaps borrowed) zbaya ‘I invoke’ at Vsp. 6.X by the side of frayeze which likewise is an indicative. § 497. Dual:— Third Person: i. ACT. GAv. add caratas-cd ‘both come’ Ys. 51.12. — ii. MID. ZPhl. Glass, p. 54.8 has baraite ‘they two bring’ cf. A. 0 . S. Proceedings Oct. 18S9 p. 165. § 498. Plural: — First Person: i. ACT. YAv., similarly with short d (as above) : baydmahi ‘we invoke'. I48 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. Second Person: i. ACT. YAv. also isolated (-/- like pret. form) karat a ‘ye eat’ Vd. 7. $7- — ii. MID. GAv. -duye (cf. § 190) didragzoduyi ‘ye keep holding’ (desiderative) — on -0- for -a- of stem, see § 39. Third Person: See general details above § 490 seq. b. Preterite. § 499. Plural : — Third Person: ii. MID. GAv., observe visiqla ‘they entered’ (on ef. § 32). 2. Imperative. § 500. Singular: — Second Person: i. ACT. YAv., note (by reduction §§ 34, 493) naze ‘perish thou’ (i. e. nasya, y nas- Cl. 4). — ii. MID. GAv., only -hvd: gtifahva ‘hear thou’, ba/^o/ivd ‘share thou’ (on -1?- for -a-, see § 39). Third Person: I. ACT. GAv., observe -0- (cf. §39) in vir^zydtu ‘let him work’ varz- Cl. 4), vatayotu ‘let him announce’ (| [vat- Cl. 10). § 501. Plural: — Second Person: i. ACT. GAv. with ending -110 (cf. Skt. -land) bar and ‘bear ye’ Ys. 30.9, cf. 457 above, and Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 740. — ii. MID. GAv. gujodum ‘hear ye’ — Skt. ghofadhvam. 3. Subjunctive. § 502. Singular: — Second Person: i. ACT. YAv. occasionally Si for -d(fi): § 450: apa.yasdi 'thou wilt destroy’ (i. e. yasahi) ; vazdi, vazdhi (as variants) ‘rnayest thou bring’ Vd. 5.16. — YAv., a form with secondary ending (but syntax bad) is baza) Yt. 24.8. § S°3- Plural:— Third Person: i. ACT. GAv. shows also -in (for -qn) in rapin 'they may hold’. — ii. MID. YAv. like mravd're above § 452, also nigra' re ‘they may strike’ Yt:. 10.40, so again a>vhd‘re Yt. 10.45. 4. Optative. § 504. Singular: — First Person - ii. MID. YAv., observe ma'tiya ‘1 would think’ Yt. 10.106 (for mainyaya § 194). § 505. Plural: ~ First Person: i. ACT. GAv. (with regular secondary ending -ma'di, cf. Skt. -mohi) vu u rai ma'di ‘we would cause to believe’. Third Person: YAv. like maczayaqla in paradigm is yazayanla ‘they would sacrifice’. The non-a-Conjugation (unthematic). 149 5. Participle. § 506. On the relation of Av. -mna (metrically often -mam) to Skt. -mana, see § 18 Note 2. § 507. In Av. more often than in Skt. (cf. Whitney, Skt. Grant. § 741 a) there appear instances of middle (passive) participles of a-verbs formed with the participial suffix -ana, -ana (= Skt. -ana, § 1 8) instead of -mna, e. g. barana- ‘bearing’, °azana ‘driving’ ; — yazana- ‘worshipping’; starana- ‘strewing’. ii. The non-tf-Conjugation (unthematic). § 508. General Remark. In Av., as in Skt., the verbs of the non-tr- conjugation (unthematic) are not so numerous as those of the thematic conjugation. They may be grouped in six classes (Cl. 2, 3, 7, 5, 8, 9), in each of which the endings are attached directly (without an interposed a) to the stem which is subject to modification. The striking characteristic of the entire group is the variation of the root in different forms. The modified root or the suffix assumes now a stronger form, again a weaker form. § 509. Strong and Weak Stem-Forms. The strong Cguna) forms, as a rule, are: — (1) the Sing. Indie. Act. (Pres. Pret.), — (2) the 3rd. Sing. Imperat. Act., — (3) the entire Subjunct. — The remaining forms are weak. Many fluctuations and transfers, however, occur ; especially often is the strong stem employed in forms, (see 3rd. plurals) modelled after the ^-conjugation. Mode Formation.— Special Remark. 1. Indicative. § 510, The endings of the nOn-thematic indicative require some remark. GAv. generally shows the older use of -ml (§ 450) and -aHi, -a‘tc, -af (for thematic -atiti, -arite -an § 452). In YAv. this old distinction is not sharply preserved. The stem in general to which the endings are 150 Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. directly attached shows a variation of str. and wk. forms according to the preceding rule, § 509. 2. Imperative. § 51 1. The ending of the imperat. 2 sing, is -dt,-di. The endings in general are attached directly to the pre- pared class-stem. This shows the strong form in the 3 sg. act.; in the other forms it has the weak grade, but fluctuations occur. 3. Subjunctive. § 512. The endings are attached by means of the mode-sign a to the prepared class-stem which shows the strong form throughout. 4. Optative. § 513. The regular optative endings are attached by the mode-sign -yd-, -i- (1) in accordance with the rules given above at § 463. The stem regularly shows its weak form throughout, but variations from this sometimes occur. 5. Participle. S 514. The participial forms (verbal adjectives) are made by attaching to the present stem in its weak grade the formative element -ant, -af (i. e. -fit) for the active, and -ana, -ana beside -mna, for the middle. Classes of the non-«-Conj ligation (unthematic). Cl. 2, 3, 7, 5, 8, 9. § 515. The six classes of unthematic verbs have certain characteristics in common but they have also certain individual peculiarities, these classes will now each be taken up in detail. Class 2 — Root-Class. § 516. Class 2 — Root-Class — root itself is present stem = Skt. second (ad) class. — The stem may have the strong or the weak form according to § 509, the endings The non-<7-Conjugation (unthematic) : — Cl. 2 (root-class). 151 are then attached directly to the stem. Examples are quite numerous : Av. | f pa- ‘to keep, protect’, pa-’ti (3 sg. pres.) = Skt . pd-ti: Av. y i- ‘to go’, ae-'li (3 sg.), y-ehiti (3 pi. pres. § 34) =■- Skt. e-ti } y-anti; Av. y stu- ‘to praise’, stao-Hi = Skt. stau-ti (§ 60 Note e) ; Av. \ r jan- ‘to slay’, jahi-ti (3 sg. pres, indie.) — Skt. han-ti ; Av. y vas- ‘to wish’, vas-ti (3 sg.) , us-mahi (1 pi. pres, indie.) = Skt. vds-ti, us-masi (Ved.). Paradigm of Class 2. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 612 seq.) § 517. Av. y mru- ‘to say’ = Skt. y~bru-. Av. hap- ‘promote’, vas-, us- ‘wish’, ah- ‘sit’, rild- ‘grow’, stu- ‘praise’, i- ‘go’, is- ‘be able’. §518. i. Indicative. — a. Present: i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1 . mrao-mi brav-t-mi 2. ( nirao-$i) hafii (GAv.) brav-i-sl 3. 7)irao-Hi brav-i-ti Dual : I . (mrvahl 1 * J usvatn (GAv.) bru-vasi Plural : I . (mru-mahi) us main bru-masi 3. (furv-ahiti) 2 brv.v-anti ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 1 . mruy-e z 2. (mrii-se) cf. raose 4 . . . . I mru-ite 3 - -5 i mruy-e 0 Plural: i . mru-maide 3. (nirv-aiitc) analunte G . . . bruv-e brii-se bru-te bruv-e brit-rnahe bruv-at? 1 i. e. mru-vahi § 68.1. — 2 Yt. 17.10. — 8 § 190. — 4 Strong form § 5 ° 9 - — 5 Ys- 19.10, cf. § 450 end. — e Yt. 17. 11 ; V s . g.22. Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. 152 ij 519. b. Preterite Indicative (and Injunctive). i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1 . tnrao-m d-brav-am 2. Vl'KdO'S a-brav-'-s 3 - mrao-l d-brov- l -i Plural : 3. ( WlTdO-H ? [) usin a-bruv-an ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 1 . 1 )i V a V - 1 ** d-oruv-i f tut ti-tn d-bni-ta 3. ] * \ mrao-ta (GAv.) . _ Plural: 3. m PQSV^Cl 71 1 (i * a-bruv-ata § 520. 2. Imperative. i. act; ve. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. 2. mru-idi . brfi-hi 3. mrao-tu (GAv.) brav-'-tu Plural : 2 . (mrao-t/i) itaoiG* b,u-tu 3. (inr<*v-atiiu) ya^ii, .... . . . bruv-dntu § 5 21 - 3- Subjunctive. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1 mrav-a-ni 5 . brdv-s-ni I mrav-a-Hi (GAv.) hrdv-a-ti ■’’I tnrav-a-( 6 brav-a-t Plural: J . (mrav-d-ma) janama brdv-a-ma 3. Onrav- 9 -n) vasin brdv-a-u 1 § 64. — 2 Observe sir. stem; or is it mr a vi § 6S Note 3? — 3 Cf. § 509 end. - * Strong form ( 1 ), cf. § 509. — 6 Yt. 15.50; 122. — n See /.Phi. Gloss, p. ill. The non-fl-Conjugation (unthematic) : — Cl. 2 (root-class). 153 ii. MIDDLE, Av. Singular: j (mrav-ai) isai ' { mrav-dne 1 Plural : 3. mrav-a-h'e 2 § 522. 4. Optative. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: 2. mru-yaa 3. mru-ya-f ... . . . ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 2. mrv-i-§a 3 3. mrv-i-ta (GAv ) .... § 523. 5. Participle. Av. i. ACTIVE. mrv-at- ........ ii. MIDDLE. inrav-dna - 4 mrao-mna - 5 . cf. Skt. brav-ai cf. Skt. bru-ya-s brii-ya-t bruv-T-tkas bruv-i-ta cf. Skt. bruv-ant- bruv-and- Forms to he observed in GAv. and YAv. § 524. Beside the above paradigm, a certain number of forms in GAv. and YAv. are worthy of note. 1. Indicative. a. Present. § 525. Singular:— First Person: i. ACTIVE. GAv., notice (from strongest stem) stdumi 'I praise’ (but v. 1 . staomi ) Ys. 43.8, cf. Skt. staiiti (Ved. 3 sg.). Second Person: i. ACTIVE. YAv., observe likewise as regular form (§ 122) fahi ‘thou proteclest’. Third Person: ii. MIDDLE. YAv. also (like 1st. — 3rd. sg. pres., above) ni-jne ‘he smites’. 1 Yt. 5.82. — 2 tnadai-cd 'and we name’. Third Person: ii. MID. YAv., seldom the plur. ending -ati i~ ute): Av. aoju'te ‘they .say’ Yt. 8.5 1 , etc. — Observe also Av. so ire they lie’ Yt. 10.80 ^ Skt. sere. b. Preterite. § 527. Singular:— Second Person: ii. MID GAv., note as a regular 2 sing, aoglii 'thou saidst’ Ys. 43.12. Third Person: i. ACT. GAv., observe (with inserted -i- like Skt. abravit) the form sdhi £ ‘he taught’ Ys. 50.6. — ii. MID. YAv. also (from str. stem, like mraota above) staota ‘he praised’. 5. Participle. § 528. ii. MID. Observe also -tiua (for -and) and (like a-conj. §§ ^14, 477) -f/ntta: Av. aojdna-, aojtmna- ‘speaking’. Transfers to the ^-Conjugation (thematic). § 529. A number of transfers from the Root-Class to the tf-conj ugation are to be found. 1. Indicative, i. ACT. b. Pret. GAv. mrav-o-£ ‘lie said’ Ys. 45.2. 2. Imperative, i. ACT. YAv. mrav-a, mrv-a ‘say thou’. — ii. MiD YAv. stav-a-vuha. ‘praise thou’. 3. Subjunctive, i. ACT. YAv. mrav-di (for -tihi § 502) ‘if thou say’ Ys. 71.15. — il. MID. YAv. (above in paradigm) mrav-a rc ‘if they say’ § 452 end. 4. Optative, i. ACT. YAv. stan-oi-t ‘he might praise’ beside stuyd£. § 530. Inflection of Av. \ r ah-. h- ‘to be’ — -only act. — = Skt. ]/ as-, s-, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 636. § 531. 1. Indicative. — a. Present. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1. ah-rni di-mi 2. ahi 1 asi 3. as-ti as-ti Dual : 3. s-to s-lds 1 i. e. for ah-hi :: Skt. asi for as- si. The non-a-Conjugation (unthematic): — Cl. 2 (J/"i-ya-pa ‘might ye be’. § 538. Transfers to the ^-conjugation : — 1. Indie. Pret. 3 sg. avh-a-%. — 3. Subjunct. 3 sg. auk-a-Hi. § 539. Beside all the above paradigm of the present-system, there is made from this root ah ‘to be’, as in Skt., a regular perfect (bvha etc. § 606 = Skt. dsa etc. Class 3.— Reduplicating Class. § 540. Class 3. — Reduplicating Class. The root is reduplicated to form the present stem. The stem then shows a variation of strong and weak forms (§ 509); the endings are attached to it directly. The general rules for reduplication have been given above § 465. As examples of formation, the following may be taken: — Av. \ dd- ‘to give, to place’ (Stems dada-, dada--, dad-, dap dad-, §§ 82, 83, 86), da-da-Hi (YAv.), da- dd-Hl (GAv.), da-dq-m, da-pq-m — Skt. dd-d(h')d-ti , a-da- d(h)a-ni; — Av. ]/ ci- ‘to atone’ (Stems ci-kay-, ci-ki-), ci-kay-af 3 sg. subjunct. — Skt. cikayat ; — Av. ]/ hac- ‘to follow', hi-shafp-ti , hi-sc-a-ina'de (Ys. 40.4) = Skt. si-sak-ti ; — Av. j / jan- ‘to slay', ni-ja-jn-ziiti — Skt. j i-ghn-anfi . Paradigm of Class 3. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 647 seq.) § 541. Av. \ddd- ‘to give, to place’ (str. stem YAv. dada, GAv. dada-; wk. stem Y Av . dad-, dap-, GAv. dad-) = Skt. da-, \ dud — stems dad(h)a-, dad(h ) — , cf. Whitney, Skt. Grain. § 667 seq. ■Note. Obseive that orig. da-, dha- are practically fallen together in Av. as da-, §§ 82, 83. — On the interchange of d, d, p, see §§ 82, 85, 86. The non-tf -Conjugation (unthematic) : — Cl. 3 (redupl.). 157 § 542. i. Indicative. — a. Present. i. A. C T 1 V E. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1. dada-mi ddd(h)a-mi 2. dada-hi ddd(h)a-si I dada-Hi ddd(h)s-ti 3‘1 das-ti (YAv.) 1 — 2 Plural : 1. dad* -mahl , dad(h)-mdsi ( Ved.) 2. — d(h)at-ta I dada^ti (GAv.) 3 . | Hdada-iti (YAv.) 4 ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. ( da‘d-e (YAv.), dad-e (GAv.) .... dad(h)-i 1 ' | dalp-e 5 — 2. — d(h)at-si | das-te (GYAv.) 6 d(h)at-ti [ das-de (GAv . ) 5 _ Plural : I. dad^-maide ddd(h)-mahe § 543. b. Preterite Indicative (and Injunctive). i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1. dadtii-m, dapq-m d-dad(h)n-m 2. dad /«'-). 3. Subjunctive. § 5.5 !• Sg. PI. i. ACT. YAv., add (regularly) from ~\f a- ‘to atone’, ci-kay-a( (3 sg. subjunct.), ci-kay-a-td (3 du. subjunct. ZPhl. Gloss, p. 92,34), ci-kaen (3 pi. subjunct.) i. e. *ci-kay-dn § 64. 4. Optative. § 552. Beside the mid. forms with long z ( -is a, -ita) are found also the variants -it a, cf. § 21 Note. Transfers to the ^-Conjugation (thematic). § 553. A number of transitions from the Third Class to the ^-conjugation occur. The reduplicated wk. stem dap- (YAv.), dad- (GAv.) of y da- in Av. as in Skt. — cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 672— thus not infrequently assumes the inflection of an tz-stem, § 4S3. 1 Ys. 9.1. i6o Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. I. Indicative, i. ACT. a. Pres. YAv. dap-a-Ui , dap-i-rili. — b. Prei. YGAv. dap-»-m, dap-d, Jap-a-t, dad-a dap->-n, dad-g-n (beside dadap § 543 Foot-Note). — ii. MID. YAv. dap-a-' ! !<. GAv. dad-g-nte ‘tliey are placed’. Note. Similarly transferred Av. zizangtiti, zizan.it:, sizandf from "J fzan- 'beget , bear’. The Skt. shows jijanat as redupl. a o r. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 864. Class 7. — Nasal Class. § 554. The roots of the nasal class all end in a consonant; the class has for its characteristic feature the assumption of an internal nasal to form the stem. That is, the root has a -na- (in strong forms), an - n - (in weak forms) inserted immediately before its final consonant to form the present stem. The root itself retains its weak grade; the endings are attached directly to the stem. — Cf. Skt. seventh Class, Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 683 seq. Mere belong for example: Av. yds- ‘to announce, promise’ ci-na-sti; Av. y *ric- ‘to let go’ *ri-na-%ti — Skt. ri-na-kti, and some others — see following paradigm §555. Paradigm of Class 7. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 684.) § 555- Av. y cis- ‘to announce, promise’, cip- ‘to proclaim, think’, mark- (mgr’nc-) ‘kill’, kart- ‘to cut’, mis- ‘mingle’, vid- ‘find, receive’. Cf. Skt. y chid- ‘to cut’. § 556. 1. Indicative. — a. Present. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1. ci-na-hmi (GAv.) 1 chi-nd-dmi 2. ci-na-sti chi-na-tti ii. MIDDLE. Singular: 3. kiri-n-tc 2 chi-n-te Plural: 2. msr 3 -ti-g*-duye (GAv.) chi-n-ddhvi 3. mir'-ti-caUe (GAv.) 3 chi-n-ddte 1 Cf. § 141. — 2 Vd. 7.38, cf. imperat. k?r*titu , but kgr’nla’ti a-conj. as Skt. krntati. — 3 Ys. 31. 1, -ale - -nte. The non-a-Conjugation (unthematic) : — Cl. 7 (nasal class). 161 § 557 - b. Preterite, i. ACTIVE. Singular: 2. Imperative. i. ACTIVE. Singular: cf. Skt. d-chi-na-t a-chi-na-t Av. 3. kar*-ri-tn % § 559 - 3. Subjunctive, ii. MIDDLE. Plural: cf. Skt. chi-na-ttu 1 . ci-na-pcmahle 4 § 560 . i. ACTIVE. Av. cf. Skt. chi-va-damahai 4. Optative. A v. Singular: cf. Skt. ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular: cf: Skt. 3. 7 U?rqs-yd-[ ' J . . . chi-n-d-yd-t 3. vi-ri-di la 0 . . . chi-n-ditd vi-ti-da( *i)t - 7 . . . chi-n-dant- vi-q-dunna- .... chi-n-dana- § 562. The form Av. nur 3 js>ite stands perhaps for *msr 3 -ti-gle (3 sg. mid.). If so , the formation would be regularly after this (7) class. But the form is quite uncertain. § 563 The stem mar^c- ‘kill’ has practically become stereotyped as a root according to the z7-conj. by transfer; hence the thematic forms: — Pres. Act. 3 sg, mai^ncaHi; 3 pi. nur 3 ncir t ti ; — Mid. 3 sg. vur^nca^e, 3 pi. mJi^ncafite (above) . — 1 mperat. Mid . 2 sg, mar^nd.avuka . § 564. The root GAv. ward- (as mamnd- § 39) *tp destroy’ has likewise become practically crystallized according to a-conj. : Pret. Act. 3 sg. nivr?>ida£, 3 pi. mor 3 tidmi (on cf. § 39 end). 1 i. e. mi-na-s-s, § 158. --- i. e. ci-ira-s-t, § 192. — 3 Vd. 7.38, weak form ! — ' a-conj. hv transfer as in Skt. — 6 On -rq- — r n, see § 49. On §, cf. § 162. — 8 Yt. 17.54, with variant vitidita (i). — ‘ In compounds. § 56i. 5. Participle. Av. i. ACTIVE. cf. Skt. Av. i). MIDDLE. cf. Skt. Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. Transfers to the a- C onjugati on. i62 Inflection' Conjugation of Verbs. § 505. Similar instances of stereotyped forms and transfer to ^-conjugation us also in Skt., are: Ac. 2 vid- ‘find, obtain’ (viyd-, like Skt. vi-n-d-d-ii) vi-ti-d-?->i-ti (3 pi. indie.), vi-n-d-a-Ui (3 sg. subjunct. Vd. 13.36) beside unihcraatic vi-na-sti (( »Av.), vi-tt-dita (YAv. opt. above). — Likewise Av. kart- ‘to cut’ (hr*ttt-, like Skt. ky-n-t-d-ti) k?r'-%-t-a‘ti (3 sg. indica- tive), k)r>-n-t-a-l (pret.). — Also some others. Note. Peculiar is 2 sing. pret. act. m»r»iica i rii'$ ‘thou didst destroy’ — weak nasalized root with added an (= vn ). On -T$— ?s cf. § 527 end. Class 5. — //zeClass. § 566. The verbs of this class are not numerous. The root adds vao- (in the strong forms), tin- nv - (in the weak forms) to make the present stem. The root itself retains its weak grade. Here belong for example: Av. ykar- ‘to make’ kdr 3 -nao-Hi — Skt. kr-no-ti ; Av. y srn- ‘to hear’ i"ru- nao-Hi — Skt. sr-no-ti; Av. J/ as- ‘to attain’ a$-nao-‘ti — Skt. as-nd-ti , and a few others. Paradigm of Class 5. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 60S.) § 567. Av. | fkar- ‘to make*, var- ‘cover choose’, dab- ‘deceive’, hu- ‘press’, sri- ‘give over’, sru ■ ‘hear’. — Cf. Skt. y kr-. § 568. i. Indicative. — a. Present. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1. kdr'-nao-mi kr-yd-mi 2 . kjr ? -nii-$i 1 kr-tfi-si 3. k?r*-nao-‘ti ky-yd-U Plural : 3. kdr’-nav-anti- kr-vv-anti ii. MIDDLE. Singular: 3. VdV'-HU-iti’ ky-yu-te Dual : 3. vdr 3 -nv-aUe (GAv.) 3 kj-yv-site Note 1 On ti , cf. § 60 Note b. — 2 Yt. 13.26, so metrically. Cf. § 68 3. — * Ys. 31-17. The non-a-Conjugation (unthematic) : — Cl. 5 (w/c-class). Av. Plural: cf. Skt. 3. V 3 r 3 - 1 lV-a' l nte 1 Lr-m-dte § 569. b. Preterite. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 3. far 3 -nao-t d-kr-yd-t Plural : 2. d 3 b- 3 nao-ta (GAv.) 2 d-kr-yo-ta ii. MIDDLE. 3. hu-nu-ta a-ky-yu-ta § 570. 2. Imperative. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular : ef. Skt. 3. kjr 3 -nu-‘di kr-yu-hi Plural : 2. s‘ri-nao-ta 3 . . kr-yo-ta § 571. 3. Subjunctive. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. I. ktr 3 -nav-dni kr-ydv-ani Plural : 3 - kjr 3 -nau-n 1 kr-yav-an ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 1. ksr’-nav-dne kj-yav-si § 572. 4. Optative. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. 2. s u rn-mi-yai ky-yu-yas 3 . kar 3 nu-ydf kr-yu-yai § 573. 5. Participle. i. ACTIVE. Av. hu-nv-a(ll)t- k;-nr-d(n)t- ii. MIDDLE. hu-nv-ana- ky-yv-and- 1 After >-nav-a-hi, k>r*-nav-at. k)r>- nav-qn if thou, he, they make’. § 575- On instances of kar- made up after clas-. 9, see below § 591. Class 8. — ?AClass. § 576. The eigth class (Skt. ta«-class, Whitney. Ski. Cram. § 6y 7 seq.) is hardly ntore than a variety of the preceding (5) class. It comprises, however, enough roots to be distinguishable. The present stem is made by add- ing to the root: ao- 3 av- (in the sir. forms), u-, v- (in the wk. forms). Included under this class are the roots: Av. \ tan- ‘to stretch = Skt. \f ion-; Av. y' in- ‘drive’ — Skt. \ in-. Likewise here, parts of Av. J/ dp- ‘to reach — Skt. y ap-; Av. \f jzar- ‘flow (pres, participle), cf. Skt. yksar-; Av. y har- protect’. Paradigm of Class 8. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 698 b.) § 57 •/. Av. yin- ‘to drive’, fan- ‘stretch’, van- ‘strike’, jiar- ‘flow’, jsan destroy’. - Cf. Skt. y (an- ‘to stretch’. tj 57S. 1. Indicative. — a. Present. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 3. in-av-Ui . lan-o-ti Plural: 2. sfiag-u-pa 1 (?) . tan-u-lha. ii. MIDDLE. Plural: 3. < 7 / /nte ' 1 tan-v-ati 1 Uncertain ; Vs. 53.tr. — 5 i. e. *dp-a-antc after ff-conj. On f, see § 95. The n on -tf-Conj ugation (unthematic) : — Cl. 8, 9 («-, «a.-class). j ( 5 ^ § 579 - Av. 1. tan-av-a § 58o. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: 3. van-u-yBj .... 3. Subjunctive, i. ACTIVE. Singular: 4. Optative. cf. Skt. tan-u-yat Av. cf. Skt. . tan-av-d (Ved.) ii. MIDDLE. Singular: cf. Skt. j. tan-u-ya 1 . tan-v-iyd § 581. 5- Participle. Av. i. ACTIVE. cf. Skt. Av. ii. MIDDLE, cf. Skt. gzar-v-a(ti)l- . . . tan-v-a(n)t- gxon-v-auina ' 1 . . . tan-v-dna Forms to be observed. § 582. 1. Inclic. Pres. Act. 3 sg. ha u r-v-a‘li (after ir-eonjuga- t i o n). — Mid. 3 pi. fyavutitae-ca ‘and they rain’ (i. e. fya»h-v-a>ite § 63). Class 9. — ?«?-Class. § 583. la the ninth class na- is added to the root to form the strong present-stem; n-, na- (i. e. n T tz-conj.) is added to make the weak pres. stem. The form na- (i. e. rt-conj.) is commoner than n-. The endings are attached directly ; the root itself retains its weak grade. The Skt. ninth class likewise adds nd- in the strong forms, but n-, in- (i. e. w before cons.) in the weak. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 717 seq., esp. § 731. Here belong: Av. fri- ‘to love’ fri-na-mi — Skt. pri-nd-mi ; Av. j/ garw- ‘to seize’ gar*it<-nd-’ti = Skt. grbh-na-ti ; Av. \/var- 'to choose’ vai^-iy-te — Skt. vr- ip-te; Av. \ r gar- ‘to sing’ gar 3 -n-te — Skt. gr-ig-te. Likewise some others — see following paradigm § 584. Paradigm of Class 9. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 718). § 584. Av. y fri- ‘to love’, garw- ‘seize’, var- ‘choose’, hu- ‘to press’, par- ‘fight’. — Cf. Skt. \[ prT- ‘to please’, p" var- ‘to choose’. 1 cf. Skt. tan-v-i-ya § 62. — 2 Like i?-conj., -amna. On d, cf. § 39. 1 66 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. § 585. i. Indicative. — a. Present. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. 1. fri-na-mi 3. gyr } w-vd-Hi . Plural : 1. fry-q-mahi (GAv.) 1 .... 3 . fri-n-*nti . . ii. MIDDLE. Singular : I . V 9 r*-n-e . . . . vf-ft-e 3. vsr’-ii-te . . § 586 . b. Preterite. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. 3. in ip-11 d-t . ii. MIDDLE. . . a-pri-ya-t Singular: 3. fraor'-ii-ta 2 Plural : . . . d-vr-pi-ta 3. V 3 r>-n-dta (GAv.) 3 .... . . . o-vr-y-ata § 587 . 2. Imperative. i. ACTIVE. Av. Plural : cf. Skt. 3. fri-n- 3 tit.il . . . pri-n-antu § 588 . 3. Subjunctive. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular : cf. Skt. r . fri-nd-ni j hu-na-ni (GAv.) t fri-nd-f . Plural : 3. g 3 r?iv-nq-n . .... . . pri-ffS-n 1 i e. fri-n-mahi or frv-nn-mahi. — - Vs. 5'/. 24, Yt. 10.92, i. t. fra vir J n-l a, cf. § 62.2. — 3 i. e. *vtr’-n-nta . Perfect-System : — Reduplication. 167 Av. ii. MID DIB. Singular : cf. Skt. pri-vai pri-na-tai 3. par’-nci-He Plural : 3. V 3 r 9 -nm-iite 1 § 589 - 5. Participle. ii. MIDDLE. Av. fri-n- 9 mna- 2 pri-y-ana- § 590. The weak forms in na- (i. e. ^-conjugation by transfer) are frequent; the instances of 3 pi. thus formed are noted above. Other exam- ples of this transfer (-n-a) are given in the next section § 591. § 591. The transfers to the ^-conjugation with weak stem (na) are: 1. Indicative, i. ACT, a. Pres, hu-n-a-hi ‘thou piessest’, fri- n-a-Hi , fri-n-a-ma/ii , fri-n-fyti (above). — ii. MID. k»r 3 ‘they make, cut’.— b. Pret. i. ACT, ksr’-n-jm ‘I made, cut’, sa-n-a-f. ‘it ap- peared’ (i. e. sad-n-af. § 185) Yt. 14.7. — ii. MID. sttr>-n-a-ta ‘lie strewed’. 2. Imperative, i. ACT. GAv. par 3 -it- a ‘fulfil thou’ Yt. 28.10, YAv. inip-n-a-tu ‘let him turn’, fri-n-ttytu (above). — ii. MID. brt-n-a- vuha ‘cut thou’. 4. Optative, i. ACT. ksr 3 -n-di-p z a ra-n-ae-ma (GAv.) ‘we might anger’ Ys. 28.9, stdr’-n-ay-m ‘let them strew’.. — ii. MID. st 3 r 3 -n-ae-ta ‘let him strew’. § 592. General Remark. The chief characteristic of the perfect is the reduplication; the endings also differ in some respects from those of the present-system; the perfect shows likewise a distinction of strong and weak forms. As to signification, the perfect (and pluperfect) as 1 Vd. 5.59. — 2 -tHina like (7-conj. Forma to be observed. II. PERFECT-SYSTEM. Perfect. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 7S0 seqd Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. 1 68 in Skt. commonly denotes simple past time; sometimes present time is expressed. Note i. An assumed periphrastic form of the perfect sporadically occurs, see § 62 3. Note 2. On the absence of reduplication, see § 620. Reduplicated Syllable. § 593. The principal points to be observed in regard to reduplication of the vowels (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 783) are: 1. Internal or final a or a is regularly reduplicated by a (sometimes by a — cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 786 a), occasionally by i. For example— Av. ta-tag-a ‘lie has formed’ (\dtaj-) — Skt. ta-tdkf-a ; Av. do- da -pa ‘thou hast created’ ( \fda-) = Skt. na-dha-tha ; Av. da-dar’s-a ‘I have seen’ ('[ , r Jan-) = Skt. da-dars-a; Av. id-fir-ar •> ‘they have made’ (| / kar-) — Skt. ca-kr-nr ; GAv. va-v»r>z-oi ‘he has worked’ (mid.) \tvarz-; Av ji-ga u rv-a (observe palatal j § 465 c) ‘I have perceived’ ( ^ gar w- j Skt. ja-grahh-a. 2. Internal or final i, 11 or i , u are reduplicated by i, u (sometimes i, it). For example — Av. di-dvae§-'i 'I have hated’ (] r dvis-') — Skt. di-dves-a ; Av. di-day-a he has seen’ (\kdi-) = Skt. di-dhay-a ; Av. tu-tav-a he has been able’ ( \f tu-) = Skt. tii-tdv-a. Note. Worthy of remark is Av. ba-bv-ar * (with a from \f bit- ‘to be’) Yt. 13.150 = Skt. ba-bhiiv-ur, but Av. bvava (i. e. bu-vau-a, Yt. 13 2, cf. § 68 h = Skt. ba-bhuv-a. 3. Initial a by reduplication with itself becomes a. For example- — Av. tTi-vb-a ‘he has been’ (J ah-) = Skt. d-s-n. 4. Initial i (or u if found) is reduplicated by « y i. e. i-y (or u i. e. u-v), cf. § 68 a. Av. ■ k* -"«> >> ytyq (i. e. iy-ay-qn) ‘they may have come’ Ys. 42.6 ( 1 / 7 - subjunct. u-inflect. if not redupl. pres.). So also JJ yaefa i. e. iyaega Yt. 13.99. § 394. The laws for the reduplication of con- sonants have been sufficiently treated above, § 465 c. Perfect System : — Radical Syllable. 169 Radical Syllable. Strong and weak Stem-Forms. § 595. The strong stem or guna-form of tire radical syllable, as in the non-^-conjugation (unthematic), is found in the perfect-system 1) in the Indicative Act. 1,2,3 s g- Pres. Pret. ; 2) in the Imperative Act. 3 sg. ; 3) in the Subjunctive entire. The remaining forms are weak. But numerous fluctuations in this rule occur. Note. In GAv., as in Vedic Skt., medial short a before a single consonant is lengthened to a in the radical syllable of the 3 sg. pf. act. For YAv. no rule is laid down. — Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 793 c. Thus, GAv. np-nds-a ‘it is lost’ (|7 nas-) = Skt. na-vas-a. § 596. With reference to the weak forms, some ob- servations as regards the radical syllable may be made. An internal or final i, u remains unchanged e. g. l ri-rip-ar 3 ‘they lie’ (|/V//-), su-sru-ye ‘I have heard’ (} f sm-') Yt. 17.17, yet su-sru-ma ‘we have heard' Yt. 13.198; but a number of roots having media! a between single consonants (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 794 e) and certain others, by loss of the vowel in weak forms rnay undergo some change : 1. Roots in ~ar show weak forms in -r- before vowels; Av. ba-wr-ar 3 ‘they bore’ (J [bar-), beside ' GAv. va-vpi 3 s-di ‘he worked’ 3 sg. pf. raid. (j\f varz- i. e. t w o cons.). 2. Roots in -am, -an show weak forms in -m-, -n- : Av. ja-gm-yq.m. ‘I would have come’ (j\f gatn-'y. GAv. ca-tpi-ar * ‘they have desired’ (| fkqn-j. 3. Roots with initial ya-, va- by contraction with tjie reduplicated syllable show in the weak forms yae- (yoi-), vao- (vau-) i. e. ya-i-, va-u-: Av. \ r yat- ‘to strive’ makes 1 pi. act. YAv. yaepma. , GAv. ybipma (i. e. ya-yt-ma, ra-it-ma')-, Av. j [van- ‘win’ makes 3 pi. act. vaonar 3 (i. e. va- vn-ar, va-un-ar). Cf. § 63 seq. 4. Roots with radical final a lose this a. before endings beginning with a vowel, so also before endings where Skt. shows the union-vowel i, Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 794 end . Av. \[ sia- ‘to stand’, hi-st-a 1, 3-sg. pf. act.; \ r dd- ‘give, place’, da-d-a 3 sg. act., da-’d-e 3 sg. mid.; da-d-ves ptcpl. (Skt. da-d-i-vqs or da-tt-vas ). 170 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. Personal Endings and their connection with the Stem. § 597. The endings of the perfect, especially in the middle voice, are mostly primary. They are attached directly to the tense-stem as in the unthematic conjuga- tion; sporadic traces of a ‘union-vowel’ i, 3 (cf. Whitney, Sfit. Gram. § 797 seq.) perhaps however exist. See Bar- tholomae, A.F. ii. p. 97. § 598. The endings agree with those of the Skt. ; some forms however are to be specially observed, see be- low § 599 seq. Av. i. activb. Singular : Perfect cf. Skt. End i n g s. ii. MIDDLE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 1 . -a . -d •e -i 2 . - pa . - tha — -sc 3 - -« • -a -e -e 1. — . Dual : -va Dual : -va/ie 'y r . -athur — ■a the 3. -a tar 3 . - atur -a‘te (GAv.), -te -ate 1. -ma . Plural: . - ma Plural: -ma/te 2. -a -a — -dhve 3. -ar 3 , 3 r 3 S . . -ur — -re i’erfect Endings (Observations). § 599. Singular:— First Person: ii. Ml L)DLE. A 1st. sg. mid. form in ->> (i. e. -an § 54 — Skt. -au) from a root ending in long a is perhaps to be found in dado '1 have made' Vs. 10.9 — Ski. dad ha 11, Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 800 e. Second Person: i. ACTIVE. Note the form -la (Tor -pa § 78 end) after s in GAv. vuistd ‘thou knowest'. § 000. Dual Third Person: ii. MIDDLE Observe ihe siiflis -le 3 dn. mid. in GAv. dazdc ‘they both created’ Ys. 30.4 ( i. e. *dhazdhai, diia-d/i-tci) , cf. Bartholomae, K.Z. xxix. p. 2S5 — flexions Mire p. 16. Perfect System: — Personal Endings. — Pluperfect. 17 1 § 601. Plural: — Third Person: i. ACTIVE. The ending -»r*s (above) beside -ar* is found in GAv. ci-koil-jr’X ‘they have thought, taught’ Ys. 32.11. Pluperfect (Preterite). (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 817 seq.) § 602. The existence of a preterite (pluperfect) indicative corresponding to the present perfect, seems to be shown by a few forms. There is, however, some un- certainty, see Note. The forms here recognized as plu- perfect are made by adding the secondary endings directly to the perfect stem. The strong stem appears in the singular active ; the weak stem elsewhere. The thematic a (transferring to the ^-inflection) is sometimes found. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 817 seq. Note. There is much difficulty in distinguishing a pluperfect from some other reduplic. forms. Some of the examples may equally well be referred to other forms (impf., aor.) of the redupl. preterite. Mode-Formation of the Perfect. § 603. The perfect like the other tense-systems shows an indicative (pres perf. ; pret. pluperf.), imperative, subjunctive (prim, and sec.), optative and participle (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 808 seq.). These are formed as in the non-£-conjugation (unthematic) ; the subjunctive has the strong stem + mode-sign a; the optative has the weak stem -j- -yd-, - 1 -. §604. A number of transfers to the ^-inflection instead of the thematic are found in pluperfect, imperat., subjunct., optative, and participle. See § 619. Paradigm of the Perfect-System. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 800 seq.) § 605. Examples of the inflection of the perfect may be taken from the following roots: — Av. ~\f gar w- ‘to seize’ = Skt. j/ grabh- ; Av. j/ dvis- ‘hate’ = Skt. J/ dvis- ; Av. j / 1 rttd- ‘grow’ — Skt. ^ f 1 rttdh- ; Av. | [ dars- ‘see’ Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. — Skt. yf dars- ; Av. | /da- 'give, make’ =r Ski; dha- ; Av. \f kan- ‘love’ — Skt. J fkan-; Av. yf tu- ‘be able’ = Skt. J ftu-: Av. y s-a . ja-grabh-a. di-dvef-a . ru-rodh-a, da-dars-a 2. da-dd-pa 1 . da-(t(h jd-tha | ca-kan-a, tu-tav a .... ca-kan-a, tu-tav-a J 'l da-dar-a . da dhar a, da dh&r-a Dual : 3. yaet-atar * 2 . (yct-atur) Plural : | di-dvlfma ' , sii-sru-ina . di-dvif-i-ma, vi-vis-ma 1 yacp-ma 1 . (ylt-i-md ) 2. ha-nhan-a — 3. ba-ivr-ar* , cd-Jp'-ar * .... . ia-bhr-ur, ca-kr-ur ii. MIDDLE. Singular : I . su-sruy-e . su-sruv-e 3. tu-pruy-e . .... . su-sruv-e Dual : ( ma-man-dde J ma-mn-aic ^ 1 da-z-de e ... .... — 1 Vs. 71.10. — s ZPhl. Gloss, p. 56. it.- — 3 On i after v cf. § 20. — cf. 1 ; 590.3. — 6 Ys. 13.4, Bartholomae, K.Z 17, 19. — # GAv. Ys. 30.4, cf. § 000. xxi.x. p. 288 = Fiexionslthre Perfect- System : — Paradigms. 173 § 607. b. Pluperfect (Preterite). i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. i . di-dae-m 1 . a-ja-grabh-am 2 3. u ru-raos-t : a-ci-ke-t, Plural : 3. sask-pu' — ii. MIDDLE. Singular : 3. pn-dfys-td (GAv.) ’ ■ — Plural: 3. vaoz-i-rPtn 6 — § 608. 2. Imperative. i. ACTIVE, Av. Singular : cf. Ski. 3. ui-sa-nhar-a-tii 7 . . li. MIDDLE. 2. dr' J -$vd (GAv.) . 8 § 609. 3. Subjunctive. i. ACTIVE. Plural: I . dmh-dma a . 2. vaordz-a -fid (GAv.) ii. MIDDLE. Plural: 3. covh-a-ire 10 § 6 to. 4. Optative. i. ACTIVE. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. i. ja-jrn- vq,m j a- gam-yam 2 . tit- tu-yw 11 3. vaon-yql . . ma-man-yat 1 Can as well be redupl. pret. CL 3. — 9 cf. Whitney, S/tt. Grant. § SlSa, — J Skt. "J/ s rudh-, cf. § 151. — 4 Ys. 53.1 i. e. saskin-ca. — 5 cf. Barthoioniae, B.B. xiii. p. 65. -- 6 cf. §§ 455, 616. — 7 Ys. 5S.4. (/-inflect, by transfer, Whitney, Skt. Grant. § 814. — # cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 813 end. — 0 cf. tf-in fleet. — 10 Ys. g.23 cf. § 452, v. 1. muhdir 3 . — 11 Ys. 9 29, used as 3 sg. 1/4 Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. § 6(1. 5. Participle. cf. Skt. i. active. Av. ha-11/ian-vah- ia-san-vds- ii. MIDDLE. ha-vhau-ana- sa-san-Sna- Forms to be observed in GAv. and YAv. 1. Indicative, a. Perfect. § 612. Singular: — First Ferson: ii. MID. GAv., add aroi 'I have earned’ (V dr-) Ys. 33.9, on -di- cf. § 56. - On a possible 1st. sg. mid. in -0 (i. e. -an) — Skt. -an, from | fdd-, see § 590 above. Third Person, i. ACT. Observe radical a in (root with medial a before one consonant) GAv. ninasa ‘it is lost’, YAv. thidara ‘be fixed’ — see § 595 Note, but likewise ii, YAv. lakiina ‘he loved* (\ r ban-), yayfita ‘lie strove’ (j/j vat-), baviira ‘lie bore’ ("J f bur-). — Again from weak stem (filial radical *ma ‘we strive’ (-< 7 /- § 56) beside YAv. yaepma above. Second Person - i. ACT. YAv., note the long a strongest stem in haghana above in paradigm. Third Person: i. ACT. YAv. from weak stem (final radical a lost before vowels §596.4) and str. redupl. ud-d-ir * ‘they made’ ( 1 / <<■«-) — Skt. dadhur. — [.ike wise note (§ 62.2) YAv. vaonar 3 , GAv. t aonar* 'they strove’ (i. e. aa-vn-ar § 596.3). — Long redupl. syl. ca-tyr-ai 1 ‘they have made’ Vd. 4.46. — GAv-. also psuffix ->r*s) ci-koit->r 3 s ‘they thought’. b. Pluperfect. § 615. Singular: — Third Ferson: ii. MID. GAv. bual^la (in paradigm, see Foot-Note) pre- sents ‘Attic reduplication’. § 616. Plural: — Third Person: ii. MID. YAv. vaozinm (i. e. va-vz-i-r>m "J f raz-) above in paradigm shows 3 pi. ending in -ran — Skt. -ram (cf. Whitney, S/tf. Gram. §§ 834 b, 867) with connecting vowel. See above § 455 end. Perfect -System -Paradigms. 175 4. O p t a t i v e. § 617. Plural: — First Person: i. ACT. YAv., perhaos here da'dyama. Yt. 24.58. 5. Participle! § 618. i. ACT. On inflectional forms of the pf. act. ptcpl. see §§ 349, 350 — ii. MID. Also suffix -ana (beside -ana) vavazana- ‘driven’, dadrana-, dadrana- ‘held’. Transitions to the thematic (a) inflection. § 619. A number of transfers to the ^-inflection occur of. § 604. 1. Indicative, i. ACT. b. Pluperf. Sg. 3. YAv. la-tad-a -/ ‘he formed’ ; jd-jm-a-t. 2. Imperative, i. ACT. Sg. 3. GAv. ni-Ianhar-a-tu (in paradigm). 3. Subjunctive, i. ACT. Sg. 3. YAv. anjhaj. ‘may be’; Du. 3. dBfihdlun Yt. 13.12; PI. 3. iyeya fiieuq — *iy-ay-a-an) ‘they may go’ PJ/ 7 -) Ys. 42.6 (if not desiderative).— ii. MID. PI. 3. YAv. dwhdh'e Yt. 10.45, c f- §§ 4 5 2 . 4^b. Absence of Reduplication. § 620. In Av., as in Skt., the absence of a redupli- cated syllable is met with in a number of cases. This is familiar in vac da ‘wW = Skt. veda . and in some other forms. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 790. §621. As example of perf. lacking r e d u pi i c a t io n may be given G(Y)Av. vid- ‘to know' Skt. | fvid-. 1. Indie, a. Perf. Sg. 1. vaida, 2. vOistd, 3. vaida, vaeda (YAv.). 2. imp e rat. PI. 2. vdizdum Ys. 33.8, 3. Sub j unc t. Sg. 1. vaeda Ys. 48.9; PI. 2. vaedodum (§ 39). 4. Op tat. Sg. 3. vidyd/. 5. Par tic. i. ACT. vuivak- (GAv.), vidvah- (YAv.).— ii. MID. v ai- de na- Ys. 34.7, vaiJtmna- (theniat.). § 622. Other examples of pf. wanting red up 1 . are: GAv. ~\[ cag- ‘grant’, tag 3 m a (t pi. pf. act.), cag 3 Jo (3 da. plpf.) , cngveri (ptcpl.). — Also GAv. apauo ‘attained’ (ptcpl. 1/0?/’-). i ;6 Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. Periphrastic Perfect. § 623. In YAv. traces of a periphrasis which may be construed as forming a perfect are found. — C'f. also Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 1070, 1072. Jn Av. the acc. sg. fem. of the pres, participle is united with the perfect of the auxiliary ah- to be. — YAv. sraisye 1 >ilim titvhal ‘it may have clung’ (subjunct.), astara- ye'ntlm Cpuhat ‘should have corrupted’. — Perhaps also here biivivwuha ‘he had frightened' Yt. 19.48,50 (? 110m. sg. ptcpl. \ r bi- -j- aw ha, cf. variants). 111. AORIST-SYSTEM. Aorist. (Chiefly found in Gotha A vesta.) § 624. General Remark. I11 regard to form the aorist in Av. may perhaps best be defined as a preterite, whose exact corresponding present is missing and which consequently attaches itself to an analogous present and preterite, and forms a new system subordinate to these. In regard to meaning the aorist in A vesta commonly denotes a simple past action, usually but not always mo- mentary. it may often, as in Skt., be rendered by our ‘have’. The instances of aorist formation are found chiefly in the Gatha portions of the literature, but occurences in the later parts are by no means uncommon. Note. lhe resemblance in form which the aorist bears to the preterite (imperfect.) sometimes gives rise to question whether certain given forms are to be classed as preterite (imperfect) or as aorist , the decision depends chiefly upon whether or not we assume a present to the form — e. g. cf. Bartholomae, Verbnm p. 63 seq. - § 625. Two groups of aorisls may conveniently be distinguished; they are 1. no n-sigtna fci c, 2. sigmatic. These comprise several sub-varieties of formation (7 as in Skt.), as follows. Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 824. Aorist-System : — Non-Sigmatic Group, i. Root-Aorisi. 177 Aorist-System i. Non-Sigmatic ii. S i g m a t i c 1. Root-aorist. 2. Simple (Z-aorist (thematic). 3. Reduplicated aorist. 4. h- (s-) aorist. 5. ha- (sa-) aorist (or //-thematic). 6. //-aorist. 7. ////-aorist. § 626. Augment and Endings. The augment in aorist forms as elsewhere in Av. is commonly missing; the augmentless forms, moreover, often have a subjunctive (imperative) signification (cf. § 445 Note 2 injunctive). The endings in the indicative are the secondary. §627. Modes of the Aorist. The modes — impera- tive, subjunctive (prim., sec.), optative — of the aorist are formed according to the regular laws of the other systems. Note. Observe the existence of a form 3 sg. imp era t. mid. in -4/,'/ = Skt. -dm: GAv. pr>iucqm ‘speak.’, vidqm 'it shall decide’ Vs. 32.6, cf. Skt. duhdtn, Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 6 1 8. i. Non-Sigmatic Group. § 628. The aorists of the non-sigmatic group — I. root- aorist, 2. simple tf-aorist (thematic), 3. reduplicated aorist — resemble preterites (imperfects) which correspond re- spectively to the root-class, the ^-conjugation (thematic), and to the reduplicated class. 1. Root- Aorist. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Grant. § 829.) § 629. The root-aorist is like an imperfect of the root-class without a corresponding present indicative. The endings are attached directly to the root in its strong or its weak form. The distribution of strong and weak stem- forms is in general the same as in the present and perfect systems. The modes show their characteristic mode-signs. § 630. Example of root-aorist inflection (almost ex- clusively GAv.). 12 730 I7» Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. Av. --^3 j/ da- ‘to give, do, make' (str. stem da-, da-, \vk. stem d-j — Ski. \f nd-, Jha-, Whitney, Skt. Granin § 829. § 631. 1. Indicative. — Aorist (Preterite). i. ACTIVE,. (G)Av, Singular: cf. Skt. 1 . — d-d(h )u-m 2 . CUV. itCVS-Cd . . . d-d(h)a-s 3. dd t a-d(h)a-t Plural: 1. dd-ma d-d(hju-tna 2 . lid-id . . . . d-d(h)S-ta 3. d-ar> d-d(h)-ur ii. MIDDLE. Plural : 3. data 1 — $5 632. 2. Imperative. i. ACTIVE. (GIAv. Singular: cf. Skt. 2. da- l di — 3. (id-til d(h)d-tu 633. 3. Subjunctive. i. ACTIVE. Singular: 2 , dd-Iu — 3. da-Hi d(h)a-ti Plural: 2. dq,-Miihi l — 3- dq-n , — ii. MIDDLE. Singular: i. dd-nP — ^ j dm-nhe — 3 . dd-'te Plural : 3 . dce-tite i. e. J-iita. — - Vs. 68. 1 — 3 Ys. 44.9. A ovist-System : — i. Root-Aorist. 179 § 634. 4. Optative. i. ACTIVE. (G)Av Singular-: cf. Skt. I. d-yqm d(h)e-yam 2 . da-yca da -yea ' — 3. d-yaf., da-yaf' — Plural: 2. dd-yata 4 ... — ii. M I D D h E. 1 . d-ya “ — 2. d-i§a 3. d-yatqm § 635. 5. Participle. i. ACTIVE. Av. da)lt- Forms to be observed in GAv. and YA.v. § 636. Some further examples of inflection in GAv. and some forms also in YAv. may be observed. 1. Indicative. — Aorist. § 637. Singular: — First Person: i. ACT. GAv. dar 1 * 3 som ‘I saw’; note snv-t-m 'I heard’ (ob- serve like §§ 527, 550). Second Person: i. ACT. GAv. var’s ‘thou hast done’ (yari 4- s § 165"!. Third Person: j, ACT. GAv. moist ‘he turned’ ttt //-) , ear - 1 'he made’ (1 [liar-, -0- — -a- § 39). — Here probably also yaog>t Vs. 44.4. — Observe GAv. sdh- 7 -f ‘he taught’ (sa/i-j, YAv. vaht-i-l ‘let conquer’ Ys. 60.5 (if not opt with wk, ending). § 638. Dual : — Third Person: ii. MID. GAv. asrvattm ‘they called’. § 639. Plural: — First Person: ii. MID. YAv. y a 0 fytna ! d e ‘we joined' GAv. var*matdi ‘we have chosen’. Third Person: i. ACT. YAv. a-Ik-ar 3 ‘they elapsed' ("J [sac-') Yd. 1.4; also bun ‘they become’. — GAv. °jJn, •g»mtn ‘they tarne’. — ii. MID. fracantita ‘they provided’ bar-} Vd. 2.11. 1 From strong stem. So metrically Yt. 10.114; Vs. 57.26 — - From strongest stem. — 3 From str. stem. So metrically Yt. 13.50 cf. Vd. 3.32. — 4 From strongest stem.-- 5 i. e. * \iiya . Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. I So 2. Imperative. § 640. Singular Second Person: ii. MIL). GAv. k»r*pva ‘make thou’. Third Person: ii. MID. GAv. (ending -am above §§ 456, 627 Note) »r*iu- t\{tn ‘speak right,’, v'Ulqm ‘shall decide’. § 641. Plural: — Third Person: i. ACT. GAv. scaiitu 'let them follow’ ( \f sac-). 3. Subjunctive. § 642. Singular: — First Person: i, ACT. YAv. fysta ‘I will stand’. — GAv. yaoia ‘I will yoke’, varani ‘1 will choose’. — ii. MID. gir 3 ie, gsr 3 zol ‘I will complain’, sruy :■ ‘I may be heard’, YAv. buyc '1 may be’ {\ hu-') Afr. 1.10,11. Third Person: i. ACT. YAv. in u[ ‘will become’. — GAv. jimtU ‘he may come’. § 643. Dual:— Third Person: ii. MID. GAv. jam a etc ‘they may come’. § 644. Plural: — First Person: i. ACT. YAv. jimama ‘we shall come’. Second Person: i. ACT. GAv. vt-rayapo ‘ye distinguish’. Third Person: i. ACT. GAv. bvatiti-ca ‘and they will be’, jnmu ‘may they come’. 4. Optative. § 643. Singular: — Second Person: i. ACT. YAv., similarly %fnuy <2 ‘thou mightest icjoice’. Third Person: I. ACT. YAv. also (from str. stemj jam-ya( ‘he might come’; again (from wk. stem as above) dis-ySj ‘let him show’ Afr. 3.7 etc., likewise GAv. mipyaj ‘he might deprive’. — ii. MID. GAv. drita ‘lie might hold’ (l ! da/-). § 646. Plural: — - First Person: i. ACT. YAv. jamy&ma beside j a myoma ‘we might come’. — GAv. buyama ‘we might be’. — ii. MID. GAv. va‘ n wa'di ‘we might choose’. Second Person: i. ACT. YAv. buyata ‘might ye be’. Third Person: i. ACT. YAv. buyqn, buydr*s ‘they might be’. Note. For fuller GAv. lists in regard to the root-aorist see Bartlio- lomae, K. 7 .. xxiv. p. 313 seq. — Flexionslehre p. 44 seq. § 647. Transfers to the thematic inflection are found, e. g GAv. va/jj-a-t 'he increased’, G A v . frd-jm-a-t 'he came’ ij /gam-). Aorist-Syslem : — 2. «-Aorist. — 3. Reduplicated Aorist. l8l 2. Simple (7-Aorist (thematic). (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 346 seq.) § 648. The instances of the simple tf-aorist are not very numerous; in Av. this aorist plays a part similar to that in the Skt. of the Rig Veda. In formation and in- flection it is identical with a preterite (imperfect) of the 6th class. The root in its weak form simply assumes the thematic vowel a; the secondary endings are then added for the indicative.— Cf. Whitney, Skt. Grain. § 846. §649. Examples of the rz-aorist (chiefly GAv.) are the following: 1. Indicative, i. ACT. Aor. (pret.) Sg. 3. vida / ‘he found’ (be- side 3 sg. pres. pret. vitfri-aj ) , biijaf. 'he absolved’ (beside pres. bunj-airiti). — ii. MID. PI. 3. Jpgrt? ‘they ruled’ (1 ffea-). 2. Imperative, i. ACT. Sg. 2. vida ‘find thou’. — ii. MID. PI. 3. //priiqm ‘let them rule’. 3. Subjunctive, i. ACT. Sg. 1. hanani, 3. hand( ‘let me, him cam’. 4. Optative, ii. MID. Sg. 3. Jrfaetd ‘might he rule’. 5. Par t i c ip 1 e. i. ACT. vldat" (in compounds). Likewise some other forms might be added. 3. Reduplicated Aorist. (Ct. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 856 seq.) § 650. The reduplicated aorist is comparatively rare. The stem is made by reduplicating the root which then appears in its weak form and assumes the thematic a. The secondary endings are added for the indicative. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 856. § 651. Example of inflection, Av. J/ vac- ‘to speak’ (stem vaoc-a- i. e. va-uc-, va-vc-) — Skt. ]/ vac- (voca-): 1. Indicative, i. ACT. Sg. 1. v ad com, vao'cim (§ 30), 2. vaoed, i'aocas-cd, 3. vaoca /, Svaoca[ (§§ 32, 466). — PI. 1. vaotama, vaociimd. 2. Imperative, i. ACT. Sg. 2. vaoca. 3. Subjunctive, i. ACT. Sg. 1. vaoca (Ys. 45. 3), 3. vaoca/. 4. Optative, i. ACT. Sg. 3. vaocoit.— V\. 1. vaoedima. Note 1 . Similarly GAv. nqsai ‘lie disappeared’ (i. c. ita-ns-o(, \fuas- = Skt. j / iras-). I 82 Ilillection : 'Conjugation of Verbs. Note 2. lo the redupk aor. possibly belong the obscure forms. V'Av. ururud-tt-$a 'thou artist grow' 2 sg. mid. Ys. 10.3, GAv as-af-u-la Hi has beers accomplished’. The u may be anaptyctir, or is it from a pres 'or- al ation? § 652. Instances of the true causative aorist with strengthened reduplication (cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. §§ 1046, 856] are: \' rar- ‘to believe, cause t.o believe’, GAv. vauridte (3 sg. subjunct. mid.); vdiirayd (i sg. opt. mid.), v a ur cu- rin ' 1 ih (1 pi. opt. mid.). On vaurd'te etc. for vd-vr-aHe see § 62, 2 above. Note 1. The forms ztzar.in, zizandt (cf. Skt. ajijanat, Whitney, Ski. Gram. §£ 864, 860) are best reckoned under Cl. 3 in Av. on account of pres, indie, zizumiiti Yt. 13.15. Note 2. The form vaozinu. Yt. 19.69 is reckoned under pluperf. above § 616. ii. Sigmatic Group. 4. h- (s-) Aorist. (Cf. \\ hitney, Ski. Gram § 878 seq.) § 653. The charactetistic mark of this aorist is an orig. sibilant a’ (= A v. h, s, s) which is added in forming the stern. The inflection is tint hematic, the endings being attached directly to the root which shows different degrees of strengthening, see next section § 654. § C54. The indicative sg. act. has the vfddhi -strengthening; the indie, plur. act. and generally belli numbers of the indie, mid. have the guna form, 'the imperative mid. and the entire subjunctive act. show likewise guna. The optative and some instances of indio. plur. mid. generally have the weak form. § 655. Examples of inflection of this aorist arc taken from the following roots: Av. | f di- ‘regard, think 1 -- Skt. ]/ a hi- ; Av. Jar- ‘hold, hold back’ =-- Skt. \f dhir- ; Av. J 'sand- ‘show, present, appear' — Skt. E chand- fj 142; Av. 1 d man- ‘think' — Skt. ( man- , Av. ], r /v aars- 'shape, create’; Av. "\f fras- ‘ask’ = Skt. \lpras-; Av. \'pra- 'pro- tect' — Skt. | ftrd-; Av. \! van- ‘win’ -- Skt y van- ; Av. p / nqs-, tias- ‘cause to vanish' - - Skt. 1 ?iqs-, nas- ; Av. \i arz- ‘work* Aorist-System : — 4. h- (s-) Aorist. 183 = Skt. \fvarj- ; Av. j//5- ‘protect’ = Skt. [ffa- / Av. y~vac- ‘speak’ = Skt. ~\f vac- ; Av. \f da- ‘give, do, make’ = Skt. \fda-, dha- ; Av. y 2 ngs; Has- ‘attain’ = Skt. ~\f 2 nq.<-, mi-. § 656. i. Indicative. — Aorist (Preterite). i. ACTIVE. (G)Av. Singular: cf. Skt. 2 . dai s. StyS 1 bkai-s 2 , achan 3 - dar 3 st, ddr p st ’, St%S 1 d-bhur achan ii. MIDDLE. Singular: 1. mavh-V', frapi 2. matighd 3. m^s-ta Plural: 1. a-mah-ma'di ", mah-via'dV . . 2. pwar * 5 6 z-dum 3 ...... § 657. 2. Imperative. ii. MIDDLE. Singular: 2. frrapva mqs-i mqs-ta . . d-gas-mahi . . d-vy-dhvain Plural: 2. praz-dum. 9 Iri-dhvam § 658. 3. Subjunctive. i. ACTIVE. (G)Av. Singular: cf. Skt. ( vaipah-adi vqs-ati 1 vatlgh-af vqs-at Plural: I . nd§-dmd 10 vqs-ama j. var 3 $-atiti 11 — ^ 1 V3tlgh-an vqs-an 1 Ys. 46.19. — a \Vh„ At/. Cw«, § 891. — 3 § 39. — 4 Ys. 43-11- — 5 Wh., Skt. Gram. 1$ 890. — 6 Also mitiht . — ' i. e. \vk. form, *masmadi from nin-s-madi. — * §§ 7 1 , 1 79. -- 0 § 1 7 1 . — 10 § 1 58 -f -f- r. — 11 § 1 65 -5 -j- .0. 184 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. il. M I b D L E. Av Singular: cf. Skt. 1. pd)i)h-e, mingh-di 1 mqs-ai 1 2 . pdjvh-ahe 1 m^s-ase 3. var°}-aUe* mas-att Plural: 2. ' dcenh-odum 4 das-adhvam 3. 7 'a//S-'>/?/e 5 vaks-ante § 659. 4. Optative. i. ACTIVE. Av. Plural: I. rtaji-tma (YAv.) G .... II. MIDDLE § 660. 5. Participle. (Y)Av. mavh-ana - 1 rG)Av. ciis-smna - 9 . cf. Skt. t- dhts-amona- (RV.) Forms to tie observed. § 661. G Av rtii-aharth-di ‘thou wile give 2 sg. sub- junctive mid. \, ra-, cf. YAv. ptowhahe (in paradigm). Note. GAv. viltigiiai (above) is by transfer thematic like Skt. mqsai cf. § 663. 5. ha- (sa-) Aorist. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Grain. § 916 seq.) § 662. The orig. .<77-aorist (-- A\ . ha. vha) in Av. is really only a variety of the preceding a-aorist. It arises by transfer of the a-aorist to the ^-inflection. .§ 663. Examples of the ha- (sa-) aorist inflection are the following: 1. Indicative, i. ACT. Sg. 3. YAv. asqs-a-£ ‘he fulfilled, offered’ CJ/.r«t« above § 656) Vd. 19.15 = Skt. a-ch.ant-s-at. 2. Imperative, i. ACT. PI- 3. YAv. javkpqiu ‘they will smite’ 1 1/" /an-) Yd. 2.22. 1 themat. § 661. — 4 Yt. 8.1. — 3 § 165. — 4 Ys. 45.1, cf. § 39, o = a. — 6 3 vat- ‘say, call'. — ' Vs. 70.4, | 2 nas- — orig. -s -j- s. — 7 Yt. 8.47. — 3 Cf. Whitney, Sat. Gram. § S97. — 0 themat. Vs. 51. 1. Aorist-System : — 5. ha-(sa-) Aorist. — 6. //-Aorist. — 7. hit- Aorist, 185 3. Subjunctive, i. ACT. Sg. 3. YAv. na-t-d-Hi ‘will disappeat’ Yt. 2. 11 {\ r inas- Skt. | [mas- § 158); jaJiaf Ny. 1.1 — ii. MID. YAv. Likewise here 1 sg. subj. mid. mriighdi above § 661. 5. Participle, ii. MID. GAv. fy$nao{-?»tna- (\/ i/inu- ‘to gratify’), dipmna above in paradigm § 660. 6. //-Aorist. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 898 seq.) § 664. One or two instances (GAv.) of the /i-aorist — see Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 898 — are quotable. They are from yku -, c'ii- ‘look for, hope , ]/ fy$nu- ‘gratify, delight’: — 1. Indie, ii. MID. Aor. (pret.). Sg. 1. c’v-ijl-i (on long -T- after v see § 20). 3. ch t-fj-ia. 3. Subjunct. i. ACT. Sg. I. fyfnw-iji-a. ‘ 7. ////-Aorist. (Cf. Whitney. Skt. Gram. § 911.) § 665. An instance ( YAv.) of the his- (sis-) aorist is apparently the following: 1. Indie, i. ACT. Sg. 2. 0 da -his ‘thou hast made’ (| f da-) Yt. 3.2 cf. Skt. glasis, Whitney, Skt. Grain. §§ 912, 913. § 666. No certain instance of a precative seems to be found in Avesta. Aorist Passive, third Singular. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 842.) § 667. In Av. as in Skt. an aor. 3rd. singular in -i with passive meaning occurs, though tt is not of common use. The form is made by adding i to the verbal root 'which has either the vrddhi or guna strengthening. The form may take the augment as in Skt. § 668. Examples of 3rd. sg. Aor. Pass, are the following: — (a) With vrddhi. — From Av. \tvac- ‘speak, call’ vaci , avaci (GAv.) = Skt. vaci, avaci; Av. |/ sru - ‘hear, call’ j raid (GAv.) = Skt. sravi ; so Av. a'di ‘is said, spoken of’ \ r ad- (so Geldner) = Skt. Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. 1 86 ah- — With g'jija (or middle) form. — - From Av. | [ mru- ‘say’ mraoi t ( i .A v. i. e. rnrav-i}, Av. \f vr.t- ‘understand’ ‘va'ti (GAv.J, Av. J jit n- ‘slay’ ja’ni (VAv.). .Note. The form YAv. u*,:avi ‘it was granted, obtained’ (1 far-) is made, not directly front the root, but from tile prepared stem ?r*-nu-, )r*-nau-. IV. FUTURE-SYSTEM. Future. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 932 seq.) § 669. The characteristic mark of the future in Avesta as in Sanskrit is -hy- {-fy- § 133) — Skt. -sy- (-sy-) added to the root. The root assumes the gun a- form ; the inflection is thematic (.-hya, -§ya ). — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 932 seq. Modes of the Future. § 670. The instances of the future are in general not very numerous ; they are confined to the indicative mode and to the participle. The place of the other modes is often taken by a subjunctive of other parts of the vyrb used in a future sense. Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 938. Future. Formation and Inflection. §671. Exam pies of future formation and inflection an: taken from the following roots. (T. Whitney, Skt. Grata. § 933. Av. | f vac- ‘to speak’ = Skt. \fza<-; Av. \f karz- ‘let go, drop’ Skt. J f surj- ; Av. v.v- ‘further, .save’ Skt. \ sti-. § 672. i. Indicative.- Future. i. a or 1 v f. Av. Singular: cf. Skt. I . Tafj-fy d (GAv.) vak-sy-umi ii. MIDDLC. Singular: 3. I a!j sy-e'te 1 * .ak-sy-dte Plutal : 3. har*-sy-eilte 3 s ark-sy-antl* 1 Ys 1900; V->u. 15.3. — - Vsp. 12. 1. On ’t 4 r see § 165. — s Cf. Skt. vaiksyan/r from \varj-. Future-System. — Secondary Conjugation ■ — Passive. 187 § 673. 2. Participle. i. ACTIVE. Av. sao-sy-am- .... cf. Skt. kse-sy-dut- ii. middle . har’-sy-armia- yak - sy-dmana - Forms to be observed. \ § 674. Notice the long vowel instead of strengthening in the Av. participles bn-§y-atit- from Ini-, opp. to Skt. bhdv-i-sydnt- (§ 61 Note 2), cf. Skt. RV. su-sy-ant-. Observe also hrm-jty-aiit- beside //rvT-iy-ant- from y ty-vi- ‘be raw, bloody’. V. SECONDARY CONJUGATIONS. § 675. The secondary conjugations consist of the following formations (thematic), a. Passive, b. Causative, c. Denominative, d. Inchoative, e. Desiderative, and f. In- tensive (unthematic). A. Passive. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 768 seq.) § 676. General Remark. The passive force may be given in any tense-system simply by employing the middle voice in a passive sense. In the present-system, however, there is also a formative passive made by means of the passive sign -ya- (cf. Cl. 4) attached to the prepared root. Note. The connection between this formative passive in va a n J Cl. 4 of the present -system is generally acknowledged. In Skt. the diffe- rence of accent distinguishes the two, the passive having accented jw, but Cl. 4 an unaccented ya. As no written accent is found in Av., such a distinction cannot always ire sharply drawn; it is therefore some- times doubtful whether a given form is really n passive or merely a middle used with passive sense, e. g . mewyete (pass.) Vs. 44.12 identical in form with manytte (mid.) Yt. 10.139 — Skt. mavydti, many ate < § 677 Formation of the Passive. The passive sign is -ya- Skt. accented -ya-) attached to the root which then assumes the weak form. Note. The no'- roots require some remark as they frequently show MS. variations as to the way in which tire radical /-vowel is expressed: e. g. Av. y mar- ‘to die’, mir-ye-Ui, mir-ys-^te, nur^-ye-'ti , ma'r-ye-Ut Vd. 3.33 — Skt. mriydte ; again Av. ~\fkar- ‘to make’, kir-yc-Ui Yt. 10.10.9, 1 88 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. kir-yc-' nte v. 1. ka‘r-ye-' : ntc Vd. 3.9, cf. § 48 above. The development in such cases evidently is *:ny-ya-le Av. mar-ya-te (or -ah- § 48) Skt. my-i-yd-te or mir-ya-te (-'/•- § 70) mr-i-yd-te § 67S. Endings. I11 Skt. the passive form assumes the middle endings, but some exceptions with active end- ings occur, cf. Whitney. Skt. Cram. § 774. In Av. also, the middle endings are used but the active ones like- wise are not very uncommon. Observe especially the MS. variants in final e, i (§ 35 Note 2) kirye‘ti , kirye'He. The intransitive passive force seems therefore to lie in the ya- element. Note. An undoubted example of act. ending but passive force is fra-vez-)d[ in Yt. 13.50 kahe rd urva (nom. masc.) f< avezynt 'of which one of you will the soul be worshipped?’ Apparently also with active ending (from ~\f dd-) dayff{ (subjunct.) Yd. 3.32, ni-dayat (impf.) Yt. 12.17. Modes of the Passive. § 679. The modes of the passive arc the usual ones of the present-system; a complete list of forms, however, cannot be gathered from the texts. Passive Inflection. § 680. Examples of passive voice with middle and active endings are the following: 1. Indicative, a. Pres. Sg. 3. bah-yehe v. 1. ta’ryiUi ‘he is borne’, kiryeHi v. 1. kiryehe ‘it is made’ ; PI. 3. hiryc’ule v. I. ka’r- yehite ‘they are made’ (§ 48). — Pret. Sg. 2. ma’rxavha ‘didst die’ v. 1. m»r 3 yavhtt, 3. vi-smynta ‘was heard’, ni-dayat ‘was placed’. 3. Subjunctive. Sg. 3. viah'ydHe v. 1. mirya'te , miryd'li ‘is destroyed, dies’; yezyd / ‘is worshipped’; PI. 3. i>ah-yd.>ile ‘they will be borne’, janyd)r,te ‘they will be slain’ Yt. 14.43. 5. Participle. Av. suyannta- ‘being advanced, saved’. Note. From - ‘to cover’ is found a form ni-va^r-ye-he (v. 1. »/;), — on 0, cf. § 39. § 681. A Perf. Pass. Participle in -ta or -na also belongs to the passive conjugation. See § 710 below. • Secondary Conjugation: — Causative. j gg § 682. A Fut. Pass. Participle (Gerundive) in ya- is formed according to § 716 below. § 683. The Aorist Passive 3rd. Singular likewise falls under this formation. It is treated above, § 668. B. Causative. § 684. General Remark. In Av. as in Skt. the cau- sative (-aya-), like the Denominative is identical in form with Cl. 10, the latter being originally a causative forma- tion. The causal is found in the Present-System. Note. In Skt. many of the so-called causatives do not have a strict causative value and are therefore reckoned as belonging to the Skt. cur- Class(io); similarly in Av., a number of causative forms have been treated above under Class 10, cf. § 482 seq. § 68 5. Formation. The present-stem of the causa- tive is formed by adding the causal formative element -aya- to the root which is usually strengthened. The strengthen- ing of the root is subject to certain variations. a. Internal or initial a before a single consonant is generally lengthened (vrddhi), but sometimes it remains unchanged, thus: Lengthened a, Av. "J [vat- 'to comprehend’, cans, ‘make known’ •valaya- — Skt. vdtaya- ; Av. Y tap- ‘to warm, be warm', caus. ‘make warm’ lajaya- = Skt. tapaya- ; Av. [ [gam-, jam- ‘go, come’ jdmaya- = Skt. gamdya- (Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1042 g). — Unchanged u. Av. pat- ‘to fall, fly’ papaya- — Skt. pa lay a- , Av. Y sa, ^~ ‘appear’ sadaya- = Skt. chadaya- , Av. Y a P~ ‘obtain’, a pay a-, opp. to Skt. a pay a-. b. Internal and initial a before two consonants (i. e. long by position) remains unchanged: Av. | / daft- ‘to know-, cause to know’ datygma- — Skt. daksdya- ; Av. Y va Y~ 'grow, cause to grow’ vatyjaya- = Skt. vaksdya- ; Av. ‘bind’ baiidaya- — Skt. ban- d/idya- ; Av. Y zam k- ‘crush’ znttbaya- = Skt. jambhaya-. c. Final long a disappears: Av. \> sta- ‘to stand, cause to stand’ staya- opp. to Skt. slhapaya-. cf. Whitney. Skt. Gram. § 1042 i. d. Internal or initial;,*/ before single consonants (i. e. in light syllables) have the guna-strengthening: Av. Y v *d~ ‘ t0 know’, caus. ‘inform’ vaedaya- — Skt. ved&ya- ; Av. | k rue- ‘light up’ rao- coya- — Skt. roedya-. Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. 190 e. Final « (or /') receives the vrddhi-strengthening : Av. \ r s ru- to liear’ sravaya- — Skt. sravdyn-. Note 1. The nasal of the present-stem (Cl. 9) appears in Av. k?r‘>ilaya- from \ r kart- ‘to cut’ as in Skt. kfntaya-, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 10.12 h. So also Av. butyaya- from J fbuj- ‘to release'. Vote 2. The root za- ‘to let go’ makes zayaya cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1042. Note 3. Observe with lengthening instead of strengthening of root (§ 61 Note) GAv. u rupaye‘titt ‘they cause pain’ (| f rup-') — Skt. ropd- yanl: ; GAv. * ruddy ata ‘he caused to lament’ — Skt. rudhayata. Modes of the Causative. § 686. The Causative shows the same modes, 1 In- dicative, 2. Imperative, 3. Subjunctive, 4. Optative, in- cluding also 5. Participle, as the present-system naturally does. Inflection of the Causative: Present-System. § 687. The causal in the present-system is inflected after the ^-conjugation (thematic), see Cl. 10 above, §§ 481, 482 seq. Other Causative Formations. § 688. To the causal formation belongs not only the causative of the present-system, but also a causal aorist (see § 652); possibly likewise a causative perfect .(plu- perfect), and some other parts. § 089. On the reduplicated Causative Aorist, -ee § 652 above. § 690. Possibly here helongs as Periphrastic Perfect (Plupf.), Av. bivtivdnha ‘he had frightened’, see § 623 § 691. A causal derivative from J fh-ap- ‘to sleep’ is made by at- taching the root da- ‘to make, do’ in its causal form directly to the radical element; thus, Av. 'irabdayr'-ti ‘puts 10 sleep’. 692 Other causative derivatives made with root da- t^cf. § Gq i ) but without causal form, are ava-vkab-dafta he would cause to .-deep’ ( | hrap-), t/raoia'af ‘caused to howl’ ( j %rus-), yaoida'ti 'makes pure' (| yaoi-). § 693 Some forms with causal signification but without the aya- formation occur; Av. vafoai ‘he caused to grow’ \ s. 48.6 opp. to va/jjl- ayu-ln ‘they both, cause to grow’ Vs. to. 3. § 694. A11 occasional verbal noun (infinitive) or adjective (participle) is likewise to be noted under the causal formation: Av. frazrutu- ’made Secondary Conjugation : — Denominative. 19 1 famous, renowned’. » rvaesta - ‘turned’ Ys. 11.2. Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § *051 seq. C. Denominative. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1053 seq.) § 695. Denominative verbs are formed from a noun- stem (substantive or adjective) by adding -ya or -a — Skt. -yd or -a to the stem In Skt. the -yd is accented, but as there is no written accent in Av. , it is sometimes hard to decide whether a certain given verb-form in -aya be really a denominative from an rt-stem or not rather simply a causative. As to meaning, the denominative usually signifies ho make, use, cause, be, or practise’ that which the noun-stem itself denotes. § 696. Formation and Inflection. The denomi- native is found in the Present-System and is made 1. by adding -ya (= Skt. -ya ) , or more rarely 2. -a (— Skt. -a) directly to a noun-stem. The inflection is therefore that of the present-system a - conjugation (thematic). — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 1054, 1068. 1. ya added: Av. as a- n. ‘holiness’ ( ( 7 -stem) denom. asa-ya- ‘to gain by holiness’, asaye'-ti = Skt. ytayd- ; Av. zara- m. ‘rain’ denom. vara-xc-mi ‘1 rain down’; — Av. avhu- in. ‘lord’ (.v -stent) denom. uvhu-ya- ‘to become lord of’, avhuyaHe ; — Av. ntniak- n. ‘homage’ (cons, stem) denom. nimak-ya- ‘do homage’ lumatiyamahi — Skt. namasyd- ; — -.Av. i$ud- f. ‘debt’ (cons, stem) denom. ijii/tt-ya- 'incur a debt’, , yil'dydmahi — Skt. isudhyd-. 2. Simple a added: Av. patti- ‘lord’ (Astern) denom. pa’py-a- ‘to possess as lord’, pa’pyedi Skt. palya- ; — Av. fyratu- m. ‘wisdom’ («-stem) denom. 1 /rapw-a- ‘be wise’, ptcpl. mid. tirapzvdmnahe ‘of him that is wise'; — Av. fyavhu- m. ‘mist’ («-stem) denom. fyavhv-a- ‘to fall as mist', Jyavku-rylae-ca (§§ 63, 493, 582); — Av. acaah- n. ‘sin’ (cons, stem) denom. aenavh-a- 'to commit sin’, aemivhaHi Ys. g.;;o opp. Skt. enas-yd-. Note. Final a of a .noun-stem seems occasionally to disappear (cf. in Skt. after n or r, Whitney, Skt. Grain. § 1059 c). Titus, Av. baipaz- ya-ti etc. ‘he practises healing’ Yt. 8.43 \pae$aza- n.), vdstryae-ta ‘let him pasture’ ( yastra - n.) , par^san-ye-di ‘he asks’ Yt. 8.15. So probably also 192 Inflection : Conjugation of Vt.bs. Av. pi'su'ta'i'i ‘he lights’ {pspina- n., pfpj/ia- f.i, cf. Skt. pftanyati, Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1060. D. Inchoative. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Grom. §§ 60S. 747.) § 697. The existence of the inchoative in Av., as in Skt., is shown by a few verbs. The inchoative sign is s — Skt. ch ( § 142) added directly to the root in its weak stage. The thematic ^-inflection is then assumed. The instances of inchoative are comparatively so few that these inchoative J-forms have sometimes been reckoned as independent roots. § 698. Examples of Inchoatives. The forma- tion and inflection is shown by the following instances. Av. jT gam-, jas- (i. e. gm-i-) ‘to go. come’ jn-s-a-Ui, cf. [saoxsi — Skt. gd-ch-a-tl ; Av. 1 f yam-, yas- (i. c. y/u-s-) ‘come, reach’ ya- s-a-‘te — Skt. yd-ch-a-te ; Av. ~\ffras-, p?> >s- (i. e. pars-s- ) ‘ask’ pir>-s-a‘te, cf. Lat. po(r)scit — Skt. pj -cha-ti ; Av. \ r z ah~, us- (i. e t/s-s-) 'to light up’ us-a-’ti = Skt. uchdti; Av. \ r lap-, tafs- : to warm, grow warm’ taf-s-a-p , cf. Lat. leptsco. Also a few others. Note. Observe the as-imilation anti loss of consonants before s in the following examples: Av. t>r 2 saUi ‘he trembles' (i. e. *l.*r*s-s-a*li ) , cf. Skt. | / Iras- ; Av. u a'li just above § 69S. So Av. irlsop ‘he began to sweat’ \Firid- — Skt. sz-ul-. See §§ 1S4, 185 above. E. Desiderative. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 1026 seq.l § 699. The desiderative in Av. resembles the Skt. in formation and signification. The root is reduplicated and the formative element -ha (-vha. -fa. -2 a) — Skt. -sa as desiderative sign is added. The vowel of the re- duplicated syllable is always (-2- § 21 Note); the initial consonant of the root in reduplicating follows the usual rules above § 465. The root of the desiderative appears ordinarily in its weak grade , sometimes , however, in its strong (middle) Secondary Conjugation : — Inchoative; Desiderative ; Intensive. form. The desiderative is confined to the present-system ; the inflection (-ha, -sa) is thematic. §700. Examples of Desiderative Formation. The instances of the desiderative are not very numerous; the following may be noted. Av. \fji- ‘to conquer, win’, desid .ji-ji-jta- 'seek to win over’ = Skt. ji-ji-sa ; Av. ~\f Qjfnu- ‘gratify, rejoice’, desid. ci-\$nu-$a- , Av. \ r sua- ‘know’, desid. zi-fyhia>-aha- (§§ 164, 465 Note 2) = Skt. ji-jM-sa-; Av. ~\f dab- ‘deceive’, desid. GAv. di-w-ia- (i. e. di-'Hh-za § Sy) ‘seek to deceive’ = Skt. dipsa-; Av. y sac- ‘teach, learn, can’, desid. sijta- (i. e. *si~?k-sa-) = Skt. si-k-sa-. Likewise a few other forms, e. g. duisr’ia- from \ r dar%- ‘make firm’, mimajia- from ~\[ rnarij- ‘magnify’, vivaria- from | fvarz- ‘do’. §701. Examples of Inflection. These are con- fined to the present-system thematic. 1. Indicative, a. Pres. 1 . ACT. PL 3. GAv. ji-ji-piiU Ys. 39.1. — ii. KID, PL 2. di-dr aj-zciduye Ys. 48.7.— h. Pret i. ACT. Sg. 2. ci- fyhtu-jid Ys. 45.9. — ii. MID. Sg. 3. di dar 3 -$a(a ‘he held back’ (| f dar-). 2. Imperative, i. ACT. Sg. 3. GAv. vi-vstigha-lu ‘let him seek to surpass’ (j/Yw/-). ii. MID. Sg. 2. Y Av. mi-mar-ty-samiha. 3. Subjunctive, i. ACT. Sg. t. GAv. ci-I^nu-ga Ys. 49.1; 3. YAv. ji-ji-$d-'-ti . — ii. MID. Sg. 3. mi-mar^^-jd-Ue. 5. Participle, i. ACT. GAv. ci-fygnu-fant- Ys. 43.15. — ii. MID. YAv. zi-tyjnGs-vhsmria- § 465 Note 2. Note. A Perf. Participle of the desid. Act. is ja/^-avtS ‘having the desire to slay’ (j fjan-') ZPhl. Glossary p. 92. F. Intensive. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Grom. § 1000 seq.) § 702. The characteristic features of the Intensive are reduplication and the unthematic inflection. In forma- tion, the Intensive in Av., as in Skt., closely resembles the reduplicating class (Cl. 3 ) of the present-system; it is distinguished from Cl. 3 by having a strengthened re- duplicated syllable. § 703. As regards the reduplication, the forma- tion of the Intensive in Av. is twofold. 1 3 194 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. 1. The reduplicated syllable is made by repeating the initial conso- nant followed by the radical vowel in a strengthened form (a being streng- thened to a; — i to ac, oi ; — u to a o'). — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1002. 2. The reduplicated syllable is made by repeating the entire rool. — Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 1002 ii. § 704. As regards the radical syllable itself, this assumes sometimes the strong form, sometimes the weak grade, according to the person or the mode in which it is found. The inflection as stated above is unthematic. § 705. Examples of Formation. As instances to illustrate the Intensive formation the following may be taken : 1. Strengthened Reduplication: Av. \f part- 'to fight', intens. /< 7 - p)r 3 l- ; — Av. 1 f dis- ‘show, teach 1 dae-dois-, dac-dis- — Skt. de-dfs-, dc-dis- ; Av. p rid- ‘find’ voi-vid- — Skt. vt*vid- ; — Av. \ r zti- ‘call* zao-sao- — Skt. ja-hav-. 2. Repeated Root: Av. | [ dar- ‘to tear' dar-dar- — Skt. dar- dar -. Av. | fkar- ‘make’ car-k?)>- — Skt. ca.r-kr- ; Av. ~\f jiar- ‘stream, flow’ jiar-jsar •- (in participle) opp. Skt. cd-ksar-. Note. An intensive witli the r.r-inflection (Cl. 4 ihematic) is to be found in the following instance: Av. \f ras- ‘to wound*, GAv. ra-rf§-yt’nti (indie.) Vs. 47 - 4 . ra-rfg-yqn (subjunct.) Ys. 32.11 ; YAv. rd-rsj-ya-qlti (nom. pi. ptcpl.) Yt. 1 1.6; but un-ihematic GAv. rd-ro$-d (ptcpl.) Ys. 49.2 cf. Skt. ra-raks-; see also Whitney, Skt. Gram. § rot 6. Similarly, Av. y yah- *be heated, boil' vaipya- (i . e. ya-if-ya-) in the ptcpl. yaofyaql- = Skt. ya-yas-. § 706. Examples of Inflection. These arc con- fined to the present-system unthematic, and they are mostly from GAv. Thus: 1. indicative, a. Pres. i. ACT. Sg. 1. GAv. zao-zao-mi ; PI. 1. GAv. (ar*-k?r*-mahi Ys. 58.4. — ii. MID. Sg. 1. GAv. voi-ldd-e. — b. Prel. Sg. 3. dac-doiJ-t. 4. Optative, i. ACT. Sg. 3. YAv. dar^-da'r-yat (with str. rad. stem -dar- instead of expecLed wk. 1 hr 3 -). 5. Participle, i. ACT. YAv. j:ar a -jlar-nit- (ff-infleot.). §707. Transfers to the ^-inflection are found, e. g. Indie. Pees. 3 sg. act. YAv. uae-niz-aUi ‘it removes’, et al. Verbal Abstract Forms: — Participle. 195 VI. VERBAL ABSTRACT FORMS. Participle, Gerund, Infinitive. § 7°8. To the verbal system there also belong the Participle or verbal adjective, the Gerund, with Ge- rundive, and the Infinitive or verbal noun. A. Participle. 1. Participle in -aiit, -at (Act.) ; - mna , -dun (Mid.). (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 583, 584 etc.) § 709. Participial forms in -atit , -at (i. e. - nt ), fem. -a‘riti, - a‘ti in the Active, and forms in -mna, -ana (-ana) in the Middle, are found in each tense-system. As these attach themselves directly rather to the tense-systems, they have been discussed above under the respective systems, cf. §§ 488, 533 etc. 2. Passive Participle in -ta. (Cf. Whitney, .S’/'/. Cram. § 952 seq.) § 710. A passive participle or past passive parti- ciple, is made in Av., as in Skt., by adding the suffix -ta = Skt. -ta (accented) directly to the verbal root, which is subject however to certain euphonic changes. This verbal adjective in -ta (m. n.) , -td (f) is regularly declined ac- cording to the ^-declension §§ 236, 243. Examples of the formation are Av. pdta- ‘protected’ (y pa-) = Skt. pdta- ; Av. gdr 3 pta- ‘grasped’ ty gar w- § 74) = Skt . grbhHa; Av. druipta- ‘deceived’ (J / druj- § 90) = Skt. drugdhd-. §711. Treatment oft lie Root before -ta. The form of the root is subject to modification and is liable to vary before the added suffix. The following points may be noted: — • 1. The root very commonly (but not always) shows the weak form, if it has one, before -ta ; a penultimate nasal is accordingly dropped. Thus, with weak form, from Av. y vac- ‘to speak’ ptcpl. °upa- = Skt. ukta- ; Av. \f iui- ‘press our' hntu- = Skt. sutd-: — Av. ypauj- ‘draw, drive’ papa- ; Av. \f h>artj- ‘encircle’ hr a pa- — Inflection : Conjugation of Verbs. I 96 Skt. svakla- ; Av. y band- 'to bind' Oar to- (§ 151) = Skt. baddha-. ■Strong form or unchanged, Av. \ da- ‘to place' data- opp. Skt. Orta- ; Av. y tas- 'rut, form’ taita- — Skt. tast.d-. 2. Roots in final -a retain this. Thus, Av. s/d- ‘to stand’ stata- opp. Skt. s fluid-; Av. [ da- ‘place’ opp. Skt. hita- ; Av. y sna- ‘bathe’ — Slit, sna/d- ; Av. \ r pa- ‘protect’ - Skt. paid-. 3. Roots in -ar often show MS. variations between -)r»ta and -ar J :a, cf. § 47 Note. Thus, Av. y>ar- ‘to bear’ bar’ta-, baryta- (e. g. Ys. 62 .9) — Ski. bhrta-; Av. | f star- ‘stretch, strew' frasi>r*ta-, f raslar’ta-. 4. Roots in -an, -am in Av., as in Skt., often form -ata (i. e. -ufa. -mid)-, sometimes they show' -ata. Thus, Av. \ r jan- ’to slay’ jam- -- Skt. kata-; Av. y man- ‘think’ mala- = Ski. maid-; Av. y gam- ‘go’ "ata- =■ Skt. /fata-; Av. zan- ‘beget, boar’ zata- — Skt. jdtd-. 5. Rut roots in -an, -am often retain the nasal (m being assi- milated to n before /). Thus, Av. \ r kan- ‘to dig’ °ka?ita- (cf. also kata-) opp. Skt. khatd- ; Av. y zan- ‘know’ °zaiila- ; Av. Vs* am- ‘be angry’ grant a-. 6. Sometimes a radical short u appears as long ti before -la, cl. § 20. Thus. Av. y syrt- ‘to hear’ sruta- = Skt. sriita- ; Av. \[ dm- ‘run’ druta- — Skt. dr did-. £ 712. The past participle in -ita, although common in Skt., hardly appears in Av. ; the instances Av. daipita- Ys. 57.11 - Skt. dhrsitd-, Av. raodita-, za‘rita- are best treated under Suffixes below, § 786 Note 1. 3. Passive Participle in -na. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 952.) § 713. The //^-formation of the passive participle is very rare in A vesta. The instances are hardly distinguish- able from adjectives. As examples may be given, Av. | tan- To stretch’ iis-tana- ‘upstretched’ = Skt. uttand-; Av. y u- ‘be wanting’ i/iia- = Skt. find-; Av. \ par- ‘fill’ p 3 r 3 na- — Skt. purna-. 4. Perfect Active Participle in - 'ah. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 802.) § 714. The formation of the Perf. Act. Participle has been treated above under the Perfect -System, see §§ 61 1, 618, 399. Verbal Abstract Forms : — Participle, Gerundive. 197 5. Perfect Middle Participle in -ana, -ana. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 806.) § 715. On the formation of the Perf. Mid. Participle, see above under Perfect-System, §§ 61 i, 618. B. Gerundive and Gerund. 1. Gerundive: (a) Fut. Pass. Participle in -ya (declined). (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § 961 ) §716. A declined derivative adjective with verbal force is made from some verbs by attaching the forma- tive element -ya to the root. Such an adjective is regu- larly inflected according to the ^-declension. In meaning, it often corresponds to the Latin form in ndns ; it is there- fore commonly called a gerundive or future passive participle. Examples are from Av. \f is- ‘to wish’, a gerundive (vbl. adj.) ij'ya- — Skt. f/r/-, ■ Av. 1 fkars- ‘draw furrows, plow’ kaipya- Skt. "kfsya- ; Av. j fvar- ‘choose, believe’ va'rya- — Skt. vdrya-. Other instances occur. 2. Gerundive : (b) Fut. Pass. Participle in -tv a, -pwa (declined). (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 966 a.) § 717. A declined derivative adjective of like signi- fication C-ndus) with the preceding (§ 716) is made by add- ing -tva, -]nva, -dwa (§§ 94. 96; see also under Suffixes) directly to the root in its strong form. Such a verbal adjective is regularly inflected after the ^-declension. Examples are: Av. jqpwa- ‘worthy to be killed’ C\fjan-) — Skt. hantva- ; Av. fignaop-wa- ‘worthy to be satisfied’ {\ffysnu -) ; Av. varZtva- ‘to be done’ (| fvarz-'), mapwa- ‘to be thought’, valydwa- ‘to be spoken’. 3. Gerund (Absoluiive) in -ya (indeclinable). (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 989 seq.) § 718. A species of Gerund or Absolute (indeclinable) in -ya seems to occur in the following instances with < tu‘pc: Av. iBbigcJ-rya ‘seiz- ing’ = Skt. “gtrya; Av. pa’-liricya ‘throwing away’. But cl. Bartholomae in B.B. xv. 237. Inflection ; Conjugation of Verbs. 198 C. Infinitive. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Grain. §§ 538, 968.) § 719. The Infinitive is a verbal noun, an abstract derived from a verb. It is formed either directly front the root, or sometimes from a tense-stem. Such a derivative noun is used with an infinitival or a semi-infinitival force. The noun form is found most often in the dative case; sometimes , however, in other cases. The abstracts used as infinitives are most commonly cases of a substantive stem made by means of the suffix -di, -ti, -ah; less often they are formed from stems in -man, -van, -a; or they are from suffixless stems. § 720. Examples of Infinitives or Verbal Nouns so used, are the following. Cf. also Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 970. 1. Ending Av. -dyai, -dyai dative = Skt. -dhyai. (Chiefly GAv. ; rate YAv.) From root: GAv. d>r>dyai ‘for holding’ l| fdar-). — From pres, stem: GAv. vn 3 zye*dydi ‘to work', YAv. vaza*dyai ‘for driving’ (E vat-) Yt. 15. 28, srdvaye’dyai ‘to proclain’ Yt. 24.46. 2. Ending Av. -tie, -tayae-ca dative — Skt. -la ye. (Only YAv., but frequent.) From root: YA \. anu-matSt, anu-matayae-ca (§254) ‘to think, according to’ (\f wan-') = Skt. dnu-mataye ; Av. k>r 3 tSc ‘for making’ ( \fkar -) = Skt. krtayi ; Av. bir’tsc ‘for bearing’, etc. 3. Ending Av. -avhe dative = Skt. -ase. (Chiefly GAv.) From pres, stem: GAv. vaenavhi ‘to see’ (V vain-), srava- yeyhe ‘to repeat’ (\tsrr/-, causal), GAv. avauhi, GAv. ava'yht, ava - vhai-ca ‘to aid’ av-). — From aor. stem redupl., GAv. vaocavhi ‘to speak’ vac-). 4. Ending Av. -mahu, -va'ite dative = Skt. -mane, -vane. (GAv. and YAv.) From pres, stem: YAv. staoma’ne ‘for praising' (|/’j - f«-), GAv. vidvanoi ‘to know’ ( yfvid-) § 56. Also a couple of others. Periphrastic Verbal Phrases. IQ 9 5. Ending Av. -di dative (tf-decl.) — Skt. di. (GAv. and YAv.) From root: YAv. jaydi ‘to win' (]/' //-). — From stem; GYAv. fradapdi ‘to promote’ (p\f da-). 6. Ending Av. -e dative (radical) = Skt. -e. (Chiefly GAv.) From root: GAv. dar 3 soi ‘to see’ dars-), suye, savoi ‘to profit, save’ (\ r sic-), pui ‘to protect’. 7. Ending -te locative. (GAv. and YAv.) From root: GAv. dite ‘to go to’ (J/ 7 -) Ys. 31.9. — From stem: YAv. daste ‘to put, make’ Vsp. 15.1. § 721. A number of other formations in the acc., gen., loc., cases of abstract nouns may be regarded as in- finitives. For examples, see Geldner, in K.Z. xxvii. p. 226; Bartholomae , in K.Z. xxviii. p. 17, B.B. xv. p. 215 seq. VII. PERIPHRASTIC VERBAL PHRASES. § 722. In the Av., there is an inclination occasionally to use periphrastic phrases made up by means of an adj., a participle or a noun , with a copula verb or auxiliary, instead of a regularly formed tense-stem. The auxiliary may sometimes even be omitted. The periphrastic phrase is chiefly found in YAv.; its presence, however, is re- cognized in GAv. — Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1069 seq. § 723. The possible existence of a Periphrastic Perfect lias been noted above, § 623. § 724. A number of Periphrastic Expressions made by means of an adjective, a participle, or a noun com- bined with a verb, deserve special mention. 1. Periphrastic with Av. | fi- ‘to go’ ^ Skt. cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1075 a. GAv. stavas aycni '[ shall praise’ Ys. 50.9. 2. With Av. [ f dh- .‘sit’ = Skt. "J fas-, and Av. ~\f sta- ‘stand’ — Skt. "J f sthd-, cf. Whitney, Skt. Grain. § 1075 c. YAv. upa.maitiM Site ‘remains’, te hist tipi jzarijhirsiitis ‘they keep flowing’. 200 Inflection: Conjugation of Verbs. 3. Willi Av. yah- ‘be’ = Skt. \fas-, and Av. \fbu- be’ — Skt. y hhu - , cf. Whitney, Skt. Oram, ij 1073 d. GAv. ahia Jt 't- njmna Met us both pray to’, 1 da injunct. Ys. 29.5; GAv. hya{ cUjluuii 'let one be gratifying"' Ys. 43.13, GAv. uva hqs ‘being able, possessed of', YAv. pa‘rilt?r J t(.lis aahiv 'may be looking about’; YAv. yaoiday/in avion. Cf. also f rao i ri ua- Yt. 13.25. — YAv. yaf. bavdtii a‘wi.vavycn ‘that 1 may be conquering’ ; YAv. yaoidala bun ‘they become cleansed’, vavan ) buye ‘become victorious’. 4. With \ da- ‘give, make, do’, bo apparently YAv. a‘biga i ry& daipe ‘l do accept’, pa’liricva a'a’pc ‘he does throw away' cf. § 718. INDECLINABLES. § 725. General Remark. The indeclinable words in Avesta, correspond in general to those in Sanskrit and in the other Indo-Germanic languages. Under Indeclinables are comprised Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections. These may be taken up in detail. A. Adverbs. § 726. The adverbs in Av., as in Skt., may be made either from a pronominal stem or from a noun-stem by means of a suffix, or their forms are merely crystallized cases of old or abandoned nouns. t. Adverbs made by Suffix. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 1097.) § 727. A number of adverbs are made by adding suffixes to a noun or an adjective stem, or especially to a pronominal stem. Their meaning is various. a. Adverbs of Place.' (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. §§ 1099, 1100:) § 728. The principal adverbs of place made by means of a suffix are: Suffix Av. -to — Skt. -tas, Av. ahvito ‘around’ — Skt. abhilas. — Suffix -pm — Skt. -tra, Av. kupra ‘where’ = Skt. kutra; Av. hapra ‘along, with’ =. Skt. satra. — Suffix -da = Skt. -ha, Av. ida ‘here, now’ = Skt. iha. Likewise a number of others. b. Adverbs of Time. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1 103.) § 729. The number of temporal adverbs that are made by means of a suffix is not extensive but corresponds in proportion to the Sanskrit. Examples are : 202 in Jeclinaldes. Suffix GYAv. -tin. -Jii — Skt. -da, -did, -aha, Av. vndd, yada ‘when’ - Skt. yada; Av. kada, kada ‘when?’ = Skt. kadi. So Av. ada 'then’ — Skt. adha. Adha. c. Adverbs of Manner and Degree (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. §§ iioi, 1104 seq.) § 730. The adverbs of manner and degree made by- means of a suffix are numerous. Suffix Av. -pa — Skt. -I ha, GYAv. yapd, yap a ‘as’ — Skt. ydths ; Av. apa, a pn ‘so’ ■=■ Skt. at ha (al/taj . — Suffix -I — Skt. -s (Whitney, § 1105), A v. pri! 'thrice’ = Skt. Iris. — Suffix -ti = Skt. -ti (Wh., § 1102), Av. u‘ii ‘tlius’. — Suffix -vu( (acc. sg. advbl.) = Skt. -7 /at (Wh., § 1106), Av. vacasiastiva/ ‘after the mariner of the text’. Simi- larly Av. haktr’l ‘once’ = Skt. sal: ft. 2. Case-forms as Adverbs. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 11 10 seq.) § 731. Many adverbs in Av., at> in Skt., are really only stereotyped cases of nouns, adjectives , or pronouns, used with an adverbial force. 1. Accusative as Adverb — frequent (cf. Whitney, § 1 1 1 1) : (a) From pron. stern, Av. // ‘even — Skt. it; Av. in/ ‘how’ = Skt. id! ; Av. °cif particle — Skt. "t it; Av. coif (cptl. w. ;/) particle — Skt. cet ; Av. noif, naeda ‘not’ - Skt. net. — (b) From adj. stem, Av. nurqm (acc. sg. f.) , nur>m (acc. sg. n.) ‘now, quick’, cf. Skt. ttiindm ; Av. n par 3m ‘hereafter’ — Skt. aparam. — (c) From noun- stem, Av. nqma ‘by name’ — Skt. nd/na. 2. Instrumental as Adverb (cf. Wh., § 1 1 12): (a) From pron. stem, Av yavata ‘as long’ = Skt. yaiata; Av. /a ‘by this, therefore’, yd ‘by which, whereby’, dis ‘thereby’ (§ 431). — (b) Fiom adj,, Av. dat/fina ‘to tbe right’ — Skt. ddkfincna ; Av. yesnyata ‘praiseworthy’ (cf. Wh., § Iliad); Av. tarasca ‘across’ (§ 2S7 above) — Skt. tirased; Av. fracc ‘forth’ Ys. 9.8 (cf. § 287), cf. Skt. praca. 3. Dative as Adverb (cf. Wh., § *113): Av. tnlyai, prityac ‘for second, third lime’, Vd. 16.15, v - '• 4. Ablative as Adverb (cf. Wh., § 1114): (a) From pron. stem, af (GAv.) , dnf (YAv.) ‘then’ cf. $ 431 above ^ Skt. at — (b) From noun-stem, aritar/.naenidf ‘within’, —(c) From adj. stem, Av, ditrd/ ‘from afar’ — Skt. Jurat ; Av. ptiskaf ‘behind’ — Skt. pascal. 5. Genitive as Advero-in temporal sense (cf. Wh., § 1 1 1 5) : Av. ty/apb ‘at night’. Adverbs, Prepositions. 203 6. Locative as Adverb (cf. Wh., § 1 1 16) : From noun and adj. stems, Av. di/dr e, diirae-ca ‘afar’ = Skt. dare; Av. asne, asnae-ca ‘near’. 3. Miscellaneous Adverbs and Particles. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1122.) § 732. A number of adverbial words, chiefly mono- syllabic forms, deserve mention here. Examples are : a. Place. Av. kva (k a va) ‘where’ = Skt. kva ; Av. haca ‘with, forth’ = Skt. saca; Av. par?ntar* ‘outside’. Likewise some others; see § 728 above. b. Time. Av. mi ‘now’ = Skt. mi, nu; Av. mopu ‘soon, quickly’ (§ 38) = Skt. mak.cu • Av. pascaetd ‘after’. c. Manner. Av. aeva ‘so’ = Skt. evd; GAv. uana 'differently, specially’ (§ 17) = Skt. ndna ; Av. cu ‘how'. d. Negative. Av. ma ‘not’ (prohibitive) = Skt. mi. e. Asseverative. Av. ba ‘indeed, truly’, badd ‘even, indeed, always*. 4. Adverbial Prefixes. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1118 seq.) § 733. Here belong the verbal prefixes treated below (§ 749), some of which however show at times more or less distinctly their original adverbial value. Examples are : Av. a’pi, a'pi (GAv.) ‘even, for, afterward’ = Skt. dpi ; GAv. a‘bt, YAv. a‘ud ‘to, unto’ (occasionally advbl.) = Skt. ab/u; Av. ava, ava (GAv.), avo (Ys. 30.10 extra metrum) ‘down’ = Skt. Ava, avds ; Av. para ‘forth, before, beyond’ = Skt. paras; Av. haca ‘with, forth’ r= Skt. saca; Av. upah'i ‘above’ = Skt. ttpari. B. Prepositions. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1123 seq.) § 734. Prepositions in the sense of words that ‘govern’ oblique cases do not strictly exist in Avesta, any more than in Sanskrit. There are , however, a number of ad- verbial words which are used with the oblique cases and which define such cases more precisely. Their office is thus directive. These are termed Prepositions, and some- times they seem really to govern the cases with which they stand. 204 lndeclinables. § 735. A fuller discussion of the Prepositions and of the cases with which they are used, belongs rather to Syntax. A mere enumeration of these forms in comparison with the Skt. is here given. Some of the words are case-forms used adverbially with a prepositional value; see under Syntax. Principal A vesta Prepositions. a* pi (with acc., loc.) ‘upon, after, for’, cf. Gk. in'. = Skt. dpi a'wi, GAv. a'bi (w. acc., dat., loc.) ‘to, unto, upon’, cf. dp.cpi = Skt. abhi ada‘n (w. acc.) ‘under, beneat.h’, cf. Skt. adhar (adv.) ana (\v. acc.) ‘along, upon’, cf. Gk. ava ami (\v. acc.) ‘along, after, according to' — Skt. dnu atjtar * (w. acc., instr., loc.) ‘between, among’, cf. Lat. inter — Skt. antdr a pa (w . dat.) ‘away, off’, cf. Gk. a no - Skt. dpa arSm (w. abl., Ys. 51.14) ‘without’, opp. Skt. dram avi, aoi (w. acc., dat., gen.) ‘to, upon’; (w. abl.) ‘from’; (loc.) ‘in’ a (tv. acc., dat., abl., gen., loc.) ‘hither, from, to, until’ = Skt. <7 npa (w. acc., loc.) ‘unto, in’, cf. Gk. uno — Skt. upa npa'ri (w. acc., instr.) ‘above, over’, cf. Gk. ur.sp = Skt. updri taro, tarasca (w. acc.) ‘through, across’, cf. Lnt. tram — Skt. liras, tirascii pa'ti (u . acc., instr., dat., abl., gen., loc.) ‘to, at, for, with’, cf. noxi — Skt. prdti pairi (w. acc., abl.) ‘around, from around’, cf. itSpi — Skt. pan para (w. arc., instr., abl., gen ) ‘before, from’, cf. nipi — Skt. bard pari, GAv. pari (w. abl., gen., loc.) ‘before, beside', cf. Tidpoc — Skt. paras pasca (w. acc., instr., abl., gen.) after, behind’ = Skt. pasta pascaeia (w. acc.) 'after, following’ pasne (w . acc., gen.) ‘behind, on the other side of’, cf. Lat. pone mat (\v. instr., abl., gen.) ‘with’ = Skt. srndt iij 140 above) haca (w. acc., instr., abl., gen.) ‘with, in consequence of’ — Ski. sdea hapra (w. acc., instr., dat.) ‘with, along with’ = Skt. satrA kada (w. instr., clat., abl.) ‘with, along with' — Skt. saha. § 736. Ihe Prepositions, as in other languages, are not infrequently placed after the case which they de- termine, instead of before it; they thus become ‘Post- positions’. Examples are numerous: Av. apem a ‘to the water’, raocanem pa'ti at the window’, a/tf/ haca ‘in accordance with righteousness’, etc. Similarly in the loc. case -kva, -{V(i — *su -fa; so ahmya ‘therein’ — ah mi -l- a. Others likewise. Prepositions, Conjunctions. 205 § 737 - The abl. phrase YAv. a uta rdf naemdf ‘within’ is employed, in addition to its adverbial use, also with a force that is practically equi- valent to a preposition: Av. atflari if naemdf yar*dr&jd 'within a year’s time’; a Hi a rdf naemdf barBprifua ‘within the wombs’. C. Conjunctions. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § J231 seq.) § 73§. The conjunctions and particles of adverbial value have in part been treated above under Adverbs. It remains only lo emphasize the conjunctive force of some of the most important Co-ordinates and Subordinates. They are mostly postpositive in position. 1. Co-ordinate Conjunctions. § 7 39 - The chief co-ordinate conjunctions, copulative, adversative, etc. are here noted. a. Copulative. Av. ca ‘and, que’ = Skt. ett ; Av. ca ... ca ‘both . . . and’ — Skt. ca . . . ca; Av. uta ‘also’ = Skt. utd ; Av. uta . . . lit a ‘both . . . and’ .— Skt. uta . . . uta. .Negative , Av. noif ‘not’ -— Skt. nii! ; Av. naif. ■ . naif, naif . . . naeda, nava . . . naif ‘neither . . . nor’. 1 ) Adversative. The oniv one in use seems to be Av. tu ‘but, liuwever’ — Skt. tu. c. Disjunctive. Av. id ‘or, else’, e. g. Vd. 12. 1 = Skt. vd ; Av. ud . . . vd ‘either . . . or’ — Skt. vd . . . vd. d. Causal. Av. si ‘for’ (orig. asseverative, and often so used in Av. as ill Skt.) — Skt. hi. e. Illative. Here may be noticed Av. a/a ‘so, therefore’ — Skt. ilka. Perhaps also some others. 2. Subordinate Conjunctions. § 740. The subordinate conjunctions, temporal, modal, final, etc., with adverbial force, have been noted above under Adverbs (§ 728 seq.), e. g. Av. yada ‘when', yapa ‘as, that’, etc. To these may be added the conditional conjunction Av. yezi. yedi ‘if’ = Skt. yddi. % Indeclinables : Interjections. 206 D. Interjections. § 741. A few exclamations arc worthy of notice; they are, in part, remnants of cases of unused words crystallized as Interjections. Examples are not numerous. § 742. The most important Interjections are: Av. di ‘O’ (w. voc.) — Skt. di; Av. usta ‘hail (an old loc.). Like- wise a few others, probably originally case-forms of nouns or adjectives, e. g. Av. dvdya ‘alas’ (old instr.), cf. avoya me bdvoya ‘woe, woe indeed to me' Yt. 3.14; Av. inja ha, here’, tin ja ‘ho, there’. WORD-FORMATION, FORMATION OF DECLINABLE STEMS. § 743. General Remark. Words are made from roots either directly without an affix , or they are more com- monly formed by means of added suffixes , or again by composition. (1) Only a small proportion of declinable stems, how- ever, are made directly from verbal or pronominal radicals in their bare root-form without any affix. The simple root does sometimes serve as a declinable stem (see dis- cussion below, § 744), but this happens chiefly in com- pounds. (2) The great majority of words, in Av. as in other tongues, is derived from radicals by assuming an affix (suffix or prefix). The root-part of the word contains the fundamental idea; the prefix or suffix modifies its meaning. (3) A third method of making new words is by com- bining words already formed so as to build up a compound. The formation of verbs and pronouns has been suffi- ciently treated above; attention is here given to tire for- mation of noun-words. i. Suffixless Formation. Root-Words. (Cf. Whitney, %kt. Gram. § 1147.) § 744. A limited number of declinable stems, nouns and adjectives, in Av. as in Skt , are made directly from a simple root without assuming any suffix. The suffix- 208 Word-Formation: Declinable Stems. less stems have been discussed above, under Declension ££ 248, 261 etc. They occur ottenest as finals of com- pounds; they are therefore frequently tnaue up with verbal prefixes. As to signification, the root-words, as in Skt. (cf. Whitney, Skt. Grqtn. § 1147 a), are action-words, espe- cially infinitives; or they may be nouns of agency. Some- times they are adjectives. £ 745. As examples of Root-Words without Suffix may be given: Av. vac- ‘voice, word' — Skt. vac- ; Av. tlntj- ‘de- ceit, Fiend’ -- Skt. drith-: Av. admit- ‘undeceiving’ -- Skt. adriih-: Av. a‘wi-sac- ‘following’ =Skt. abhi-sac-. Nutt- 1. In Av., as in Ski., root-words at the end of a compound are subject to some variation, (a) Internal <7 i» often lengthened, anuZ- hac- ‘attending’. — (b) Radical >, // remain unchanged. — (c) Roots ending in a short vowel including ar usualls assume a t, as in Skt. (cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § ) / 47 d ). Av. nbar't- title of a priest ( |/ rar-), cf. Skt. a bhf!-, Whitney, Skt. Cram. $ 3S3 h. Similarly in the prior member of a com- pound, Av. sruj.gaoja- ‘of listening ears’ ( \f cf. Skt irut-karna- ; Av. jit.api- (l f/>-), cf. Whitney. Skt. Gram. §ij 1147 c, 383 h. Note 2 . Reduplication is perhaps to be sought in Av. til-tut-, cf. lor. pi. t t/tufova Vd. 6.51, cf Ski. tvac-. 2. Derivation by Prefix and Suffix. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Cram. §§ 1118, 1136.) § 746. Words are derived from radicals chiefly by the addition of prefixes and suffixes. The Prefixes and Suffixes may now be taken up in detail. PREFIXES. a. Nominal Prefixes, Substantive and Adjective. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Cram. § 1121.) £ 747. A number of prefixes are used in making new words of substantival or adjectival value out of words al- ready formed; these may be called nominal or noun- Nominal and Verbal Prefixes. 209 prefixes. The most important Nominal Prefixes (subst. and adj.) in Av. are: a- negative, hu- ‘well’, dus- 'ill'. § 748. Examples of nouns and adjectives formed with modifying nominal prefixes are: Av. a- negative (an- before vowels, /- before v; rare ana-) — Skt. a-, an- e, g. Av. a-srusti- ‘disobedience"; Av. an-ar’pa- ‘wrong' — Skt. anartha-; Av. d-visti- 'ignorance' — Skt. avitti-; Av. arw- maridika ‘unmerciful’. Av. hu- (occasionally hao- ) ‘well’ =3 Skt. su-: e. g. Av. hu fUi- ‘prospenty’ — Skt. suksiti- : Av. hao-zqpvua- ‘friendship’. Av. dus- (sporadic dins ) ‘ill’ = Skt. dus-: e. g. Av. dusiti- (i. e. dus-iih - § 186) ‘distress’; sporadic Av. dins-sravah- ‘inglorious’. I-ikewise a few others. b. Verbal Prefixes. (Cf. Whilney, Skt. Gram. § 1076 seq.J § 749. A number of verbal prefixes or so-called ‘pre- positions’ occur in combination with verbs; they modify or define the meaning of these more clearly. Some of these prefixes were originally stereotyped cases of nouns that have assumed an adverbial character. § 750. The most important verbal prefixes in Av. are the following. The meanings given are of course only general and approximate. See Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1077. Av. a'ti ‘past, over, beyond’, '\f bar — u'li ‘bring over to’ = Skt. dti a'pi ‘upon, on', '\j jan — a' pi ‘smite upon’ = Ski. api a'wi. GAv . a‘bI'\.o, upon, against ' ,'\ r gam- -j- a> wi, a‘ 6 i ‘come upon’ = Skt. abhi anu ‘after, along', j/ 7 - anu ‘go after’ = Skt. anu aiitar J ‘between, among’, y mru — j- atjtar* ‘interdict’ = Skt. an/dr apa ‘away, forth, off’, y bur — | - apa ‘bear away’ — Skt. dpa ava ‘down, upon’, jan — j- ava ‘strike down’ =r- Skt. ava avi, aoi ‘to, upon’, ybar--\-av> ‘bring to’ a to, unto , ~[/ bar- tf ‘bring to’ = Skt. d apa ‘to, unto, toward’, y bar- upa bring up’ ^ Skt. upa r/s, uz 'up, forth, out’, [/ bar- -f- us, uz ‘bring forth’ — Skt. ud m ‘down, in into’, 1/ jan- -j— /7 / ‘smite down’ ■= Skt. ni ms, nii ’out, forth, away’, \f bar — nis, nil ‘bring away’ — Skt. nis para ‘away, forth’, ybar- -)- para ‘bear away’ = Skt. para pa‘ri ‘round about, around’, ~\j bar- ~\- paGi ‘bear around’ = Skt. pari •4 2 TO Word-Formation: Prefixes and Suffixes. fra ‘forth (ore. forward', \f bar- -j- fra ‘bring forth’ — Skt. pro pa'ti 'towarjs. against, back’. \ bur- A- paUi ‘bring towards = Skt . prdh vi 'apart, away, out’, J bur- -j- vi ‘bear asunder’ = Skt. vi hqtn, hull-, GAv him, hiq- ‘together’. ]/ bar- -(- hum ‘bear together’ = Skt. sum. Note. Instances of stereotyped case-forms of a noun entering into verbal combination as prefix, are to be found: c. g. Av. yaol ~j \fdS-, yudi-dS'ti -makes pure’, cf. Av. yaos Ys. 44.9 = Skt. vo.t. §751. The connection between the prefix and the verb, in Av. as in Vedic Skt. (Whitney, Skt. Gram. £ 1081) is very loose; several words, therefore, often intervene be- tween the prefix and the predicate, so that sometimes it is difficult to tell whether the prefix is to be connected directly with the verb or is to be regarded merely as an adverb: e. g. apa haca qzahibyv J vtipra barois ’mayest thou, O Mithra, bring us away from distresses’ Yt. 10.23, beside apa-bara‘ti ‘he brings away' Vd. 5.38. fc; 752. A repetition of the prefix is not uncommon, that is, the prefix may stand at some distance before the predicate and then be repeated in combination with the verb: As an example of such repetition compare, Av. hqm ida lac tan ham. bar ay an ‘let them collect possessions together there' Vd. 4.44. Note 1. I11 GAv., the metre shows that the second prefix is re- gularly to lie expunged: e. g. GAv. hyat him vohii || mazdd [him 1 ] -frusta manauhd ‘when lie conferred with Vohu Matiah’ Ys. 47.3. Again hyut pud him cas/ua‘n 7 [hiq] yrubsm ‘when i conceived thee in mine eye’ Vs. 31 8. Similarly «<■ . . . [ttg]-jin Vs 46.12 ; et al. Note 2. In tli e case of a long predicate, when several subjects or objects belong to the same verb, the verb itself is sometimes expressed but once, the prefix being then repeated each time with the subject or object as the case may be: e. g. ay a duality a fruorjqhi i tthuru inazdio a soya I fra vohu maud , fra . . . fia . . . frii . . . ‘Almra Mazda professed his faith according to this law, Vohu Manah professed it, so did’ etc. Ys. 57.24. $ 753- When the prefix immediately precedes the verb to which it belongs, the form of the prefix is sometimes Verbal Prefixes. 211 made subject to the rules of sandhi (see Sandhi, below); sometimes, however, it undergoes no change but is allowed to remain unaltered, cf. §§ 51, 52 above. Thus: (a) With Sandhi. Av. J f az- ‘to drive' + avct, upa. para may give avazoi / (ava -f a.r), updza' l ti (upa-paz°), parazdtiti (para -j- az°) ; — Av. J/ i- ‘to go’ - Pupa , para gives upaeta - (upa -f- it a). para-Hi (para ~r ae l ti) ; — Av. "j f vac- ‘to speak’ shows paHyaolpta ‘he spoke’ Ys. 9.2, and a^pyuJjda- (a 1 pi ~r ul/da), cf. § 52 Note 1; — Av. j/ hac- ‘follow’, upavhacaHi (upa A Itacp; — Av, \Pharz- ‘let go’, upavhar 3 za'ti, fra-uhar 3 zaHi. (b) Without Sandhi. Av. f/ as- ‘to reach, ob- tain’, ava.asnaoHi , paki.aipiaoki. (beside frdpiao’ti with sandhi). Also many other examples. Note 1. The metre sometimes determines whether sandhi is to take place, or whether the hiatus is to be allowed to remain; compare in- stances like pahi.apayal Yt. 8.38, pa^ri.apaya Yt. 10.105, e! al. Note 2. The forms us, >iis (with voiceless s) are used chiefly be- fore voiceless consonants, the forms uz, nit are used before voiced; but this rule is likewise by no means without exception. Thus Av. uzba- mqti, uzulipyqn, niihsr 3 ia, so sr^zu/pla- (: before voiced sounds); blit usaja-, niftfsya Ys. 50.12, arsuhda- [s before voiced). Note 3. The preposition Av. hqm ‘civ’ = Skt. sam appears in various forms, the form being assimilated to the sound following; thus, ham- (be- fore vowels), hqm (before iabials and some other consonants), haq (before gutturals, palatals, dentals), also him, hiq- occur in GAv. — Examples are Av. hantart/W-, hqmhdrayin , hatikarayetni , hanjasiqU , haq/acaHi . Some exceptions to the law' of assimilation occur, e. g. mahiyu.hqm.tciUa- ‘con- structed by the spirit’ ; et ah § 754. Specially to be observed in compounds is the treatment of an original 2 after a prefix ending in i, u, 1. The original s, as expected, becomes s after i, u, cf. Whitney, S/U. Gram. § 185. Thus, YAv. ni/UuHi (]f stu-) Yv. 14.42; YAv. niltayedi Yt. 10.109 (Tut GAv. padislavas with s Ys, 50.9); Av. aiwipic- ‘accompanying’ Ys. 52.1 = Skt. abhisdc- ; Av. fadliJma- romna- (v. 1 . ftPti/smanmna-, paUi.manmttaA ‘thinking upon’ (Av. y mar- = Skt. ~\fsma,r- § 140) Yt. 10.86. — Similarly in internal 2| 2 Word-Formation: Primary Suffixes. reduplications unless followed by p §§ 155. 109. Thus, Av. hisma- nnl- 'remembering'. Put (with sp) Av. hi spits . hispdstmna 'spying' Yt. 8.36, Yt. 10.45. 1. Frequently the peculiar writing sh , ik is found after /, u. It seetns to be an attempt at etymological restoration. Thus, Av. Units. hits- ‘attending’ Ys. 31.12 = Skt. anusac - , Av. a‘wiShuta- (v. 1. ahuiPJutla-) ‘pressed haoma-juice’ (Av. "J Thu- — Skt. p su-) Ys. x 1 .3 ; Av. pa't'is/raftta- ‘encircled Ys. 1 1.8— Skt. parisvakta- ; Av. hushtafa ‘soundly sleeping’ ft; 95) Ys. 57.17 — Similarly in internal redupli- cation, Av. hishat/ti 'it clings' (| fhac-'). 3. Complicated are the following formations: GAv. viP-a-vharatii ’let him protect’ Ys. 58.4 (beside Av. ni . . . haraUt Ys. ig.io); YAv. nis-a-ohasti 'he settles down’ Ys. 57.30 (beside nisa/faytt / Ys. 9.24); Av. pa‘rntnharsUt- ‘imbrued’ (beside v. 1. pa‘riuharUn-i) SUFFIXES. § 75 5 Most derivatives, in Av. as in other languages, are made by means of suffixes. These resemble the cor- responding suffixes in Ski., and the)’ may likewise be divided into two general classes: a. Primary Suffixes, or those added directly to original roots or to words resembling such. b. Secondary Suffixes, or those added to deri- vative steins which have already been formed with a suffix. These two classes may now be taken up in detail. A. Primary Derivatives. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Crum, ij 1 143.) § 756. A Primary Derivative is a word that is formed by adding one of the so-called Primary Suffixes directly to an original toot §757. Form of the Root. The root to which the primary suffix is added may undergo more or less change in its form. Most generally the root is strengthened either to the guija or the vrddhi stage. Such variations Primary Derivatives. 213 for the most part answer to corresponding changes in Skt.; they will not be taken up in detail here; reference may be made to Justi, Handbuch der Zendsfirache pp. 366 — 38,3. §758. Some general remarks, subject to excep- tions, however, may be made with regard to the strengthen- ing of the root. (a) In Av., as in Skt., internal radical a is commonly vfddhied before the suffix a; but it commonly remains unchanged before the suffix /. (b) Interna! and initial i, u are gunated before the suffix a and /'. (c) Internal and final /, u are gunated before the suffixes -ana, -ah, -pra, -pwo, -man. (d) The root generally remains unstrengthened before the suf- fixes -ta, -fi, -rt, -pu, -ra, -vor>, and in some other cases. The Principal Primary Suffixes. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § ) 146 a.) § 759- A list of the principal primary suffixes may here be given in connection with the Sanskrit, see Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1146 a. One or two of these here given might perhaps be further resolved and regarded as secon- dary, but it is found convenient to include them here. 1 -a I 7 -us 33 2 -an I 8 -u 34 -man 3 -ana )g -ka (-ikaj 35 - mi 4 -a‘ni 20 -ta (-da) 36 -/nit a, -mana 5 -on* (-wO -ita, -a/a 37 -y a 6 -ar 2 1 -tar ( -dar) 38 -yah, -ista 7 -ah 22 -ti 39 -v* 8 -a 23 tu 40 -ra 9 -ana (frna) 24 -tra (-pra, - dra ) 4 1 -ri io -/ 25 -tva ( -pwo) 42 -ru I i -in 26 -pa (-da) 43 -vo 12 -inti 27 -pi 44 -van (-pvan) 13 -it 28 -pu 45 -van/ (-pwa/it) 14 -iSi 29 -na (-/no) 4 6 -va h 15 30 -nah 47 -var (-vara) 16 • u 31 -»i -una 32 -nu Word-Formation: Primary Suffixes. - 1 4 A few other Primary Suffixes. § 700. A few other suffixes occur sporadically ant! may also for convenience be classed under the primary division, though their »ccondaiy origin may be possibly traced. As examples may be taken • Suffix, Av. -ay>i in sar’Jaya-; Av. -at a in dafyjara- ; Av. -ura in razura-; Av. -tah in parStSk- (Whitney, § 1152 a). Likewise some others. Discussion of the Primary Suffixes. 1. Av. -a -- Skt. -a (Whitney, § 1 14S). £761. With this suffix a great number of derivatives are formed. Their signification is various; they are ad- jectives, action nouns, agent-nouns. The root is generally strengthened by gnna or vrddhi. Examples are very numerous : Noun (masc., neut.). Av. van a- ‘strength’ = Skt. vdja-; A v. maeja- ‘cloud — Skt. me git d-; Av. gaosa- ‘car’ = Skt. ghrisa-; Av. caJ/ra- ‘wheel’ (neut.) -- Skt. cakrd-.— A d j e c t i v e. Av. anta- ‘strong’ — Skt. dm a- ; Av. a sara - ‘headless’; Av. amoja- ‘immortal’ -- Skt. amfta-; Av. draoja- ‘deceitful’ — Ski. drogha-. Also many others. 2. Av. -an — Skt. -an (Whitney, § i iGo). $5 762. This suffix forms a limited number of neuter and masculine nouns of action and agency, including also a few adjectives. Examples are : Noun. Av. uljjan- m. ‘ox’ =: Skt. uksdn-; Av. tufa//- in. ‘shsper’ - Skt. (dksaa- Av. u rvan- m. ‘soul’; Av. masari- n. 'greatness’ — - Skt. mahdn-. — Adjective. Av. )vii}Jun- ‘not receiving’; Av. ’ > ta’ t rvan- ‘conquering’. 3. Av. ana (-.via) — Skt. -ana (Whitney, § 1150). § 763. This suffix, as in Skt., forms many deriva- tives, nouns and adjectives of varied value. Roots in /, u commonly receive the ^//^/-strengthening before this suffix. Primary Derivation: — Suffix -a, -art, -ana, -a‘ni, -uqt, -an, -ah. 2 I 5 Some of the adjectival derivatives made with this element can hardly be distinguished from participles. Examples are: Noun. Av. vanhana- n, ‘clothing’ = Skt. vasana-; Av. hnqja- maua- n. 'assembly' = Skt. sqgamana- ; Av. bajina- n. ‘dish’ = Skt. bhdjana-, § 17, 30 ; Av. manpana- n. ‘dwelling’; Av. raocana- n. ‘light, window’ = Skt. rocana-. — Adj. Av. zayana- ‘wintry’. § 764. After an r, the Av. form -)na answers in some instances to orig. -ana , while in others it corresponds to -na (i. e. -*ua, see § S02). These must be distinguished. As examples after r: (a) Av. ->na — Skt. -ana (i. e. - a na ) , Av. vanna- m. ‘choice, belief’ = Skt. varand- ; Av. hamimna- n. ‘battle, conflict’ = Skt, samdraiia-. Likewise some others. But observe Av. banana- (-ana) ‘side, shore’ Yt. 5.38 etc. opp. to Av. kar’na- (-na) ‘ear’ Yt. 11.2 = Skt, kdrua- ; yet consult the variants. (b) Examples of Av. -ma (i. e. -*na) = Skt. -na , after r, are given below under -na § 802. 4. Av. -ahii -- Skt. -an: (Whitney, § 1159). § 765. Sporadic traces of the suffix -an l in Av., as in Skt., are to be found. As example may be quoted: Av. dui-afni- adj. ‘evil’ Vd. 14.5. 5. Av. -aiit (-dfit : -hit) — Skt. -ant (Whitney, § ji 72]. § 766. This is the suffix which forms the pres, and fut. participles. It has been sufficiently treated above, §§ 477 . 5 * 4 - 6. Av. -an (-ana) — Skt. -an (Whitney, §§ 169 a, 11511). § 767. This suffix forms a limited number of nouns; they are al- most all of the neuter gender. It occurs likewise in adverbs and pre- positions, probably there representing old case-endings. In some nouns the form becomes -ana by the ^-transfer. The prefix -an must be con- nected with -an, cf. § 337. Examples : Av. vadan- n. ‘weapon’ — Skt. vdnhan- ; Av. za/an- d. ‘iaw’ ; Av. baevar-, balvara- (^-inflection) ‘thousand’; Av. nan-, nara- m, ‘man’ — Skt. nan-, nara-. Observe the adverbs Av. aiitar * ‘be- tween, inter’ = Skt. anldr ; Av. i(an 3 'immediately’. 7. Av. -ah — Skt. -as (Whitney, § 1151). § 768. From this very common suffix, in Av. as in Skt., a great number of derivatives are made. They are 2l6 Word- Formation : Primary Suffixes. chiefly abstract neuter nouns and some adjectives (probably originally cjistinguisljed from the latter by a difference of accent, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § i 1 5 1 e). The roots in i, u show ^^/7(Z-streng*thening before this suffix. Examples are: Noun. Av. avah n. ‘aid’ = Skt. dvas- ; Av. aenah- n. ‘sin = Skt. ? nas -; Av. tjmah- n. ‘darkness’ — Skt. tamas- ; Av raucah- n. ‘light’. — Noun, Adjective GAv. dvarjiah- n. ‘hate’. dvae$ah- adj. ‘hateful’ Ys. 43.8 = Skt. dvesas-; Av. vasah- n. ‘will’, vasah • adj. ‘will- ing' Ys 31.tr, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1151 e. A feminine noun in Av., as in Skt., is Av. u$ah- f. ‘dawn’ = Skt usds-, cf. £ 357 above. 8. Av. -a = Skt. d (Whitney, § 1149). § 769. This suffix makes feminine adjectives answering to masculine and neuter rr-stems. If also makes a considerable number of feminine action-nouns. Its form is often obscured, as it frequently appears as d §§25. 17, rS. Examples have been given under declension of fern, nouns and adjectives §§ 3G2, 243. 9. Av. -ana (-ana) = Skt. -ana (Whitney, <5 1 175). 770. This suffix is used in forming middle and passive participles; it has therefore been treated under the different tense-systems, §§ 477, 507 etc. Examples of participles mid. and pass, are: Av. isana- ‘ruling’ — Skt. isana--, Av. mavhdna- ‘thinking' (aorist ptcpl .) ; Av. yazdna ‘worshipping’. pdpir’tdna- ‘fighting’. Also others. Nole. A few noun-stems in -an also show -ana as a sporadic heavy form with o-transfer. e. g. ari&na- ‘male’ § 310 jo. Av. -i — Skt. -i (Whitney, § 1 1 5 5). § 771. With this suffix a considerable number of de- rivatives are formed. They are adjectives and substantives. Primary Derivation: — Suffix -a, -ana, -/', -in, -ina, -is, -ijii. 21 / The masculines are chiefly agent nouns , the feminines are abstracts; there is an occasional neuter. The root generally shows the guna stage Examples are: Nouns, Av. azi- m. ‘dragon’ — Skt. a hi-; Av. kavi m. 'Kavi, king — Skt. kavi-. — -Av. kar$i- f. ‘circle, circuit = Skt. krsi-: Av. dahi - f. ‘creation’ = Skt. dhast-; Av. maeni- f. ‘wrath, punishment Ys. 31.15, 44.19 ~ Skt. meni-. — Av. as/- n. ‘eye = Skt, aksi-. — Adjective. Av. za'ri- 'yellow, golden’— Skt. hari ■; Av. darji- ‘bold’, etc. § 772, On Av. -i/a — Skt. -it a, see § 786 below. § 773 - On Av. -iti — Skt. • iti , see § 789 below. 11. Av. -in = Skt. -in (Whitney, § 1 1 83). § 774 Only a few undoubted instances of this suffix as a primary derivative are noted; its use in secondary formation of possessives is more familiar (§ 835), though not so common as in Sanskrit. Quotable exam- ples of the primary usage of this suffix are : Noun. Av. ka'nin- f. maiden. — Adjective. Av. stacin (in ajstacind) 'flowing, running’. 12. Av. -ina =— Skt. -ina (Whitney, § 1177 c) § 775 - There are a few quotable derivatives that show this suffix. Examples are: Adjective. Av. daf/fina- ‘right’ — Skt. daksiya- ; Av. za'rina- golden' — Skt. harina-. 13. Av. -is — Skt. -is (Whitney, § j 153)- § 776. A small number of neuter nouns are made by means of this suffix, instances are : Noun. Av. Aar } zis- n. ‘cover, mat’, cf. Skt. barhis- ; Av hadis - 11. 'abode'; Av. vifi'n- n. ‘judgment’, sna'/>is- n. ‘weapon , cf. § 359 above. 14. Av. -ijii = Skt'. -isi (cf. Whitney, §§ 1153, 1156a). § 777 - This suffix belongs perhaps rather under secon- dary derivation than under primary endings. It occurs in only one or two words and may best be mentioned here. It seems to answer as a corresponding feminine formation 21 8 Word -Formation : Primary Suffixes. (-ifi) to the preceding -is The root is strengthened be- fore it. Examples are : Noun. Av. tJziifi- f. ‘power, might’ = Skt. tdvisi-; Av. hdh'ifl- f. ‘mother . § 77-S. On -ista in superlatives see § 813 below. 15. Av. -i — Skt. -i (Whitney, § 1156). £ 77 9- This suffix is to be sought in feminine nouns and adjectives, cf. also Whitney, S/;t. Gram. § 1 1 56 b. Such feminines correspond for the most part to rnasc. and neut. stems in -a, -i or a consonant. Sometimes it is doubtful whether it would not be better to regard some of the nouns and adjective.-, as secondary in origin. Noun. Av. inalpsi- f. ‘fly', va‘di- f. ‘stream, river’. — Adjective. Av. daevi- ‘fiendish’ = Skt. devi-; Av. drivt- f. ‘poor’ (t? 187, fern, to drijn- m. n.). Like- wise certain others, cf. § 3 62. 1 ( 3 . Av. -u — Skt. -11 (Whitney, § 1178). vj 780. Tiiis suffix which closely resembles the cor- responding one in Skt., forms derivative nouns and ad- jectives. The nouns are chiefly masculine. Examples are: Noun. Av. qsu- m. ‘branch, twig’ — Skt. qsu-; Av. i$u- tn. ‘arrow’ — Skt. isu- ; Av. pasu- m ‘small cattle’ = Skt. pasu--, Av. tanu-, land- f. ‘body’ = Skt. tanii ■, tanu-; Av. niadu- n. ‘honey’ — Skt. rnadhu-. — Adjective. Av. po«ru- ‘full — Skt. puru-; Av. vavku-. voliu- ‘good’ = Skt. vasu-; Av. driju- ‘poor’. Likewise others. § 781. On Av. -una ~ Skt. -unn, see ^ S02 below. § 782. On Av. -ura - - Skt. -tiro, see i? 8 > 6 below. 17. Av. -us — Skt. -«• (Whitney, § 1134). § 783. This suffix forms a few derivatives; they are chiefly nculer nouns. As examples may be quoted : Av. ar’dtti- n. ‘assault, battery’, gar } eu.<- n. ‘milk’, /anus- n. ‘person’ Ys. 43.7, cf. § 360. Add aiso manus- masc. nom. propr. 21 q Primary Derivation : -Suffix -i, -u, -its, -it, -ka, -la. 1 8. Av. -u Skt. -u (Whitney, § 1179). § 784. With this suffix only an occasional feminine noun is made. As an example may he quoted Av. la nil- (/aim-) f. ‘body’ — Skt. lanfi- (tami- ). 19. Av. -ka Skt. -ka (Whitney, § 11S6). § 785. This suffix forms a few primary derivatives; they are nouns and adjectives. Its Uoe in secondary derivation, as in Skt., is more com- mon. Examples of -lia as primary suffix are : Noun. Av. adka- m. ‘garment, robe’ Yt. 5.126 — Skt. dtka- ; Av. mahrtka- m. ‘death’ — Skt. market.-. — Adjective. Av. huSka- ‘dry’ = Skt. st'tfka-. 20. Av. -ta (-ita, -ata) = Skt. -ta (-ita, -ata), Whitney, § 1 176. § 7S6. The suffix -ta is used chiefly (1) in forming past-passive participles directly from the conjugation-stem as explained above under Participles, § 710 seq. It ap- pears also (2) in a few general nouns and adjectives which show more or less of a participial character. The feminine form shows -ta. Examples are: (1) Past-Passive Participles in -ta, see §711 above. — (2) Nouns and A d j e c t i v e s ; Av. diita- m. ‘messenger’ — Skt. diitd- ; Av. augusta- m. ‘toe’ = Skt. avgustha- ; Av. sasta- m. ‘hand’ — Skt. hast a-; Av. ata- ri. ‘right’ (-sa — -rta, § 163) = Skt. rtd-; Av. andhita- fem. ‘Anahita’ nom, propr. Note 1. The suffix Av. -Ua — Skt. -ita (Whitney, § 1170 d) appears in a few adjectives: e. g. Av. za’riia- ‘yellow, green’ — Skt. hdriia- ; Av. masita- ‘great’ ; perhaps in Av. raottila- ‘red’. Likewise in the ptcpl. ndj. Av. dars ita- ‘emboldend , daring’ (\fdars-) Ys. 57.11 — Skt. dhrsitd -, cf. § 712 above. Note 2. A suffix -ata (stem a to) -- Skt. -ata (Whitney, § i t 76 e ) may be assumed in a few nouns and adjectives which show partly a gerundive force. Av. 3 r*sat&- n. ‘silver’ = Skt. rajala- ; Av. vazala- m. ‘adorable, divinity’. Note 3. The suffix -ta is sometimes disguised as -da in accor- dance with certain phonetic changes, cf. § 89 etc. Av. v?r»zda- ‘grown great, mighty’ (i. e vardi -f id) ■= Skt. vrddha-. So Av. dr»wda- Yt. 1 3 - 1 1 • Likewise -r-ia is oflen disguised as -fa, cf. § 163. 220 Word-Formation : Primary Suffixes 21. Av. -tar ( dar) = Skt. -tar (Whitney, § 1182). v? 787. This suffix is used in fonning masculine, and a few feminine, nouns of agency and r el a t i o nsh i p , cf. £ 321 seq. The suffix is attached directly to the root; and radical i, u are generally strengthened before it There is a corresponding feminine -J>ri besides. Examples oi -tar are: (1) Nouns of Agency. Av. ddtar - m. ‘giver, creator’ ~ Skt. d(h)dtar-; Av. zaotar- m. name of priest = Skt. hotar- et al. — (2) Nouns o f R e 1 a t i o n- ship. Av. pa tar- m. ‘father’ - Skt. pi tar-; Av. uiatar- f. ‘mother’ =- Skt. malar-. Note 1. The suffix -tar ii> sometimes disguised (cf. § 163). Av. tv&jfar- m. ‘eater’; Av. balar- m. ‘rider’ = Skt. bhartar-. Note 2. Observe the form of the suffix in YAv. dujdar-, GAv. dng»dar - f. ‘daughter' Yt. 17.2, Ys. 45.4 = Skt. duhitdr-. Note 3. Observe -tar as neuter in infin. YAv vidqiprc Yt. 10.S2 (perhaps here har*/>re v. 1 . Ys. 62.2). 22. Av. -ti = Skt. -ti (Whitney, § 1157). § 788. This suffix is used in forming a large number of feminine nouns, chiefly abstracts, and also an occasional masculine noun or adjective. The suffix is added directly to the root in its weak form. Examples are numerous: Noun. Av. anuma'ti- f. ‘thought, agreement’ = Skt. dnumati-; Av. cisti- f. ‘wisdom’ = Skt. citli-; Av. stu'ti- f. ‘praise’ — Skt. stuti-; Av. supti- f. ‘shoulder’ -Skt. sitpti-; Av. pa l ti- masc. ‘lord’ = Skt. pati-. — Disguised form, Av. afi f. ‘Reef itude' — *ar-ti tj 163. $ 789. A form Av. -iti — Skt. -Hi (Whitney, § 1157 jj) is found in a few words: Av. spa$iti - Yt. 19-0, dskrti- (cf. § 32) Ys. 44.17. 23. Av. -tu - Skt. -tit (Whitney, § 1161). § 790. With this suffix, in Av, as in Skt., are formed a number of abstract and concrete derivatives. They are prevailingly masculine The root is commonly strengthened before the -tu. Examples are: Primary Derivation : — Suffix -tar, -ft, ~tu, -tra, -tva. 221 A \ . ydtu- m. ‘sorcerer’ — Skt. vatu-; Av. haetu- m. ‘bridge’ — Skt. situ - ; Av. Iiratu- m. ‘wisdom = Skt. krdtu-; Av. pitu- m. ‘food’ — Skt. pith-: A x.vaiitu- masc. ‘spouse’; A v.jydtu- (fem.?) ‘life’ — Skt jivdtu-. 24. Av. -tra (-pra, -dra) — Skt. -tra (Whitney, § 1185). § 791. The suffix -tra (-pra. -dra, -dra) forms nu- merous nouns, which are chiefly neuter, and a few adjec- tives. The root usually has the o/^/a-strengthening, but sometimes it remains unaltered. The original form (1) -tra of the suffix is preserved only after sibilants or a written nasal (§ 78); otherwise it becomes regularly (2) -pra (§ 77, 2). The forms (3) dra (in -f ? dr-, -//dr-) and -dra (in zdr -, - zdr -) appear only under special circumstances, see §§ 79, 89, 90. The corresponding feminine is -tra. Examples are: Noun. Ax. ustra- rn. ‘camel’ = Skt. ustra- ; Av. vastra- n. ‘garment — Skt. itastra-.— -Av. pupra- m. ‘son’ = Skt. putra-; Av. }/ sapra - n. ‘rule, kingdom’ — Skt. ksatrd-. — Av. °yaolp dra- n. ‘girdle' Yt. 15.54 (cf. § 79) = Skt. ydktra- ; Av. v a/p dra- n. ‘word’, cf. Skt. vaktrd-; Av. vazdra- m. ‘bearer’. — Adjective Av. frao u rvaestra- ‘productive’. — Av. broi pra- ‘cutting’ Yt. io. 130 etc. {y bri-). — Av. mqzdra- ‘learned, wise’ ('§ 90), si zdr a- Yt. 8.36; Vd. 13.2. Note. A fev.’ feminines vvilli suffix Av. -tra — Skt. -tra (Whitney, § IlScd) may here be noted: Av. astra- f. 'goad' = Skt. a\/ra-\ Av. 2 ao/rii- f. 'libation’ — Skt. tut tra-. 25. Av. -tva (-puta, -diva) — Skt. -tva (Whitney, § 966 a). § 792. The suffix -tva, ( -piaa, -dwu 94, 96) is used (9 chielly in forming the Gerundive , or declinable future-passive participle of ad- jectival value (Latin - lulus ) as described above § 717. But it is found also ( 2I in a few abstract nouns. The feminine form is -tva, -putu. 1. Gerundive. Examples of the suffix so used have been given above. -2. Noun. A v, staobwa- n 'praise'; dqstva- [. 1 skill’, vq/Uotl- f. 'herd'. 222 Word-Formation: Primary Suffixes. 26. Av. -pa (da, -da) - Skt. -tha (Whitney, § 1163). § 79 3 - With the suffix -pa (- da , -da §§ 89, 90, 77 Note 3) are made, in Av. as in Skt., a number of action- nouns of different genders , and a few verbal adjectives with passive signification. The root usually appears in its weak form. The feminine is regularly -pa. Examples are: Noun. Av. rap a- m. ‘chariot’ = Skt. rdtha-; Av. havi*r 3 pa- in. ‘foe’; Av. vicipa- in. ‘decision ; Av. zqpa- m. ‘birth’. — Av. ar 3 pa- n. “subject, thing’ — Skt. drtha-. — Av. gapci- f. ‘song, hymn’ — - Skt. gat ha- ; Av. gaepd- f. ‘being, creature’; Av. cipd- f. ‘penalty’. — Adjective. Av. nfyda- ‘spoken, word' (§ 77 Note 3) = Skt. ukhthd-; Av. prat 3 da- ‘gratified'; Av. )ul[da- ‘girt, compact' Yt. 10.127. Note 1. On Av. -da -- orig. ~ta, see § 786 above. Note 2. The form - apa (probably thematic a />a) -- Skt. -a/ha (Whitney, § 1163c'! occurs in some words: Av. vafgajni- n. ‘growth’ — Skt. vakfdthu-. 27, 28. Av. -pi, -bn . Skt. -thi, -fhu (Whitney, § 1164). § 794. The suffix Av. -pi = Skt. -thi occurs in one or two words; it is aiso disguised as -ft. The suffix Av. -Jut = Skt. -thu is likewise quotable. Both of these elements are used in making nouns, the suffix being attached to the weak form of the root. Examples are . Suffix -pi: Av. ci pi- 1. ‘punishment’ ; Av. a\H- f. dread, terror’. So Av. asti- m. ‘minister’, cf. Skt. at’ thi-; \v. hat(ii- 11. ‘thigh’’ — Skt. sakthi -. — Suffix -pa: Av. hi pit- nr. N dweller, socius’. § 795. On the form -pi a, see -h a § 79 1 above. § 796. On the form -Jiva, see -tv a § 792 above. 8 797- Orr -Jwan, see -van § 820 below. § 708. On the form -Jivatit, see below, § 821. 8 799- On *^ le f° r nr -da, see -It § 786, and -pa § 793 above. § 800. On -da see above, -Ja § 793. § 801. On tire form -dra see -ha, -pra § 791 above. 29. Av. -it a, (-una) — Skt. - na , (-una), Whitney, § 117 7. § 802. The suffix -na is used (1) in making a few past-passive participles equivalent to those in -ta It is Prim. Deriv. : — Suffix -pa, -p / , -J>u, -net, -itna. - nati , -rti, -nu, -htu. 223 also employed (2) in forming some abstract nouns and likewise adjectives whose verba! character is easily recog- nized. The root is generally not strengthened. ( 1 ) Passive Participle in -na. Examples of this formation have been given at § 713 above. — (2) Noun. Av. frasna- m. ‘question’ — Skt. prasnd- : Av. yasna- m. ‘sacrifice’ — Skt. ya jud- ; Av. Irafna- m. ‘sleep’ — Skt. svapna-. — Av. par* na- n. m. ‘wing’ = Skt. parnd-. — Av. haena - f. ‘army’ — Skt. send-.— Adjective. Av. magna- ‘naked’ = Skt. nagna-; Av. k annul- ‘few’. See also § 713. § S03. The suffix form Av. -una — Skt. -ttna (Whitney, § 1177 c), doubtless of secondary origin, is distinguishable in a few words: Av. la u - runa- ‘young’ := Skt. t&rupa- ; Av. a* run a- ‘fiery’ — Skt. arui.td-. 30. Av. -nah = Skt. -tins (Whitney, § 1 1 52). § 804. The suffix -ua/’i is perhaps somewhat more common in Av. than in Sanskrit, ft forms neuter abstracts. Radical i, u are strengthened before it; a remains unchanged. Examples are: Av. raifyiah- n. 'possession’ -- Skt. riknas-; Av. fear* nah- n. ‘splendor’; Av. dr 11 up ah- ‘offering’ Skt. dra.vh.ias-; Av. par } na)i- n. (in parniaohunlJtit') ‘fulness’ == Skt, pa.rii.tas-; Av. rafna.ii- 11. ‘help, comfort’. 31 Aw. -Hi ■ Skt. -ni (Whitney, § 1158). § 805. With this suffix, as in Skt., are made a small number of nouns and adjectives. Strengthening of the root occurs. Examples are: Av. vurfni- m. and adj. 'virile, male’ = SV;l. zfsni-; Av. sraoni- f. ‘hip’ — Skt. sroni- ; Av. fjfaoni- f. ‘fatness’. 32. Av. -nu, ( -snu ) -- Skt. -nu, (-snu), Whitney, §§ 1162, 1194.. § 80G. With the suffix -nu , as in Skt., a small number of nouns or adjectives are made. Examples are : Av. burnt- m. ‘light, ray' — Skt. bhanii- ; Av. garHirt- nt. ‘itch’ = Skt. gfdhnu- ; Av. tafr>u- m. fever’ — Skt. tapnii -. — Av. dainu- f. ‘female, cow’ — Skt. dhenu-. § S07. The suffix Av. -iuu ~ Skt. -snu (Whitney, § 1194) is like- wise quotable: e. g. Av. rnohinu- m. ‘light, brightness’ — Skt. raC.rini-; Av. fqsnu- f. ‘dust’, cf. Skt. piisu. 224 Word-Formation: Primary Suffixes. 33. Av. -mu — Ski. -mu (Whitney. § 1 166). § 808. With this suffix a considerable number of derivative-- are made, they are adjectives and nouns. The nouns are chiefly masculine- The root is often strengthened. Examples are Noun. Av. hctoiiia- m. haotna’ Skt. soma-, Av a?*ma- m. Tury’; Av. *‘ruf>ma-- m. ‘growth’. — Av. gar-ma- n. ‘heat’ = Skt gharma -. — Adjective. Av. > bam a ‘shining’ — Ski. bhbma- Av. tai/ma- ‘strong, swift’: Av. gar^ma- ‘hot’ =: Skt. gharma-. 34. Av. -man — Skt. -man Whitney, § 1168). cj 809. The suffix -man in Av., as in Ski., forms a number of derivative action nouns; most of these are neuter; a few are masculine. The root generally shows the guna- strengthening. Examples are: Noun. Av. asman- in. 'stone, heaven' = Skt. aiman -: Av. ras/nan- m. ‘column, rank - . — Av. namatt-, naman- n. 'name' = Skt. n&mun- ; Av. vacs man- ‘dwelling’ (in vaesnion-da Vt. 10.86).= Skt. vesman-; Av. Uio//man- 11. ‘seed’ = Skt /oilman-; Av. bar'sman- n. ‘barsom’. 35. Av -mi — Skt. mi (Whitney, § 1167). § Slo. This suffix, as in Skt., is found in a very few masculine and feminine nouns. Examples are: Av. var-mi- in. ‘wave, billow' =• Skt urmi-; Av. dami- m. ‘crea- tor’ Ys. 31. S; Av. ® zami - m. ‘birth’ — Skt. jami . — Av. bt/nii- f. ‘earth — Skt. bhiimi-, bhumi-. 36. Av. -mna, -inana = Skt. -man a (Whitney, § 1)74). § 811. This suffix is used in forming the middle (passive) participles of the different systems. It has been discussed above, § 709 etc. Furthermore on Av. mna, -inana (Gk. -y. svo;) opp. to Skt. -maria see § 18 Note 2 37. Av. -ya Skt. ya (Whitney, § 1213) § 812. This suffix is used in making the Gerundive (fut. pass, ptcpl § 71(3) and also verbal adjectives; like- wise a few nouns, it is sometimes difficult, in Av. as in Skt., to distinguish the primary from the secondary deri- Suffix -ma, -man, -mi, -tuna, -man a, -ya, -yah, -ilta, -yit, -ra, -ri. 22 ^ vatives made with this suffix. The root is usually weak. The corresponding feminine form is -yd. Examples are: G erundi ve and Adjective (cf. also § 716): Av. imp- ‘desir- able’ = Skt. ifya; Av. i'ivyu- 'living, fresh ’ = Skt. jhya-; Av. maijya- 'deadly'; Av. hc.’pya ■■ ‘true* -= Skt. sniyd-; Av. maidya- ‘middie’ ~ Skt. nuidkya-, — Noun. Av. huhya- n. ‘grain’ — Skt. sasyci- ; Av. idpya- fem. ‘beam’, cf. Lat. antae. 38. Av. -yah. (- ista ) -- Skt. -iyas, (- isiha ), Whitney, § 1 184. § 813. These suffixes are used respectively to form the comparative and superlative degree of a number of old adjectives. The form -ista is perhaps more strictly secondary, but as both forms are practically added directly to the crude stem (§ 365) it is more convenient to keep both together under the head of primary derivation. For examples, see § 36 5. 7,9. Av. -yu — Skt. -yn (Whitney, § 1165). § 814. This suffix is attached in forming a very few nouns. Th^ root remains unstrengthened before it. Examples are ; Noun. Av. ma’iivu- in. ‘spirit’, cf. Skt. manyu-; Av. m»r 3 pyu- m. ‘death’ ( 1 f mar- -j- t as in Skt.) Skt. mrtyu- ; Av. dafiyu- da'yhu- fem. ‘country’, cf. Skt. dasyu-. 40. Av. -ra — Skt. -ra (Whitney, S 1188). § 815. This suffix is common, in Av. as in Skt.; numerous adjectives are formed by it; these adjectives may also be used as nouns of all three genders. The root is usually weak. Examples are: Noun. Av. vazrd- m. ‘club’ — Skt. vdjra-; Av. cajya- n. ‘wheel’ = Skt. catzrd- ; Av. hura- f. ‘a drink’ = Skt. surd -. — Adjective. Av. ujra- ‘mighty’ ~ Skt. ugrd- ; Av. cipra- ‘bright’ — Skt. citrd- ; Av. sutyra- ‘red’ - Skt. sukrd-; Av. gufru- ‘deep’. § 816. Tiie form Av. -ura — Skt. -ura (Whitney. § J 188 f) used apparently as a primary suffix has sporadic traces: Av. tazura- m. f. ‘forest’. Perhaps also ar ? zura- 11. nomen propr. Ivlt. Demavand (-ura) 41. Av. -ri — Skt. -ri (Whitney, § 1191). § 817. This suflix is found in a very few derivatives. Examples are: Av. hu'ri- f. ‘abundance’, cf. Skt. bhuri-; Ac. tijri- rn. nomen propr. »5 2 26 Word-Formation : Primary Suffixes. 42. Av. -ru — Skt. -ru (W'hiinev, § 1192). § S18. This suffix occurs in a very few words. Noun and adjective examples are quotable: Noun. Av. asm - n. ‘tear’ = Skt. dsn/-. — Adjective. Av. vaqdru- ‘desiring’. Uncertain antru-, canint-. 43. Av. -va (-(him, -spa) — Ski. -va (Whitney, § 1190). § 819. With this suffix are formed a few derivative adjectives and nouns. The root generally appears in its weak form. The suffix is sometimes disguised in °spa, c dwa §§ 9^> 97- The corresponding feminine form is -va. Noun. Av. sa"rva- m. nomen propr., cf. Skt. sarvd- ; Av. as pa- wl. ‘horse’ (§ 97) — Skt. diva-; Av. avhva- f. ‘soul’; Av. yadiud- f. ‘bitch’. — Adjective. Av. ha»rva- ‘whole’ = Ski. sdrva-; Av. fyraoldva- ‘hard’; Av. >r*dwa- ‘high, arduus’ -- Skt. tlrdhvd- ; Av. a>‘rva- ‘speedy’. 44. Av. -van f-puit as primary suffix occurs in a few words, chiefly verbal adjectives. Some of these derivatives bear resemblance to an //-parliciple of Cl. 8. As above (§ 820), a / is added after a root ending in a short vowel, including -ar ; this gives rise to the form -pwa>it § 94. The weak form of the root is the rule. The suffix -vatit some- times seems to add the force of possession as it does when secondary. Examples are ; Av. a u rvarit- adj. and noun ‘swift, courser’ — Skt. drvani-; Av. s"runva>it- ‘audible’; Av. birvant- ‘advantageous’ (§ 31); Av. vivauhvati!- m. nomen propr. — Skt. vivdsvant- ; Av. slor’pvatit- ‘levelling’ (1 f star--\- t, see above); Av. vtl>)rp-vatit- ‘divided, having pauses’ (| bi.r — |- t added). Primary Derivation : — Suffix -ru, -va, -van. -vatit, -vak. -var. 22 ~ 46. Av. -vak (-vatvh-, -us) = Skt. -vas (-vqs, -zAr^Whitney, §1173. § 822. With, the suffix -vak (-vconh str. -us wk.) is made the perfect active participle. The root is redupli- cated except in a few words which make the perfect with- out reduplication. For examples, see § 348 seq. 47. Av. -var (-vara) = Skt. -vara (Whitney, § 1171). § 823. With the suffix -van (-vara) are made a con- siderable number of neuter nouns. They commonly show a parallel stem with suffix -van (§ 820). The form -vara arises by transfer to the a-declension. Examples are : Av. karjfvar- n. f. beside karpvan- ‘clime, zone’ ; Av. zafar- (i. e. *zap-var § 95) n. beside zufan- ‘jaw’ ; Av. baivar- n. beside baevan- ‘myriad’. So mipwara- 11. (-vara) beside mipwan- ‘pair’. Observe Av. srvara- (for sruvara- § 68) ‘horned, Sruvafa’. B. Secondary Derivatives. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Grant. § 1202 seq.) § 824. The so-called Secondary Suffixes are those which are added to make new derivatives from primary derivatives or words which already show a suffix. The forms thus arising are termed Secondary Derivatives. The great majority of them are adjectives, but often they are nouns. § 825. Form of the Stem. In assuming the secon- dary suffix the stem, though it is already prepared, may still undergo other changes in form. (a) Final -a of a stem disappears before suffixes beginning with a vowel or y. (b) Final -/, -u of a stem are generally strengthened before suf- fixes beginning with a vowel, though tt, as in Skt., sometimes re- mains unchanged, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1203 a, b. (c) Final -an of the stem appears as -an, -n, depending chiefly upon the difficulty of pronunciation (cf. Whitney, § 1203 c): Av. bar’smanya- ‘relating to the barsoin’, vydl/a-nya- ‘ruling in the council’; Av. v&r 3 prajni- ‘victorious’ (from zz/z-stem) , cf. Skt. var- 2 28 Wore- Formation : Secondary Suffixes. (d) The initial syllable of the stein receives the vfddhi- strengthening in secondary derivation less often in Av. than in Ski., cf. Whitney, § 1204. Examples of vrddhi (cf. § Co) are: Av. Shu'ri- 'of the Aliuriau’, cf. Slit, Ssnri- ; At. tnazdaycmii - ‘be- longing to the worship of Mazda', Av. rauya- beside $ a ova ‘be- longing to the cow’, opp. Skt. gdvya- (ij 60 Note d); Av. h&vani- 'relating to Havana’ ; Av. dr sly a- ‘belonging to a spear’. For guga- forms, see above § 60 Note c. The Principal Secondary Sul fixes. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gran, § 1 207.) § 826. A list of the principal secondary suffixes may here be given in connection with the Sanskrit, see Whitney, t. Gram. § 1207. i - a I I -u 2 1 -11a 2 -ai’tui (- aeni , -aini) 12 -kn (-ak,’ t -ika ) 22 ->n a 3 -aona 13 -ta 23 -man (-mam, -tana) 4 -an 14 -tor a. -tana 24 -Mqnl 5 - ana (-ana, -an/) 15 -tdl 25 -ye 0 -ar t r 16 -ti 20 -ra 7 -* 17 -/« (-da) 27 -va 8 -in 18 -pya 28 --mn 9 -in a 19 -/ Wll 29 -liana 0 -i 20 -P'uana 30 -vattl A few other Secondary Suffixes. § 827. A few other secondary suffixes occur sporadically and may for convenience be mentioned here. Suffix. Av. -}na in numerals, bripva- ‘a third’, cn/rniva- ‘a fourth’, paulauhva- ‘a fifth’ Ys. 19.7. Also Av. -so. — Slit, -sa (Whitney, § 1229), Av. navasa-, iSasa-, ar(asu-. r. Av. -a — Skt. -a (Whitney, § 1208). § 828. This suffix, in Av. as in Skt.. is very com- mon. It forms secondary derivatives from nouns or from adjectives. The derivatives thus made are chiefly adjec- tives denoting ‘relating to’, ‘of , ‘with’; but there are also numerous nouns, including patronymics. The secondary a is especially common in compound words, transferring the whole compound to the rt-declen- Secondary Derivation: — Suffix -a, -acna, -aona, -an, -ana. 229 sion; the treatment of that, however, does not really be- long here. Examples of a as secondary suffix are: Noun. Av. haozapwa- n. ‘the goodly company'; Av. ay a v ha- m. n. ‘iron’ Ys. 11.7 = Skt. a'y as a- ; Av. narava- m. ‘descendant of Naru’ (patronym.). — Adjec- tive. Av. tJiuavha- ‘dark’ = Skt. tdmasa- (w. vrddhi); Av. upa-sm-a- ‘upon the earth’ § 836. Note. Final -i : -re of the primitive generally, but not al- ways, appear as -ay-, -av- before this suffix. Thus, Av. kavaya- 'kingly’ (kavi-) — Skt. havyd- ; Av. dar ? ja.arstaya- 'long-speared’; Av. rna'nyava- ‘spiritual’ ( inainyu -). But simple y, v in staomya- (fr. staomi -), haozqpwa- (fr. huzatitu-) above § 828. 2. Av. -a%na C-aeni, -aim) — Skt. -ena (Whitney, § 12236). § 829. This suffix in Av. makes adjectives of material , cf. Skt. samidhend-, Whitney, § 1223 e. The form -alni is found beside it in the same adjectives ; the sporadic -ain't appears to be a mere variation of the latter, cf. § 193 Note 2. Examples ate: Av. ayauhaina-, ayanhaeni- ‘made of iron’; Av. gr’sataina-, °aeni- ‘of silver’ ; Av. zaranaena-, °acni- ‘golden’ ; A v.bawraini- ‘of beaver-skin’. 3. Av. -aona, cf. Skt. -ami. § 830. This suffix (perhaps primitive a-stem ana § 832) occurs in Av. hr ait aona- m. ‘Thraetaona’ — Skt. traitand- ; Av. ar*jaond- m. nomen pvopr. Yt. 13.117 (? cf. Skt. arhatjui- n.); Av. piidpna- m. nomen propr. Per- haps also in Av. mtnjaona- adj. ‘deadly’. 4. Av. -an (cf. Skt. -in). § 831. This derivative suffix forming secondary nouns and adjec- tives occurs in a few words. It corresponds in part to the Skt. suffix -in. A final stem vowel disappears before it. Examples are : Noun. Av. mapran - m. ‘prophet’, cf. Ski. rnantrin- ; Av. In 1 - vanan- in. nomen propr. — Adjective. Av yet Iran- ‘having a son’, cf. Skt. putrin- ; Av. visan- ‘possessing a house’, 5. Av. -ana (-ana, -ant) — Skt. -ana (-ana, -ant). Whitney, §§ 1175a, 1223 a, b. § 832. This suffix is a patronymic and is found chiefly in proper nouns and adjectives. Before -ana. a final stem vowel a may be dropped , or it may coalesce with the Word-Formation : Secondary Suffixes. 2jO ending, thus giving -ana. A final i is strengthened before -ana. The form -dm (- dni ') seems to be a corresponding feminine. The initial syllable is not always strengthened. Examples arc : Noun. A v. jamaspStia- m. ‘son of Jamaspa’ ; Av. gao'tay&na- m. ‘son of Gaori’ Yt. 13.118, — Av. vjhrkana- m. ‘Hyrcania’; Av. ahuram- f. 'daughter of Almra’.— Adjective. Av. haecaf.aspana- ‘de.-cended from Ilaecataspa’ ; Av. apwyfinu-, fipivyaiu- ‘belonging to the A tbv. yas’ (Slit, fiptyd-). 6. Av. -anc, -ac — Skt. -anc, -ac (Whitney, § 407 seq.). § 833. The ending Av. -a-qc, -ac (of verbal origin) is combined wiih prepositions and some other words to make a few derivative adjectives. It may practically be regarded as a secondaiy suffix. See § 287 above. Av. pa u rva>i :- ‘advancing’ (§ 287 above) ; Av. franc-, f rac- ‘for- ward’ Ski. prune-, prac- ; Av. nyanc- ‘downward’ — . Skt. tty a Ac- ; Av. vtivatfc- ‘on all sides’ Skt. viyvaiic-. 7. Av. -i ~ Skt. -i (Whitney, § 1221). § 834. With this suffix are made some derivative ad- jectives and substantives chiefly patronymic. They are formed from noun-stems in -a -, and most of the examples show the vrddhi-strengthening. Noun. Av. havani- in. nomen propr. (cf. Av. havarui - — Skt. sat' ana-) ; Av. nzdaezi- m. beside uzdaeza- ‘heap’; Av. hvavhrvi- m. ‘blessedness’ Ys. 53.1. — Adjective. Av. ahidri- , ‘of the Ahuriau* (§ 60), cf. Skt. asuri- ; Av. mazdayasni- ‘Mazdayasnian’ (fr. mfizda- yasna) ; Av. var’prajni- ‘victorious’, cf. Skt. v&rtraghna- ; Av. zfira- pnstri- ‘of Zaralhushtra’ ; Av. raji- ‘belonging to Ragha’ (raja-). 8. Av. -in = Skt. -in (Whitney, § 1230). § 835. The suffix -in is used as a secondary ending in Av., as in Skt., in forming possessive adjectives. They are not numerous. A final vowel disappears before the suffix. Examples are : Av. p»r»nin- adj. ‘having a feather’ (par 3 na-) Yt. 14 38 = Skt. parrtin- ; Av. viyczdin- ‘having offering’ Yt. 13.64; Av. drujin- ‘pos- sessed of a devil’ (druj-) Yt. 4.7. 9. Av. -ina = Skt. -ina (Whitney, § 1209 c). § 836. A secondary suffix -ina (apparently an ^-inflection of -in) may be assumed for a few nouns and adjectives. As examples ; Suffix- aye, -,il, -i, -:>i, -ina, -f, -it, -ka, -.'a, - tar a , -tuna. 23 I Noun. Av. rapipwina- m. nomen propr, ; Av. upahina- m. nomen propr. — Adjective. Av. vacahina- ‘consisting of a word, verbal’ Vd. <1.2. Similarly the ending -ini in Av. macfmi- 'belonging to sheep’ (fr. macii-'). io. Av. -i Skt. -i (cf. Whitney, § 1156 a). § 837 The primary derivatives in -i have been treated above; one or two words however seem to show a more distinctive secondary origin, e. g. Av. nd‘ri- f. ‘woman’ (observe vrddhi) = Skt. niiri-, 1 I. Av. U. § 838. The suffix u, used in forming secondary derivatives, is to be recognized in one or two instances : Non n. Av. hajdanhu - ni. ‘satis- faction, fill’ Ys. 62.9. 12. Av. -ka (-aka, -ika) — Skt. -ka (aka, -ika), Whitney, § 1222 seq. § 839. With the suffix -ka are made a number of nouns and adjectives. The forms in -aka, -aka, -ika may conveniently grouped with it, cf. Whitney, §§ 1 186c, 1 1S1 d. The corresponding feminine is -ka. As examples: Noun. Av. araska- m. ‘disorder’; A \. pasuka- m. ‘cattle, beast’; Av. drafpaka- m. ‘banner’ (in drafjakavai //-) ; Av. dahiika- m. nomen propr.; Av. mapydka- m. ‘man’; — Av maridika- n. ‘mercy’ (cf. Whitney, § 1 186 c) = Skt. tnrdikd-; A v. ehiika- m. n. ‘face’ — Skt. dnika- ;■ — Av. nd‘rika- f. ‘woman’; Av. paprika- f. ‘fairy, Peri’. — Adjective. Av. lyji&ika- '‘trifling’ ; Av. kutaka- ‘small’. Pronominal adj. Av. ahm&ka- ‘ours’ = Skt. asrudka-; Av. Itfmaka- ‘your’ — Skt. yupnaka-, cf. Whitney, § 1222 c. 13. Av. -la = Skt. -ta (Whitney, § 1245 e). § 840. This ending as secondary suffix occurs in a few words, ad- jectival and substantival. Examples are: Noun. Av. prita- m. ‘Thrita’, cf. Skt. trita-; Av. bupyqstd- f. Tlnsliyansta*. — Adjective. Av. apavasta- adj. ‘righteous’, m. ‘righ- teousness’; A v. p a tjr 3 ta- ‘winged’. 14. Av. -tar a, -tsma — Skt. -tar a, -tama (Whitney, § 1242). § 841. These suffixes are used respectively in form- ing the comparative and superlative degree of adjectives, the latter also in the ordinals vi$q,stjma-, satotsma-, ka- Word-Formation : Secondary Suffixes. 23 2 zavrotdma-. The treatment of the stem-final before these endings has already been given. Examples, see §§ 364, 374. 15. Av. -tat = Skt. -tat (Whitney, £§ 1238, 383k). § 842. This suffix makes feminine abstracts. Its in- dependent origin is shown, for example, in Av. yavaeca.ta l le beside yavaetditaeca Ys. 62.6. Yt. 13.50, cf § 893. Examples: Av. nparatat- f. ‘supremacy’ -- Skt nparatat- ; Av. ha u rvatdt- f. ‘completeness, Salvation’ — Skt. sarvalal-. Likewise others. 16. Av. -ti — Skt. -ti (Whitney, § 1157 b). § S43. The suffix -ti appears as secondary ending iu a few words; the most important of these are the numerals. Examples are : Av. panvnir’ti- f. ‘bow’ (cf. panvar -) ; Av. t/Jvutli- ‘sixty’ - Skt. '■•ast! - ; Av. hapidHi- ‘seventy’ -- Skt. saptati- ; Av. nava'ti- ‘ninety’ — Skt. naval/-, see § 366 above. 17. Av. -pa (-da) — Skt. -tha (Whitney, § 1242 d). § 844. The secondary suffix -pa is to be sought in one ot two numeral and pronominal words. As examples: Av. haplapa- ‘seventh’ = Skt. sati tat ha-; Av. pulpta- ‘fifth’, cf. Skt. pane- a -tha- ; — A w.avapa- ‘thus, so’. iS. Av. -Pya Skt. -tya (Whitney, § 1245 b). § 845. 'this suffix in Av., as in Skt., makes one or two derivaii'e adjectives from prepositions and adverbs. As instances: Av. ahvipya- ‘away, distant*; Av. paseppya- ‘behind’. 19. Av. -pxtia — Skt. -t-aa (Whitney, § 1239). g S46. With this suffix, as in Ski., a few neuter nouns denoting ‘condition’, ‘state’ are formed from adjectives and nouns. Examples : Av, twhupwa- n, ‘lordship’; Av. ni/upuia- n. ‘mastership’; Av. vanhVp-aja- n. ‘good deed' Skt. vasutva-. 20. Av. -puana — - Skt. -tv ana (Whitney, § 1240). g 847. This suffix is hardly more than an extension of the pre- ceding, which it resembles in meaning. A quotable example is the abstract noun, Av. na‘ripwana- n. ‘marriage’, cf. Skt, patitvana-, Whitney, g 1240. 21. Av. -na — Skt. -na (Whitney, § 1223 g). § 848. With this suffix a very few secondary derivatives are formed. Examples are: Suffix -tat, -li, -pa, -pya, -/>wa, -pwana, -na, -ma, -wan, -mat//, -ya. 233 Noun. Av. ahuna- m. ‘the Ahtina formula’. —Ad j e c ti v e, Av. ll ayana - ‘belonging to a well’ Yt. 6.2; Av. zrayana- ‘of the sea'; Av. vahmana- ‘praiseworthy’; Av. a’ryana- ‘Aryan’. 22. Av. -ma — Skt. -via (Whitney, § 1224 b). § 849. With -ma as secondary suffix are made a few superlatives from prepositions, a few ordinal numerals, a small number of adjectives from nouns, and one or two derivative substantives likewise. Examples are; Noun. Av. spna/na'-, spi/ama- m. ‘Spitama’. — Adjective. Av. op?ma- ‘last’ — Skt. apama- ; Av. t/psma- ‘highest’ — Skt. npamA-t — Av. fratoma- ‘first 1 — Skt. prathamd- (Whitney, § 487 b); Av. nauma- ‘ninth’ (§§ 64, 374) ----- Skt. navamd- ; — -Ay. Jaliyuma- ‘be- longing to the country’ (dally it -) ; Av. zantnmar ‘belonging to the tribe’. 23. Av. -man (-mana, -mna) — Skt. -man (-mna), Whitney, §§ tl6Si, T224C. § 850. A very few words show the suffix -man, or its variations -mana, -mna. The examples are : Noun. Av. ah'yaman- m. ‘connection, family, Airyaman’, cf. Skt. aryaman-. — Adjective. Av. yahnnana- ‘relating to a sor- cerer’; Av. xiranimna- ‘angered’ Yt. to. 47. 24. Av. -mailt — Skt. -want (Whitney, § 1235). § 851. The secondary suffix -manj, like -rant below, is used in making a number of possessive adjectives from noun-stems. The noun-stems with which it is used, as in Skt., are chiefly //-stems. Examples are: Av. Ip'atumaiit- ‘having wisdom — Skt. hratumant- ; Av. gaomant- ‘having milk, flesh’ — Skt. gdmai.it Av. madu mailt- ‘rich in sweets’ — Skt. inddhumant- ; — Av. ar } pama.iit- ‘right, true to fact’ (from rz-stem) ; — Av. afrasimarit- ‘not progressing’ (fr. /-stem). 25. Av. -ya (-ay a) — Skt. ya (iya, -iya), Whitney, §§ 1210, 1214, 1215. § 852. The suffix ya corresponds to Skt. -ya, -iya (§ 68, 1), and forms a large number of secondary deriva- Word-Formation: Secondary Suffixes. 234 lives. These arc chiefly adjectives; less often they are nouns. The vrddhi-strengthening which is often found in Skt. (Whitney, § 121 i) is almost wanting in Avcsta. The feminine form is -yd. Before this suffix, the stems in -a. -d, drop their final vowel ; the stems ending in -u retain the u unchanged, un- less it unites with a preceding t into p~v, $ 94. A few forms in -ay a occur, either by retention of stem-rt, or by extension (§ 68 Note 3), compare Skt. -iya, Whitney, § 1214. Examples of -yet are: Noun. Av. alprya- m. ‘pupil’; Av. n&ohaipya- n. nomen propr. , cf. Skt. jUfsa/ya- ; Av. vastrya- adj. ‘fanning’, m. ‘farmer 1 ; — Av. avhuya- f. ‘lordship’. — Adjective. From //-stem : Av. dhu'rya • ‘lordly’ (observe vrddhi fr. ahum-) Yt. 1382, 14.39; Av. ajrya- ‘topmosl’ ~ Skt. dgrya-, ay r iya- ; Av. haomya- ‘relating to haoma’ = Skt. somyd- ; Av. ltfapryti- ‘kingly’ = Ski. ksatnya- ; Av. yesnya- ‘revered’ = Skt. yrjiiiya-. — From a-stem ; Av. hactiya- 'belonging to an army’ = Skt. sinya- ; Av. gaepya- ‘material, earthly’.- — From //-stem: Av. ruj>;iya- ‘reasonable’, cf. Skt. t'lviya-, Av. po*ruya- ‘first’ — Skt. pui vyd- ; so Av. gaoya-, gdvya- ‘belonging to the cow' — Skt. gdvya -. — From consonant stem: Av. tisya- ‘of the clan’ — Skt. visya-. Note. Observe the few forms that show -aya as remarked upon just above § 852 c. Examples are: Noun. Av. zar*daya- n. ‘heart’ — Skt. hfdaya- ; Av. ear*/uaya- adj. ‘green’, n. ‘verdure’, cf. .Skt. harm yd-. — Ad- jective. Av. uspaya- (acc. aspufrn) ‘belonging to a horse’ — Skt. dsvya- ; Av. nanny a- ‘flowing, navigable’ = Skt. navyh-, cf. § 68 Note 3. 26. Av. -ra — Skt. -ra (Whitney, §§ 1226, 474). § 853. This suffix occurs in a very few words, chiefly pronominal derivatives. Examples are: Av. adara- adj. ‘under, lower’ = Skt. ddhara-; Av. apara- adj. ‘later, behind’ — Skt. apara-; Av. upara- adj. ‘further, above’ = Skt. upara-. Probably Av. hazaura- adj. and n. ‘thousand’ = Skt. sahdsra-. Observe Av. ahura- in. ‘lord, Altura’ = Skt. dsura-. 27. Av. -va, ( -vya ) ~ Skt. -va, ( -vya), Whitney, § 1228. § 854. The ending -va as secondary suffix occurs in a very few adjective*. These must Lie distinguished from orig. //-adjectives transferred to the (/-inflection. Examples of -va as secondary suffix are: Second. Periv. : — Suffix -ra, -va, -vya, -van, -va‘ri, -vana, -va>il. -? Av. ajravct- ‘belonging to the head’ (ajra-) ; Av. bfmava- ‘be- longing to the tail’ ( buna - § 185). Note. The suffix Av. . -vya =■ Skt. -vya (Whitney, § 1228 c) is dis- guised in one or two words, names of kindred: A bratfdrya- m. ‘uncle’ § 191, cf. Skt. bkratfvya-. 28. Av. -van, (f. -vafrT) — Skt. -van, (f. -vari), Whitney, § t 234. § 855. A few secondary derivatives are made with the suffix -van. They show also a corresponding feminine -vah'i. Examples are : Av. asavan- adj. m., apava^ri- (beside opaoni-) adj. f. 'righteous’ Skt. rtiivan- if. -vart)\ Av. apravan- m. ‘priest’ = Skt. atharvan- ; Av. haptd.karfvan- n. ‘seven karshvars’, Av. hapto.karpvnhi- ‘belong- ing to the seven karshvars’. 29. Av. -vana Skt. -vana (Whitney, § 1245 ’)• § 856- This suffix arises apparently by transfer of the preceding -van to the ^-inflection. It bears also a relation to -var § 337. It is to be recognized in a couple of instances: Av. a/rivana- n. ‘blessing’; Av. panvana- 111. ‘bow’; Av. hapravami- adj. ‘splendid’. 30. Av. -vaiit — Skt. -vant (Whitney, § 1233). § 857. The Suffix -vant is closely akin to the suffix -mailt, and like the latter it is used in making a large number of possessive adjectives from nouns. The suffix -varit is used with a-, i- and consonant stems, -inant being employed chiefly with //-stems as noted above § 251. Examples are numerous: From //-stem Av. amavaiit- adj. ‘strong’ “ Skt. arnavant- ; Av. pupravaiit- ‘having a son’ = Skt pu- travant- ; Av. haomavatit- ‘having haoma’ = Skt. soma- van t-. — From /-stem: A x . frarsa'iitivarpt- ‘having off- spring’; Av. ndh'ivarit- ‘having a wife’; Av. raevaiit- ‘radiant’ = Skt. revant-. — From consonant stem: Av. aojanhvaiit-, aojowhvarit- ‘mighty’ Ys. 57.11, Ys. 31.4 = Skt. ojasvaut- ; Av. Uiuaphvaiit- ‘dark’ — Skt. td- inasvant- ; Av. paemavaiit- ‘with milk’ (paeman-) ; Av. ar$navaiit- ‘possessing a stallion’ (arpan-). Wonl-Formation : Compound Su ms. > Note l. A trace of the lengthening of the final vowel before ■vmii (cf. Whitney, § 1233 d) is to be found in Av. 2 <1 ‘rimyavan t- 'pro- ducing verdure’ Yt. 7.5, of. Skt. vfstiydvant-. So Av. yt ;$niavar t i-, rtiavatii Note 2. A few words, chiefly pronominal derivatives in -va>it, have the meaning ‘like to’, ‘resembling’, cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1233 f. Examples are: Av. /Utivon!- ‘like me’ == Skt. muvant- ; Av. p.varant- ‘like thee, your Grace’ — Skt. tvavant-. So also Av. visaUivatii - ‘twenty-fold’; Av. srunvaTit- ‘hundred-fold’, § 376. FORMATION OF COMPOUND STEMS. § 858. General Remark. Compounds, Verbal and Nominal, occur in Avesta as in Sanskrit, but in Av. since most words arc written separately in the MSS. and each is followed by a point, the compounds are not always so easily recognized as in Skt., nor are the rules of Sandhi so rigorously carried out. Verbal Composition has been sufficiently treated above, § 749 seq. ; it is necessary here to take up only the Noun- Compounds. Note. In printed texts the compounds are differently marked in different editions; Geldner’s Avesta has the compound united in printing and retains the separating point (.) , Westergaard likewise but a small dash p) is astd ; Spiegel’s edition does not designate tha compound;. Noun -Composition. $ S59. Noun-compounds have either a substantival or an adjectival force. They consist usually of two members, more rarely of three (§ 804). c. g. drva-asa-cipra ‘the sound offspring of righteousness’. The members which enter into composition may be nouns, adjectives, or indeclinables ; or they may be parts of a verb, either radical or parti- cipial. The final member of the compound receives the inflection. The first member is subject to some modifica- tion in form, generally assuming the weak grade. § 860. Examples of different combinations, nouns, adjectives, etc., entering into composition are: Noun-Composition : — Union of the Members. 237 Av. vispaUi (subst. -j- subst.) nr. ‘lord of the clan’ = Skt. vispdti-; Av. dar 3 jO.(/dzu- (adj. -j- subst.) adj. ‘longimanus* — Skt. tlirgka- bdhu- ; Av. vTspo.hdnya- (adj. -j- adj.) adj. ‘all-shining’; Av. hvaspa - (indecl. -j- subst.) adj. ‘well-horsed’ — Skt. svdiva- ; Av. nipacsla-, rappestar- (subst. - 4 - rad.) m. 'warrior standing in chariot’ =.- Skt. ratheslhd- ; Av. nidasnapis- (rad. -j- subst.) adj. ‘having weapons laid down’; A vi star 3 t 0 .bar*sman- (ptcpl. -j- subst.) adj. ‘with out- spread barsom’. Likewise some other combinations. Union of the Members of Compounds, a. Contraction and Hiatus. § 86 f. Tito rules of Sandhi for concurrent vowels and consonants are in great measure carried out, though some- times they are disregarded. Hiatus, for example, is at times allowed to remain between concurrent vowels. § 862. Examples of the different methods of treat- ment of vowels are : With Contraction ot Resolution. Av. a>‘rujpdspa- 'having wliite horses’ (avntjpa -j- uspa) ; Av. aPwyama- ‘over-mighty’ (aiwi am*); Av. pailydsti-, pa'tyasti- (v. 1 . pa*pi.asti-), pa'pyesli- ‘repetition’ (paHi -j- as°) Ys. 53.3, Afr. 1.8, Vd. 22.13; so Av, uHyaojava- beside uni aojana- ‘thus speaking' , Av. pailyaofy/u beside paUi aolpa ‘he an- swered’; Av. mazdcudpla- 'spoken by Mazda’ (°tt -|~ ulfrfa) Ys. 19.16. — With Hiatus, Av. asu.aspa- ‘swift-horsed’ — Skt. asvasva- ; GAv. cipra .avail- beside YAv. cipravah- ‘manifestly aiding’ Ys. 34.4, Ny. 3. 1C; Av. fypvhvi.ist/- ‘having darting arrows’. See ij§ 51, 52 above. Note. In the Gatlins, as is shown by the metre, all contractions in compounds are to be resolved. See § 51 Note 2. § 863. Examples of consonant Sandhi in compounds are common. The following examples illustrate the inter- change of voiced and voiceless § 74. Observe orig. s. Av. duskar^ta- ‘ill-done’ — Skt. duskytd-; Av. duscipra- ‘of evil seed’; Av. duhtbja - ‘ill-spoken’ = Skt, durukla- ; Av. duZJacna- ‘of evil conscience’; Av. vavhasdah- ‘giving what is best’. b. Treatment of the prior Member. § 864. Owing to the tendency in Av. to write all words separately the connection between the parts of the 238 Word-Formation : Compound Stems. noun-compound is much looser than in Skt. ; hence the frequent variations in the form of the prior member. Ob- serve particularly that the first member often assumes the form identical with its nominative singular. The princi- pal points may be presented in detail. § 865. Final -a of the stem may remain unchanged before con- sonants, bill more often it appears as -0 like the nominative. Occasionally, though more rarely, it is lengthened. Examples are: Av. hazavra.ga.pa- , hazavrd.gaoifa- , hazaurd.gao§a- ‘thousand- eared’ Yt. 17.16, Yt. 10.91, Yt. 10.141 etc. So hrd-, hud- ‘self’ in composition, fodddta- ‘self-governed’, hvavastra- ‘self-clothed’. Note. Observe that a when preceded by y may give ya, yd, yd, but sporadic traces of reduction (§ 67) are found, e, g. Av. na're.manah- (n.ibya m°) ‘manly-minded’ Ys. 911, beside ha‘pya.data- Yt. 11.3, >ia‘- pyd.var’z-. Similarly traces of u for va, va are found in Av. var^dysma- ‘soft-earth’ (var’dva-). § 866. Original S of feminine stems may remain unchanged , but sometimes, like a, it becomes -i. Examples are : Av. daend.vazah- nomen propr., daeno.disa- m. ‘teacher of the law’ (daind-) , urvaro-baipiza- adj. ‘having the balm of plants’ (urvarS-). Note. Original via ( prohibitive ) appears as mlt- in composition in YAv. makasvij mastri ‘no dwarf, no woman’ et al. Yt. 5.92; GAv. ma- vticpa- ‘not failing’ Ys. 41.1. § 867. Final i, i, u, ( u ) of a stem remain as a rule unchanged in the prior member of a compound , though t usually appears for /. Examples are : Av. za*ri.gaona- ‘yellow-colored’ (za*ri-), musti.masak- ‘large as the fist’ (musti-), nu‘ri.cinah- ‘seeking a wife’ (va‘ri-). — Av. dsu.~ ka'rya- ‘quickly working’, vo u ru.gaoyav'/G ‘having wide pastures’. Note 1. The a-stems occasionally show -us, like the nominative singular: e. g. Av. bazul.aojak- ‘strong-armed’ (observe -/), nasus.ava.bsr’ta- ‘corpse-dcnled’. Somewhat different is the -/ in Av. anus. bar- ‘accompany- ing’ (Skt. Snufdc -), Av. pasus.ha»rva- ‘cattle-protecting’, see above § 754, 2. Observe also YAv. nasuspacya- ‘corpse-burning’ (with s before p, § 754). Note 2. Av. gdu-, gao * ‘cow ’ appears in composition as gao-, gain-, gavo- (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 361 f): e. g. Av. gaoyaoUi- ‘cow-pasture’ = Skt. gavyQti- ; Av. gavaliti- ‘abode of cows’, Av. gavd.stdna- ‘cow-stall’ — Skt. gosthAna-. Noun-Composition: — Treatment of thePrior and Final Member. 239 § 868. Simple stems ending in p show forms identical with the nominative singular. Examples are : Av. afpcipra- 'containing the seed of waters’ (up-), awzdata- ‘contained in the waters’, k)r 3 fPhvar- ‘corpse-eating’ (kphrp-). § 869. The tf>//-stems as a rule show the weak form -«/ as final of a prior member. Sometimes, however, they show -a, -as, like nomina- tive, § 295. Examples are: Av. raevap.aspa- ‘having splendid horses’, var 3 dap.gaepa- 'increas- ing the world’. — Av. baru.zaobra- (observe -a), beside barap.zaopra- (observe -afj ‘bearing the libation’ Yt. 10.30, Yt. 10.126; raevas.- cipru- ‘of splendid family’ (but cf. also § 151). Note. Observe the form th instead of / in Av. zaraihustra- ‘Zoroaster’, haniaspapmaedaya- name of a season. § 870. The tf«-stems show a in composition as in Sanskrit fcf. Whitney, S/it. Gram. § 1315 a), or they appear as -0. Examples are: Av. apavajan- ‘slaying the righteous’ (apavan-) , luima.azbadi- ‘invocation by name’, rama.payan a- ‘having an abode of repose’ (raman-). — Beside Av. ramd.piti- ‘abode of repose’ (rdmau-), zrvii.- data - ‘created in eternity’ (zrvan-). § 871. The ar-stems naturally have nnaptvctic ( 3 ) § 72, and form respectively ar 3 , Jr 3 . As examples may be noted : Av. ayar 3 .bara- ‘day’s journey', hvar 3 .bar 3 zah- ‘height of the sun’; — npr 3 .bar 3 zak- ‘height of a man’. Observe commonly d!pr 3 .- pata-, atPr 3 .savah -, iiijr 3 - etc. Yt. 13.102 , but Strava^pa- name of priest Vsp. 3.6 etc. § 872. The a/i -stems may appear in their original form -as under certain circumstances (§ no), but otherwise they become -0 as usual (§ 120). Examples are: Av. tpmascipra- ‘containing the seed of darkness’, manamao^rya- ‘having the mind pre-eminent’, — Av. ayd.Piaoda- ‘having a helmet of iron’ (ayah.-), sal o.yaepa- 'useful to the world’, h>ar 3 nb.ddh- ‘glory-giving’. Note I. Observe a (§ 170) in Av. vauhazddh- ‘giving what is better’ Ys. 65.12. Remark also the weak form of -vnh in Av. yaetup.yao- nomen propr. Yt. 13.123, vidus.yasna- ‘knowing the Yasna’. Note 2. Observe the peculiarity y-ah retained) in mipahvacCi) ‘false- speaking’ (mipah- -j- vy Ys. 31.12. c. Treatment of the final Member. § 87 3. The final member of a compound in Av. as in Skt. (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1315) often undergoes 240 \Vornann- (obsei've -ana) ‘thousand-eyed’, front caiman-. § S76. The final member sometimes undergoes abbreviation, owing to an original change of accent in assuming the v ruk form , or to other causes (cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1315). As examples: Av. up anna- ‘upon eartli’ (t’m-), frnfrda- 'fore part of the foot' (pad a-), frafsu- ‘abundance of cattle' (pan/-). Likewise others. d. Case-form appears in prior Member. § 877. In Av., as in Skt. (cf. Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 1250). a case-form is sometimes found in the prior member of a compound. Examples are : a. Accusative (especially before radical finals). Av. ahum.- tntr’ifc- ‘destroying the soul’, as.'/naoja- ‘confounding righteousness’ ( asJin mao jo, m — }- in in, t; iS'j', a hit mini- ‘healing the soul 1 , dacwn.jan- ‘daeva-sntiling’. — 1 ). Dative. Av. yavac-jJ- ‘living for ever’. — c. Genitive. Av. »*iuasciprn- ‘having the seed of earth’. - — d. Locative. Av. dttraedars- ‘seeing at a distance’, rapacltti-, rapaeltar- ‘warrior standing in a chariot’ (rape-), ma'dvOi pa'tis/dnu- to the middle of the breast’. Classes of Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, SJtt. Gram. $ 1246 seq.) § S/8. Modelled after the Sanskrit Grammar the com- pounds in Avesta may conveniently be divided into the following classes: — Classes of Compounds. 24 i i. Copulative. SYNOPSIS ( ii. Determinative [ 1,e P endent ' A I b. Descriptive. OF \ ( ,, I n. J ossessive. / iii. Secondary Adjective Compounds COMPOUNDS / [ b. With governed ' iv. Other Compound Forms. Final. These different classes may be taken up in detail in comparison with the corresponding Sanskrit divisions.' i. Copulative Compounds. (Of. Whitney, S/if. Gram. §§ 1252, 1255.) § 879. Copulative Compounds (Skt. Dvandva). Two co-ordinate terms which would form a pair connected by ‘both — and’ may dispense with the conjunction and unite into a compound. The Av. Dvandva-Compounds differ from the Skt. in this that in Av. each member assumes the dual form and is separately declined. Exam- ples of Copulative or Dvandva-Compounds are : Av. pant vira ‘cattle and men' Ys. 9.4 etc. ; pasubya v/rae’bya ‘by cattle and men’ Vd. 6.32 etc.; pasz'tv virayat ‘of both cattle and men’ Vsp. 7.3 etc. ; a pa urvah'e, ape urva’rc ‘water and trees’ Ys. 9.4, Giih 4.5 ; pdyti ]nvdr 3 ?ldra ‘the keeper and the judge’ Ys. 57.2. Note. A rather late instance may be cited in which several suc- cessive members, though ordinarily found only in the singular, unite as a series each in the plural and form an aggregative compound: Vsp. 10. 1 dye te yesti ar 3 zahibyd savahioyo frail a fiithyo vhiada ffubyd i'c u ru.bur 3 P Libya vo“ru.jar 3 stibyo aheca karfvanS yap irnnirapahe. ii. Determinative Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1262 seq.) § 880. Determinative Compounds are divided into two classes, (a) Dependent Compounds, (b) Descriptive Compounds. In regard to signification, the Determinative may have either a substantival or an adjectival value. a. Dependent Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1264 seq.) § 88 r. Dependent Compounds (Skt. Tatpurusa) are those in which the former member stands in relation to 16 242 Word-Formation : Compound Steins. the latter member as though it were governed by the latter. The force of the prior member is that of an oblique case tacc., instr. gen. etc.) depending upon the latter; and actual case-forms in such instances do sometimes occur, see § $77 above The compound has noun or adjectival value according to its final member. 1. Noun value (Whitney, § 1264): Accusative relation. Av. tnipro.druj- rn. ‘one that breaks his pledge’. — Gen. relation. Av. vispa‘H- m. ‘lord of the elan’. — Loc. relation. Av. rapacsia- m. ‘warrior standing in a chariot’ {rape — actual loc.. cl. § 877'!. 2. Adjective value (Whitney, § 1265) Acc. relation. Av. kai:ur 3 dojiin- ‘smiting the head’. — bat. relation. Av. ddmirfaia- ‘created for all creatures’.— Instr. relation. Av. ahurudala- ‘made hy Ahura’. — Abl. relation. Av. qzd.biij- ‘freeing from distress’. — Loc. relation. Av. z 3 niar*guz- ‘hiding in the earth’. b. Descriptive Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. (dram. § 1279 seq.; §882. Descriptive Compounds (Skt Karmadharya) are those in which the former member stands not in a case-reiation but in attributive relation to the second and adds some qualification to it. The value of the com- pound itself is substantival or adjectival according to its final member. 1. Noun value (Whitney, § 1280 b, d): Av. dur>jo.fiti~ f. ‘a long residence’, p)r 3 nd.md 3 vha- n. ‘full-moon’ ; — Av. uslradaimi- f. ‘she-camel’, cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram. § i28od. 2. Adjective value (Whitney, § 12821 Av. vifftliS-umya- ‘all- brilliant’, uparu.kairya- ‘making higher, raising up’. With advbl. pre- fixes (a-, an-,, hu-, dus-, ars- etc/), Av, hukern/a- ‘well-made’, Av. arsufyda- ‘right-spoken’. Likewise some others. iii. Secondary Adjective Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, Ski. Gram, 1292 seq.) § 883. The secondary adjective compounds are o! two hinds, (a) Possessive, (b) those with governed final member. Noun-Composition: — Determinative, Adjective Compounds. 243 a. Possessive Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1293 seep) § 8 84. Possessive Compounds (Skt. Bahuvrihi) are composite adjectives formed from a corresponding Deter- minative compound (§ 880) merely by adding to the latter the idea of ‘having’ or ‘possessing’ that which the deter- minative itself denotes. § 885. The Skt. shows a difference of accent between a Determinative and its concsponding Possessive ; in Av., as there is no written accent, the distinction cannot be drawn in that manner. § 886. The second member of the Possessive is ge- nerally a substantive ; the first member may be a substan- tive. adjective, pronoun, numeral, participle or indeclinable. The force of the compound always remains adjectival. Possessive A d je c ti ves. — Noun initial. Av. aflcipr'i- ‘having the seed of wateis’. — Act j. initial. Av. dar*jd.bazit- ‘having long arms, longimanus’. — Pron. initial. Av. ) ivuvasira - ‘having own cloth- ing’, ya.syaojma- ‘having what actions’ Vs. 31.16. — Num. initial. Av hazanra.ga >$a- ‘having a thousand eats’ (cf. Whitney, § 1300). — Ptcpl. initial. Av. mgir*ptG.draf$a- 'with uplifted banners’.— Indecl. initial (Whitney, § x 304). Av. afoafna- ‘not-sleeping’, afwydma- ‘having excessive might’ (Whitney, § 1305). b. Adjective Compounds with governed final Member. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1309 seq.) § 887. These adjectives are exactly the reverse of Dependent compounds; they are attributives in which the first member practically governs the second member. The second member is always a noun and stands in case-relation to the first. The compound itself has an adjectival value. This group shows two subdivisions, (1) Participial, (2) Prepositional, according as the prior member is a participle or a preposition. Details follow. 1 . Participial Adjective Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1309.) § 888. These compounds are old in Av. as they are in Sanskrit. The prior member is a present participle which in meaning governs the second part. The whole is an adjective. Examples are: Word-Formation : Compound Stems. 244 N Av. vanaj.pt f a ;ta- adj. ‘winning battles', var’Jap.gaipi- ‘increasing the world’, 1.) ‘five twigs’. — Av. haploiritiga (mase. plur. ) ‘the Great Bear . b. Adverbial Compounds. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 1313 ) § S02. Adverbial Compounds (Skt. Avyayibhava) are composites made by the union of a preposition or a particle as prior member jnd a noun as final member, combined to form au indeclinable noun or rather neuter accusative used adverbially, cf. § 934. The class is quotable in an instance or two; Av. aprit'ur. ‘up to three times’, cf. Skt. advadijiam : Av. fa’tySptm ‘against the stream, contrary’ (§ 9341 Vs. 05. 0 , Yd. 6.40 - - Skt. Noun-Composition : — Other Compound Forms. — Sandhi. 245 pratipdm (cf. Lanman, Sit. Reader p. 195); Av. fra.dppm, nydppui, upa - iipsm 'from out, down, to the water’ Vd. 21.2. c. Loose Compound Combinations. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § I 31 5.) § 893. One or two other points in regard to com- pounds and their formation may be noticed here. 1 The no men propr. naPryu.savhu- m. ‘Nairyosangha’ sometimes has its component elements separately declined, e. g. mdryehe sawhakc Yt. 13 85, Vsp. 1 1. 16. beside nairyo.savkahe Ny. 5.6. Similarly, the derivative yavdeca.id'te beside yavaStd‘/aeca ‘for ever’ Ys. 62.6, Yt. 1330, cf. § 842. So in verbal derivatives, d’razda-, z a rasca dap etc. 2. Observe later such agglomerations, especially from initial words of chapters (cf. Te Deum), as Av. kanmamasmm hdHlm ‘the whither-to-turn Chapter’ (kdm nprnoi sqm) Ys. 46 end; tappiva.por 3 sa- ‘beginning with the words This-I-ask-Thee’. Likewise in nomina propria, resembling the Puritanical names, e. g. Av. ajjpm.yevhe.raoca) nama 'Bright-' n-Righteotc- ness by name’ Yt. 13.120, et ah § 894. Long compounds -are not common in Avesta; as examples merely may be quoted, Av, frddat.v 7 spqm.- hujydHi- ‘advancing all good life , na' l ryqvi . hq.rn.vart> tivcnit- ‘having manly courage’, po»m .sar* dd.viro.vqpwa ‘having a crowd of many kinds of male offspring’ Vsp. 1.5. Sandhi with Enclitics. (Cf. Whitney, Skt. Gram. § 109 seq.) § 895. The principles of euphonic combination may be regarded as twofold: (1) as applied in the building up of a word from its elements; (2) in the union of words in a sentence. The former may be called Internal Com- bination or Word-Sandhi ; the latter, though practically wanting in Av., is called External Combination or Sentence-Sandhi. § 896. The laws for the internal combination of for- mative elements and endings have been treated above un- der Phonology. 246 Sandhi with Enclitics. § 897. Sentence-Sandhi, or the external combination of words in a sentence, is wanting in the A vesta (§ 41 except in the ca^-c ot enclitics and in compounds, and there only Conditionally, the words otherwise are writ- ten separately, each followed by a point. Thus, GAv. yapd ahu Ys. 27.13; GAv. yivsed uHi Vs. 39.3; YAv. ni anmn Ys. 9.17; YAv. a‘pi imam Ys. 57.33, and count- less others. Note 1 . In Geldner’s Metnk pp. 54 — 57, numerous instances are collected where external sandhi is apparently to be accepted, but they are uncertain, and in the edition of the A vesta texts Geidner has rightly fol- lowed the MSS. Note 2. Observe the MS. reading GAv. ‘for indeed’ ''but in metre properly zt if) Ys 45.8. Conversely GAv. yapdiJ (so also according to metre, but better MS. authority for yapd dis, Geidner) Ys. 33. 1 . Combination with En clitics and Proclitics. § 898. Instances of Sandhi are common in the case ol enclitics like t/i, he, at. ca which form a unit with the preceding word and are often written together with it; but even here the manuscripts often preserve the usual law of keeping each word separate and unchanged. As examples: YAv. pa'riye ‘round hint’ (combined like Skt hi sah Whitney, Skt. Cram. § 188) Ys. 9. 28 beside ni him (uncombined) Yt. 13.100. Again YA v. skvtidam sc maud kdr 3 nh'di ‘make his brain cracked' Ys 9.28; GAv. kas.te ‘who to thee Ys. 29.7; GAv. kasnd (cf. Germ, ‘man ) Ys. 44.4. So GAv. sasksq-cd (observe if) Ys. 53.1 beside uzulfsyqn-ca (observe n) Yt. 13 .78. — Similarly with Sandhi after the manner of enclitics and proclitics, GAv. huzaiitus 3 sprite Ys. 43.3 ; YAv. havayeds 3 tanvd ‘of his own self’ ; GAv. rasas 3 l/sa- prahya Ys. 43.8 ; YAv. yas 3 taipuo i Mho am strong’ Yt. 19.87; YAv. wtyaojand ‘thus speaking’, beside uHi aojano. Sandhi in Nominal and Verbal Composition. 247 Note 1. In the MSS., enclitics and proclitics are frequently written together as a single word, e. g. GAv. kanwna for ha.m 3 .ua Ys. 50.1; tapwa for ta.pwd Ys. 31.13; tsiigd for tiiig.a Ys. 46.13; nairlva for na.iri.vd Ys. 41.2. Likewise YAv. ataj, and a.ta[ Vd. 5.2, and many others. Note 2. Observe that -ca ‘que’ is always written together with the preceding word; notice the difference of treatment of vowels and con sonants before it. Sec (Sea, -aca, -ica, -asca, -disc a, -Ssca) §§ 19, 26 Note, 120, I24, I29. § 899. Special attention may be drawn fo the treat- ment of words before an enclitic beginning with t. In several instances, especially in the Gathas, a word before a /-enclitic takes a sort of compromise form made by a mixture of the usual pause form and the grammatical Sandhi- form. Thus are to be explained; GAv. vista (compromise between vas.td and vi /a, hence 5 , .r) Ys. 46.17 ; GAv. ys tigs til (mixture of ySiig tu and yqs.tit). Contrast GAv. akas-lStig ( — a ds -j- t ) Ys. 50.2, with Av. gaepas-co (°cps-\-eJ. But GAv. debs-tie Ys. 28.7, cf. § 124 above. Note. Observe likewise YAv. kas 3 .pwam , yas 3 pwa , a compromise between ko Jnvqni and kastvqni etc. § 78 above. §900. The laws of euphonic combination in Noun- Compounds and also in Verbal-Composition have been treated above §§ 753, 861 seep; they require no further remark here. (The Sketch of the Syntax and Metre follows in Part II.) Indexes to Part I. Order of Letters. Vowels. Av. t>. ai, au, ae, ao — a, Si, au — •/', i — u, u — s — e, e * o, o — So — n. Consonants. n, n, —y Cl). r, k < k> g 3 — <’ j~t, /. d, d, l — p, f, b, v (u) — s, i, /, /, z, i — h. if, h. n’ — », p, AVESTA-INDEX (Grammatical Elements). The references throughout are to the sections (§§). Abbreviations are extensively used; but it is believed they will be readily recognized For example, ‘cpd.’ is compound, ‘cpsn,’ composition: ’dcln.’ mean, declension; ‘ertdg.’ ending; prone.’ pronunciation; ‘primy/, ‘sedry.' stand for primary, secondary; ‘pdgm.’ is paradigm, etc. The Indexes are comparatively full, but if an element is not found under one of its letters look for it under one of its other letters, or under the appropriate head in the other Indexes. Remember that long and short vowels sometimes interchange in A vesta. Av. a. a, prone. 6; -- Skt. a 15, for Skt. a 17; interchanges with a (a) in MSS. 18 N., 472 N., 498; la- bialized to o 38; 39 ; streng- thened or contracted 60 ; str. in causat. 685 ; lost after n, r, etc. in denom. 696 N. ; loss of in sedry. deriv. S25 a; a-anaptyctic 72. a-slems, dcln. 236; transfer of i-, «-stems to a-dcln. 256 N., 269. a-, pronom. stem 422 seq., 431. a-conjugation (themat.), in general 469-506; classification and for- mation 470; class (first) of verbs 470, 478-507; (sixth) 470 , 479 - 5°7 ; (fourth ya) 470, 480-507; (tenth aya) 470, 481 till 507 ; transfer from root-class 529; transfer from redupl. class 563-5, 573; transfer from nu-, ?/-class 574, 578, 582; transfer from intens. 707. I a-aorist (themat.), formation 648. | -a, primy. 761, sedry. 828. J a-inflection in cpds. 874; final in cpds. 865. ai, as, interchange in MSS. 193 N. 2. -aiti, -a’te (— -nti etc.) 452. -ahu, primy. 765. -ami, sedry. 829. ai, prone. 7 ; = Skt. e 54-5 ; streng- thening of i 60;. for aya 64. -aena (-aeni), sedry. 829. -aem, for -ayam 494. -aevam (orig.) — Av. -oyum 62 N. 2. ao, prone. 7 ; = Skt. 6 54, ^7 ; streng- thening of u 60 ; for ava 64. a oi, aon (a/m), aor, for orig. avy, avn, avr 62. -aona, sedry. 830. -aom, -aott, for -avam 494. -aos (accent) = -pas 265 (gen.). Indexes to I'att I. -aka, sedry. 839. -ar, see -nt/r. -a/a, primy. 7 8 6 X. 2. -a da, in abl. sg. 222. -at (-t -auk-, foi orig. -as- 1:7-119; for old -a ns- 126. -auhe, infill. 720. ('./-stems, dcin. 300, interchange with (//-stems 311 ; compar. of 54, 58. -Sal — -aos (accent) 265 genitive. -itlg-, -Jtigh-, -in- — old -am- 12S-9. I Av. to c. e, prone. 6; = Skt. e (final) 35; | — Skt. a, a after y 28, 34 ; | — orig. ya (final' 67, 493. inter- : changes with /-final 35 X. 2. I Av. |y i, prone. 6; ==■ Skt. e (final) 36; found chiefly in -a'e 55. Av. >> 0. 0, prone. 6; in -ao- 37: stands for <7. 38 . Av. "V* y. 0 , prone. 6; = Skt. du (final) 42; stands for a. d through labiali- zation (rounding) 39, anaptyetic 7 2; — oh! -as 120 : in dual 223, 240; for an in cpds. 870. Si — Skt. P 54. 56; (final) in 1st. sg. pres. 450. ! -oyum r- orig. -aevam 63 N. 2. -dhu, -ohva, loc. pi. 342. Av. t*" ,n. ( 0 , prone. 6; = Skt. as 43, 124; = Ski. a 44 ; interchanges with - 8 a, -at in MSS. 19 3 Y. 2 ; =Skt. -ds in dual 223. S/uh — old as 123, 224. -ok'- — old -as 124 N. Av. K' a. 4, prone. 6; == Ski. a, 1 / with nasal 45-6. -/}, -ci/ 7, -am, interchange in MSS. 193 N. t. qC ir), defective spelling in MSS. 45 N 2 , pleonastic spelling 45 Y. 3. -qn, -q — old -ans 129. -qm, dissyllabic gen. pi. 224, 3 sg. aor. imperat. 456, 627 X T ., 640. -qh icr old -ans 126-7. Av. 9 k. k, prone. 8 ; geneial character 76 ; = Skt. k 7.8; loss of k ( 1 / ) 187(5); interchange of kjc 76 N. ka-, interrog. 406. •ka, primy. 785 . sedry. 839. | fkar- He make’, pdgm. 567 seq. ; perf. 606, aor. 037-40; pass. 680; intensive 705-6. | [hat- ‘to cut - , conjugation forms 555 s eq., 5 ^ 5 - //-, ci-, interrog. pron. 407. y in-, i‘u-, aor. 664. Av. I Y q. lq, prone. 9 ; general character 77; - Skt. ah 77, Skt. k 77, introduced before f 77 N. 1, 188- I. A vesta-index (Gram. Elements'). — Reference to the §§. fy, in YAv. 90. ¥ 77 >< T - 3 - = ori S- ktr 79 - ft = Skt. ks 1 5S N. \j fti-, aor. 649. yftnu-, aor. 664. Av. r g. g, prone. 8; = Skt. g, gh 82-3. | f gam-, jam-, aor. 642-7. | fgarw-, conjugation forms 584. -g>J- 89. gv (GAv.) — YAv. v 187 (1). Av. t, j. J, prone. 9 ; = Skt. g, gh 83. ji, in GAv. 89. jiar-, intensive 705-6. Av. m c. c, prone. 8 ; general character 76 ; interchange of cjk 76 N. -ca ‘que’, treatment of vowel and cons, before it 26 N., 1 24 N. cjj, interchange in MSS. 193 N. 2. ~\f c ag-, pdgm. perf. 622. ci-, interrog. pron. 407. 1 f ci- ‘to atone’, conjugation forms 55 *- V ■ ci *-’ pdgm. 555. cy (old) — Av. jjy Q) 162. Av. (fy. j, prone. 8; general character 88; — Skt.y, h 88; = Skt. g 88 N. 2 ; — Skt. gh 88 N. 3 ; interchange j of jjz, j[c in MSS. 193 N. 2. | y jam-, gam-, aor. 642-7. Av. ro t. t, prone. 8 ; general character 76 ; j — Skt. t 78; loss of t 187 (6), i 25 5 ovig. t becomes Av. s 15 1; as- sumption of ( after short root in deriv. 745 N. 1, 820; treat- ment of enclitics before t 899. ta-, pronom. stem, dcln. 409. -ta, ending pass, ptcpl. 681, 710; priiny. 786 ; sedry. 840 ; be- comes -da 786 N. 3. \f titn-, conj. forms 579-80. far-stems, dcln. 321. -tar, primy. 787. -tara, compar. adj. 363 seq., 841. \ -tap, suffix 760. -tat, sedry. 842. -ti, primy. 788 ; sedry. 843. -tu, primy. 790. -t)m, 3 du. 454. -tfina, superl. adj. 363 seq. i -lie, -tayaeca, infin, 720. j -to (beside -po), ending du. 44S N., 45 1 - j ty, for -py- 79 N. | tr (Av.) — orig. tr 79 N. j -Ira, -Ira, primy. 791. j bri, fern, to -tar 362. I iv (Av.) -= Skt. tv 94. I -tva, -pwa, in gerundive 716; primy. 792. ts (orig.) = Av. j 143. Av. 6 p- p, prone. 0; general character 77; — Skt. tfi, t 77; — Skt. s 77 N. 2 ; stands for Av. d 86 ; inter- change of p/d in MSS. 193 N. 2 ; stands for t in cpsn. 869 N. -pa, primy. 793 ; sedry. 844. -pi, -pu, primy. 794. -po (beside -to), ending du. 448 N., 451 - pw — Skt. tv 94. 256 Indexes to l’art I. pzva- ‘tuns’; dc!n. 439. •pzra, in gerundive 716: scdry. 840. -pzvatz, see 820. -fiw ana, scdry. 84 7. -pzvaiit, see -z'ayt 821. -pra, primy. 79 1. -pya, scdry. 843. Av. _3 d. d, prone. 8 ; = Skt. d, dh 82-3 ; internal d <85 ; dropped between consonants 187 (2). ■ da (~= -la), primy. 786 N. 3. dad-, dap-, interchange of stems 541-2, 533. \ dar- hold’, peif. ptcpi. 618; aor. opt. 645. \P dar- ‘tear', intens. 706. } da- ‘give, place’ -- Skt. ~\f da-, dha-, pres. pdgm. 540; aor. pdgm. 63 1 se

n\n in MSS. 193 N. ; end- ing of ace. sg. 222. -ma, primy. 808 ; scdry. S49. -mahie, inlin. 720. Man-stems, dcln. 300. 1 [man-, aor. 656. -man, primy. 809; scdry. (-man, -mana, -mna) 850. -mailt, scdry. 851. 1 [may-, mid. -pass. 680. ~\f mark- (in, ir*»ic-) conjugation forms 555 - 63 - mard-, conjugation forms 564. ma ( — tnd), neg. in cpds. 866 N. 1 -mi, primy. 810. mirv-tyc-, see T f mark-. indr 3 iid-, see ' ]fmard- 564. I y mru-, opp. Skt. \'bru- 105 N. 1; pres. pdgm. 5 1 7 seq. ; aor. 3 sg. 668 . ; -mna (-mSnaJ — Skt. -mana 18N. 2; primy. 8ll. Av. ro (") y (i). y Ci)> prone. 1 1 ; for i by resolution 51 ; in reductions 61 ; vocalized to i 62 ; written by abbrevia- tion for iy 68, 92 N. 1 ; y initial 91 ; i initial 91 N. ; i internal 91 ; = Skt. y 92 ; = Skt. v (in Av. uye) 92 N. 2, 190; y lost after s 187 (3). ya (orig.), becomes Av. -i- ( -t-) 63; becomes Av. -c (final) 67, 222 (in.str.); is formative element in pass. 676-7. ya-, rel. pron. dcln. 399 seq. jj/«-(fourlh)class of verbs 470, 480-507. -ya, in gerundive and gerund 716, 718; primy. 812; scdry. (ay a) 852; final in cpds. 865. yah, compar. adj. dcln. 345-6, 365, 813. -yd, primy. fern. 812. ye, for -ya- in verbs 492. -yehl, fern, compar. to -yak 363. -yu, primy. 814. yv (orig.j — Av. -tv- 62. Av. 1 r. f, prone. 11; r - vowel 60 ; — Skt. rtf) 100; — orig. sr 138; trans- position 1 9 1 . r-stems, dcln. 333 seq. -ra, primy. S 1 5 ; scdry. 853. ras-, intens. forms 705 N. -ri, primy. 817. -ru, primy. 818. 17 258 indexes to Part I. -run, secondary ending 3 pi. 455. -re, 3 pi. pres. 452. rt (orig.) — Av. / 163; = Av. »r*t- , 163 N. -rta (orig.) — Av. -Sa 7 So N. 3. Av. () (») v (it). v (u), prone. 1 1 ; for u by resolu- tion 52; in reductions 61 ; voca- lized to u 62 ; written by ab- . breviation for ttv 68 ; Skt. , iv, iv 68 N. 2; — Skt. bh S7 ; j for Av. w 87 ; = Skt. v 93 ; | for ttv 93 X. 1; combined with consonants 94; for gv 187(1). va -stems, have acc. sg. -uni 63 X. 1 . -va, primy. 819; sedry. 854. -va'ri, fern, to -van 855. "J/" vac-, aor. 65 1 , 668 ; fut. 672 ; pass. ptcpl. 711(1). | (van-, aor. 658. -van, primy. 820; sedrv. 855. -vana, sedry 856. (-Jnoant), primy. S21 ; sedry. j « 57 - var- 'choo>e’, forms 567 seq. 584. | -var (-vara), primy. 823. ~\f varz-, pres. 482 seq. ; aor. 658. 1 1 fvid-, perf. pdgm. 621. ■vi ///-stems, dcln. 34S seq. -vah, ending perf. act. ptcpl. 714; primy. 822. -vwvh, see -vah. vy (orig.) = Av. -uy- 62. •vya, sedry. 854 N. Av. u s. s, prone. 9; — orig. s 109 seq.; — orig. o 6,'I42; — orig. ts 143; = older palatal s 146; — orig. dental I -f- /) 151;=. orig. 2 (-)- ni] 132; = orig. s (-)••//) 153; re- tained before -ca 189; ending of Dom. sg. 222; — Skt. ch in inchoative 697 ; r-prpfixes. bow treated 754. .(■•stems (orig.), deln. 338 seq. s-, sa-, r/ 7 -aorist, see h. -sa, 2d pers. sg = Skt. - tha ; 453. -sa, sedry. 827. | [ sand-, sal-, aor. 656. st, origin 192. ’ \f sta- , in periphrases 724. sn — older zn 164 X. T. sp (Av.) — Skt. sv 97. -spa, see -va 819. sy (orig.), treatment in Av. 131. sva (orig.), treatment in Av. 130. -srn, -(va, imperat. 456. Av. n, g), ro s, f, /. s, /, / prone. 9 ; general character 106 N., 154 seq.; s r in Av. fs 147-9 >' — orig. s after i, it, !/, r 155-6; — Skt. is 158; — older palatal s (-{- f, or n) 1 59-60 ; = Skt. rt 163 ; in gu = older zn 164 ; I — older io 165 : = older si (Skt. sf) 166; s in prefixes 745. -sa (Av.) — orig. -rta 163, 786 X. 3. -sar (Av.) — orig. -rtar 7S7 N. I. Sqm, pronoin. gen. plur. 380. st, as iigature 3; = Skt. s! 159. hi — Skt. sa 160. -situ, primy. 807. sy (s) — older cv 162. -(va, ending loc. pi. 224; sedry. 827. sh, written in compounds 754. Av. / z. c, prone. 9; =. Ski. j, h 8S, 168, 169; = r-voiced 170, 872 X. i. I. A vesta-index (Gram. Elements). — Reference to the §§. 259 ~\f zd-, cans. 685 IN'. 2. zd — Skt. dh 89, 1 7 1. zn (orig.) =: Av. sn 153. zb = Skt. hv 99. zm (orig.) = Av. sm 152. Av. U) 2. z, prone. 9 ; = Skt. /, h 88 N 1, 177, 178; in combination ji, mi, in 89, 164 N. 2; — /-voiced 179: — Skt. ks I S r ; = Skt 4 > 4 h 182-3. Av. or, t" /. h, h>. ' '-'V h, }i, prone. 12; general remark 184; — orig. j' 1 10; — orig. -sy- 137 ; h (— s ) dropped before m •87(4)- j h- (1) stems, dcln. 33S seq. i h-(sj aorist, pdgin. 653 seq. ha- (sa) aorist, forms 663. -ha- (-vha-), in desiderative 699. ■J i hari-, fut. 672-3. ////-aorist, formation 665. ~\fhu- ‘press’, pres, forms 567, 588, i 591 ' . -he — Skt. -sya, ending gen. sg. 222. j hm, as ligature 3: = orig. -sm- 141 ; eleuientin pronom. dcln. 379-81. | hy, hy = orig. sy 131-3. ! -kyd, -hyd d, in gen. sg. 222. ! hr, for -r- 1 00 N. < . lr, hv, as ligature 3; prone. 12; — orig. sv 130. | -hva, -$va, ending loc. pi. 224, 736; ending 2 sg. imperat. 456. II. AVESTA-1NDEX (Word-List). Av. ■" a. j dpi- f. 794- a‘ 7 vi-sac- 743 - a’fhe i ,36. aipya loc. sg. 2S1. uhvyu dat. pi. 286 N. { a‘ ryaman- dcln. 300. acta- pron. stem, dcln. i 417 seq. aim dcln. 422 seq. aeva- dcln. 369. at hi as nom. sg. ra. 41 1, | 418. «cfa- (acta) dcln. 417 a vu he dat. sg. 265 ana- pron. stein 426. tnitar » n aim at 73 1 (4 737 - aya- instr. 429. ar»du$- dcln. 3 Co, form 7 » 3 - ars- in cpds. 882. ava- pronom. stem 432. avaut- dcln. 441. avavai%t- dcln. 442. a.*, as ‘was’ 453, 532 asti- subst. 794. astvaiit - dcln. 291. ahtt nom. sg. 275. ahmaka- 839. ahninksm 440 N. 3. ahmya loc. sg. 736. ahy a. leflex. 436 N. 5. Av. d. e *t 53 . 731 (4'). d'di aor. pass. (>68. tV/lii'rim 375. ahsnfts 77 X. 1, 889. at, daf advbl. 73 1 (4). Star-, dtr-, djbr- dcln. 33 '- seq. aoi 62 N. 3 - a aim 369. aof/ta 90. aog*da 90. aojzd 527. aojabe 526. aojana-, acj/mna- 528. aojd, aojd) nom. sg. 341. aojtvr-ca pi. 343. aka- ‘bad’ 365. arista- 365. apa u run- 313 N. 1 advrh nom. sg. 315. adman- S20. a[ka- (adka-) 8 1 1. a peruse 484 N. af it acini) 774. asrvalam 63S. aj-aoni- dcln. 257, fem. 362. ajjaonis lleut pi. 315 ajlaran- dcln. 313, com- parative 365 N. 3. . aidin' 67. a{d an- str. form 313, 315, 62 N. 1. aidunqm C>2 N. I. asanm voc. sg. 313. alkar* 62 9. asyah-, a/ah- 347, 365. UL dpd 4S6. j aisin deln. 380. azdbii general pi. case 229. a he 137. dpi avail- dcln. 313 N. d/bi tint 375. dp-, ap- dcln. 286. db?r*f- nom. sg. 281, formation 745 N. I. Spnie 578. dnui.hac- 754 (2). droi pf. 612. as ‘was’ 453, 532. iisista- 365. asis'ti- 789. Av. ) u. : 1‘lita- 71 r (1). npasma- 870, 889. \ uboibya OS N. I. j "ruracst 607. I U ruruduja 651 N. 2. II. Avesta-Index (Word-List). — Reference to the §§. 26l “ruddy at a 685 N. 3. ’‘riipaye’iyii 683 N. 3. ’’rvaelta 694. u rvan-, ’‘run- dcln. 314. uvae’bya 68 N. I. usa’ti 698 N. ujfSh -, ujah- dcln. 357. ugqrn, uyWuhsm 341. ufi.dqm 355 N. uz, its euph. 750, 733 N. 2. Av. i r. dr*navi 668 N. ir-’iucqm 3 sg. aor. im- perat. 456, 627 N., 640. Av. { ?. Snail's la 607, 615. Shma 389. Av. "V 0, dim, oyum 369. Av. W. wuha, pf. 539. Wvha're 609. wuha 1 re 503, 619. Av. K* q. qsqst/ta 651 N. 2. Av. 5 £. ka’nin-, dcln. 316, for- mation 774. katdro, kalarascif 19. kar$van-, dcln. 3 1 5, for- mation 820. ku^nvqna 463 N. ksr 3 ndun 571 . k)r>u style 591. Av. ly h. j lyrafstydis 229. I lyiapd, advl. 731 (5). lys/d 642. lyl/ndvdya 390. tyjrnaopmna 663. tyindviya 664. Av. C' g. ga’ri-, form 48, dcln. 25 I- gao-, gait-, gava-, dcln. 278, in cpsn. 867 N. 2. gar’nu- 806. | gava- see gao- 278. Av- \ J- j*na) 84. j jzarvatyl- 581. jzunvamna- 581. Av. M c. ca’ti 407. caepaetsm 484. catavro 372. capwar-, dcln. 372. ! capxvar*sat»in 374. caprus 375. caymstyg, “am, loc. sg. 305 ; ca/yrar 3 606. cikditsyt's 601, 614. etna 407 N. anas 192, 557 ' c’viyi 664. coyt t 637. cyauha( 407 N. Av. d j. jay mat 465, 619. javhstylu, apr. 663. jamaete, du. subj. 45 1, 643 - jasa’ti 142. j‘{ 22. jigsr’zap 3 pi. 550. jijipnti 701. Av. r« t. taly/ua-, comparat. 365 N. 2. tap pronom. dcln. 409 seq. tat-apsrn 81 N. 2. tanuye 190. ianuyi, loc. sg. 360. tanil-, dcln. 27 1. tarycista- 363 N. 2. tarasca, instr. advl. 287, 73 1 - ti$ar-, dcln. 37 1 . Wry a- 374. tutulipva 745 N. 2. turn, dcln. 390. tsmavuhW, “utytsm 295. tsrssa’li 698 N. twigi- 777. - 16 , advl. ending 728. tqjyah- 365 N. 2. Av. i p. put a- 435, 439. -pwa, num. suffix 376. pwa(, advl. 436 N. 4. pwavatyl- 435. pit) dr* star a, du. 39. pri-, dcln. 371. prlsata- 374. pyiyva 376, 827. 1 pnzafds, nom. sg. 3x5* 1 prizafsm, voc. sg. 300. 2u2 Indexes to l’art I. Av. j d. da’ pi-id, did dip a 463 N. dtrdis 550. drt’yhu-, dahyu-, dcln. 269. doeum, acc- sg. 63 N., 239 - daend-, dcln. 243. dabnpaf, nbl. sg. 349. dadujjb 350. dado , pf. 1 sg. 599. dam-, dcln. 318 N. 2. Joy a l as pass. 678 X. dar f ja- 48. dasanqm 373. Jazdc, pf. mid. du. 600, 606. dahaka, duhtikaca 19. dd/ar-, dcln. 322. daman/, °qu 308. °dahis 665. dido cm 607. didar’Paia 701. didrajioduyg 498. dipm na 66o, 663. dujdar-, dujdur- 787 N. 2. duyg 190, 370. dus-, dul- in cpds. 882, 8G4. duz-vacah-, dcln. 339. d*b*ii(iotd 569. d J ji( 22. dStig, dqm 318 N. 2. dqnmahi 45 N. 3. draomSbyd 307. drivi- 362, 779. drfgvaiii-, form 31, dcln 291. drtgvSIS 295. drigvd'te 18 \. 1 Jtrwda- 786 N. 3. j drvaij./-, drvo 295. 1 dva-, dcln. 370. Av. i° t. i 1 pkaejpah-, fpaesah- 8 1 , 96 N. Av. at p. j paUi.smartmna- 754 (1). : paUyaptm, advl. 892. 1 pa’ri.aetrius, acc. plur. 327 - pa'ri.avharita - 754 (3). pn’rishralpa- 734 (2). | pao’ryb 62 N. 2. | polar-, ptar , dcln. 322. pap-, dcln 288, 3x0. paticanqm 373. paqcasapbii 374. paiica.ya/Uil 891. I pati/an-, pap-, dcln. 3 1 o. | pus Lai 731. | Jasnt 735. p?r } navo, nom. sg. 295. ptr'nint, dat. sg. 316. j ptr’sanye'li 696 A. * po u ruyd 62 X. 2. j pataka he 66 1 . Av. a) f. | f’dro, f’droi 322, 325. ! fyavhutile 493, 5S2. 1 fracu, instr. advl. 287, 73 * | frafpu- 876. | frabda- 876. i fraturii 275. j frost?r*ta 7 1 1 (3). | ft as rut a 694. | ft aye- yd l as pass. 678 N. \ /raj, nom. sg. 287. | fryamahf 45 X. 3. | fpnyarft-, dcln. 291. Av. j b. 1 baevar’bii 336 N. | bajina 17. ' bara’le, du. 451. j bdjiar- 787 N. 1. I I'uyata, bay a mo 463 X. 1 bu‘ri-, dcln. 252. I buoyant-, fut. 672. ! btr’^di, nom. sg. fern. 245. ' t»r*zatil-, dcln. 295.- j bizvatit- 31. I brutu'rya- 191, 854 N. 1. brvapbyqm 223. Av. 1 n. ! naPcij 40S N. naeniia’ti 707. nnoma , tsainna- 64. na/ia 17. nar-, dcln. 332. nose, imperat. 493. vS’dyah-, dcln. 346. tiamtniS 229, 308. ndmqn 308. itijnt, 3 sg. 525. nijra're 452, 486, 521. nii-, ini-, eupli. 750, 753 N- 2 - nuruyo , ntruyd 62 X. 3, 832 . j ntrqi 49, 332 N. 1. ntrSuP, acc. pi. 327. I npndsa 612. j «°‘t 73'- od’ 389. II. Avesta-Index (Word-List). — Reference to the §§. uqsap redupl. aor. 65 1 N. nmanaya, loc. sg. 239. Av. ^ m. ma-, mavaql-, pronom. 435. dcln. 438. ninUiya, opt. 504. tna’nyu-, dcln. 262. magavan-, inagaun- 3 1 3 N. 1. madsma 63 N. 3. niamnus 350. mas-, masyah- 365. masyat, °avho, sg. pi. 346 . maz-, compar. 365. mazant-, dcln. 298. mazSna, instr. 305. tnazddh-, form 89, dcln. 336 . mazy ah- 365. vialtrka - too N. 1, 785. ma-cis 408 N. nta/irqS-cd 49, 327. mdvoya 386. mipahvacS) 872 N. 2. mi nas 557. m i 'mar 5 fyfamth a 701. tnsr^Tj.g^daye 556 msrqsynt 560. mraoi, 3 sg. aor. pass. 668 . mravi, 1 sg. pret. 519. mravaiye 452, 486, 521. mdh-, mcdvho, dcln. 355. Av. ro (") y (i). ya-, rel. dcln. 399. yac$a (iae$a) 593 (4). yaog’L 637. yaos, yaos 750 X. | yavactcdtc S42, S93. I yasna-, dcln. 236 seq. ! ydi-P as general pi. 384. j ydhi, loc. sg. 353. 1 yi a t 403. | yum, v'oc. sg. 314 N. I. ; yuvan, yvan-, dcln. 314 N. 1. \ yd-, dcln. 276. i ydpmaksm 440 1 ST. 3. ! yeyhe, form 136, 399, in. for f. 383 X 7 . yeyq (jeiq) 593 (4), 619. ycsnyata, instr. advl. 731. Av. ^ r. rae-, rat-, dcln. 277. raose, 2 sg. 518. rapaesta-, °ar, dcln. 249, 330, form 877, SSi. j rar s s-, intens. 705 X. rdjttmo, gen. instr. 265. razura- 816. rcaitliavhoi 661. Av. Ip (») v (ft). va*m£, 637. vaeda, pdgm. 621. vaetn 386. v aor d tar 5 613. vaozirftn 607, 616, 652 X. 2. vakjc-, dcln. 285. vaJifyPte 672. vacasi astivat, advl. 730. j vacah-, dcln. 339. vavhu-, compar. 365. vavuhj-, (cm. 362. vavhd, vahyo 347. var*s 637- vastra-, dcln. 237. vdunus 350. vdci, 3 sg. aor. pass. 668. vatoyvlu 39 N. r dr’prajui- 82 5 C. vitidita 560, 565. vipud-, wk. stem 349-50. vipifi, loc. sg. 359. viddyum 63 N. 2. vidqm, imperative 456, 627 N., 640. vidoipre, infin. 787 N. 3. vidvah-, dcln. 349-50. vtyJtigh aid 701. vis-, dcln. 279. visaHi, mint. 374. vispa-, dcln. 443. vispfm 20. vispaiS 229. V 3 r ? prajan-, dcln. 317,' compar. 365 N. 3. v)r 3 pravan-, comparat. 3 d 5 N. 3. v?r 3 uvaUf, dtt. 451, 568. V 3 r*zyatqm 485. vS ‘we’ 389. vs ‘you’ 393. vohu-, compar. 365. voijvauyo 62 N. 3, 247. 393 - Av. U s. saena- 187 (3). sata 374. satta) 591. sar-, dcln. 335. sa$k?n 607. sahi{ 527, 637. sun- see span- 314 N. sdire 452, 526. star-, dcln. 329. s/d, sto 531 . 264 Indexes lo l’art I. slate mi 525. sirj/es, acc. pi. 327-9. span-, sun-, dcln. 314 N. 1. spafyti- 789. spafupa 578. srtvim 637. sna'pis , dcln. 359. stave, 3 sg. nor. 668. Av. /. 162. pavayoip 162. fe, dcln. 394-5. /<», 110m. fem. 250. Av. yo /. syaopnem 1 62. Sye'nli 162. Av. / z. zafar- 823. ]/ 2 a a-, foims 553 N. cam-, z*/)t-, dcln. 318. zaranalma 591. zaranya- 48. zififnefiethsi/ina - 465 X., 701. ztzamnti 553 N. zizanptt 652 N. 110m. sg. 318 N. *<*' 533 - syam- ‘hiems’, dcln. 318 j N. 2. | zraya, zrayai, loc. sg. ; 341, 357 N. 2. zriene 3 14 N. 1. i Av. or, K* h, ft, h. , ha*rva‘ti 582. h-aom 440 N. 1. i haoyat 68 X. 3, 440 N. 1. j j hahr>{ 375, 730. leafy-, dcln. 256. hafypaya, '-a Ip a 4S7. hamaspapmacdaya 8C9 Note. har’prt, infin. 787 N. 3. hava- see hva- 440. hazaura- 374. ha as 110m. sg. m. 411. hairipi- 777 . hau, pron. 432. i halqtn 18 N. 3. ■ hipaus, °q'tt 278 X. hisposemna- 465, 754. | hismantiio 465. hie- in cpds. 882. hudah-, dcln. 353. htepiti- 31. hurd, gen. sg. 334. hut 532. h? } §c, dcln. 394-5. ho ( hvo ) 416 N. ho, ha, tap dcln. 409 seq. hqt/e, hem, hlti- 753 X. 3. hyat 403. hyar *, hyqtr 455. hyitn, ky 5 p 535. hva-, ha-, hava-, dcln. 440. haepaipe, instr. 239. hvacah-, dcln. 339. halo, reflex. 436 N. 1. hauhdnm, acc. 325. hva pa), 0 qni 357 X. 1. hvar-, dcln. 334. hae-sna, instr. sg. 344. karsnaoteheb, •i/qtjmze)^ . hvavoya 436 X. 3. hi suf. 698 N. heng, gen. sg. 334. hvqmahi 45 N. 3. hvo, hvavoya 398, 416, 436 N. 3. III. GENERAL INDEX. Ablative, the ending -at lightened ! to -Sf 19, 239; remarks on forma- j tion 222 seq. ; advl. use of 731. Abbreviation of final member of compound 876. Absolutive (gerund) 718. Accents, not written in Av. MSS. 2; effect of 265, 341, 885. Accusative, formation 222 seq.; neut. sg. in pronouns 379; as infinitive 721 ; as adv. 731 ; in compounds 877, 881. Active endings with passive force 678 N. ^-declension, transfer from cons, dcln. 344; from vah stem 351 ; from d//-stem 355, 357 N. 3; from tl - stem 359 N. See also Transfer. Adjective, dcln. of adj. 219 seq.; pronominal dcln. 443; comparat. degree 345-6. 3 6 3 seq.; adj. pre- fixes 747-8; formed by primy. and sedry. derivation 761 seq.; adj. demoting material 829; ad- jective cpds. 881-3, 887. Adverbial prefixes 733 ; advl. uses of prep, phrase 737; adverbial cpds. 892. Adverb, numeral 375, multiplicative 376; pronominal 436; formation of adv. 726-32; shows case-forms 731 - Agency, nouns of 787. Agglomerations S93. Aggregative compounds 879 N. Alphabet, characters and translitera- tion 1. Anaptyxis 2 N., 69, 72. Anusvara (Skt.j, hoVv represented in Av. 46. Aorist-system, synopsis and forma- tion 447-8, 624-68. , radical aor. subjunct 549; augment missing in aor. 626; has sedry. endings 626; modes of aor. 627; redupl. aor. 650-2; causative forms 652; sigmalic aor. 653 seq. ; passive aor. 3 sg. 667-8. Aspiration, pronunciation of h 12. | Aspirate mediae -j- t or -j- s 89. ! Assimilation of consonants 185. ' Augment, rules for in Av. 466; com- mon omission of aug. 466, 626 ; restored for metre 466 N. 2. Augmentless preterite as injunctive 466 N. 3. <7-vowel, contraction 60 seq. Avyayibhava (Skt.) compound in Av. 892. j Bartholomae’s law, statement of, 89. I Cardinals —see Numerals. ! Cases in declension 220 seq.; inter- change 233; case-forms in ad- verbs 73 T ; in cpsn. 877. 266 Indexes to Part I. Causal signification without form 693: i causal conjunctions 739. Causative aorist 652; formation of | causative 684-94, inodes of caus. 686; inflection 687-8; aorist 689. Comparative, adj. dcln. 346; fem. form in -ye hi 303 ; comparat. of j •iw-stem 365 N. 3; in -tar a 841. j Compound stems, in general 858-95; j how written in MSS. 858 N. ; -union j of members 86 1 seq.; hiatus in ' cpds. 861-2; treatment of orig. s j after /, u in cpsn. 754, contrac- j tion in cpds. 862; sandhi in cpds. : 863; case-forms in cpsn. 877; | classes of cpds. 878-91; copula- j tive cpds. 879; aggregative 879 ; N.; determinative 880-2 ; depen- | , !‘v 3, 13. Liquid, prone, of r II; / wanting in Av. 1 1 N. ; nature of r too. Locative, formation 222 seq. ; loc. infinitive 72 1; as adverb 731; in compounds S77, 881. i.oss of a consonant 187-8. Loose compound combination 893. Material, formation of adj. denoting material 829. Mediae (",w, -ana 709, 8 1 1 ; passive in -la 710-11, 78b; -Ha 712; -na 713, 802; participial adj. com- pounds 888. Passive voice 445 N. 1 ; aor. 3 sg. pass. 607-8; form, and pdgm. 676-9; endings 678; pass, force with act. endings 678 N. ; modes of the pass. 679; fut. pass, ptcpl. 681-2; pass, ptcpl. in -la, -na 710-13, 7S6, 802. Patronymics, formation 82S-34 ; show vrddhi strengthening 834. III. General Index.- Reference to the g§. 269 Perfect, act. ptcpl. dcln. 343; perfect- 1 system synopsis 447-S ; personal j endings 44Sd, 597-600; of ah- ! ‘to be’ 539; perfect-system in- flection 592-623; redupl. syllable 592-4; pluperfect 602; modes of the perf. 603 4, pdgm. 605 seq. ; periphrastic form 623; perf pass, ptcpl. 68 1; perf. desid. 701 N. ; act. ptcpl. in -vah 714. 822; mid. ptcpl. in -ana, -ana 715. Periphrastic, perf. 623 , verbal phrases 722-4. Person in verbal inflections 447. Personal pronoun 385 seq. ; endings of verbs 448; of perf. 497-600. Pluperfect 602. Plural, general plur. case 228 seq. Polysyllables, shorlenfinallong vowels J 25 - Possessive pronoun 434-5, 440 N. 3 ; \ cpds. S84-6. Postposition of preposition 736. Postpositive a in abl. and loc. 222-4, ■ 379-80. Precative, not quotable 666. Predicate verb, used only once when j prefix repeated 752 N\ 2. ( Prefixes, advl. 733; nominal 747-8; j verbal 749-54 ; rules for connect- | ing w'ith verb 75?; repeated 752; j separated from verb 753. Prepositions, in general 734-7 ; placed in postpositive position 736. Prepositional adj. cpds. 8S9. Present-system 468-591; causative 687. See Indicative. Preterite, see pluperfect 602. See In- j dicative. Primary, derivation 756-823; treat- : ment of root 757 8. Proclitics, sec Sandhi 898. Pronominal, dcln. of adjs. 443; de- rivatives 857 N. 2. Pronouns, synopsis 377 seq. ; personal 385 seq.; relative 399 seq.; inter- rogative 406 seq.; indefinite 408; demonstrative 409 seq. ; possess. 434-5. 440 N. 3; reflexive 435-6. Pronunciation 6 seq. Proper diphthongs 54 seq. Prothesis 69, 7 1 . Protraction-diphthongs 53. Punctuation, method in MSS. 5. Quantity, agreement between Av. and Skt. 15; different from Skt. 16; rules for vowels 23 seq. Radical syllable, in perfect 595-6; in intensive 704. Reduction-diphthongs 53; reduction of ya, va to i, it 63 ; in verbal forms 493 4; of ya to e in coin- pounds S65 N., cf. inslr. 239. Reduplication, general rules 465; redupl. class (third) of verbs 470, 540-53; redupl. syllable of perf. 592-4; absence of redupl. 620; redupl. in aorist 650-2; in de- siderative 699-701 ; in intensive 703 in nouns 745 N. 2; redupl. of orig. .f 754 (2). Reflexive use of personal pronouns 395; reflex, pronoun 435-6. Relative pronoun 399 seq. Relationship, nouns of 321, 7S7. Repetition of same syllable avoided 194: of pronoun 408; of root in intensive 705, of prefix 752. Resume of Phonology 195 seq. Resolution of vowels 52, 862. 2 "JO Indexes to Part 1 . Root-class (second), of verbs 470, 516-39. root aorist 629-47 ; root repeated in intensive 705: forma- tion of root-words 744-5 ; root in primy. deriv. 757-8. Samprasarana 203. Sandhi, occurrence in Av. 75; with j prefixes 753; in cpds. 861 seq.; with enclitics 895-900; with pro- 1 clitics 898. . 1 Secondary conjs. 447-8, 675-707, t 44S b ; scdry. suffixes 826, 844-57 j scdry. adj. compound; 883-9. j Semivowels, y, v 91-3. Sentence-sandhi 897. Shortening of vowels 25, 5 1 . Sibilants 106. Simple a-aorist (thematic) 648-9. ■ Signiatic aorist 653 seq. Sonant, sec Surd, Voiced. Sonantizing of s to 5 1 70; of.? to a j 79. , Spirants, prone. 9 ; voiceless fy, p, f \ 77; voiced j, d, w 82. Stem-gradation 235. 284 seq., 290, j 320, 595-b. See Strong and Weak. | Stems tlcln. of steins in a 236 seq.; | 1 in a 243-9; >» > 257; strong and 1 weak 284-8; in radical i 261 j i , . . .1 in u, u 262-75, m al 277; in <71/278; in consonants 279 seq. ; without suffix 279: in at/t- 287; | in -ant, -mailt, -van! 289 seq.; j in -an, -man, -van 299 seq. ; in -in 316; in radical -n, -m 317; in orig. -/• 319 seq., 333 seq. ; in j -tar, -ar 321; in orig. -r 338 j seq. ; in -ah 339.; formation 743 1 seq. Strengthening, in intensive 702; in i derivation 825. Strong and weak foims, in verbs 467. i n perf. 505-6. See Stem-gradation. Subjunctive, improper subjunct. or injunct. 445 N. 2, 466 N. 3 ; mode- formation 461 : first persons 462 ; endings 462; formation intf-conj 475, 502-3; in non-a-conj. 512; in redupl. class 551. Suffixes 755-S57; primy. 756-823. Suffixless formation 744-5 Superlative formation 363 seq.; in -Uma 84 1 . Surd and sonant (voiceless and voiced) 74 - Talpurusa (Skt.), cpds. 881. Tense 445 seq. Tenues (It, t.p, c), prone. 8; character 76 seq. Thematic vowel in verbs 461; the- matic orrt-conj. of verbs 469-507 ; a-aorist 648-9. Transfer, in dcln. 234 seq.; of /-stems to rt-dcln. 256 N. ; of //-stems to a -dcln. 269; of consonant stems to 3 - 5 . 574 . 604, 610, 707. Transition, see Transfer. Transposition, see Metathesis. Union of members of cpds. 86 1 seq. Unthematic conjugation 516-92. //-stems, show trace of accent in genitive 265. Verbs— see Conjugation. Verbal system, synopsis 447-S; pre- fixes 749-54; composition 749 III. General Index. — Reference to the §§. seq., 858; abstract forms (infin. ptcpl.) 708. Vocalic r, how represented in Ay. 47 seq. Vocative of rz/r-stems 193; formation 222-4. Voice, in verbal inflection 445. Voiced and voiceless 74; voiced spirants j, d, 1 u 20b; voiced and voiceless consonants in cpds. 863. See also Voiceless and Sonant. Voiceless 74; voiceless spirants fy, h, f 204; voiceless consonants 753 X. 2. See Voiced and Sonant. Vowels, how written in Av. 1, 2; prone. 6 seq.; system 14; agree in quality and quantity with Skt. 14; vowel-gradation 18 N. 2; higher and lower grades tS X. 2 ; weaken- ing through increment 19; long in vicinity of v 20; long and short fluctuate in MSS. 21 ; rules for quantity 23 seq.; preference for long in GAv. 24, 26; leng- thened in monosyllables 24; shor- tened in polysyllables 25: treat- ment before - m 26 N. ; differ in quality from Skt. 28; concurrence j of vov,els 50; co-alesce 50 seq.; 1 271 contraction and resolution 50 seq.; short in contraction 5 1 ; streng- thened 60 seq. ; help-vowel (anap- tyctic) 71; fluctuations in writing ai ae 193 N. 2; vowel-variation -35, 467, 509 seq., 595-6; re- duplication in verbs 465, 592-4; treatment in causatives 685. Vowel- variation 235, 467, 509 seq., 595 - 6 . Vrddhi, diphthongs 53; strengthen- ing in patronymics 834. See also Gutia. Weak stem, -us in perf. ptcpl. 350. See also Strong. Word-formation 743 seq. ; by prefixes 746-54; by suflixes 755-7 . Word-saudhi 895. Writing, method in MSS. 2, 4; fluc- tuations in spelling between a, a 18 N. , between a, a in MSS. 29 A.; between e, i in MSS. 35 N. 2; between d, q in MSS. 45 N. 1 ; defective (and pleonastic) writing of q (nj 45 N. 1,2; fluctua- tion between -at*, -31* in MSS. 47 ; manner of writing an older iy. uv 68 X. 2; -ai for -ahi 357 X. 2. Additions and Corrections. a. Corrections. A few obvious misprints are passed over without notice. page vii (line 17) — for practise read practice. n I (foot-note) — ,, antar 3 read titular*. ) 1 3 ( § 6 1. 14) — „ fawing read fawning. n 6 (§ '9 ’• 9 ) — ,, a/xV/taraf read a/d^'ara/. M 8 (§ 28 l- l) — ,, e read i>. »» 9 (§ 29 '• 6) — ,, evisti read nvis/f. 11 59 (§ 192 N.) — „ ‘thou didst promise' read ‘he promised’. M 11/ (foot-note) — omit gen. sg. take and strike out foot-note. n i§ 440 1. 16) — for yav&ku lead yuvakti. • 37 (§ 466 1. 13) — strike out Note 2. >1 14s (§ 5°5 1 - 3 ) — for va ‘r 0 read vdnr°. 11 151 (§ 516 1. 12) — „ vds-li read vds-ti. • 1 > 164 (§ 5/6 1- I) — ,, eigth read eighth. »» '79 (S t >37 1. S) — „ cor*/ read cor 3 /. n < 9 1 (§ 694 1. 4) — „ Vs. lead Yt. b. Additions. page 5 (§ 17 5 ) — add: Av. viiyu- ‘wind’ re Skt. vayu-. 11 10 (§ 32 I- 10) — ,, GAv. Iqm ‘her’ Vs. 53. 4 = Skt. lant. 11 »5 (tj 51 1. 16) — „ Note 4. in the Galhas, as is shown by the metre, all contractions are to be re- solved. >1 29 (§ 77 1 - 9 ) — y , Av. val/yapa- ‘growth’ = Skt. vaks- atha-. ,, 38 (§ 95 1 - d) — „ Av. za/ar-, zafan-. cf. ~\f s»uib-. 1 ’ 42 (§ 109 1. 9) — ,, Av raocas .pair is ta . 11 53 (§ 162 1. 10) — ,, So Av. nnrajyd / from mar 3 tic- Additions and Corrections. 273 Page 57 (§ 183 1 . 4) —add: ; So also Av. zolidista-, soisnu-, cf. Skt. hid-, heif- ; Av. vdiidoyatit-, voiidaf, cf. Skt. vid. „ 58 (§ 187 !. 4 ) — „ So also in Av. yazdi Yt. 10.14 yaza(h)i. 0 59 (§ 193 1 - 14) — » Grig, pm becomes Av. km, cf. GAv. hahini (haf-si), YAv. vah- mai ( y vap -) — Geldner. 59 (§ *93) — - Note 3. Av. u , u occasionally = Skt. a (derived from nasal sonants), e. g. Av. vdtu.hlta- ‘wind-riven’ (cf. Skt. ksa-tu -), Av. vayo.tiiite ‘storm-bound’ ( — Paul Horn. » 75 (,§ 254 abl.) — „ Observe abl. YAv. dfetaed-a ‘in concord’ ( afi$u-j Vd. 3.1. „ S 4 (§ 286 1 . 2) — ,, Oat. ape, ZPhl. Gloss, p. 8f>. .. 95 <§ 331 1- 4) — „ abraf (a-dcln.) Afr. 4.5. „ 103 (§ 362 1. IO) ■ — „ mae$a- (m.) ‘sheep, ram’, mae'yi- l f.) ‘ewe’ ; ][$apra- (m.) ‘lord, king’, fyfaprz- (f.) ‘mistress’. 00 (§ 660 It) - „ YAv. vawharit- aor. act. ptcpl. with fut. meaning Yt. 13.155. See Justi s. v. y van-. 'N Date Due FACULTY KB •iim i ^ PK6103 .J 12 An Avesta grammar in comparison with Princeton Theological Seminary-Speer Library 1 1012 00003 6964